124i - 384i Software Hardware Program Features

124i - 384i Software Hardware Program Features
telemanuals.com
124i/384i
Software Manual
P/N 92000SWG08
Issue 1-0, June 1998
Printed in U.S.A.
030733.402
telemanuals.com
This manual has been developed by Nitsuko America. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel,
and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to:
Nitsuko America, Telecom Division
4 Forest Parkway
Shelton, CT 06484
http://www.nitsuko.com
Attention: Manager, Technical Publications
Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, or representation
with respect to, any of the equipment covered. This manual is subject to change without notice and Nitsuko America has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, Nitsuko America also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems appropriate. No representation is made that this manual is
complete or accurate in all respects and Nitsuko America shall not be liable for any errors or omissions. In no event shall Nitsuko America be liable for any incidental or consequential damages in connection with the use of this manual. This document
contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced without prior written consent of Nitsuko America.
©1998 by Nitsuko America. All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
Table of Contents
Introducing the Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Charts and Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Optional Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Forced Account Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Verified Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Operator Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Account Codes for Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Hidding Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Account Code Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Alphanumeric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Analog Communications Interface (ACI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Auxiliary Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ACI Call Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Physical Ports and Software Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Attendant Call Queueing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Automatic Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
ARS Feature Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Call Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Dialing Translation (Special Dialing Instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Time of Day Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Hierarchical Class of Service Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Forced Authorization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Separate Routing for Selected Call Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Separate Routing for Equal Access (10XXX) Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Separate Routing for 976 Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Basic ARS Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Background Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Barge In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Call Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Call Forwarding Immediate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Call Forwarding with Both Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Call Forwarding when Unanswered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Call Forwarding, Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Call Forwarding with Follow Me. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Call Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Call Waiting / Camp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Caller ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Central Office Calls, Answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Universal Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Central Office Calls, Placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
i
telemanuals.com
Table of Contents
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Personal Computer Interface (PCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Telemarketing Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Database Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Open Architecture Interface (OAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Split (From Conference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Continued Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko 900i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Data Communications Interface (DCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
RS-232-C DCI Module (DCI-A: P/N 92266) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Centronics DCI Module (DCI-B: P/N 92267) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3-Port DCI Unit (3DCI-A: P/N 92258). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
DCI Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Keyset-Originated Data Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Terminal-Originated Data Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Terminal-Originated Voice Call (Telemarketing Dial). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
DCI Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Hayes Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
DCI Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Speed Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Physical Ports and Software Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Department Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Overflow Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
User Log Out/Log In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Enhanced Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Department Step Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Dial Number Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Dial Tone Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
DID Dialed Number Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Flexible DID Service Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
DID Intercept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Vacant Number Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Busy Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Ring-No-Answer Intercept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
DID Camp-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
DID Routing Through the VAU Automated Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Federal Communications Commission DID Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Direct Inward Line (DIL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
DIL Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
DISA Class of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Trunk Group Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Common Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Operator Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Paging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DISA Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DISA Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Department Calling with Overflow Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
ii
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Table of Contents
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directed Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Door Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Line Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E911 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Alarm Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Machine Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer to Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Inward Line to Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bridged Fax Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible System Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forced Trunk Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Listen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclusive Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hotel/Motel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hotline, External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InDepth and inDepth+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intercom Abandoned Call Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Primary Rate Interface (PRI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labelmaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Only Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing Only Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both Ways Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meet Me Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meet Me Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meet Me Paging Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memo Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Microphone Cutoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
255
264
265
268
272
275
278
279
284
287
287
287
287
290
293
296
298
303
305
307
310
312
312
312
312
312
319
321
323
324
326
331
333
333
333
335
336
338
338
338
338
345
345
345
345
349
353
356
360
362
366
368
368
373
377
381
iii
Table of Contents
Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigned Night Answer (ANA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Night Answer (UNA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off Hook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Called Extension Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Signaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off Hook Signaling Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Touch Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Touch Serial Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging, External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Trunk Access Code Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Trunk Toll Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prime Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing Prime Line Preference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Prime Line Preference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy (Data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Private Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outgoing only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both ways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse to Tone Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repeat Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverse Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ring Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ringdown Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Number Dialed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secretary Call (Buzzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Secretary Call Pickup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selectable Display Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selectable Ring Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
383
383
383
389
389
389
389
389
389
395
400
402
402
406
406
411
415
415
415
415
415
419
420
420
420
424
427
427
427
427
430
433
435
438
440
444
447
450
453
456
457
461
463
465
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Table of Contents
Station Message Detail Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abandoned Call Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blocked Call Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customized Date Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferred Call Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Call Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digit Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digit Masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duration Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Call Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial and Parallel SMDR Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usage Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Name or Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANI/DNIS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANI/DNIS Routing to the VAU Automated Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TAPI Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tenant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie Line Class of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Digit Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk GroupAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Trunk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forced Trunk Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie Line Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Tie Line Service Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Permit Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Restrict Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restrict Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permit Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
International Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Restriction for Abbreviated Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Call Digit Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Call Digit Counting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Free Trunks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Restriction Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toll Restriction Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traffic Management Report (TMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension (Department) Groups Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Without Holding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic On-Hook Transfer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Group Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Queuing/Camp On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
470
470
470
470
470
470
470
470
470
471
471
471
471
471
471
471
483
484
493
495
502
507
512
512
512
512
512
512
512
512
513
513
513
513
513
521
524
524
524
524
524
524
525
525
525
525
525
525
532
534
543
543
543
543
543
543
549
552
555
v
Table of Contents
Voice Announce Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAU Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park and Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single Digit Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Call Answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Overflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Automated Attendant Greetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Prompting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
900 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time, Date and Station Number Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring to Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversation Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal Answering Machine Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Center Mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Tone For Long Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Year 2000 Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
558
558
559
559
560
561
561
561
561
561
561
562
565
566
585
585
586
586
586
586
586
586
586
599
603
604
607
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Table of Contents
Introduction to Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Before You Start Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
0000 - Maintenance Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
0001 - Save Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0002 - Load Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0003 - Time and Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0004 - Automatic Extension Circuit Type Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0005 - Extension Circuit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0006 - Slot Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0007 - System Report Port Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0008 - Alarm Report Port Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0009 - Loop Back Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0010 - Alarm LED Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0011 - Alarm Display Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0012 - Remote Service Center Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0013 - Remote Service Center Trunk Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0014 - Remote Service Center User’s Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0015 - Automatic Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0091 - View System Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0092 - View Alarm Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
621
622
623
623
625
628
629
635
637
639
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
0100 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
0101 - DTMF Tone Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0103 - Time and Date Display Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0104 - DP to DTMF Conversion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0109 - Keyset Splash Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0110 - Keyset Confirmation Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0111 - Trunk Ring Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0115 - Analog Station (ASTU) Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0116 - Tone Detection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0118 - Extension CODEC Gain Type Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0119 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0120 - External Page/Door Box CODEC Gain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0121 - ISDN Layer 1 Operation Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0122 - ISDN Layer 1 Timer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0123 - ISDN Layer 2 Operation Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0124 - ISDN Layer 2 Timer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0125 - ISDN Layer 3 Operation Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0126 - ISDN Layer 3 Timer Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0127 - ITSU Operation Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0128 - Analog Station (ASTU PCB) Sidetone Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0129 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Sidetone Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0130 - Date Format for SMDR and System Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0131 - Unsupervised Conf. CODEC Gain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0132 - DID Trunk Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0133 - Tie Line Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0135 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0136 - T1 Trunk Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0137 - ISDN Primary Interface Layer 2 Operating Mode Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0138 - ISDN Primary Interface Layer 3 Operating Mode Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0139 - BRI ISDN Line TEI Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
649
650
651
652
654
656
661
666
669
671
676
677
679
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
691
693
694
696
698
701
703
709
710
711
vii
Table of Contents
0200 - Programming Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
0201 - Setting the Programming Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
0202 - Setting User Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
0300 - Basic Hardware Setup (Part B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
0301 - Inter-Tenant Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0302 - Music on Hold and Conference SetUp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0304 - PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0305 - PGDU PCB Sensor Activation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0306 - Pre-ringing Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0307 - Setting the ISDN Line Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0308 - Conference Circuit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0309 - DSS Console Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
717
718
719
721
722
723
724
725
726
0400 - Extension Options (For Tenant Groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0403 - Selectable Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0404 - SMDR Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0405 - System Timers (Part A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0407 - Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0408 - 0409 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0412 - DISA and Tie Trunk Class of Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0413 - Hotel Mode Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0414 - System Timers (Part B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0415 - Repeat Redial Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0416 - Voice Mail Integration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0417 - Traffic Management Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0420 - E911 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
727
732
734
736
739
746
756
757
758
761
763
764
766
767
769
772
775
0500 - System Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
0501 - System Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0502 - Extension Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0503 - DCI Extension Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0504 - ACI Extension Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0506 - Department Calling Group Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0507 - DCI Pooling Pilot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0508 - ACI Group Pilot Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0510 - Trunk Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0511 - Service Code Setup (Part A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0512 - Single Digit Service Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0515 - VAU Master Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0516 - Voice Mail Master Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0518 - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0519 - Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
777
786
788
789
791
793
794
796
797
803
806
811
812
815
816
0600 - Abbreviated Dialing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
0601 - Common Abbreviated Dialing Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0602 - Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0603 - Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0604 - Common Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
817
820
822
824
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Table of Contents
0700- Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
0701 - Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
0800 - Night Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
0801 - Automatic Night Service Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
0802 - Weekly Night Service Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
0803 - Holiday Night Service Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
0900 - Trunk Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0902 - Trunk Ring Tone Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0903 - Trunk Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0904 - Trunk Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0905 - Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0906 - Trunk Group Routing (Dial 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0907 - Trunk Group Routing for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0908 - Trunk Group Routing for DCI Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0910 - Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0914 - Setting the Music On Hold Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0915 - Incoming ISDN (3.1 Khz Audio) Ring Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0916 - Incoming ISDN Data Trunk Ring Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0917 - DIL Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0918 - Data Line Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0919 - DIL No Answer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0920 - ACI Call Recording (Per Trunk). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0922 - Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0923 - Alternate Trunk Route for DCI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0924 - ANI/DNIS Service Option Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
841
846
847
849
850
851
853
854
855
856
857
859
861
862
863
864
866
867
869
870
872
873
874
1000 - Extension Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1002 - Extension Tenant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1003 - Extension (Department) Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1004 - Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1005 - Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1006 - Programming Function Keys (Part A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1007 - Programming One-Touch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1009 - Cordless/Desktop Extension Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1010 - External Alarm Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1011 - Function Key Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1012 - Call Pickup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1013 - Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1014 - Park Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1015 - Universal Answer/Auto-Answer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1016 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1017 - Voice Mail Port Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1018 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1019 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1020 -ACI Call Recording Destination (Per Extension) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1021 - Hotel Telephone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1022 - Hotel Mode Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1023 - Abbreviated Dialing Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1024 - External Hotline Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
875
878
879
880
882
883
891
893
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
903
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
ix
Table of Contents
1025 - Toll Restriction Override Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1026 - Loop Key Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1027 - Fixed Call Forwarding Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1028 - Multiple Directory Number Key Delayed Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1029 - Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1030 - Fixed Call Forward Off-Premise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
913
914
916
918
919
920
1100 - DSS Console Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1102 - DSS Console Key Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1103 - DSS Console Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1104 - DSS Console Alternate Answering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1105 - Operator’s Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1106 - Direct Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1107 - DSS Console Lamp Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
921
922
922
924
925
926
927
1200 - DCI Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
1201 - DCI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1202 - DCI Port Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1203 - DCI Tenant Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1204 - DCI Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1205 - DCI Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1206 - Initialize DCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1207 - DCI Hotline Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
931
936
937
938
939
941
942
1300 - ACI Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
1301 - ACI Port Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
1302 - ACI Tenant Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944
1303 - ACI Department Calling Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945
1500 - Door Box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
1501 - Door Box Tenant Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
1502 - Door Box Ring Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
1503 - Door Box Chime Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
1600 - Paging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
1601 - Internal Paging Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1602 - Internal Paging Group Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1603 - External Paging Zone Tenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1604 - External Paging Zone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1605 - Universal Night Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1606 - External Paging Zone Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1607 - Internal Paging Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1608 - All Call Internal Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1609 - All Call Paging Zone Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1610 - Combined Paging Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
951
952
954
955
958
960
961
962
963
965
1700 - Pooled Modem Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967
1800 - DISA, OPA and DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
1801 - DISA Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1802 - DISA and OPA Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1804 - VAU Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1805 - DID Translation Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1807 - DID Translation Table Expected Digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1808 - DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1809 - DID Intercept Ring Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1810 - DID Intercept Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
969
971
973
975
977
978
981
982
983
985
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Table of Contents
1811 - DISA Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987
1812 - DISA Toll Restriction Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
1813 - Alternate Trunk Routing for DISA Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
1900 - Automatic Call Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
2000 - Copy and Clear Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
2001 - Copy Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
2002 - Initialize Extension Numbers and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
2003 - Initialize Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
2100 - Automatic Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
2101 - ARS Call Route Options Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
2102 - ARS Six Digit Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
2103 - ARS Three Digit Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
2104 - Conflict Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
2105 - Minimum COS for Dialing 976 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
2106 - ARS Rate Period Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
2107 - ARS Dial Treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
2108 - Separate ARS Routing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
2109 - ARS Authorization Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
2110 - ARS Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
2111 - ARS Equal Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
2200 - VAU Module Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
2201 - VAU Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2202 - VAU Message Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2203 - General Message Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2204 - VAU No Answer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2205 - OPA Message Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2207 - 900 Preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2208 - VAU Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2209 - OPA Error Message Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2210 - Automated Attendant Single Digit Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2211 - Hotel Wake Up Message Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1021
1022
1023
1025
1026
2300 - Tie Line Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
2301 - DID/E&M Start Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2302 - Tie Line Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2304 - Tie Line Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2305 - Inbound Trunk Outgoing Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2306 - Tie Line Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1027
1028
1030
1 031
1032
2400 - Caller ID Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033
2401 - Caller ID Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2402 - Caller ID Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2403 - Caller ID Printer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1033
1035
1037
1038
2500 - PC Attendant Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
2501 - PC Attendant Console Port Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
2502 - PC Attendant Console Tenant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
2503 - PC Attendant Console Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
2600 - T1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
2601 - T1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
2602 - T1 Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
xi
Table of Contents
3000 - Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
3001 - Account Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
3002 - Verified Account Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
xii
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Abbreviated Dialing
•
•
•
•
•
•
Account Codes
•
•
•
•
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
124i
Available.
360 fixed bins available.
Common bins are 000-199.
Group bins are 200-359.
Each of the eight
Abbreviated Dialing Groups
has 20 group bins.
DSS Console Chaining
requires Base 2.13 and
EXCPRU 2.18. system
software or higher. You can
only chain to stored Group
Abbreviated Dialing
numbers.
Storing a Flash requires
Base 2.13 and EXCPRU
2.18 system software or
higher.
Modifying the outgoing dial
tone detection criteria
requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Storing a bin number with a
Programmable Function
Key requires Base or
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Available.
Verified Account Codes,
Operator Notification and
Account Codes for
Incoming Calls require
Base or EXCPRU 4.02 or
higher.
Hidden Account Codes
require Base or EXCPRU
4.02 or higher.
Prior to Base or EXCPRU
4.02 software, Account
Codes are from 1-8 digits
long. In Base or EXCPRU
4.02 or higher, Account
Codes are from 1-16 digits
long.
Verified Account Codes are
from 3-16 digits long with
Base 4.02 or higher and
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
•
•
384i
Available.
1990 bins available (0000-1990)
for Common and Group
Abbreviated Dialing. Up to 32
Abbreviated Dialing Groups
available.
•
DSS Console Chaining requires
system software 3.06.14 or
higher.
•
Storing a Flash requires system
software 3.06.
•
Modifying the outgoing dial
tone detection criteria is
available in all versions.
•
Storing a bin number with a
Programmable Function Key
requires system software 3.07.10
or higher 14 or higher.
Available.
Verified Account Codes,
Operator Notification and
Account Codes for Incoming
Calls require system software
3.07.10 or higher.
•
•
•
•
•
Hidden Account Codes require
system software 3.07.18 or
higher.
In system software prior to
3.07.10, Account Codes are
from 1-8 digits long. In system
software 3.07.10 and higher,
Account Codes are from 1-16
digits long.
Verified Account Codes are
from 3-16 digits long.
Feature Cross Reference I
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Account Codes (cont.)
124i
•
•
Alarm
Alphanumeric Display
Analog Communications
Interface (ACI)
•
•
•
•
Attendant Call Queuing
•
Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD)
•
•
•
•
Automatic Route Selection
•
•
•
Background Music
Barge In
II Feature Cross Reference
•
•
•
In Base 3.05, EXCPRU
3.05 or higher. Forced
Account Codes do not block
911 calls.
Available.
Available.
Available ---- six ACI
software ports (two 3-ACI
Modules max.) and 4 ACI
Department Groups (1-4).
ACI modules auto-ID when
plugged in.
Not available.
Available.
Basic ACD operation
requires EXCPRU version
2.18 or higher. ACD is not
available with Base
software.
ACD ---- The Next
Generation is available in
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
InDepth/inDepth+ is not
available.
For more information, refer
to the ACD Manual (P/N
92000ACD**).
Available.
Changing the tone detection
setup and trunk access code
requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Dial Treatments can contain
# and * characters in Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
Available.
Available.
In Base or EXCPRU
software 4.02 or higher,
turning off the Barge In
tones also turns off the
called extension’s display.
•
384i
In system software 3.07.25 or
higher, all X11 calls except for
01 and 411 are local calls.
Forced Account Codes do not
block 911 calls.
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Available ---- 192 ACI software
ports (64 3-ACI Modules max.)
and 32 ACI Department Groups.
•
ACI modules do not auto-ID.
•
Available ---- requires system
software 3.01.02 or higher.
Available.
Basic ACD operation requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
•
•
•
ACD ---- The Next Generation
requires system software 3.07.18
or higher.
•
For more information, refer to
the ACD Manual (P/N
92000ACD**).
Available
Changing the tone detection
setup and trunk access code
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Dial Treatments can contain #
and * characters in system
software 3.06.02 and higher.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
In system software 3.07.10 and
higher, turning off the Barge In
tones also turns off the called
extension’s display.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Barge In (cont.)
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
•
Call Forwarding/
Do Not Disturb Override
Call Timer
Call Waiting/Camp On
Callback
•
384i
System software 3.07.24 and
higher allows users to dial the
Barge In code (810) before
calling a busy extension.
•
System software 3.07.24 and
Users can Barge In only
higher allows users to Barge In
after hearing busy tone.
after hearing busy/ring tone in
addition to busy tone.
• System software 3.07.30 and
Users cannot press a Barge
higher allows users to press a
In key (or a Super Display
Barge In key (or a Super Display
Barge In soft key) before
Barge In soft key) before calling
calling a busy extension.
a busy extension.
See MULTIPLE DIRECTORY NUMBERS/CALL COVERAGE
Available
• Available
Base software prior to 1.2R • System software prior to 3.04
uses different dial codes.
uses different dial codes
• COS control over reminder
COS control for reminder
message requires system
messages requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
software 2.13 Base, 2.18
EXCPRU or higher.
Available.
• Available---- system software
prior to 3.04 has different
programming options.
Fixed Call Forwarding Off- • Fixed Call Forwarding OffPremise available in all
Premise requires Base 1.2N
versions.
or higher or any version of
EXCPRU.
• Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining
Fixed Call Forwarding
requires system software 3.07.12
Chaining requires Base or
or higher
EXCPRU software 4.02 or
higher.
Available
• Available
• System software prior to 3.04
uses different procedures.
DSL sets require Base 2.13, • DSL sets require system
software 3.06.02 or higher.
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Available.
• Available ---- system software
prior to 3.04 uses different
procedures.
Available.
• Available.
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Available.
•
•
•
Call Coverage
Call Forwarding
•
•
•
•
Call Forwarding, Fixed
•
•
•
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
•
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
124i
Users cannot dial the Barge
In code (810) before calling
a busy extension.
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Available.
Feature Cross Reference III
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Caller ID
•
•
•
•
•
Central Office Calls, Answering
•
•
•
•
•
Central Office Calls, Placing
•
•
•
IV Feature Cross Reference
124i
Available.
Multiple Message Format
requires system software
1.2N.
There are 200 Caller ID
bins available, numbered
000-199.
Automatically out dating
the Caller ID Block Code
(*67) is available. Base
1.2R and earlier out dated
the non-standard code *6.
Prior to Base 2.13 and
EXCPRU 2.18, the Caller
ID display can be up to 10
digits. In Base 2.13 and
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher,
the display can be up to 12
digits (for non-ACD calls).
Available ---- 52 trunks.
Adjusting the side tone for
analog trunks is not
available.
Customizing CODEC Gain
Types and Trunk Ring
Tones requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Unanswered calls can
overflow to Voice Mail in
Base 1.2R or higher and all
versions of EXCPRU.
Unanswered calls can
overflow to the VAU
Automated Attendant in
Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02
or higher.
Available ---- 52 trunks.
Customizing CODEC Gains
and setting up Alternate
Trunk Access Codes require
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
The ability to turn DTMF
tones for outgoing trunk
calls on and off requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
•
•
•
384i
Available.
Multiple Message Format type
codes 4 (number absence) and 8
(name absence) require system
software 3.04.
There are 1000 Caller ID bins
available, numbered 000-999.
•
Automatically out dialing the
Caller ID Block Code (*67)
requires system software 3.06.02
or higher.
•
Prior to system software
3.06.09, the Caller ID display
can be up to 10 digits. In 3.06.09
and higher, the display can be
up to 12 digits (for non-ACD
calls).
•
•
Available---- 128 trunks.
Adjusting the side tone for
analog trunks is available.
•
Customizing CODEC Gain
Types and Trunk Ring Tones
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Unanswered calls can overflow
to Voice Mail in system
software 3.05.15 or higher.
•
•
Unanswered calls can overflow
to the VAU Automated
Attendant in system software
3.07.10 or higher.
•
•
Available ---- 128 trunks.
Customizing CODEC Gains and
setting up Alternate Trunk
Access Codes require system
software 3.04 or higher.
•
The ability to turn DTMF tones
for outgoing trunk calls on and
off is not available.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Class of Service
•
•
Computer Telephony
Integration (CTI) Applications
Conference
•
•
•
Available.
•
•
The system allows either 8
four-party conferences or 4
eight-party conferences.
•
•
Split (From Conference) is
not available.
•
•
Adding a parked call to a
Conference requires Base
4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or
higher.
The Conference initiator
cannot place conference
trunks on Hold.
•
The Trunk Answer Code
(867) requires Base 4.02,
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
The system allows either 8
four-party conferences or 4
eight-party conferences.
•
Available.
Available ---- requires Base
3.03 or EXCPRU 3.03 or
higher.
Available ---- 72 DCI
software ports, allocated
between 72 DCI Modules
and six 3-DCI Units (two
per cabinet) maximum.
•
•
Available.
Enhanced hunting requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
Available.
•
•
•
•
Conference, Voice Call/
Privacy Release
•
Continued Dialing
Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko
900i)
•
•
Data Communications Interface
(DCI)
•
Department Calling
•
•
Department Step Calling
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
124i
Available ---- 10 Classes of
Service and 96
extension/virtual extension
ports.
An extension’s Class of
Service cannot be changed
via a Service Code.
•
•
•
•
384i
Available ---- 15 Classes of
Service in each Tenant Group
and 384 extension/virtual
extension ports.
In system software 3.07.31 or
higher, an extension’s Class of
Service can be changed via
Service Code 177.
Available.
Each DTU-A/C allows either 4
four-party conferences or 2
eight-party conferences per
PCB.
Split (From Conference)
requires system software 3.07.24
or higher.
Adding a parked call to a
Conference requires system
software 3.07.24 or higher.
System software 3.07.24 or
higher allows the initiator to
place conference trunks on
Hold.
The Trunk Answer Code (867)
Requires system software
3.07.24 or higher.
Each DTU-A/C allows either 4
four-party conferences or 2
eight-party conferences per
PCB.
Available.
Available ---- requires system
software 3.07.10 or higher.
Available ---- 288 DCI software
ports, with 144 DCI Modules
and 48 3-DCI Units maximum.
System software prior to 3.04
uses different DCI Types.
System software 3.05 and higher
has default assignments for the
first 3-DCI installed.
Available.
Enhanced hunting requires
system software 3.06.02 or
higher.
Available.
Feature Cross Reference V
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Dial Number Preview
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Tone Detection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
VI Feature Cross Reference
•
124i
Available.
Available.
Changing the tone requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
Available.
Allocating circuits for Dial
Tone Detection is not
required.
Tone Detection Setup
requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
The Next Trunk in Rotary if
No Dial Tone option
requires Base 4.02,
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Available ---- Four DID
Translation Tables with 200
entries each. Prior to Base
1.2R, Wink Start Dial Pulse
DID operation was
unavailable.
Intercept routing to Voice
Mail requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
DTMF DID requires a Tone
Detector (DTDU) PCB.
Tone Detection Setup
requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Enhanced Answer
Supervision requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
DID Routing Through the
VAU Automated Attendant
requires Base 2.13 or
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Routing by trunk to a
specific VAU message
requires Base 4.02,
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Intercept routing to the
VAU Automated Attendant
requires Base or EXCPRU
software 4.02 or higher.
Available ---- 52 trunks, 96
extensions/virtual
extensions and eight
Department Groups.
•
•
•
384i
Available.
Available.
Changing the tone requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
•
•
Available.
Allocating CDTU circuits for
Dial Tone Detection is required.
•
Tone Detection Setup requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
•
The Next Trunk in Rotary if No
Dial Tone option requires
system software version 3.07.10
or higher.
Available ---- eight DID
Translation Tables with 1500
entries each.
•
•
•
Intercept routing to Voice Mail
requires system software 3.02 or
higher.
Tone Detection Setup requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
•
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires system software 3.05.15
or higher.
•
DID Routing Through the VAU
Automated Attendant requires
system software 3.06.16 or
higher. Limited capabilities
available with 3.06.09. Routing
by trunk to a specific VAU
message requires system
software 3.07.10 or higher
Intercept routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant requires
system software 3.07.10 or
higher.
Available ---- 128 trunks, 384
extensions/virtual extensions
and 32 Department Groups.
•
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Direct Inward Line (DIL) (cont.)
•
•
•
Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Console
•
•
•
•
Directed Call Pickup
Directory Dialing
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
•
•
•
124i
Department Group as DIL
destination always
available.
DIL overflow to Voice Mail
requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
DIL overflow to the VAU
Automated Attendant is not
available.
Available ---- 15 users, 8
DISA Classes of Service
and 52 trunks.
Requires DTDU PCB for
DTMF DISA trunks.
•
•
•
•
•
Enhanced Answer
Supervision requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
Overflow routing to Voice
Mail requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Tone Detection Setup and
setting the CODEC Gain
Type transmit and receive
levels requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Overflow routing to the
VAU Automated Attendant
is not available.
•
Available.
8 consoles maximum (two
maximum per extension).
Storing additional digits
after a Service Code
requires system software
Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
DSS Console flash rates
may be customized in Base
or EXCPRU software or
higher.
Available.
Not available.
Requires Base 2.13 or
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
•
•
384i
Department Group as DIL
destination requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
DIL overflow to Voice Mail
requires system software 3.05.15
or higher.
DIL overflow to the VAU
Automated Attendant requires
system software 3.07.10 or
higher.
Available ---- 15 users per
Tenant Group, 15 DISA Classes
of Service and 128 trunks.
Requires DTMF receivers on
CDTU PCB for DTMF DISA
trunks.
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires system software
3.05.15.
•
Overflow routing to Voice Mail
is available.
•
Tone Detection Setup and
setting the CODEC Gain Type
transmit and receive levels
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Overflow routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant requires
system software 3.07.10 or
higher.
Available.
32 consoles maximum (four
maximum per extension.
Storing additional digits after a
Service Code requires system
software 3.06.14 or higher.
•
•
•
DSS Console flash rates may be
customized in system software
3.07.14 or higher.
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Requires system software
3.06.02 or higher.
Feature Cross Reference VII
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and
Flash Patterns
•
•
Do Not Disturb
Door Box
•
•
Dual Line Appearance
E911 Compatibility
•
•
External Alarm Sensors
•
•
124i
Available.
Available.
Customizing the Keyset
Splash Tone, Keyset
Confirmation Tone, Trunk
Ring Tone, Intercom Ring
Tone and Alarm Ring Tone
requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Available.
Available ---- eight Door
Boxes and one Chime Tone.
Available.
Available ---- Requires
Base or EXCPRU software
4.02 or higher.
Each PGDU PCB has 4
sensors, with 8 maximum
per system (2 PCBs). All
sensors set for alarm.
•
Customizing the Keyset Splash
Tone, Keyset Confirmation
Tone, Trunk Ring Tone,
Intercom Ring Tone and Alarm
Ring Tone requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
•
•
Available.
Available ---- eight Door Boxes
and three Chime Tones.
Available.
Available ---- Requires system
software 3.07.10 or higher.
Changing the Alarm Ring
Tone frequencies requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
Each PGDU PCB has 4
sensors, with 8 maximum
per system (2 PCBs). All
sensors set for alarm.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available ---- 32 Call Pickup
Groups
Available.
Enhanced operation available in
system software 3.05.15 or
higher.
Available.
Available.
•
•
Available.
Available.
Fax Machine Compatibility
•
Flash
Flexible System Numbering
•
•
•
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Group Call Pickup
•
•
Group Listen
•
•
Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree Answerback/
Forced Intercom Ringing
Headset Operation
Hold
•
•
Available.
Available.
Complete numbering
flexibility requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
Available.
Available ---- eight Call
Pickup Groups.
Available.
Enhanced operation is
available in Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Available.
Available.
•
•
Available.
Available.
VIII Feature Cross Reference
384i
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Each PGDU has 8 sensors, with
16 maximum per system (2
PCBs). Sensors 1-4 and 9-12 as
set for alarm. Sensors 5-8 and
13-16 set for fax.
Changing the Alarm Ring Tone
frequencies requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Each PGDU has 8 sensors, with
16 maximum per system (2
PCBs). Sensors 1-4 and 9-12 as
set for alarm. Sensors 5-8 and
13-16 set for fax.
Available.
Available.
Complete numbering flexibility
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Hold (cont.)
•
Hotel/Motel
•
124i
Hold Recall to Operator
requires system software
Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
Not available.
•
•
•
Year 2000 Compliance not
available.
•
Hotline
Hotline, External
InDepth and inDepth+
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Not available.
•
•
•
Intercom
•
•
•
•
Intercom Abandoned Call
Display
ISDN Compatibility
•
Available.
Changing the Intercom ring
tone requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Available.
•
Currently not implemented.
•
Labelmaker
Last Number Redial
Line Preference
Loop Keys
Meet Me Conference
•
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
The system allows either 8
four-party conferences or 4
eight-party conferences.
•
•
•
•
•
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Memo Dial
Message Waiting
•
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Single line telephones can
leave, cancel and receive
Messages Waiting.
•
•
•
•
•
•
COS control for reminder
messages requires system
software 2.13 Base, 2.18
EXCPRU or higher.
Available.
Available.
•
Microphone Cutoff
Multiple Directory Numbers/
Call Coverage
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
•
•
•
•
•
384i
Hold Recall to Operator requires
system software 3.06.14 or
higher.
Available ---- refer to the
Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N
92000HMT**) for additional
information.
Year 2000 Compliance requires
system software 3.07.25 or
higher.
Available.
Available.
Available ---- requires system
software 3.07.18 or higher.
Available.
Changing the Intercom ring tone
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Available.
Contact your sales
representative for availability.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Each DTU-A/C allows either 4
four-party conferences or 2
eight-party conferences per
PCB.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Single line telephones can leave,
cancel and receive Messages
Waiting. Prior to system
software 3.02, single line
telephones cannot receive a
Message Waiting.
COS control for reminder
messages requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Available.
Available.
Feature Cross Reference IX
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Multiple Directory Numbers/
Call Coverage (cont.)
•
Music on Hold
Name Storing
Networking
•
•
•
Night Service
Off Hook Signaling
•
•
•
One-Touch Calling
•
•
•
One-Touch Serial Operation
Paging, External
•
•
•
Paging, Internal
•
Park
•
•
•
124i
In Base 4.02, EXCPRU
4.02 or higher, a Call
Coverage key will flash
when the covered extension
has a second call waiting.
Available.
Available.
Not Available.
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Off Hook Signaling
Enhancements are not
available.
Available.
Entering names at a keyset
requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Storing a Flash command
requires system software
Base 2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
Available.
Available ---- eight
External Paging zones and
eight alarm circuits
maximum.
Combined Paging is always
available.
•
•
•
Available ---- eight Internal
Paging Groups (Zones).
Available ---- 8 System
Park orbits.
Personal Park requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
Enhanced Dial Buffering
not implemented.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available ---- eight External
Paging zones and 16 alarm
circuits maximum.
•
Combined Paging is available
prior to system software 3.04
only if a PGDU is installed.
Available ---- 32 Internal Paging
Groups (Zones).
Available ---- 32 System Park
orbits.
Personal Park requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
•
•
•
•
Splitting between calls on
Park keys not available.
•
PBX Compatibility
PC Attendant Console
•
•
Available.
Not available.
•
•
Prime Line Selection
Privacy (Data)
Private Line
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Available.
•
•
•
X Feature Cross Reference
384i
In system software 3.07.10 and
higher, a Call Coverage key will
flash when the covered
extension has a second call
waiting.
Available.
Available.
Available ---- requires system
software 3.07.15 or higher.
Available.
Available.
Off Hook Signaling
Enhancement require system
software 3.07.24 or higher.
Available.
Entering names at a keyset
requires system software 3.06.02
or higher.
Storing a Flash command
requires system software.
Enhanced Dial Buffering
requires system software 3.06.06
or higher.
Splitting between calls on Park
keys requires system software
3.06.14 or higher.
Available.
Consult your sales
representative for availability.
Available.
Available.
Available.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Programmable Function Keys
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Repeat Redial
Reverse Voice Over
Ring Groups
•
•
•
•
•
Ringdown Extensions
•
Room Monitor
Save Number Dialed
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call Pickup
Selectable Display Messaging
•
•
•
•
•
Selectable Ring Tones
Serial Call
Single Line Telephones
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Expanded ACCOUNT
column not available.
•
•
Year 2000 Compliance is
not available.
•
•
•
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
•
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Available ----72 single line
telephones maximum.
Install 2-OPX Modules in
odd numbered ports only.
The system automatically
disables the next adjacent
port.
Analog Message Waiting
lamping not available.
Setting the DTMF criteria
requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Adjusting the side tone
level is not available.
Loop Disconnect
Supervision for 2- OPX
Modules not available.
Available.
The RD/COST field and
Call Costing is available.
•
Station Message Detail
Recording
124i
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available ---- 16 Ring
Groups.
Available ---- 96
extensions/virtual
extensions and 24 Hotline
assignments.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
384i
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available ---- 128 Ring Groups.
Available ---- 384
extensions/virtual extensions
and 50 Hotline assignments (in
each Tenant Group).
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available ---- system software
prior to 3.04 uses different
procedures and programmable
keys.
Available.
Available.
Available ----255 single line
telephones maximum.
Install 2-OPX Modules in any
port. The system automatically
disables the next adjacent port.
Analog Message Waiting
lamping is available.
Setting the DTMF criteria
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Loop Disconnect Supervision
for 2- OPX Modules requires
system software 3.06.02.
Available.
The RD/COST field and Call
Costing is only available in
system software prior to 3.07.10.
The ACCOUNT column is
expanded to 16 digits in 3.07.10
or higher.
Year 2000 Compliance requires
system software 3.07.25 or
higher.
Feature Cross Reference XI
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS
Compatibility
•
•
•
•
•
TAPI Compatibility
•
ANI/DNIS Compatibility
requires system software 3.06.02
or higher.
•
ANI/DNIS routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant (page 447)
requires system software 3.06.09
or higher. Routing by trunk to a
specific VAU message requires
system software 3.07.10 or
higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision
for T1 tie trunks requires system
software 3.05.15 or higher.
•
•
Voice Mail Caller ID with
ANI/DNIS requires system
software 3.06.14 or higher.
•
Available ---- requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Basic TAPI commands available
in both Nitsuko TAPI Driver
versions.
TAPI Enhancements require
system software 3.06.02.
•
Compatibility with the
Nitsuko 384i Proprietary
Mode Telephony SPV
1.00.03 (or higher) driver is
not available.
•
•
The system allows either 8
four-party conferences or 4
eight-party conferences.
•
•
Enhanced Tandem
Trunking requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
•
•
384i
Available ---- Customizing the
CODEC Gain Types requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
•
•
•
XII Feature Cross Reference
•
Basic TAPI commands
require the Nitsuko TAPI
Service Provider 1.02.02.
TAPI Enhancements require
Base 2.13 and EXCPRU
2.18 or higher.
Additional TAPI
Commands not available.
•
Tandem Trunking
124i
Available ---- Basic T1
capabilities require
EXCPRU version 2.18 or
higher. T1 DID and tie lines
require a DTDU PCB.
ANI/DNIS Compatibility
requires EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher. It is not available in
Base software.
ANI/DNIS routing to the
VAU Automated Attendant
requires EXCPRU software
4.02 or higher. Routing by
trunk to a specific VAU
message is also available in
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Enhanced Answer
Supervision for T1 tie
trunks requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Voice Mail Caller ID with
ANI/DNIS requires
EXCPRU version 2.18 or
higher.
Available
•
•
Additional TAPI Commands
require 384i Proprietary Mode
Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or
higher) driver.
System software 3.07.12 or
higher provides compatibility
with the Nitsuko 384i
Proprietary Mode Telephony
SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver
through Program 0419:11.
Each DTU-A/C allows either 4
four-party conferences or 2
eight-party conferences per
PCB.
Enhanced Tandem Trunking
requires system software 3.05.10
or higher.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Tie Lines
•
•
•
124i
Available with EXCPRU
PCB only. DTMF tie lines
require a DTDU PCB.
Customizing CODEC Gain
Type transmit and receive
levels and Tone Detection
Setup requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Enhanced Answer
Supervision requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
Available.
Year 2000 Compliance is
not available.
384i
•
Available.
•
Customizing CODEC Gain Type
transmit and receive levels and
Tone Detection Setup require
system software 3.04 or higher.
•
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires system software 3.05.15
or higher.
•
•
Available.
Year 2000 Compliance requires
system software 3.07.25 or
higher.
Available ---- 15 Toll
Restriction Classes in each
Tenant Group and 256
extensions.
In system software 3.05.15 and
earlier, you must enable digit
counting (0702:4) in order to use
the Permit and Restrict Code
Tables.
Available.
Available ---- requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Time and Date
•
•
Toll Restriction
•
Available ---- eight Toll
Restriction classes and 72
extensions.
•
•
Digit counting (0702:4) not
required in order to use the
Permit and Restrict Code
Tables.
•
•
•
Available.
Available ---- requires
EXCPRU 2.10 or higher
and an LAPB PCB. Not
available in Base software.
Year 2000 Compliance is
not available.
•
•
Available.
MOH or ringback on
Transfer requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Available ---- 16 trunk
groups and 36 routes.
Changing the Trunk Access
Code requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Available ---- 16 trunk
groups.
Available.
•
•
Toll Restriction Override
Traffic Management Report
(TMS)
•
Transfer
•
•
Trunk Group Routing
•
•
Trunk Groups
•
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
•
•
Year 2000 Compliance requires
system software 3.07.25 or
higher.
Available.
MOH or ringback on Transfer
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Available ---- 128 trunk groups
and 64 routes.
Changing the Trunk Access
Code requires system software
3.04 or higher.
Available ---- 128 trunk groups.
•
Available.
•
•
Feature Cross Reference XIII
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Voice Announce Unit
•
•
•
Voice Mail
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
XIV Feature Cross Reference
124i
Available ---- install VAU
in odd numbered ports only.
The system reserves the
next adjacent port for the
expansion module (if
installed). If not installed,
the adjacent port is
disabled.
When a user presses 8 with
system software 2.13 Base,
2.18 EXCPRU or higher,
they hear the date
immediately after the time.
The Voice Announce Unit
is Year 2000 Compliant and
will announce the year 2000
and above.
Available.
COS control over the
reminder message requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
Changing the DTMF tone
detection criteria requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
To accommodate customerprovided pagers, Base 2.13
and EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher can accept Park and
Page strings containing any
valid DTMF digits.
In Base 2.13, EXCPRU
2.18 or higher, a line key
changes from red to green
when an AME users presses
CALL1 to intercept the call.
Voice Mail Caller ID with
ANI/DNIS requires
EXCPRU version 2.18 or
higher.
Message Center Mailbox
requires Base 4.02,
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Voice Mail key flashes red
when there are messages
waiting.
•
384i
Available ---- Park and Page and
Personal Greeting have different
procedures prior to system
software 3.04.
•
When a user presses 8 with
system software 3.06.02 or
higher, they hear the date
immediately after the time.
•
The Voice Announce Unit is
Year 2000 Compliant and will
announce the year 2000 and
above.
Available.
COS control over the reminder
message and requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
•
•
•
Changing the DTMF tone
detection criteria setup requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
•
To accommodate customerprovided pagers, system
software 3.05.09 and higher can
accept Park and Page strings
containing any valid DTMF
digits.
In system software 3.06.02 or
higher, a line key changes from
red to green when an AME users
presses CALL1 to intercept the
call.
Voice Mail Caller ID with
ANI/DNIS requires system
software 3.06.14 or higher.
•
•
•
•
Message Center Mailbox
requires system software
3.07.10.
In system software 3.07.10 and
higher, Voice Mail key flashes
green when subscriber mailbox
has messages waiting.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
Feature Name
Voice Mail (cont.)
Voice Over
Volume Controls
Warning Tone For long
Conversation
Year 2000 Compliance
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
•
124i
Year 2000 Compliance is
not available.
•
•
•
•
Available.
Available.
Available.
•
•
•
•
Available ---- unaffected by
the date change to the year
2000. The system uses a
two-digit date code entry.
Future releases will use a
four-digit date code entry.
•
384i
Year 2000 Compliance requires
system software 3.07.25 or
higher. Consult your Sales
Representative for applicable
NVM-Series Voice Mail
software.
Available.
Available.
Available.
Available ---- system software
prior to 3.07.25 is unaffected by
the date change to the year
2000. The system uses a twodigit date code entry. With
system software 3.07.25 or
higher, the system uses a fourdigit date code entry.
Feature Cross Reference XV
384i/124i Feature Cross Reference
XVI Feature Cross Reference
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Section 1 — Features
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 1
2 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
About This Manual
Introducing
the Features
About
This Manual
Section 1 - Features
Before Reading This Section
This section provides detailed information on the system’s features. If you don’t know what the various features
are, review the Table of Contents for this section and the manual’s Index. After reviewing, turn back to this section for the specifics.
Using This Section
The features in this section are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary. This section subdivides each feature definition into headings as follows:
Description tells what the feature is and describes its benefits. Along with the Description are the Conditions and the
Default Setting. Conditions provides the feature’s operational limits (if any). Default Setting outlines how the
feature works with the default programming. When initially installed, the system uses the default setting. For
specific default settings on each program, refer to the chart at the end of this book.
Programming explains the system programming that lets you customize the feature. Some features require
programming; other’s don’t. If you decide to customize a feature, use Section 2 to enter the change into the system.
Related Features presents the feature interaction.
Operation consists of instructions on how to use each feature.
Read These Notes
Simplifying Keyset Operation with One-Touch Keys...
A keyset user can access many features through Service Codes (e.g., Service Code *0 answers a Message Waiting from a co-worker). To streamline the operation of their phone, a keyset user can store these codes under OneTouch Keys. This provides one-button operation for almost any feature. To find out more, turn to the One-Touch
Calling and One-Touch Serial Operation features.
Differences Between Telephone Models...
System telephones are available in two models: the 926 series and the 920/922 series. Although the phones work
identically, they have different cosmetics. In addition, certain keys are labeled differently or are in different locations. Refer to Figures 1-1 and 1-2 to determine which model telephone you have. The Operation instructions in
this section use 926 series key names. Keep the following differences in mind when using 920/922 model telephones:
Key Labels
926 Series vs. 920/922 Series
926 Series Key
920/922 Series Key
Used with this feature ...
DIAL
DC
Abbreviated Dialing
CALL 1 and CALL 2
CL 1 & CL 2
Dual Line Appearance
FLASH
FLSH
Flash
CONF (TRF)
CONF (TRFR)
Conference or Transfer
VOLUME ▲ ▼
VOL ▲ ▼
Volume Control
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 3
Introducing the Features
About This Manual
Programmable Keys...
When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation similar to (PGM 1006 or SC 851:
1050). This means that the key requires function code 1050, and you can program this code through Program 1006 or
by dialing Service Code 851. Refer to the Programmable Function Keys feature for more information.
Using Handsfree...
The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just press a line key or CALL
key to answer or place a call. For extensions without Automatic Handsfree, the user must:
•
Lift the handset or press SPK for Intercom dial tone
•
Lift the handset or press SPK, then press a line key for trunk dial tone
4 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-1, Abbreviated and Post Dialing Service Codes
Abbreviated Service Codes1
Code
Starting with an asterisk (*)
Starting with a pound sign (#)
For this feature. . .
When you are. . .
For this feature. . .
When you are. . .
*
(+ ext. no.)
Directed Call Pickup
Picking up a call
ringing or waiting at an
extension
System Programming
Password Protection
Entering the telephone
programming mode
#
Group Call Pickup
Picking up a call
ringing an extension in
your own pickup group
Account Codes
Entering an Account
Code from an SLT
0
Message Waiting
Answering a Message
Waiting request
Central Office Calls,
Answering
Using Universal
Answer to pick up a
call ringing over the
paging system
1
(+ Zone 0-8)
Paging
Making a Combined
Page
Conference
Adding a caller to a
Conference from an SLT
2
(+ option)
Call Forwarding
Enabling a Call
Forwarding option
Abbreviated Dialing
Dialing a Common
Abbreviated Dialing
number
3
(+ trunk no.)
Forced Trunk
Disconnect
Disconnecting a call in
progress on a trunk
Flash
Flashing a trunk from
an SLT
4
Call Forwarding, Off
Premise, Selectable
Display Messaging,
Voice Announce Unit
Setting up Selectable
Display Messaging,
Off Premise Call
Forwarding or Personal
Greeting
Abbreviated Dialing
Dialing a Group
Abbreviated Dialing
number
5
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
Logging out of or on to
an ACD Group
Last Number Redial
Using Last Number
Redial
6
(+ orbit)
Park
Picking up a call parked
in a system Park orbit
(1-8 or 01-32)
Park
Parking a call in a
system Park orbit (1-8
or 01-32)
7
Call Waiting / Camp On
Splitting (switching)
between calls on an
SLT
Abbreviated Dialing
Using Personal
Abbreviated Dialing
8
Voice Mail
Calling your mailbox
Tandem Trunking
(Unsupervised
Conference)
Setting up an
Unsupervised
Conference
Central Office Calls,
Placing
Placing an outside call
over a specific trunk
9
Not Used
1
Also see Tables 1-2 and 1-3.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 5
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-1, Abbreviated and Post Dialing Service Codes
Single Digit Post Dialing Codes
For this feature. . .
When you are. . .
1
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Changing the signaling mode of your outgoing
Intercom call
2
Call Waiting / Camp On / Callback / Trunk
Queuing
Camping on to or leaving a Callback at a busy
extension or trunk
3-5
Not used
6
Voice Over
Sending a Voice Over to a busy extension after
hearing Busy/Ring tone
7
Off Hook Signaling
Sending off-hook signal tones to a busy extension
8
Voice Mail
Leaving a message in a co-worker’s mailbox after
calling their busy or unanswered extension
0
Message Waiting
Leaving a Message Waiting at a co-worker’s busy
or unanswered extension
#
Department Step Calling
Cycling to the next member of a Department
Calling Group
6 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-2, Service Codes by Number
Dial this Service Code...1
1
When you are...
For this feature...
Also see
Function Key...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
**
Picking up a call ringing or waiting at
another extension
Directed Call Pickup
Voice Announce Unit
-
*#
Picking up a call ringing an extension in
your own pickup group (except Ring
Group calls)
Group Call Pickup
1007
*0
Answering a Message Waiting request
Message Waiting
1023
*1
Making a Combined Page
Paging
-
*2 + 0
Canceling Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
1080
*2 + 1 + Type (2-4)
Activating Personal Answering Machine
Emulation
Voice Mail
(Personal Answering
Machine Emulation)
1080
*2 + 2 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forwarding when Busy
Call Forwarding
1080
*2 + 3 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forward Follow Me at the
destination extension
Call Forwarding with
Follow Me
1080
*2 + 4 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forwarding Immediate
Call Forwarding
1080
*2 + 6 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forwarding when
Unanswered (delayed)
Call Forwarding
1080
*2 + 7 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forwarding (Both
Ringing)
Call Forwarding
1080
Forced Trunk Disconnect
-
Selectable Display
Messaging
1081
Call Forwarding
Off-Premise
1081
Voice Announce Unit
(Personal Greeting)
1081
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
1046
*3 (after #9 + 001-128 +
busy)
Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk
*4 + 3 + Message (01-20), or Activating and canceling Selectable
*4 + 3 + Hang up to cancel Display Messaging
*4 + 6 + Trunk access code
+ Outside number, or
*4 + 6 + Hold + Hang up to
cancel
Forwarding your calls to an off-premise
telephone number
*4 + 7 + Record message + # Recording, listening to or erasing a
+ Condition (2, 4, 6 or 7) + Personal Greeting or Park and Page
Destination + Type (2 or 3), or
*4 + 7 + 3 to cancel
*5
Logging out of or on to an ACD Group
*6 + Orbit (1-8 or 01-32)
Picking up a call parked in a system Park
orbit (1-8 or 01-32)
Park
1033 + orbit
*7
Splitting (switching) between calls on an
SLT
Call Waiting / Camp On
-
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 7
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-2, Service Codes by Number
Dial this Service Code...1
1
When you are...
Also see
Function Key...
For this feature...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
*8
Calling your mailbox
#
Step Calling through a Department Group
#*#*
Hookflash + # # + Enter
Account Code + Hookflash
#0
* + Enter Account Code + *
Entering the system programming mode
Entering an Account Code at an SLT
Using Universal Answer Code to pick up a
call ringing over the paging system
Entering an Account Code
#3
#4 + bin
#5
#6 + orbit (1-8 or 01-32)
1059
Department Step Calling
1021
System Programming
Password Protection
-
Account Codes
-
Central Office Calls,
Answering
Account Codes
-
Conference
-
Abbreviated Dialing
1037
Flash
-
Dialing a Group Abbreviated Dialing number
Abbreviated Dialing
1038
Using Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial
-
Park
1033 + orbit
Abbreviated Dialing
-
Tandem Trunking
(Unsupervised Conference)
-
Central Office Calls,
Placing
1-32
Message Waiting
-
Hookflash + #1 + extension + Activating Conference from a Single Line
hookflash twice
(500/2500) set
#2 + bin
Voice Mail
Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing
number
Flashing a trunk from an SLT
Parking a call in a system Park orbit (1-8
or 01-32)
#7
Using Personal Abbreviated Dialing
#8
Setting up an Unsupervised Conference
#9 + 001-128
Placing a call over a specific trunk
0 (Off-hook)
Leaving a Message Waiting at a coworker’s busy or unanswered extension
1 (Off-hook)
Changing the signaling mode of your
outgoing Intercom call
Handsfree
Answerback/Forced
Intercom Ringing
-
2 (Off-hook)
Camping On or leaving a Callback for a
busy extension or trunk
Callback/Camp On/
Trunk Queuing
1020
3 (On-hook)
Listening for the date
Voice Announce Unit
-
4 (On-hook)
Listening to the General Message
Voice Announce Unit
-
6 (On-hook)
Checking an extension’s number
Voice Announce Unit
-
6 (Off-hook)
Sending a Voice Over to a busy extension
after hearing Busy/Ring tone.
Voice Over
1057
8 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-2, Service Codes by Number
Dial this Service Code...1
1
When you are...
For this feature...
Also see
Function Key...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
7 (Off-hook)
Sending off-hook signal tones to a busy
extension
Off Hook Signaling
1018
8 (On-hook)
Listening for the time
Voice Announce Unit
-
Placing a call using ARS or Trunk Group
Routing
ARS
Trunk Group Routing
1011
111
SLT listening to the General Message
Voice Announce Unit
-
112 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen
or 7 to record
Recording, listening to or erasing the
General Message
Voice Announce Unit
-
Calling busy extension through VAU
Automated Attendant. Voice prompt asks
you to leave your number for a return call.
Voice Announce Unit
-
Recording, listening to or erasing a VAU
Message
Voice Announce Unit
-
9
114 + Your own phone
number
116 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen
or 7 to record
126
Leaving a message at an extension,
without first calling that extension
Hotel/Motel
(Message Waiting)
-
127
Enabling DND at a room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Do Not Disturb)
-
128
Canceling DND at a room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Do Not Disturb)
-
129
Enabling DND for another room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Do Not Disturb)
-
130
Canceling DND at another room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
--
131
Setting a Wake Up Call for your own room
telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
-
132
Canceling a Wake Up Call for your own
room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
-
133
Setting a Wake Up Call for another guest’s
room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
-
134
Canceling a Wake Up Call for another
guest’s room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
-
135
Enabling Room to Room Call Restriction
for a guest’s room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Room to Room Call
Restriction)
-
136
Disabling Room to Room Call Restriction
for a guest’s room telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Room to Room Call
Restriction)
-
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 9
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-2, Service Codes by Number
Dial this Service Code...1
1
When you are...
Also see
Function Key...
For this feature...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
Hotel/Motel
(Toll Restriction [When
Checked In])
-
Setting a room as checked in
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status)
-
139
Setting a room as checked out
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status)
-
140
Setting a room as available (clean) from
the room’s telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status)
-
141
Setting a room as available (clean) from
another telephone
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status)
-
142
Requesting a Room Status Printout
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status Printouts)
-
Calling, erasing or scrolling through phone
numbers on your display left by the
Automated Attendant
Voice Announce Unit
(Automated Attendant)
-
Caller ID
1073
137
Changing a room’s telephone Toll
Restriction (When Checked In) level
138
143 + VOL▲, VOL▼, 2
(Call) or 3 (Erase)
146 + 2 (Change), 3 (Delete) Changing, deleting or adding new
numbers to the Caller ID Table
or 6 (New)
148 + 2 (Call) or 3 (Erase)
Returning or erasing a missed Caller ID call
Caller ID
-
150 + 0 (install) or
1 (remove)
Logging in (0) or logging out (1) for your
Department Calling Group
Department Calling
1074
154
Enabling Conversation Record at ESL set
Voice Mail
-
155
Logging out of or on to an ACD Group
from an SLT
ACD
-
156
Activating Work Time
ACD
1053
157
Canceling Work Time
ACD
1053
158
Activating Rest Mode
ACD
1049
159
Canceling Rest Mode
ACD
1049
ACD Recording for SLT
ACD
-
Hookflash + 160
166
Changing Toll Restriction for a checked in
room
167
Logging an agent into their ACD Group
ACD
168
Logging an agent out of their ACD Group
ACD
169
Supervisor assigning an agent into another
ACD Group or changing an agent’s status
ACD
170
An agent changing their own status
ACD
10 FEATURES
Hotel/Motel (Toll
Restriction [Cecked In])
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-2, Service Codes by Number
Dial this Service Code...1
1
When you are...
For this feature...
Also see
Function Key...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
170 + ACD Group
Changing your ACD Group assignment
800 + enter name
Programming extension names
801 + zone (1-9 or 01-32)
801 + zone (0 or 00)
802 + Door Box (1-8)
803 + zone (1-8)
803 + zone (0)
804 + trunk group (1-9,
01-99 or 001-128)
Making an Internal Zone Page
Making an All Call Internal Page
Placing a call to a Door Box
Making an External Zone page
Making an External All Call page
Placing an outside call over a trunk group
ACD
Name Storing
-
Paging, Internal
1006 + zone
1076
Door Box
-
External Paging
1004 + zone
1005
Central Office Calls,
Placing
1012 + group
808
Stepping through a Department Group
809
Sending a Call Waiting tone to a busy ext.
810
Breaking into another extension’s call
Barge In
811 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (trk) +
tone (1-3)
Listening to the incoming ring choices
Selectable Ring Tones
812
Changing the signal type for calling an ext.
815
Saving a number (from SLT) or dialing a
saved number
817
Setting modem outgoing parameters
818 + pswd (0000) + 0
818 + pswd (0000) + 1
818 + pswd (0000)+ 2
818 + pswd (0000) + 3
820 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (trk) +
tone (1-3)
Activating Day Mode
Activating Night Mode
Activating Midnight Mode
Activating Rest Mode
Changing your extension’s incoming ring
tones
821
Enabling Handsfree Answerback for
incoming Intercom calls
823
Enabling Forced Ringing for incoming
Intercom calls
824
Enabling/disabling Dial Pad Confirmation
Tone
825
Turning Background Music on and off
827 + 1 or 2 + time, or
Checking, setting or canceling an alarm
827 + 1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel
Setting the system Time and Date
828 + password (0000) +
year + month + day + day of
week (0-6) + hour + minutes
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Department Step Calling
Call Waiting
-
Intercom
Save Number Dialed
1014
Data Communications
-
Night Service
1039 + pswd
1040 + pswd
1041 + pswd
1042 + pswd
Selectable Ring Tones
-
Handsfree Answerback/
Forced Intercom Ringing
-
Handsfree
Answerback/Forced
Intercom ringing
-
Dial Pad Confirmation
Tone
-
Background Music
-
Alarm
-
Time and Date
-
FEATURES 11
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-2, Service Codes by Number
Dial this Service Code...1
1
When you are...
Also see
Function Key...
For this feature...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
830
Remote maintenance
832
Placing a call on Group Hold
834
Switching from headset to handset mode
and visa versa
840
System alarm message delete
847 +
0 (Cancel)
1 (Trk calls)
2 (Paging, ICM and transfers)
3 (Paging, ICM and trk calls)
4 (Call Forwards)
Activating Do Not Disturb
-
-
Hold
-
Headset Operation
1028
-
-
Do Not Disturb
-
Hold
-
849
Placing a call on Exclusive Hold at a
DSL/SLT set.
850
Camping On to an extension when calling
into the system through the VAU
Automated Attendant
Voice Announce Unit
(Automated Attendant)
-
851 + key + code
Changing the function of a programmable
key
Programmable Function
Keys
-
One-Touch Serial
Operation
1034
852 + One-Touch + Key
sequence + Programmable
key (1034) to store,
or
852 + One-Touch +
Programmable key (1034) to
cancel
Accessing One-Touch Key Serial
Operation store and delete functions
853 + bin + number +
HOLD to store
Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing
numbers
Abbreviated Dialing
-
854 + bin + number +
HOLD to store
Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing
numbers
Abbreviated Dialing
-
855 + One Touch key + code Programming a One-Touch Key or
Personal Speed Dial
One-Touch Dialing
-
856
Answering a call ringing a phone in your
pickup group (except Ring Group calls)
Group Call Pickup
-
857
Parking a call or picking up a parked call
Park
-
859
Retrieving a call from Exclusive Hold at a
DSL/SLT set.
Hold
-
860
DID ACD Access Code (not used)
ACD
-
862
Picking up a call from Group Hold
Hold
-
12 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-2, Service Codes by Number
Dial this Service Code...1
1
When you are...
For this feature...
Also see
Function Key...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
863
Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet
Me Page on an Internal Paging Zone (if
your extension is in the group called)
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging
1010
864 + zone paged (0-9 or
00-32)
Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet
Me Page if your extension is not in the
group paged
Meet Me Paging
-
865 + zone (0-8)
Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet
Me Page on an External Paging Zone.
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging
-
Conference
-
867 + line number
Retrieving a Conferenced CO line
868 + pickup group (1-9 or
01-32)
Answering a call ringing a phone in another
pickup group (except Ring Group calls)
Group Call Pickup
1009 + group
869
Answering a call ringing a phone in another
pickup group if you don’t know the group’s
number (except Ring Group Calls)
Group Call Pickup
1008
870
Canceling a Callback request
Callback
-
871 + ext
Canceling Messages Waiting you have left
at a specific extension
Message Waiting
-
873
Canceling all Messages Waiting you have
left at other extensions
Message Waiting
-
875 + pswd (0000) + place
outside call
Temporarily overriding an extension’s Toll
Restriction
Toll Restriction Override
-
Last Number Redial
-
Data Communications
-
Music on Hold
-
876
Clearing number saved by Last Number
Redial
880
Initializing the DCI
881 + pswd (0000) + 0 (no
tone), 1 (minuet) or 2
(nocturne)
Changing the Music on Hold Tone
883
Enabling the DCI auto-answer mode
Data Communications
-
884
Disconnecting an active data call
Data Communications
-
885
Clearing the number saved by Save
Number Redial
Save Number Redial
-
892
Forcing Off Hook Signaling to voiceannounce your phone
Off Hook Signaling
-
893
Forcing Off Hook Signaling to ring your
phone
Off Hook Signaling
-
899
Testing Callback operation for SLT’s
Callback
-
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 13
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-3, Service Codes by Feature
For this feature...
1
Dial this Service Code...1
Also see
Function Key...
When you are...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
Abbreviated Dialing
Account Codes
Alarm
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
853 + bin + number +
HOLD to store
Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing
numbers
-
854 + bin + number +
HOLD to store
Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing
numbers
-
#2 + bin
Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing
number
1037
#4 + bin
Dialing a Group Abbreviated Dialing number
1038
#7 + bin
Using Personal Abbreviated Dialing
-
* + Enter Account Code + *
Entering an Account Code
-
Hookflash + # # + Enter
Account Code + Hookflash
Entering an Account Code at an SLT
-
827 + 1 or 2 + time, or 827 + Checking, setting or canceling an alarm
1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel
*5
Logging out of or on to an ACD Group
1046
155
Logging out of or on to an ACD Group
from an SLT
-
156
Activating Work Time
1053
157
Canceling Work Time
1053
158
Activating Rest Mode
1049
159
Canceling Rest Mode
1049
Hookflash + 160
ACD Recording for SLT
-
167
Allowing ACD Agent to log into a group
168
Allowing ACD Agent to log out of a group
169
Allowing supervisor to change agent’s status
170 + ACD Group
860
Automatic Route Selection
or Trunk Group Routing
9
Background Music
825
Call Forwarding
*2 + 0
14 FEATURES
-
Changing your ACD Group assignment
-
DID ACD Access Code (not used)
-
Placing an call using Trunk Group Routing
or Automatic Route Selection
Turning Background Music on and off
1011
-
Canceling Call Forwarding
1080
*2 + 2 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forwarding when Busy
1080
*2 + 4 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forwarding Immediate
1080
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-3, Service Codes by Feature
For this feature...
1
Dial this Service Code...1
When you are...
Also see
Function Key...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
Call Forwarding (cont.)
*2 + 6 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forwarding when
Unanswered (delayed)
1080
*2 + 7 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
1080
Call Forwarding
Off-Premise
*4 + 6 + Trunk access code
+ Outside number, or
*4 + 6 + Hold + Hang up to
cancel
Forwarding your calls to an off-premise
telephone number
1081
Call Forwarding with
Follow Me
*2 + 3 + Destination + Type
(2-4)
Activating Call Forward Follow Me at the
destination extension
1080
Call Waiting / Camp On
*7
Splitting (switching) between calls on an SLT
Callback / Camp On /
Trunk Queuing
2
Camping On or leaving a Callback for a
busy extension or trunk
Caller ID
1020
870
Canceling a Callback request
-
899
Testing Callback operation for SLT’s
-
146 + 2 (Change), 3 (Delete) Changing, deleting or adding new
numbers to the Caller ID Table
or 6 (New)
1073
148 + 2 (Call) or 3 (Erase)
Returning or erasing a missed Caller ID call
-
Central Office Calls,
Answering
#0
Using Universal Answer to pick up a call
ringing over the paging system
-
Central Office Calls,
Placing
#9 + 001-128
Conference
Data Communications
Placing a call over a specific trunk
1-32
804 + trunk group (1-9,
01-99 or 001-128)
Placing an outside call over a trunk group
1012 + group
Hookflash + #1 + extension
+ hookflash twice
Activating Conference from a Single Line
(500/2500) set
1016
867 + line number
Retrieving a CO line in a Conference
817
Setting modem outgoing parameters
-
880
Initializing the DCI
-
883
Enabling the DCI auto-answer mode
-
884
Disconnecting an active data call
-
Department Calling
150 + 0 (install) or
1 (remove)
Logging in (0) or logging out (1) for your
Department Calling Group
1074
Department Step Calling
#
Step Calling through a Department Group
1021
Dial Pad Confirmation
Tone
824
Enabling/disabling Dial Pad Confirmation
Tone
-
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 15
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-3, Service Codes by Feature
For this feature...
1
Dial this Service Code...1
Also see
Function Key...
When you are...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
Directed Call Pickup
** + ext.
Do Not Disturb
847 +
0 (Cancel)
1 (Trk calls)
2 (Paging, ICM and Call
Forwards)
3 (Paging, ICM and trk calls)
4 (Call Forwards)
Door Box
802 + Door Box (1-8)
Flash
#3
Forced Trunk Disconnect
*3 (after #9 + 001-128 +
busy)
Group Call Pickup
*#
Picking up a call ringing or waiting at an
extension
-
Activating Do Not Disturb
-
Placing a call to a Door Box
-
Flashing a trunk from an SLT.
-
Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk
-
Picking up a call ringing an extension in
your own pickup group (except Ring
Group calls)
1007
868 + pickup group (1-9 or
01-32)
Answering a call ringing a phone in another
pickup group (except Ring Group calls)
1009 + group
869
Answering a call ringing a phone in another
pickup group if you don’t know the group’s
number (except Ring Group calls)
1008
1 (Off-hook)
Changing the signaling mode of your
outgoing Intercom call
-
821
Enabling Handsfree Answerback for
incoming Intercom calls
-
823
Enabling Forced Ringing for incoming
Intercom calls
-
Headset Operation
834
Switching from headset to handset mode
and visa versa
Hold
832
Placing a call on Group Hold
-
849
Placing a call on Exclusive Hold at a
DSL/SLT set
-
859
Retrieving a call from Exclusive Hold at a
DSL
-
862
Picking up a call from Group Hold
-
Hotel/Motel
(Message Waiting)
126
Leaving a message at an extension,
without first calling that extension
-
Hotel/Motel
(Do Not Disturb)
127
Enabling DND at a room telephone
-
Handsfree
Answerback/Forced
Intercom Ringing
16 FEATURES
1028
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-3, Service Codes by Feature
For this feature...
1
Dial this Service Code...1
When you are...
Also see
Function Key...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
Hotel/Motel
(Do Not Disturb)
128
Canceling DND at a room telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Do Not Disturb)
129
Enabling DND for another room telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Do Not disturb)
130
Canceling DND at another room telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
131
Setting a Wake Up Call or your own room
telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
132
Canceling a Wake Up Call for your own
room telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
133
Setting a Wake Up Call for another guest’s
room telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Wake Up Call)
134
Canceling a Wake Up Call for another
guest’s room telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Room to Room Call
Restriction)
135
Enabling Room to Room Call Restriction
for a guest’s room telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Room to Room Call
Restriction)
136
Disabling Room to Room Call Restriction
for a guest’s room telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Toll Restriction [When
Checked In])
137
Changing a room’s telephone Toll
Restriction (When Checked In) level
-
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status)
138
Setting a room as checked in
-
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status)
139
Setting room as checked out
-
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status)
140
Setting a room as available (clean) from
the room’s telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status)
141
Setting a room as available (clean) from
another telephone
-
Hotel/Motel
(Room Status Printouts)
142
Requesting a Room Status Printout
-
Hotel/Motel
(Toll Restriction [When
Checked In])
166
Changing a room’s telephone Toll
Restriction level (when checked in)
-
Last Number Redial
#5
Using Last Number Redial
-
Clearing number saved by Last Number
Redial
-
876
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 17
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-3, Service Codes by Feature
For this feature...
1
Dial this Service Code...1
Also see
Function Key...
When you are...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Paging
Message Waiting
863
Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet
Me Page on an Internal Paging Zone (if
your extension is in the group called)
1010
864 + zone paged (0-9 or
00-32)
Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet
Me Page if your extension is not in the
group paged
-
865 + zone (0-8)
Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet
Me Page on an External Paging Zone.
-
0 (Off-hook)
Leaving a Message Waiting at a coworker’s busy or unanswered extension
-
*0
Answering a Message Waiting request
1023
871 + ext
Canceling Messages Waiting you have left
at a specific extension
-
873
Canceling all Messages Waiting you have
left at other extensions
-
Changing the Music on Hold Tone
-
Programming extension names
-
Music on Hold
881 + pswd (0000) + 0 (no
tone), 1 (minuet) or 2
(nocturne)
Name Storing
800 + enter name
Night Service
818 + pswd (0000) + 0
818 + pswd (0000) + 1
818 + pswd (0000) + 2
818 + pswd (0000) + 3
Off Hook Signaling
7 (Off-hook)
One-Touch Dialing
One-Touch Serial
Operation
1039 + pswd
1040 + pswd
1041 + pswd
1042 + pswd
Activating Day Mode
Activating Night Mode
Activating Midnight Mode
Activating Rest Mode
Sending off-hook signal tones to a busy ext.
1018
892
Forcing Off Hook Signaling to voiceannounce your phone
-
893
Forcing Off Hook Signaling to ring your phone
-
855 + One-Touch key + code Programming a One-Touch Key or
Personal Speed Dial
Accessing One-Touch Key Serial
852 + One-Touch + Key
sequence + Programmable Operation store and delete functions
key (1034) to store,
or
852 + One-Touch +
Programmable key (1034) to
cancel
1034
Paging, Combined
*1 + Zone (1-8)
*1 + Zone (0)
Making a combined zone page.
Making a combined All Call page.
-
Paging, External
803 + zone (1-8)
803 + zone (0)
Making an external zone page
Making an external All Call page
1004 + zone
1005
18 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-3, Service Codes by Feature
For this feature...
1
Dial this Service Code...1
When you are...
Also see
Function Key...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
Paging, Internal
801 + zone (1-9 or 01-32)
801 + zone (0 or 00)
Making an Internal Zone Page
Making an Internal All Call Page
1006 + zone
1076
Park
#6 + orbit (1-8 or 01-32)
Parking a call in system Park orbit (1-8 or 01-32)
1033 + orbit
Park
*6 + orbit (1-8 or 01-32)
Picking up a call parked in a system Park
orbit (1-8 or 01-32)
1033 + orbit
Park
857
Programmable Function Keys
851 + key + code
Save Number Dialed
815
Saving a number (from SLT) or dialing a
saved number
885
Clearing the number saved by Save
Number Redial number
Selectable Display
Messaging
Selectable Ring Tones
Parking a call or picking up a parked call
-
Changing the function of a programmable key
-
*4 + 3 + message (01-20), or Activating and Canceling Selectable
*4 + 3 + Hang up to cancel Display Messaging
1014
1081
811 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (trk) +
tone (1-3)
Listening to the incoming ring choices
-
820 + 1 (ICM) + 2 (trk) +
tone (1-3)
Changing your extension’s incoming ring
tones
-
System Programming
Password Protection
#*#*
Entering the system programming mode
-
Tandem Trunking
(Unsupervised Conference)
#8
Setting up an Unsupervised Conference
-
Time and Date
Setting the system Time and Date
828 + password (0000) +
year + month + day + day of
week (0-6) + hour + minutes
-
Toll Restriction Override
875 + pswd (0000) + place
outside call
Temporarily overriding an extension’s Toll
Restriction
-
Trunk Group Routing or
Automatic Route Selection
9
Placing a call using Trunk Group Routing
or Automatic Route Selection
1011
Trunk Queuing
2 (Off-hook)
Camping on to or leaving a Callback at a
busy trunk
1020
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 19
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-3, Service Codes by Feature
For this feature...
1
Dial this Service Code...1
Also see
Function Key...
When you are...
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).
Voice Announce Unit
** + ringing ext.
Picking up a call ringing another extension for
Directed Call Pickup or VAU Park and Page.
*4 + 7 + Record message + # Recording, listening to or erasing a
+ Condition (2, 4, 6 or 7) + Personal Greeting or Park and Page
Destination + Type (2 or 3), or
*4 + 7 + 3 to cancel
Listening for the date
-
4 (On-hook)
Listening to the General Message
-
6 (On-Hook)
Checking an extension’s number
-
8 (On-hook)
Listening for the time
-
111
SLT listening to the General Message
-
112 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen
or 7 to record
Recording, listening to or erasing the
General Message
-
Calling busy extension through VAU
Automated Attendant. Voice prompt asks
you to leave your number for a return call.
-
Recording, listening to or erasing a VAU
Message
-
143 + VOL▲, VOL▼, 2
(Call) or 3 (Erase)
Calling, erasing or scrolling through phone
numbers on your display left by the
Automated Attendant
-
850
Camping On to an extension when calling
into the system through the VAU
Automated Attendant
-
Leaving a message in a co-worker’s
mailbox after calling their busy or
unanswered extension.
-
116 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen
or 7 to record
8 (Off-hook)
*2 + 1 + Type (2-4)
Voice Over
20 FEATURES
1081
3 (On-hook)
114 + Your own phone
number
Voice Mail
-
Activating Personal Answering Machine
Emulation
*8
Calling your mailbox
1059
154
Enabling Conversation Record at DSL set
-
6 (Off-hook)
Sending a Voice Over to a busy extension
after hearing Busy/Ring tone
1057
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-4, Function Key Codes by Feature
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Key Lamp Status
Also see
Srvc Code
Dialing a stored Common
Abbreviated Dialing number
None
#2 + bin
Code: 1038
Dialing a stored Group
Operation: Press key + Abbreviated Dialing number
bin + Line or CALL key
None
#4 + bin
Code:1054
Operation: Press key +
Dial Account Code
None
*
On red when
logged in
Off when logged
out
*5
On red when
recording
Off when not
recording
160
For this feature...
Use this key...
Abbreviated Dialing
Code: 1037
Operation: Press key +
bin + Line or CALL
Account Codes
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
When you are...
Entering Account Codes
Code: 1046
Basic Operation
Operation: Press key to Logging in or out of an ACD
Group
log in
Press key + 1 to log out
or 0 to cancel
Code: 1047
Operation: Press key
Turning ACI Call Recording
on or off
Code: 1048
Operation: Press key
Emergency Call
Placing or receiving an
Emergency Call
On while calling
your supervisor or
after being answered
by your supervisor
Flashing fast at the
supervisor while
ringing
-
Code: 1049
Operation: Press key
Rest Mode
Enabling/disabling Rest Mode
On red when Rest
Mode enabled
Off when Rest
Mode disabled
-
Code: 1050
Operation: Press key
Out of Service
Taking an ACD Group out of
Service (for Group
Supervisors only), or Taking
all ACD Groups out of service
(for System Supervisors only)
-
-
Code: 1051
Operation: Press key
Monitoring an ACD Agent’s
conversation
On red while
monitoring
Off when not
monitoring
-
Code: 1052
Operation: Press key
Switching (splitting) between an
ACD Agent and their outside
caller after an emergency call
-
-
FEATURES 21
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-4, Function Key Codes by Feature
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Also see
Srvc Code
For this feature...
Use this key...
When you are...
Key Lamp Status
Automatic Call
Distribution (Cont’d)
Code: 1053
Operation: Press key
Work Time
Enabling/disabling Work Time
On if Work Time
enabled, Flashing
while on call if Auto
Work Time enabled
Off when Work Time
disabled
-
Code: 1058
Operation: None
DSS Agent Status
Using a BLF indiction to view
an agent’s status
Off when idle
On when busy
Double wink off when
making an emergency
call
Wink off when logged
off or not installed
Double wink on when
logged on
-
Code: 1079
Operation: Press key
while on hook
Queue Status Check
With 384i 3.07.18 or higher, an
in an ACD group and wish to
check status of the queue groups
None
-
Barge In
Code: 1019
Operation: Press key
Barging In on a co-worker’s
conversation
None
-
Call Forwarding
Code: 1080
Operation: Press key
Call Forwarding to extension
or Voice Mail
None
*2
Call Forwarding,
Off-Premise
Code: 1081
Operation: Press key
Setting up Call Forwarding OffPremise, Selectable Display
Messaging, VAU Park /Page and
VAU Personal Greeting
None
*4
Call Forwarding / Do
Not Disturb Override
Code: 1022
Operation: Call
extension + Press key
Overriding an extension’s Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
None
-
Callback / Camp On /
Trunk Queuing
Code: 1020
Operation: Call busy
extension or access
busy trunk + Press key
Leaving a Callback request at
a busy extension, Camping On
to a busy extension, or
Queuing for a busy trunk
On red when
activated
2
Caller ID
Code: 1073
Operation: Press key
+ 2 (Change), 3
(Delete) or 6 (New)
Changing, deleting or adding
new numbers to the Caller ID
Table
None
146
On green when
seized, on red when
busy (by other party),
Slow Flash green
when ringing, Hold
flash when on Hold
#9
Central Office Calls
22 FEATURES
Code: Trunk number Pressing a line key to place or
(0001-0128) or 0000 to answer a trunk call (where
undefine
trunks are 0001-0128)
Operation: Press key
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-4, Function Key Codes by Feature
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
For this feature...
Conference
Conference, Voice Call
Data Communications
Use this key...
When you are...
Code: 1016
Setting up a Conference or a
Operation: Set up call Meet Me Conference
+ Press key + set up call
to add + Press key twice
Code: 1017
Operation: Set up
trunk call + Press key
Setting up a Voice Call
Conference
Code: 1029
Placing a data call
Operation: Press key
+ ext or outside number
Key Lamp Status
Also see
Srvc Code
On red during setup
#1
None
-
On red when call
set up
-
On red when call is
placed
-
None
-
Code: 1030
Operation: Press key
+ line key
On a data call and wish to
block Barge In and Off Hook
Signaling
Code: 1045
Operation: Press key
+ terminal dial
Using your PC for
Telemarketing Dial
Department Calling
Code: 1074
Operation: Press key
Logging in or logging out of your
Department Calling Group
On when removed,
Off when installed
150
Department Step Calling
Code: 1021
Operation: Dial busy
ext + Press key
Step Calling through a
Department Group for an idle
member
None
#
Directory Dialing
(384i 3.06.02 or higher)
Code: 1082
Operation: Do not lift
handset + Press key
Using Directory Dialing
None
3 (On
hook)
Group Call Pickup
Code: 1007
Operation: CALL +
Press key
Answering a call ringing
another phone in your Pickup
Group
None
*#
Code: 1008
Operation: CALL +
Press key
Answering a call ringing a
phone in another Pickup
Group - if you don’t know the
group number
None
869
None
868
Code: 1009 + Pickup Answering a call ringing a
Group (1-9 or 01-32) phone in a specific Pickup
Operation: CALL + Group
Press key + Pkup Group
Hotline
Code: 1058 + dest. ext
Operation: Press key
Placing a call to your Hotline
partner
Full BLF (red) for
covered ext.
-
Headset Operation
Code: 1028
Operation: Press key
Enabling or disabling Headset
Operation
On red when
activated
834
None
-
Hold
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Code: 1043
Putting a call on System Hold
Operation: Place or (if your phone’s Hold key is
answer call + Press key reassigned)
FEATURES 23
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-4, Function Key Codes by Feature
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
For this feature...
Use this key...
When you are...
Hold (cont.)
Code: 1044
Putting a call on Exclusive
Operation: Place or Hold
answer call + Press key
Loop Keys
Placing or answering a trunk
Code: 1078 + 0
call
(Incoming), 1
(Outgoing) or 2 (Both
Ways) + 000 (All trunk
groups incoming or
ARS outgoing) or
Trunk group (001-128).
Operation: Press key
Meet Me Conference
(Also see Conference)
Meet Me Paging
Memo Dial
Code: 1010
Operation: Press key
Joining a Meet Me Conference
or Meet Me Page
Storing, using or checking a
Code: 1015
Memo Dial number
Operation:
Store: While on call,
Press key + number
Use: Press key +
CALL or line
Erase: CALL + Press key
Key Lamp Status
Also see
Srvc Code
None
-
Flashing red when
ringing,
On green when in
use
-
None
863
None
-
None
*0
On red when
activated
-
Slow Flash red
when ringing, On
red when busy
-
Message Waiting
Code: 1023
Operation: Call
extension + Press key
Answering a Message Waiting
Microphone Cutoff
Code: 1026
Operation: Set up call
+ Press key
Using Microphone Cutoff
Multiple Directory
Numbers
Code: 1036 + ext.
Operation: Press key
Placing or answering a call to
your virtual (phantom)
extension
Night Service
Code: 1039 + pswd
(0000)
Operation: Press key
Activating the Day Mode
On red when
activated
818 +
pswd
(0000) + 0
Code: 1040 + pswd
(0000)
Operation: Press key
Activating the Night Mode
On red when
activated
818 +
pswd
(0000) + 1
Code: 1041 + pswd
(0000)
Operation: Press key
Activating the Midnight Mode
On red when
activated
818 +
pswd
(0000) + 2
Code: 1042 + pswd
(0000)
Operation: Press key
Activating the Rest Mode
On red when
activated
818 +
pswd
(0000) + 3
24 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-4, Function Key Codes by Feature
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Key Lamp Status
Also see
Srvc Code
Signaling a busy extension
None
7
Storing, using or clearing a
One-Touch Serial Operation
None
852
Making an external zone page
On red when
activated
803 + zone
Code: 1005
Operation: Press key
Making an external All Call
page
On red when
activated
803 + 0
Code: 1006 + zone
(1-9 or 01-32)
Operation: Press key
Broadcasting to an Internal
Paging Zone
On red when
activated
801 + zone
Code: 1076
Operation: Press key
Broadcasting to all Internal
Paging zones
On red when
activated
801 + 0 or
00
Park
Code: 1033 + orbit
(1-9 or 01-32)
Operation: Press key
Placing a call into or retrieving
a call from a Park Orbit
Fast Flash when
orbit busy (green at
originator, red at
others)
#6 (Park)
*6
(pickup)
Repeat Redial
Code: 1075
Operation: Press key
Activating Repeat Redial
while on a call
Fast Flash while
system waits to redial
-
Full BLF red
-
Dest. Fast Flash red,
Source Hold Flash
red
-
None
-
For this feature...
Use this key...
Off Hook Signaling
Code: 1018
Operation: At busy,
press key
One-Touch Serial
Operation
Code: 1034
Operation:
Store: 852 +
One-Touch Key +
sequence + Press key
Use: Press key +
One-Touch Key
Paging, External
Code: 1004 + zone (1-8)
Operation: Press key
Paging, Internal
Reverse Voice Over
Room Monitor
Save Number Dialed
When you are...
Code: 1056 + dest. ext. Initiating Reverse Voice Over
Operation: Press and
hold key
Code: 1025
Activating Room Monitor
Operation: Press key at
destination and source
Saving, redialing or checking
Code: 1014
a saved number
Operation:
Save: Place call + Press key
Redial: Line or CALL
+ Press key
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Code: 1031 + sec. ext
Operation: Press key
Calling your secretary (using
the buzzer)
On red at source
Fast Flash red at
destination
-
Secretary Call Pickup
Code: 1032 + boss ext
Operation: Press key
A secretary picking up a call
ringing your boss’s extension.
On red when
activated
-
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 25
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-4, Function Key Codes by Feature
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
For this feature...
Use this key...
When you are...
Key Lamp Status
Also see
Srvc Code
Selectable Display
Messaging
Code: 1081
Operation: Press key
Setting up Call Forwarding
Off-Premise, Selectable
Display Messaging, VAU Park
and Page and VAU Personal
Greeting
None
*4
Serial Call
Code: 1035
Operation: Trk call +
Hold + ext + Press key
Placing a Serial Call to a coworker
None
-
Transfer
Code:1077
Operation: Press key
Transferring a call (if CONF
(TRF) is not set for Transfer)
None
-
Trunk Group Routing
Code: 1011
Operation: Press key
Accessing a trunk using Trunk
Group Routing
On red when active
9
Trunk Groups
Code: 1012 + trk
group (1-9, 01-99 or
001-128) Operation:
Press key
Using a loop key to access a
Trunk Group
On red when active
804
Code: 1020
Camping On or Queuing for a
Operation: Hear busy trunk
tone for trk + Press key
None
2
Code: 1081
Operation: Press key
Setting up Call Forwarding OffPremise, Selectable Display
Messaging, VAU Park and Page
and VAU Personal Greeting
None
*4
Calling Voice Mail or leaving
Code: 1059
In 384i 3.07.10 or higher, a message
enter 1059 followed by
extension or Message
Center number.
Operation: Press key
None
*8 or 8
Trunk Queuing
Voice Announce Unit
(Park and Page)
(Personal Greeting)
Voice Mail
Voice Over
26 FEATURES
Code: 1060
Operation: Set up call
+ Press key
Using Voice Mail Record
Slow Flash red
when active
-
Code: 1057
Operation: Hear
Off-Hook Signaling
tones + Press key
Initiating or responding to
Voice Over
On red when
responding
Hold Flash red
when listening
6
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
telemanuals.com
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-5, Function Key Codes by Number
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Use this key...
For this feature...
Code: Trunk number
(0001-0128) or 0000 to
undefine
Operation: Press key
Central Office Calls
Code: 1004 + zone (1-8)
Operation: Press key
Paging, External
Code: 1005
Operation: Press key
When you are...
Also see
Srvc Code
Key Lamp Status
On green when
seized, on red
when in use (by
other party), Slow
Flash green when
ringing, Hold flash
when on Hold
#9
Broadcasting to an External
Paging Zone
On red when
activated
803 + zone
Paging, External
Broadcasting to all External
Paging Zones
On red when
activated
803 + 0
Code: 1006 + zone
(1-9 or 01-32)
Operation: Press key
Paging, Internal
Broadcasting to an Internal
Paging Zone
On red when
activated
801 + zone
Code: 1007
Operation: CALL +
Press key
Group Call Pickup
Answering a call ringing
another phone in your Pickup
Group
None
*#
Code: 1008
Operation: CALL +
Press key
Group Call Pickup
Answering a call ringing a
phone in another Pickup
Group - if you don’t know the
group number
None
869
Code: 1009 + Pickup
Group (1-9 or 01-32)
Operation: CALL +
Press key + Pickup
Group
Group Call Pickup
Answering a call ringing a
phone in a specific Pickup
Group
None
868
Code: 1010
Operation: Press key
Meet Me Conference
(Also see Conference)
Meet Me Paging
Joining a Meet Me Conference
or Meet Me Page
None
863
Code: 1011
Operation: Press key
Trunk Group Routing
Accessing a trunk using Trunk
Group Routing
On red when active
9
Code: 1012 + tr group
(1-9, 01-99 or 001-128)
Operation: Press key
Trunk Groups
Using a loop key to access a
Trunk Group
On red when active
804
Code: 1014
Operation:
Save: Place call + Press
key
Redial: Line or CALL
+ Press key
Save Number Dialed
Saving, redialing or checking
a saved number
None
-
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Pressing a line key to place or
answer a trunk call (where
trunks are 0001-0128)
FEATURES 27
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-5, Function Key Codes by Number
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Key Lamp Status
Also see
Srvc Code
Storing, using or checking a
Memo Dial number
None
-
Setting up a Conference or a
Meet Me Conference
On red during setup
#1
Setting up a Voice Call
Conference
None
-
Off Hook Signaling
Signaling a busy extension
None
7
Code: 1019
Operation: Press key
Barge In
Barging In on a co-worker’s
conversation
None
-
Code: 1020
Operation: Call busy
extension or access
busy trunk + Press key
Callback / Camp On /
Trunk Queuing
Leaving a Callback request at
a busy extension, Camping On
to a busy extension, Queuing
for a busy trunk
On red when
activated
2
Code: 1021
Operation: Dial busy
ext + Press key
Department Step Calling
Step Calling through a
Department Group for an idle
member
None
#
Code: 1022
Operation: Call
extension + Press key
Call Forwarding / Do
Not Disturb Override
Overriding an extension’s Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
None
-
Code: 1023
Operation: Call
extension + Press key
Message Waiting
Answering a Message Waiting
None
*0
Code: 1025
Operation: Press key
at destination and
source
Room Monitor
Activating Room Monitor
Fast Flash red at
destination, Hold
Flash red at source
-
Code: 1026
Operation: Set up call
+ Press key
Microphone Cutoff
Using Microphone Cutoff
On red when
activated
-
Code: 1028
Operation: Press key
Headset Operation
Enabling or disabling Headset
Operation
On red when
activated
834
Use this key...
For this feature...
Code: 1015
Operation:
Store: While on call,
Press key + number
Use: Press key + CALL
or line Erase: CALL +
Press key
Memo Dial
Code: 1016
Operation: Set up call
+ Press key + set up
call to add + Press key
twice
Conference
Code: 1017
Operation: Set up
trunk call + Press key
Conference, Voice Call
Code: 1018
Operation: At busy,
press key
28 FEATURES
When you are...
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-5, Function Key Codes by Number
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Use this key...
For this feature...
Code: 1029
Operation: Press key
+ ext or outside number
Data Communications
Code: 1030
Operation: Press key
+ line key
Code: 1031 + sec. ext.
Operation:Press key
Secretary Call
Code: 1032 + boss ext.
Operation: Press key
When you are...
Setting up a Data Call
Also see
Srvc Code
Key Lamp Status
On red when call
set up
-
On a data call and wish to
block Barge In and Off Hook
Signaling
On red when call is
active
-
Calling your secretary (using
the buzzer)
On red at source Fast
Flash red at
destination
-
A secretary picking up a call
ringing your boss’s extension.
On red when
activated
-
Placing a call into or retrieving
a call from a Park Orbit
Fast Flash when
orbit is busy (green
at originator, red at
others)
#6 (Park)
*6 (pickup)
Code: 1033 + orbit
(1-8 or 01-32)
Operation: Press key
Park
Code: 1034
Operation:
Store: 852 +
One-Touch + sequence
+ Press key
Use: Press key +
One-Touch key
One-Touch Serial
Operation
Storing, using or clearing a
One-Touch Serial Operation
None
852
Code: 1035
Operation: Trk call +
Hold + ext + Press key
Serial Call
Placing a Serial Call to a coworker
None
-
Code: 1036 + ext.
Operation: Press key
Multiple Directory
Numbers
Placing or answering a call
from your virtual (phantom)
extension
Slow Flash red
when ringing, On
red when busy
-
Code: 1037
Operation: Press key +
bin + Line or CALL key
Abbreviated Dialing
Dialing a stored Common
Abbreviated Dialing number
None
#2 + bin
Code: 1038
Operation: Press key +
bin + Line or CALL key
Abbreviated Dialing
Dialing a stored Group
Abbreviated Dialing number
None
#4 + bin
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 29
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-5, Function Key Codes by Number
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Use this key...
For this feature...
Code: 1039 + pswd
(0000)
Operation: Press key
Night Service
When you are...
Key Lamp Status
Also see
Srvc Code
Activating the Day Mode
On red when
activated
818 +
pswd
(0000) + 0
Code: 1040 + pswd
(0000)
Operation: Press key
Activating the Night Mode
On red when
activated
818 +
pswd
(0000) +1
Code: 1041 + pswd
(0000)
Operation: Press key
Activating the Midnight Mode
On red when
activated
818 +
pswd
(0000) +2
Activating the Rest Mode
On red when
activated
818 +
pswd
(0000) +3
Putting a call on System Hold
(if hold key is reassigned)
None
-
Putting a call on Exclusive
Hold
None
-
Using your PC for
Telemarketing Dial
None
-
Basic Operation
Logging in or out of an ACD
Group
On red when
logged in
Off when logged
out
*5
Code: 1047
Operation: Press key
Call Recording
Turning ACI Call Recording
on or off
On red while
recording. Off
while not recording
160
Code: 1048
Operation: Press key
Emergency Call
Placing or receiving an
Emergency Call
On while calling
your supervisor or
after being
answered by your
supervisor
Flashing fast at the
supervisor while
ringing
-
Code: 1049
Operation: Press key
Rest Mode
Enabling/disabling Rest Mode
On red when Rest
Mode enabled
Off when Rest
Mode disabled
-
Code: 1042 + pswd
(0000)
Operation: Press key
Night Service (cont.)
Code: 1043
Operation: Place or
answer call + Press key
Hold
Code: 1044
Operation: Place or
answer call + Press key
Code: 1045
Operation: Press key +
terminal dial
Data
Code: 1046
Operation: Press key to
log in
Press key + 1 to log out
or 0 to cancel
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
30 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-5, Function Key Codes by Number
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Use this key...
For this feature...
When you are...
Key Lamp Status
Also see
Srvc Code
Code: 1050
Operation: Press key
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
Out of Service
Taking an ACD Group out of
Service (for Group
Supervisors only), or Taking
all ACD Groups out of service
(for System Supervisors only)
-
-
Code: 1051
Operation: Press key
Terminal Speech Monitor
Monitoring an ACD Agent’s
conversation
On red while
monitoring. Off
when not monitoring
-
Code: 1052
Operation: Press key
Supervisor Split
Swtiching (splitting) between an
ACD Agent and their outside
caller after an emergency call
On during Split
-
Code: 1053
Operation: Press key
Work Time
Enabling/disabling Work Time
On if Work Time
enabled, Flashing
while on a call if Auto
Work Time enabled
Off when Work Time
disabled
-
None
*
Full BLF red
-
On red when
responding
Hold Flash red
when listening
6
Placing a call to your Hotline
partner
Full BLF (red) for
covered ext.
-
Displaying an Agents status
using BLF keys
Off when idle, on
when busy, double
wink when logged
off or not installed,
and double wink
on when logged on.
Code: 1054
Operation: Press key
and dial Account Code
Account Codes
Code: 1056 + dest. ext.
Operation: Press and
hold key
Reverse Voice Over
Code: 1057
Operation: Hear
Off-Hook Signaling
tones + Press key
Voice Over
Code: 1058 + dest. ext.
Operation: Press key
Hotline
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
Code: 1059
In 384i 3.07.10 or
higher, enter 1059
followed by extension
or Message Center
number.
Operation: Press key
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Voice Mail
Entering Account Codes
Initiating Reverse Voice Over
Initiating or responding to
Voice Over
Calling Voice Mail or leaving
a message
None
*8 or 8
FEATURES 31
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-5, Function Key Codes by Number
To program a key, press CALL, dial 851, press the key and enter the code (e.g., 1057 for Voice Over).
Use this key...
For this feature...
Code: 1060
Operation: Set up call
+ Press key
Voice Mail (cont.)
Code: 1073
Operation: Press key
+ 2 (Change), 3
(Delete) or 6 (New)
Caller ID
Code: 1074
Operation: Press key
When you are...
Also see
Srvc Code
Slow Flash red
when active
-
Changing, deleting or adding
new numbers
None
146
Department Calling
Logging in or logging out of
your Department Calling
Group
On when removed,
Off when installed
150
Code: 1075
Operation: Press key
Repeat Redial
Activating repeat redial while
on a call
Fast Flash while
system waits to
redial
-
Code: 1076
Operation: Press key
Paging, Internal
On red when
activated
801 + 0 or
00
Code: 1077
Operation: Press key
Transfer
Transferring a call (if CONF
(TRF) is not set for Transfer)
None
-
Code: 1078 + 0
(Incoming), 1
(Outgoing) or 2 (Both
ways) + 000 (All trunk
groups incoming or
ARS outgoing) or
Trunk group (001-128)
Operation: Press key
Loop Keys
Placing or answering a trunk
call
Flash red when
ringing,
On green when in
use
-
Code: 1079
Operation: Press key
while on hook
Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
(384i 3.07.18 or higher)
Viewing the ACD Queue
Status of each ACD group
None
-
Code: 1080
Operation: Press key
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding to extension
or Voice Mail
None
*2
Code: 1081
Operation: Press key
Call Forwarding
Off-Premise
Selectable Display
Messaging
Voice Announce Unit
(Park and Page)
Voice Announce Unit
(Personal Greeting)
Setting up Call Forwarding
Off-Premise, Selectable
Display Messaging, VAU Park
and Page and VAU Personal
Greeting
None
*4
Code: 1082
Operation: Do not lift
handset + Press key
Directory Dialing
(384i 3.06.02 or higher)
Using Directory Dialing
None
3 (On
hook)
32 FEATURES
Using Voice Mail Record
Key Lamp Status
Broadcasting to all Internal
Paging Zones
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-6, System Number Plan/Capacities
384i
124i
4
1
Classes of Service
15 per Tenant
10
Toll Restriction Classes
15 per Tenant
8
1000
200
Trunk Port Numbers1
1-128
1-52
Trunk Group Numbers
1-128
1-16
Trunk Access Maps
1-128
1-52
Trunk Routes
1-64
1-36
Ring Groups
1-128
1-16
1000 (0-999)
200 (0-199)
8
4
1500
200
16
11
Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes
15 per Tenant
8
DISA Classes of Service
15 per Tenant
10
Telephone Extension Port Numbers1
1-256
1-72
Telephone Extension Number Range2
301-799
301-799
Virtual Extension Port Numbers
257-384
73-96
301-799
301-799
0
0
256
72
PC Attendant Consoles
2
0
DSS Console Numbers
8
4
DSS Consoles, Maximum Installed
32
8
Door Box Numbers
1-8
1-8
50 per Tenant
24
16
16
200-799
200-799
System Type:
System
Tenant Groups
Caller ID Bins
Trunks
Caller ID Bins
DID Translation Tables
DID Translation Table Entries
Tie Line Classes of Service
Extensions
Virtual Extension Number Range
2
Operator Access Number
Telephones (total of digital and analog)
Ringdown Assignments
Voice Mail Ports
Voice Mail Master Numbers
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 33
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-6, System Number Plan/Capacities
384i
124i
32
8
1990
360
Department (Extension) Group Numbers
1-32
1-8
Department (Extension) Group Number
Range
200-799
200-799
1-9 or 01-32
1-8
DCI Software Port Numbers
DCI Modules
DCI Module Ports (1 port per unit)
3-DCI Units
3-DCI Unit Ports (3 ports per unit)
1-288
144
1-144
48
145-288
1-72 (Same as ext.)
72
1-72
6 (2 per cabinet)
1-72
DCI Extension Number Range2
301-799
301-799
1-32
1-8
DCI Toll Restriction Classes
15
8
DCI Hotlines
50
24
200-799
200-799
ACI Software Port Numbers1
3-ACI Units (3 ports per unit)
1-192
64
1-6
2
ACI Extension Number Range2
200-799
200-799
ACI Department (Pooling) Group Numbers
1-32
1-4
ACI Department (Pooling) Group Extension Number Range2
200-799
200-799
Internal Page Group Numbers
0, 1-9 or 00, 01-32
0, 1-8
External Page Group Numbers
0, 1-8
0, 1-8
16
8
1-9 or 01-32
1-8
System Type:
Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing Groups
Abbreviated Dialing Bins
Department and Pickup Groups
Group Call Pickup Group Numbers
DCIs
DCI Department (Pooling ) Group Numbers
DCI Department (Pooling) Group Extension Number Range2
ACIs
Paging and Park
PGDU Sensors
Park Group Numbers
34 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-6, System Number Plan/Capacities
System Type:
384i
124i
0000
0000
12345678
0000
9999
12345678
0000
9999
Passwords
User Password for Setting Time and
Date, Music on Hold tone, Night Service and Toll Restriction Override
Passwords (Cont’d)
Programming Passwords
Level 2 (IN - Tenant 0)
Level 3 (SA - Tenant 1)
Level 4 (SB - Tenant 1)
Footnotes
1
Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports (124 or 384 – depending
on the system).
2
These devices share the same pool of extension numbers. Extension numbers
cannot overlap.
Extension numbers can be three or four digits long. See Flexible System Numbering.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 35
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-7 System Tones
Tone
Repetitions
Frequency
Level
Pattern
Internal, Special and External
Dial Tone
Continuous
350 Hz + 440
Hz
-16 dB
Steady
Internal Recall Dial Tone
3
350 Hz + 440
Hz
-16 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Internal Busy Tone 1
Continuous
480 Hz + 620
Hz
-27 dB
500 mS Off - 500 mS On
DND Busy Tone
Continuous
400 Hz
-13 dB
200 mS Off, 200 mS On
Internal Reorder Tone
Continuous
480 Hz + 620
Hz
-27 dB
250 mS Off, 250 mS On
Internal Intercept Tone
Continuous
350 Hz + 440
Hz
-16
250 mS Off, 250 mS On
Internal Confirmation Tone
3
350 Hz + 440
Hz
-16 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Internal Hold Tone
Continuous
MOH
-
-
External Hold Tone
Continuous
BGM
-
-
Internal Audible Ring
(Ringback) Tone
Continuous
440 Hz + 480
Hz
-22 dB
1 Sec On, 3 Sec On
Override Tone
1
440 Hz
-16 dB
3 Sec On
Lock-out Tone
Continuous
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Clock Alarm Tone
Continuous
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS On, 100 mS Off, 100 mS
On, 700 mS Off
Background Music
Continuous
BGM
-
-
Door Chime 1
3
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Door Chime 2
3
Variable: 880 Hz at -10 dB for 200 mS, 880 Hz at -16 dB for 200
mS, 700 Hz at -10 dB for 300 mS, 700 Hz at -16 dB for 400 mS,
700 Hz at -22 dB for 600 mS, 500 mS quiet
Door Chime 3
3
Variable: 1050 Hz at -10 dB for 200 mS, 1050 Hz at -16 dB for 200
mS, 700 Hz at -10 dB for 300 mS, 700 Hz at -16 dB for 400 mS,
700 Hz at -22 dB for 600 mS, 500 mS quiet
Service Set Tone, Service Clear
Tone
3
350 Hz + 440
Hz
-16 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Talk Back Tone, Paging Tone,
Splash Tone 2
2
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Speaker Monitor Tone, Door
Relay Tone, Door Call Tone,
Splash Tone 1
1
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
Splash Tone 3
1
800 Hz
-13 dB
100 mS Off, 100 mS On
1 Second Signal Tone
1
800 Hz
-13 dB
1 Second On
36 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-7 System Tones
Tone
Repetitions
Frequency
Level
Pattern
Sensor Alarm Tone 1
Continuous
800 Hz
-13 dB
200 mS On, 200 mS Off
Sensor Alarm Tone 2
Continuous
800 Hz
-13 dB
500 mS On, 500 mS Off
Sensor Alarm Tone 3
Continuous
800 Hz
-13 dB
700 mS On, 700 mS Off
Internal Call Waiting Tone
1
440 Hz
-16 dB
200 mS On
Internal Executive Override
Tone
1
440 Hz
-16 dB
3 Seconds On
Conference Tone, Intrusion
Tone 2, Internal Special
Audible Tone
Continuous
External Dial Tone
Continuous
350 Hz + 440
Hz
-16 dB
Steady
External Audible Ring Tone
Continuous
440 Hz + 480
Hz
-16 dB
1 Second On, 3 Seconds Off
External Reorder Tone
Continuous
480 Hz + 620
Hz
-21 dB
250 mS Off, 250 mS On
External Busy Tone
Continuous
800 Hz
-13 dB
500 mS Off, 500 mS On
External Special Audible Ring
Tone
Continuous
Variable: 440 Hz + 480 Hz at -16 dB for 1 Second, 440 Hz at -16
dB for 200 mS, 3 Seconds Off
External Intercept Tone
Continuous
Variable: 440 Hz at -14 dB for 250 mS, 620 Hz at -14 dB for 250 mS
External Call Waiting Tone
1
440 Hz
-14 dB
200 mS On, then Off
External Executive Override
Tone
1
440 Hz
-14 dB
3 Seconds On, then Off
Variable: 440 Hz + 480 Hz at -22 dB for 1 Second, 440 Hz at -22
dB for 200 mS, 3 Seconds Off
Trunk Ring Tone Range 1
Combination of...
High: 1032 Hz + 865 Hz + 16 Hz
Med: 865 Hz + 416 Hz + 16 Hz
Low: 421 Hz + 360 Hz + 16 Hz
Selected in Program 0902 for
trunks and Program 1001 Item 2
for extensions
Trunk Ring Tone Range 2
Combination of...
High: 2667 Hz + 2000 Hz + 8 Hz
Med: 2000 Hz + 1600 Hz + 8 Hz
Low: 1455 Hz + 1185 Hz + 8 Hz
Selected in Program 0902 for
trunks and Program 1001 Item 2
for extensions
Trunk Ring Tone Range 3
Combination of...
High: 1778 Hz + 2286 Hz + 25 Hz
Med: 889 Hz + 711 Hz + 24 Hz
Low: 438 Hz + 360 Hz + 24 Hz
Selected in Program 0902 for
trunks and Program 1001 Item 2
for extensions
Trunk Ring Tone Range 4
Combination of...
High: 2462 Hz + 2286 Hz + 25 Hz
Med: 2000 Hz + 1882 Hz + 25 Hz
Low: 1524 Hz + 1455 Hz + 25 Hz
Selected in Program 0902 for
trunks and Program 1001 Item 2
for extensions
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 37
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-7 System Tones
Tone
Repetitions
Frequency
Level
Pattern
Extension Ring Tone Range
Combination of...
High: 800 Hz + 1032 Hz + 12 Hz
Med: 604 Hz + 865 Hz + 12 Hz
Low: 400 Hz + 640 Hz + 12 Hz
Selected in Program 1001 Item 3
for extensions
Sensor Ring Tone Range (1-3)
Combination of...
High: 800 Hz + 1000 Hz
Med: 800 Hz + 1000 Hz
Low: 800 Hz + 1000 Hz
Set in Program 0304 for alarm
sensors. (Pitch is identical, but
pattern is unique for ranges 1-3.)
38 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
You’ll see this display...
(Idle telephone)
Ext
Date and Time
(ext name)
CHECK
SET ABB:COMMON
You dial Service Code 854 to store a Group
Abbreviated Dialing number
ABB (bin)
(digits)
You are storing Abbreviated Dialing numbers,
where (bin) is the bin number and (digits) is the
current stored number (if any)
Time and Date
ABB:COMMON
You press CALL and DIAL to dial a Common
Abbreviated Dialing number
Time and Date
ABB:GROUP
(trk name)
(digits)
HH:MM:SS
(bin name)
You press CALL and DIAL to dial a Group
Abbreviated Dialing number
You place a call using Abbreviated Dialing
PREVIEW
ABB:COMMON or GROUP
You press DIAL to preview an Abbreviated Dialing
entry, where COMMON or GROUP displays
depending on the DIAL key setting
PREVIEW
You press DIAL and select a bin before outdialing
Abbreviated Dialing number, where (bin name) is
the programmed name, (bin) is the bin number and
(digits) is the stored number
(bin name)
ABB:(bin) (digits)
CHECK
ABB(xxxx)
CHECK
ABB (xxxx)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
You press CHECK and CALL1 to check extension
information, where (ext) is the extension number,
(ext name) is the extension name, PORT nn is the
port number and GP-nn is the extension group
You dial Service Code 853 to store a Common
Abbreviated Dialing number
SET ABB: GROUP
Account Codes
Your extension is idle and on hook
You press CHECK to check a function
CHECK (ext)
(ext name)
PORT nn GP-nn
Abbreviated Dialing
When...
(name)
(digits)
(trk name)
ENTER ACCOUNT CODE
You press CHECK and DIAL to check a stored
Abbreviated Dialing bin, where (xxxx) is GROUP or
COMMON depending on the DIAL key setup
You press CHECK, DIAL and dial a bin number to
check an Abbreviated Dialing entry, where (name) is
the bin name, (xxxx) is the bin type/number and
(digits) is the stored number
You place a call and the system has Forced Account
Codes enabled.
FEATURES 39
telemanuals.com
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
Alarm
You’ll see this display...
SET ALARM
1:ALARM1 2:ALARM2
When...
You dial 827 to set an alarm
SET n ALARM
DIAL TIME
You dial 827 to set an alarm, then dial 1 (to set
Alarm 1) or 2 (to set Alarm 2)
Ext
Date and Time
ALARM n
SET
n ALARM
Your extension is idle, after setting Alarm n (1 or 2)
You set an alarm time but do not hang up
Time
SET
n ALARM
ALARM n
Automated Attendant
CANCEL
You dial 827, 1 or 2 to select an alarm type then
9999 to cancel
HH:MM:SS
(digits)
You press CHECK, dial 827, then 1 or 2 to check
your alarm setting
Time and Date
LEAVE
(digits)
LEAVE NUM
Background Music
Barge In
C:2 E:3
(digits)
You dial Service Code 143 to scroll through, call or
erase numbers left on your display be the Automated
Attendant
Time and Date
B.G.M. ON
You dial Service Code 825 to turn Background
Music on
Time and Date
B.G.M. OFF
You dial Service Code 825 to turn Background
Music off
BREAK IN
(ext name) (ext name)
(trk name)
(ext name)
BREAK IN
BREAK IN
(ext name) (ext name)
(trk name)
(ext name)
40 FEATURES
An caller has left their number on your phone
BREAK IN
You have Barged-In (speech mode) on a co-worker’s
Intercom call
You have Barged-In (speech mode) on a co-worker’s
outside call
You have Barged-In (monitor mode) on a
co-worker’s Intercom call
You have Barged-In (monitor mode) on a
co-worker’s Intercom call
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
You’ll see this display...
When...
Call Forwarding
Time and Date
FWD-B/NA
(ext name)
Your extension is idle and you have previously
activated Call Forwarding when Busy/Not Answered
(Code *22). Name shows destination extension.
Time and Date
FWD IMME
(ext name)
Your extension is idle and you have previously
activated Call Forwarding Immediate (Service Code
*24). Name shows destination extension.
Time and Date
FWD-RNA
(ext name)
Your extension is idle and you have previously
activated Call Forwarding when Unanswered (Service
Code *26). Name shows destination extension.
Time and Date
FWD-BOTH
(name)
Your extension is idle and you have previously
activated Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (Service
Code *27). Name shows destination extension.
FWD Busy/no answer
Extension No?
You lift the handset and dial *22 for Call Forwarding
when Busy
FWD Immediate
Extension No?
You lift the handset and dial *24 for Call Forwarding
Immediate
FWD No answer
Extension No?
You lift the handset and dial *26 for Call Forwarding
when Unanswered
FWD Both Ring
Extension No?
You lift the handset and dial Service Code *27 to
enable Call Forwarding with Both Ringing
CALL FWD BUSY
1:SET 0:CANCEL
You dial Service Code *27 to enable Call
Forwarding when Busy
CALL FWD NO ANS
1:SET 0:CANCEL
You dial Service Code *26 to enable Call
Forwarding when Unanswered
CALL FWD NO ANS
FWD NO ANS
(ext name)
SET FWD
1:SET 0:CANCEL
SET FWD
FWD
You dial Service Code *24 to enable Call
Forwarding Immediate
(ext name)
ICM DIAL
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
CFW
You dial Service Code *24 to enable Call
Forwarding Immediate but do not hang up
You dial 1 to set Call Forwarding. System asks you
to enter the destination extension number.
CANCEL
Call Forwarding
Off-Premise
You dial Service Code *26 to enable Call
Forwarding when Unanswered but don’t hang up
Time and Date
OFF-PREMISE
You dial a Call Forwarding Service Code and 0 to
cancel Call Forwarding
You dial Service Code *46, a trunk access code and
anoutside phone number to enable Call Forwarding
Off-Premise
FEATURES 41
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
Call Forwarding with Follow
Me
You’ll see this display...
When...
SET FOLLOW ME
1:SET 0:CANCEL
You dial Service Code *23 to dial Call Forward with
Follow Me
SET FOLLOW ME
ICM DIAL
You dial 1 to set Call Forward with Follow Me (after
dialing Service Code *23)
CANCEL FOLLW ME
ICM DIAL
0:ALL CLR
SET FOLLOW ME
You dial 0 to cancel Call Forward with Follow Me
(after dialing Service Code *23)
You have canceled Call Forwarding with Follow Me
CANCEL
Call Timer
Call Waiting/Camp On
Call Waiting/Camp On and
Callback
SET FOLLOW ME
FLW ME <<
(ext name)
You enable Call Forwarding with Follow Me, where
(ext name) is extension you want to intercept
Time and Date
FLW ME >>
(ext name)
An extension is having its calls intercepted by Call
Forwarding with Follow Me, where (ext name) is
intercepting extension
HH:MM:SS
(digits)
You place an outside can and the Call Timer starts
(HH:MM:SS)
Time and Date
CAMP-ON
(ext name)
You have dialed 2 to camp-on to a busy extension.
Name shows the destination extension.
Time and Date
CAMP CANCEL
You have dialed 870 to cancel a Camp-On or Call
Waiting request.
(trk name)
Callback
Time and Date
CALL-BACK
(ext name)
Extension at which you left a Callback (shown in the
name field) is calling you back
Caller ID
Time and Date
NO CALLER INFO
You try to display the Caller ID data for an incoming
call and none is provided by telco
Time and Date
UNAVAILABLE INFO
You try to display the Caller ID data for an incoming
call and the caller has blocked it
Time and Date
OUT-OF-STATE
You try to display the Caller ID data for an incoming
call that was placed from an area that did not have
Caller ID service
Time and Date
CHG:2, DEL:3, NEW:6
You edit, delete or add entries to the Caller ID Table
Time and Date
PERSONAL:7 CO:2
You initiate the automatic storing of Caller ID
information for your active call
42 FEATURES
ENTER NEW NO. + HOLD
You press the Edit Caller ID key and dial 6 to enter a
new number into the Caller ID Table
ENTER NAME + HOLD
You press the Edit Caller ID key and dial 9 to enter a
new nme into the Caller ID Table
Time and Date
CHG. BY NAME?:Y/N
You press the Edit Caller ID key and dial 2 to change
an entry in the Caller ID Table
Time and Date
DEL. BY NAME?:Y/N
You press the Edit Caller ID key and dial 3 to delete
an entry from the Caller ID Table
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
Caller ID
You’ll see this display...
NO MATCH
You search the Caller ID Table for a name or number
match and no matches were found
TABLE IS FULL
You try to automatically store the Caller ID
information for your call and the Caller ID Table is
full
(trk name)
(Incoming Number)
You display the Caller ID information for a Single
Message Format incoming call before you answer it
(Incoming Number)
(Incoming Name)
You display the Caller ID information for a Multiple
Message Format incoming call before you answer it
(trk name)
(HH:MM:SS)
(Incoming Number)
Central Office Calls
When...
Answer a Single Message Format Caller ID call
(Incoming Number) HH:MM:SS
(Incoming Name
Answer a Multiple Message Format Caller ID call
MISSED CALL
You press a CALL key and dial 148 to see if you
missed any Caller ID calls while you were away
from your phone
(trk name)
BUSY
You have tried to place a call over a busy trunk
(trk name)
RINGING
A trunk call is ringing your extension.
(trk name)
(trk name)
ANSWERED
You have seized a trunk for an outside call
HH:MM:SS
Conference
You have answered an incoming trunk call (where
nn:nn:nn indicates the Call Timer)
CONF
You press the Conference key to initiate a Conference
CONF
(name)
You have set up a Conference, where (name) is
either an extension or trunk name
ICM DIAL
(name)
(name)
Dial Number Preview
PREVIEW DIAL
DIAL (digits)
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Direct Station Selection
(DSS) Console
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
You use Dial Number Preview to preview your call
before dialing it out
Time and Date
SET KEY TOUCH TN
You dial Service Code 824 to enable Dial Pad
Confirmation Tone
Time and Date
CANCEL KEY TOUCH TN
You dial Service Code 824 to cancel Dial Pad
Confirmation Tone
Date and Time
OFF DUTY
You press ALT to activate Alternate Answering
FEATURES 43
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
Do Not Disturb
You’ll see this display...
When...
Time and Date
DND INTERCOM
You press DND and dial 2 to activate DND for
Intercom and transferred trunks
Time and Date
DND ALL
You press DND and dial 3 to activate DND for all
calls
Time and Date
DND TRF
You press DND and dial 4 to activate DND for
incoming Call Forwards
SET DND
You press DND to start DND activation procedure
SET DND
You press DND and dial 0 to cancel Do Not Disturb
CANCEL
Time and Date
DND EXTERNAL
Door Box
Group Call Pickup
You press DND and dial 1 to activate DND for
incoming trunk calls
Time and Date
CALL <<<
DOOR-n
You are receiving chimes from Door Box n
Time and Date
TALKING TO
DOOR-n
You dial Service Code 802 and call a Door Box,
where n is the Door Box number
Time and Date
CALL P/U
(ext name)
You have intercepted a call using Group Call Pickup
(trk name)
CALL P/U
You use Group Call Pickup to intercept a call ringing
a phone in a pickup group
(HH:MM:SS)
(ext name)
Group Listen
Time and Date
GROUP LISTEN
You press SPK while on a handset call to activate
Group Listen
Headset Operation
Time and Date
SET HEADSET MODE
You dial Service Code 834 to enable the Headset
mode
Time and Date
CANCEL HEADSET MODE
You dial Service Code 834 to disable the Headset
mode
Time and Date
(ext name)
You place an Intercom call on Hold, where (ext name)
is the name of the extension you placed on Hold
Time and Date
GROUP HOLD
(ext name)
You dial Service Code 832 to place an Intercom call
on Group Hold, where (ext name) is the name of
your Intercom caller
Hold
HOLD
(trk name)
GROUP HOLD
44 FEATURES
You dial Service Code 832 to place your trunk call
on Group Hold
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
You’ll see this display...
Hold
HOLD
Time and Date
(ext name)
(ext name)
HLD RCALL
A call you have left on Hold too long is recalling
your extension
(trk name)
HOLD
Last Number Redial
You place a call on Hold
Time and Date
TALKING TO
(ext name)
You have placed an Intercom call to an extension in
DND
Time and Date
CALLING
(ext name)
You have placed an Intercom call that has either
voice-announced or is ringing (but the user has not
lifted the handset)
Time and Date
CALL FROM(name)
An Intercom call has voice-announced or is ringing
your extension
Time and Date
HANG UP
Your Intercom caller has hung up - but you are still
off-hook
Time and Date
BUSY(ext name)
You have placed an Intercom call to a busy extension
CHECK ABANDON CALL
(nnn)
(ext name)
(trk name)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
You press CHECK and CALL2 to check the
Intercom Abandoned Call Display, where (nnn) is
the abandoned extension and (ext name) is that
extension’s name
REDIAL
(digits)
Last Number Redial is outdialing the last number
you dialed
CHECK
REDIAL
(digits)
You press CHECK and LND to check the stored
Last Number Redial entry, where (digits) is the
stored entry
PREVIEW
REDIAL
(digits)
You press LND to check your stored Last Number
Redial entry
Time and Date
CLEAR REDIAL
Loop Keys
Your extension is busy on an Intercom call
Time and Date
(ext name)
DND
Intercom Abandoned Call
Display
You place an Intercom call on Hold, where (ext
name) is the name of your Intercom caller
An Intercom call you left on Hold too long recalls
your extension, where (ext name) is the call you left
on Hold
(trk name)
HOLD RECALL
Intercom
When...
(trk name)
HH:MM:SS
WAITING – LOOP KEY
You dial Service Code 876 to clear the Last Number
redial entry
You answer a loop key and there is another call
waiting behind the call you answered
FEATURES 45
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
You’ll see this display...
MEMO DIAL
(digits)
Memo Dial
CHECK
LINE KEY (nn)
MEMO DIAL
MEMO DIAL
(digits)
Message Waiting
Time and Date
MSG>>>
(ext name)
Time and Date
CANCEL MESSAGE
Music on Hold
SET HOLD TONE
0:TN-0
1:TN-1
Off Hook Signaling
One-Touch Calling
2:TN-2
You press the Memo Dial key while on hook to
check the stored number
You dialed Service Code *0 and left a message at the
extension shown in (ext name)
You dial Service Code 881 and the password
(normally 0000) to set the MOH tone
ENTER NAME
You dial Service Code 6 to program your name
Time and Date
2nd VOICE CALL
You dial Service Code 892 to have incoming off
hook signals voice-announce
Time and Date
2nd SIGNALING
You dial Service Code 893 to have incoming off
hook signals ring
(trk name)
ONE TOUCHnn (digits)
You press a One-Touch Key after seizing a trunk to
outdial the number stored under the key, where nn is
the One-Touch Key number
KEY PROG
You dial Service Code 855 to program a One-Touch
Key
ONE TOUCH
(name)
(digits)
CHECK DSSnn
(digits)
KEY PROG
CHECK
You program a One-Touch Key by dialing Service
Code 855 and pressing the One-Touch Key, where
(digits) displays current programming
You press CHECK and a One-Touch Key to check
the stored function, where nn is the key number and
(digits) is the stored code
FTR KEY
You dial Service Code 852 to program One-Touch
Serial Operations
LINE KEY nn
FEATURE KEYS
You press CHECK and the Serial Operations key,
where nn is the programmable key number
CHECK DSSnn
(key) (key) etc.
FTR KEY
Time and Date
FTR KEY
46 FEATURES
You press CHECK and the Memo Dial key
You set the MOH tone, where n is the MOH tone
number (0-2)
KEY nn
One-Touch Serial Operation
You press the Memo Dial key to check the Memo
Dial entry before dialing it out
You dialed 871 to cancel a message you left at
another extension
SET HOLD TONE
SET nTONE
Name Storing
When...
You press a One-Touch Key twice to check the
stored Serial Operations, where nn is the key number
and (key) is the stored key function
You press the Serial Operations key to begin using
One-Touch Serial Operations
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
Paging, External
You’ll see this display...
Time and Date
PAGE EXT ALL
You make an All Call External Page
Time and Date
PAGE EXT
GROUP (nn)
Time and Date
Programmable Function
Keys
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Time and Date
GROUP CALL
(name)
Time and Date
GROUP CALL
(ext name)
KEY PROGRAM
You make an External Zone Page, where (nn) is the
external zone number
You dial 801 to access an Internal Paging Zone or
803 for an External Paging Zone
ZONE
Paging, Internal
When...
KEY (nn)
(function)
You dial 801 and an internal zone number, where
(name) is the Internal Paging Zone name
Another extension makes an Internal Page to your
paging zone, where (ext name) is the name of the
extension that initiated the page
You press a function key after dialing Service Code
851, where (function) is the currently programmed
function, as follows:
For this key function . . .
You see this display . . .
1004
PAGE GROUP 0
1005
PAGE EXT ALL
1006
PAGE GROUP ICM 0
1007
CALL PICK UP
1008
OTHER GROUP PICK UP
1009
GROUP PICK UP
1010
MEET ME PAGE
1011
LINE ACCESS
1012
LINE GRP ACCESS 0
1014
SAVED NUMBER REDIAL
1015
MEMO DIALING
1016
CONFERENCE
1017
MEET ME CONF
1018
OVERRIDE (384i prior to 3.06.02 and 124i prior to
2.13 Base or 2.18 EXCPRU)
OFF-HOOK SIGNALING
1019
BREAK IN
1020
CAMP ON
FEATURES 47
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
You’ll see this display...
When...
Programmable Function
Keys
For this key function . . .
You see this display . . .
1021
STEP CALL
1022
DND/FWD OVERRIDE
1023
MESSAGE WAITING
1025
ROOM MONITOR
1026
TRANS MIT CUT OFF
1027
TEXT MESSAGE
1028
CHANGE HEADSET MODE
1029
DATA
1031
BUZZER
1032
BOSS CALL FORWARD
1033
PARK HOLD 00
1034
SERIES OPERATION
1035
SERIES CALL
1036
ICM
1037
ABB COMMON DIAL
1038
ABB GROUP DIAL
1039
SET DAY
1040
SET NIGHT#1
1041
SET NIGHT #2
1042
SET BREAK
1043
HOLD
1044
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
1045
TELEMARKETING DIAL
1056
REV. VOICE OVER
1057
VOICE OVER
1058
DSS ICM
1059
DATA
1060
CONVERSATION RECORD
1075
REPEAT DIAL
1080
CALL FORWARD TO STA.
1081
CALL FORWARD TO DEV.
48 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
Programmable Function
Keys
Park
You’ll see this display...
KEY PROGRAM
When...
You dial Service Code 851 to program your function
keys
KEY PROGRAM
KEY (nn)
(function)
You press a function key after dialing Service Code
851, where (function) is the currently programmed
function
CHECKLINE
KEY nn
(function)
You press CHECK and a function key while on
hook, where (function) is the stored function
(trk name)
HOLD
PARK
PARK HOLD
You Park a call (before you hang up)
You dial Service Code *6 to Park a call
PARK No DIAL
ANS HOLD
You dial Service Code #6 to pick up a parked call
PARK No DIAL
Privacy (Data)
Time and Date
DATA PRIVACY
Repeat Redial
PREVIEW
CANCEL REPEAT DIAL
(trk name)
REPEAT DIAL (digits)
(trk name)
REPEAT DIAL
Reverse Voice Over
Room Monitor
REV VO TO:
You cancel Repeat Redial
Repeat Redial is automatically outdialing
You have activated Repeat Redial but have not hung up
(ext name)
You press your Reverse Voice Over key to place a
private call to your co-worker
REV V.O. DENIED
You press your Reverse Voice Over key to call your
co-worker, but the system has no CDTU PCB
circuit available
ROOM MONITOR
ICM DIAL
You press the Room Monitor key
Time and Date
MONITOR <<
(ext name)
Time and Date
MONITORED >>
Save Number Dialed
You press the Data Privacy key to activate Data
Privacy
(trk name)
NUMBER SAVED
(trk name)
You activate Room Monitor at the initiating
extension, where (ext name) is the name of the
extension being monitored
You activate Room Monitor at the extension to be
monitored
You saved the number you just dialed
Save is outdialing your saved number
SAVED (digits)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
PREVIEW SAVED NUMBER
(digits)
While on hook, you pressed your Save Number
Dialed key to preview your stored number
CHECK
LINE KEY nn
SAVE NUMBER REDIAL
You press CHECK and the Save Number Dialed key
while on hook
FEATURES 49
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
You’ll see this display...
When...
Secretary Call Pickup
Time and Date
BOSS FWD <<
(ext name)
You have activated Secretary Call Pickup for the
indicated extension
Time and Date
CANCEL FWD
(ext name)
You have canceled Secretary Call Pickup for the
indicated extension
CHECK
SECR ANS
Selectable Display
Messaging
Selectable Ring Tones
Serial Call
Transfer
Trunk Queuing
LINE KEYnn
(ext name)
TEXT MESSAGE
DIAL MESSAGE No.
You dialed Service Code *43 to choose a Selectable
Display Message
SET INCOM RING
1:INT
2:EXT
You dial Service Code 820 to set Selectable Ring
Tones
SET INT INCOM RING
1:(H) 2:(M) 3:(L)
You dial Service Code 820 plus 1 to set Intercom
Selectable Ring Tones
SET EXT INCOM RING
1:(H) 2:(M) 3:(L)
You dial Service Code 820 plus 2 to set trunk
Selectable Ring Tones
SET (type) INCOM RING
(n) SET
You set the incoming ring type, where (type) is INT
or EXT and n is the range (H, M or L)
CONFIRM INCOM RING
1:INT 2:EXT
You dial Service Code 811 to listen to your
Selectable Ring Tone Settings
CONFIRM INT INCOM
1:H 2:M 3:L
You dial Service Code 811 plus 1 to listen to the
Intercom ring settings
CONFIRM EXT INCOM
1:H 2:M 3:L + TN1-4
You dial Service Code 811 plus 2 to listen to the
trunk ring settings
(trk name)
WAIT TRF
(ext name)
You press the Serial Call key to set up a Serial Call,
where (trk name) is the trunk transferred and (ext
name) is destination extension
(trk name)
TRANSFER<<
(ext name)
A transferred trunk is ringing your phone, where (trk
name) is the trunk’s name and (ext name) is the
name of the extension that transferred the call
(trk name)
TRF RCALL
(ext name)
A trunk you transferred is recalling your phone,
where (trk name) is the recalling trunk and (ext
name) is extension from which the call is recalling
(trk name)
CALL BACK
Time and Date
CAMP LINE
50 FEATURES
You press CHECK and the Secretary Call Pickup
key while on hook.
The trunk you queued for is calling you back
You have queued for a busy trunk
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
Voice Announce Unit
You’ll see this display...
VAU MESSAGE CONTROL
L:5
R:7
E:3 ?
PLAY VAU MSG
MESSAGE No
You press CALL and dial 116 to record, listen to or
erase a VAU message
You press CALL, dial 116 then 5 to listen to a
recorded VAU message
RECORD VAU MSG
MESSAGE No.
You press CALL, dial 116 then 7 to record a VAU
message
ERASE VAU MSG
MESSAGE No.
You press CALL, dial 116 then 3 to erase a VAU
message
GENERAL MESSAGE CONTROL
L:5
R:7 E:3
?
PLAY GENERAL MESSAGE
RECORD GENERAL MSG
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
When...
You press CALL and dial 112 to record, listen to or
erase the General Message
You press CALL, dial 112 then 5 to listen to the
General Message
You press CALL, dial 112 then 7 to record the
General Message
FEATURES 51
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
You’ll see this display...
When...
Voice Announce Unit
ERASE GENERAL MESSAGE
You press CALL, dial 112 then 3 to erase the
General Message
RECORD PERSONAL MSG
You press CALL and dial *47 to record your
Personal Greeting (if none is currently recorded)
GENERAL MESSAGE CONTROL
L:5
R:7 E:3
?
You press CALL and dial *47 if you have already
recorded a Personal Greeting
PLAY PERSONAL MSG
You press CALL, dial *47 then 5 to listen to your
Personal Greeting
RECORD PERSONAL MSG
You press CALL, dial *47 then 7 to rerecord your
Personal Greeting
ERASE PERSONAL MSG
Voice Mail
You press CALL, dial *47 then 3 to erase your
Personal Greeting
Date and Time
VAU-BUSY
(ext name)
You enable Personal Greeting to forward calls to (ext
name) when your extension is busy
Date and Time
VAU-NA
(ext name)
You Enable Personal Greeting to forward calls to
(ext name) when your extension is not answered
Date and Time
VAU-BY/NA
(ext name)
You enable Personal Greeting to forward calls to (ext
name) when your extension is busy or not answered
Date and Time
VAU-IMM
(ext name)
You enable Personal Greeting to forward all your
calls immediately to (ext name)
CHECK (ext name) STA nnn
PORT-nnn GP-nn
You dial 4 while on hook to listen to your
extension’s name
Date and Time
PARK AND PAGE
You have activated Park and Page at your extension
Date and Time
LEAVE NUM
npa-nnx-xxxx
An outside caller dialing through the VAU
Automated Attendant has left their number on your
phone for a recall
SET A.M.E. FWD
1:ALL 2:LINE 0:CLR
You press your Personal Answering Machine
Emulation key
SET A.M.E. FWD
FWD ALL
VX
Press your Answer Machine Emulation key and dial
1 to forward all calls
SET A.M.E. FWD
FWD LINE
VX
Press your Answer Machine Emulation key and dial
2 to forward only trunk calls
CANCEL
Press your Answer Machine Emulation key and dial
0 to cancel forwarding
SET A.M.E. FWD
Date and Time
FWD
Voice Over
52 FEATURES
VOICE OVER DENIED
VX
You enable Answer Machine Emulation modes 1 or
2 and wait several seconds
Your Voice Over to a busy co-worker cannot go
through
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-8 Multibutton Telephone Displays
With this feature...
Voice Over
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
You’ll see this display...
When...
V.O. TO:
(ext name)
You have places a Voice Over to (ext name)
V.O. FROM
(ext name)
You have received a Voice from (ext name)
FEATURES 53
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-9 System Ring Rates
SECONDS
0
1
2
3
Ringback
ICM Ring
Call 2
Callback
Alarm
External
Alarm 1
External
Alarm 2
External
Alarm 3
External
Alarm 4
Call 4
92000 - 142
54 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Table 1-10 System Flash Rates
Keyset
SECONDS
0
1
2
Fast Flash
300 IPM
Slow Flash
60 IPM
Exclusive Hold
120 IPM
Hold
120 IPM
Flutter
180 IPM
92000 - 141
DSS Console
SECONDS
0
1
2
2 (Fast Flash)
3 (Wink Off)
120 IPM
4 (Double Wink On,
then Off)
120 IPM
5 (Slow Flash)
60 IPM
6 (Double Wink Off,
then On)
60 IPM
7 (Double Wink On,
then Off)
60 IPM
920 - 141e
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 55
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Soft Keys guide you through your
features. While your phone is
idle, the Soft Keys are normal
One Touch Keys.
Alphanumeric
Display
92 - 155 D A
CHECK
CLEAR
SERVICE
RINGING
Ringer/Splash Tone
Volume Control
[DIRECTORY]
[MENU]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
MW
FLASH
20
CALL 1
1
2
3
DIAL
4
5
6
LND
CALL 2
7
8
9
MIC
DND
0
#
SPK
HOLD
CONF (TRF)
VOLUME
Programmable
Function Keys
Abbreviated
Dialing
Dual Line
Appearance Keys
Last Number
Redial
Do Not Disturb
Microphone Cutoff
Speakerphone
Message
Waiting Lamp
Microphone
Handsfree,
Handset,
Page and BGM
Volume Control
Figure 1-1, SUPER DISPLAY TELEPHONE (Page 1 of 2)
(926 Series Shown)
56 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Alphanumeric
Display
9200 - 109
DIGITAL
CHECK
CLEAR
One Touch
Keys
One Touch
Keys
Ringer/Splash
Tone Volume
Control
Message
Waiting
Lamp
Microphone
Cutoff
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Programmable
Function Keys
Abbreviated Dialing
MW
1
2
MIC
DND
4
5
GHI
7
Do Not Disturb
8
*
Flash
9
OPER
CL 1
FLSH
CL 2
LND
SPK
MNO
TUV
0
DC
DEF
6
JKL
PRS
VOL
3
ABC
WXY
#
CONF
(TRFR)
Dual Line
Appearance Keys
Speakerphone
HOLD
Last Number Redial
Handsfree, Handset,
Page and BGM Volume Control
Figure 1-1, SUPER DISPLAY TELEPHONE (Page 2 of 2)
(920/922 Series Shown)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 57
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Alphanumeric
Display
92 - 199AA
CLEAR
CHECK
Ringer/Splash
Tone
Volume Control
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
MW
FLASH
1
2
3
DIAL
CALL 1
CALL 2
4
5
6
LND
7
8
9
MIC
DND
0
#
SPK
HOLD
CONF (TRF)
VOLUME
One Touch
Keys
Programmable
Function Keys
Abbreviated
Dialing
Dual Line
Appearance Keys
Last Number
Redial
Do Not Disturb
Microphone Cutoff
Speakerphone
Message
Waiting Lamp
Microphone
Handsfree,
Handset,
Page and BGM
Volume Control
Figure 1-2, MULTIBUTTON TELEPHONE (Page 1 of 2)
(926 Series Shown)
58 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
Alphanumeric
Display
9200 - 108
DIGITAL
CLEAR
CHECK
Ringer/Splash
Tone Volume
Control
Message
Waiting
Lamp
Microphone
Cutoff
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
One Touch
Keys
Programmable
Function Keys
Abbreviated Dialing
MW
1
2
MIC
DND
4
5
GHI
7
Do Not Disturb
8
*
Flash
9
OPER
CL 1
FLSH
CL 2
LND
SPK
MNO
TUV
0
DC
DEF
6
JKL
PRS
VOL
3
ABC
WXY
#
CONF
(TRFR)
Dual Line
Appearance Keys
Speakerphone
HOLD
Last Number Redial
Handsfree, Handset,
Page and BGM Volume Control
Figure 1-2, MULTIBUTTON TELEPHONE (Page 2 of 2)
(920/922 Series Shown)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 59
Introducing the Features
Charts and Illustrations
9200 - 110
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
ALT.
NIGHT
DAY
BREAK
NITE2
PAGE
GROUP
External
Page
Alternate
Answering Key
Night
Service Keys
DOOR
EXT.1
EXT.2
Door
Boxes
Internal
Page
2nd 100
Extensions
(DLS on 124i)
1st 100
Extensions
Figure 1-3, DSS CONSOLE
60 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Abbreviated Dialing
Features ADialing
Abbreviated
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
-
-
Available
360 fixed bins available. Common
bins are 000-199. Group bins are
200-359. Each of the eight
Abbreviated Dialing Groups has 20
group bins.
DSS Console Chaining requires
Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18.
system software or higher. You can
only chain to stored Group
Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
Storing a Flash requires Base 2.13
and EXCPRU 2.18 system software
or higher.
Modifying the outgoing dial tone
detection criteria requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Storing a bin number with a
Programmable Function Key requires
system software Base and EXCPRU
4.02 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available
1990 bins available (0000-1990) for
Common and Group Abbreviated
Dialing. Up to 32 Abbreviated
Dialing Groups available.
-
DSS Console Chaining requires
system software 3.06.14 or higher.
-
Storing a Flash requires system
software 3.06.14 or higher.
-
Modifying the outgoing dial tone
detection criteria is available in all
versions.
Storing a bin number with a
Programmable Function Key
requires system software 3.07.10 or
higher.
-
Abbreviated Dialing gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. This saves time, for example, when calling a client with whom they deal often. Instead of dialing a long telephone number, the extension user just dials the Abbreviated Dialing code.
There are three types of Abbreviated Dialing: Common, Group and Personal. All co-workers within the
same Tenant Group can share the Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers. All co-worker’s in the same Abbreviated Dialing Group can share the Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. Personal Abbreviated Dialing
numbers are available only at a user’s own extension. To set up Personal Abbreviated Dialing, refer to the
"One-Touch Calling" feature.
The 384i system has 1990 Abbreviated Dialing bins that you can allocate between Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing. Each 384i Tenant Group can have up to 32 Abbreviated Dialing Groups. The 124i system has 360
Abbreviated Dialing bins. Common Abbreviated Dialing bins are 000-199. Group bins are 200-359 (with 20
bins in each of the eight Abbreviated Dialing Groups).
Each Abbreviated Dialing bin can store a number up to 24 digits long.
When placing an Abbreviated Dialing call, the system normally routes the call through Trunk Group Routing or
ARS (whichever is enabled). Or, the user can preselect a specific trunk for the call. In addition, the system can
optionally force Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers to route over a specific Trunk Group. User preselection
always overrides the system routing.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 61
Features A
Abbreviated Dialing
Description (Cont’d)
DSS Console Chaining
DSS Console chaining allows an extension user with a DSS Console to chain to an Abbreviated Dialing number
stored under a DSS Console key. The stored number dials out (chains) to the intial call. This can, for example, simplify dialing when calling a company with an Automated Attendant. You can program the bin for the company number under one DSS Console key (e.g., #200) and the client’s extension number under the other (e.g., #201). The DSS
Console user presses the first key to call the company, waits for the Automated Attendant to answer, then presses the
second key to call the client (extension 400). See Programming below for additional details.
The DSS Console user can also chain to an Abbreviated Dialing number dialed manually, from a Programmable
Function Key or a One-Touch Key.
Storing a Flash
To enhance compatibility with connected Centrex and PBX lines, an Abbreviated Dialing bin can have a stored
Flash command. For example, storing 9 Flash 926 5400 will cause the system to dial 9, flash the line and then
dial 926 5400. The Flash can be stored by the user from their telephone or by the system administrator during
system programming.
Using a Programmable Function Key
To streamline frequently-called numbers, an Abbreviated Dialing Programmable Function Key can also store an
Abbreviated Dialing bin number. When the extension user presses the key, the phone automatically dials out the
stored number. This provides true one-touch calling via a phone’s function keys.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
•
Available. There are no Group Abbreviated Dialing bins assigned in 384i.
62 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Abbreviated Dialing
Programming
Start
In Program
0116, check
items 11-32.
Yes
Do you want to modify the
ougoing Abbreviated Dialing
call dial tone detection
criteria?
No
In Program
0401 Item 15,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 18,
enter 0.
In Program
0406 Item 19,
enter 0.
In Program
0406 Item
20, enter 0.
Group
Should extensions' DC
keys be for Common
or Group Abbreviated
Dialing?
Common
No
Should extensions be
allowed to store
Abbreviated Dialing
entries?
Yes
No
Should extensions be
allowed to dial Common
Abbreviated Dialing
numbers?
No
Should extensions be
allowed to dial Group
Abbreviated Dialing
numbers?
In Program 1005, assign
a Class of Service to an
extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Yes
Yes
In Program
0401 Item 15,
enter 0.
In Program
0406 Item 18,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 19,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 20,
enter 1.
Go to
programming
flowchart on the
following page.
FEATURES 63
Features A
Abbreviated Dialing
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
The 384i system has 1990 bins
that you can allocate between
all tenants for Common and
Group Abbreviated dialing.
In 0601, remove all bin
assignments for Common
Abbreviated Dialing.
No
In 0602, remove all bin
assignments for Group
Abbreviated Dialing.
No
In 384i, does the system
use Common Abbreviated
Dialing? (Skip this decision
for 124i.)
Does the system use
Group Abbreviated
Dialing? (Skip this
decision for 124i.)
Yes
In 0601, assign bins
for Common
Abbreviated Dialing.
In 0602, allocate bins for
Group Abbreviated
dialing.
Yes
In 1023, assign extensions
to Abbreviated Dialing
Groups.
Do you want to
assign names to
Abbreviated
Dialing bins?
The bin's address displays at a keyset
when you are entering the Common
Abbreviated Dialing number.
In 0604, for bin's
address enter 0.
ARS/Trunk
Group Routing
In 0603, enter names for
the Common and Group
Abbreviated Dialing bins.
Yes
No
Should Common
Abbreviated Dialing bin
use ARS/Trunk Group
Routing or a specific
Trunk Group?
Should users have onebutton dialing for
Common and Group
Abbreviated Dialing?
Trunk
Group
Yes
In 0604, for bin's
address enter Trunk
Group number (1-128
in 384i, 1-16 in 124i).
In 1006, assign
Programmable Keys for
Common (code 1037) and
Group (code 1038)
Abbreviated Dialing.
No
Continued
on the
next page.
64 FEATURES
In 384i 3.07.10 or higher, you can
store the bin number with the key
code. Do not store bin 0, 00 or 000.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Abbreviated Dialing
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Stop
No
Do you want to set
up DSS Console
Chaining?
Yes
In 0601, make sure
Common Abbreviated
Dialing uses 2-digit bin
numbers (100 bins total).
In 1103, assign #2
followed by a 2-digit bin
number to a DSS
Console key.
Common
Do you want DSS
Console Chaining for
Common or Group
Abbreviated Dialing?
To use chaining:
1. Place the first call.
2. Press the DSS Console
key to chain to the stored
number.
Group
In 0602, make sure
Group Abbreviated
Dialing uses 2-digit bin
numbers (100 bins total).
In 1103, assign #4
followed by a 2-digit bin
number to a DSS
Console key.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 65
Features A
Abbreviated Dialing
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0116 - Tone Detection Setup, Items 11-32
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
If required, modify the criteria for dial tone detection for outgoing Abbreviated Dialing calls. This capability requires system software version 3.04 or higher.
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 15: Abbreviated Dialing DIAL Key Control
Assign the extensions’ DIAL key for either Common (0) or Group (1) Abbreviated Dialing.
0406 - COS Options, Item 18: Storing Abbreviated Dialing Entries
In an extension’s COS, allow (1) or prevent (0) the storing of Abbreviated Dialing entries (codes 853 and 854).
0406 - COS Options, Item 19: Common Abbreviated Dialing
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) Common Abbreviated Dialing.
0406 - COS Options, Item 20: Group Abbreviated Dialing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Group Abbreviated Dialing.
(384i Only) 0601 - Common Abbreviated Dialing Bins
Designate the bins the system will use for Common Abbreviated Dialing.
(384i Only) 0602 - Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins
Designate the bins the system will use for Group Abbreviated Dialing.
0603 - Entering Abbreviated Dialing Numbers and Names
Enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers and names.
0604 - Common Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group
For each Common Abbreviated Dialing number, enter the routing option. To use ARS or Trunk Group
Routing, enter 0. To use a specific Trunk Group, enter the group number (1-128 in 384i, 1-16 in 124i).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Common Abbreviated Dialing (code 1037) or Group Abbreviated Dialing (code
1038). If storing a bin number along with the code (384i system software version 3.07.10 or higher), do not
store 0, 00 or 000.
1023 - Abbreviated Dialing Groups
For Group Abbreviated Dialing, assign extensions to Abbreviated Dialing groups (1-9 or 01-32 in 384i, 18 in 124i).
1103 - DSS Console Key Assignment
For DSS Console Chaining, assign an Abbreviated Dialing Service Code (#2 or #4) plus a two-digit bin
number to a DSS Console key.
Related Features
Account Codes
Abbreviated Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes.
Automatic Route Selection
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects.
Central Office Calls, Placing
A user can implement Abbreviated Dialing only if their extension has outgoing access to trunks.
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
One-Touch Calling
An extension can have a One-Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing operation.
PBX Compatibility
If you enter a PBX trunk access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin, the system automatically inserts a
pause after the bin.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Abbreviated Dialing operation.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones can only dial Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
Tenant Service
Each tenant can have their own set of Abbreviated Dialing bins, or tenants may optionally share bins.
66 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Abbreviated Dialing
Related Features (Cont’d)
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction may prevent a user from using a stored Abbreviated Dialing number.
Trunk Group Routing
Unless a user preselects a trunk, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk Abbreviated Dialing uses for
trunk calls.
Operation
To store an Abbreviated Dialing number:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 853 (for common) or 854 (for group).
3.
Dial common (000-999) or group storage code (00-99).
Initially, there are 1000 Common Abbreviated Dialing codes (numbered 000 to 999). There are
Group Abbreviated Dialing codes only if you define them in programming.
4.
Dial telephone number you want to store (up to 24 digits).
Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. To enter a pause, press MIC. To store a Flash, press FLASH.
5.
Press HOLD.
6.
Enter the name associated with the Abbreviated Dialing number.
When entering a letter, press DND to toggle between upper and lower case.
When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as
shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the
first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to
enter a C, press DSS1 three times.
DSS1 = A-D
DSS2 = E-H
DSS3 = I-L
DSS4 = M-P
DSS5 = Q-T
DSS6 = U-Z
DSS7 = -- (hyphen)
DSS8 = - (space)
DSS9 = Extended ASCII
characters
DSS10 = Punctuation marks
CHECK saves text entry after
you select it.
Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and *
CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e.,
backspaces over previous
entries)
Note:
You don’t have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after
your last entry.
7.
8.
Press HOLD.
Press SPK to hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 67
Features A
Abbreviated Dialing
Operation (Cont’d)
To dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing number:
9.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
10.
Dial #2
OR
Press DIAL key.
OR
Press Common Abbreviated Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1037).
To preselect, press a line key in step 1 (instead of CALL) before pressing the DIAL or Abbreviated Dialing key)
11.
Dial Common Abbreviated Dialing storage code.
The stored number dials out.
Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call. The system may optionally select a specific Trunk Group for the call.
If you have a DSS Console, you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number.
To dial a Group Abbreviated Dialing number:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial #4.
OR
Press DIAL key.
OR
Press Group Abbreviated Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1038).
To preselect, press a line key in step 1 (instead of CALL) before pressing the DIAL or Abbreviated Dialing key)
3.
Dial the Group Abbreviated Dialing code.
The stored number dials out.
Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call.
If you have a DSS Console, you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a stored number.
To check your stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers:
1.
Press CHECK.
2.
For Common Abbreviated Dialing, press DIAL or the Common Abbreviated Dialing key.
OR
For Group Abbreviated Dialing, press the Group Abbreviated Dialing key.
3.
Dial the Abbreviated Dialing Code (e.g., common code 001).
If the entire stored number is too long for your phone’s display, press * to see the rest of it.
4.
Press CLEAR.
To display additional numbers, repeat from step 2.
68 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Account Codes
Account Codes
Description
124i
☞
-
-
Available.
Verified Account Codes, Operator
Notification and Account Codes for
Incoming Calls require Base 4.02,
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Hidden Account Codes require Base
or EXCPRU software 4.02 or higher.
In Base or EXCPRU software prior
to 4.02, Account codes are from 1-8
digits long. In Base or EXCPRU
4.02 and higher, Account Codes are
from 1-16 digits long.
Verified Account Codes are from 316 digits long.
384i ☞
-
-
-
-
In Base 3.05, EXCPRU 3.05 or
higher, Forced Account Codes do not
block 911 calls.
-
Available.
Verified Account Codes, Operator
Notification and Account Codes for
Incoming Calls require system
software 3.07.10 or higher.
Hidden Account Codes require
system software 3.07.18 or higher.
In system software prior to 3.07.10,
Account Codes are from 1-8 digits
long. In system software 3.07.10 and
higher, Account Codes are from 1-16
digits long.
Verified Account Codes are from 316 digits long.
In system software 3.07.25 or higher,
all X11 calls except for 011and 411
are local calls.
Forced Account Codes do not block
911 calls.
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk calls.
The system has three types of Account Codes:
•
•
Optional Account Codes
Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call or anytime
while on a call. This type of Account Code is optional; the system does not require the user to enter it.
Forced Account Codes
Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time they place a trunk
call. If the user doesn’t enter the code, the system prevents the call. As with Optional Account Codes, the
extension user can elect to enter an Account Code for an incoming call. However, the system does not require it. Forced Account Codes does not block 1-800, 1-888 and emergency assistance (911) calls.
(384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or higher) Once set up in system programming, you
can enable Forced Account Codes on a trunk-by-trunk basis. In addition, Forced Account Codes can apply to all outside calls or just long distance calls. Forced Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the following chart:
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Number of Digits Dialed
If first digit is not 1
If first digit is 1
1-3
Not allowed
Not allowed
4-7
Allowed - does not require
Account Code
Allowed - requires
Account Code
More than 71
Allowed - requires
Account Code
Allowed - requires
Account Code
800 and 888
Allowed - Requires
Account Code
Allowed - does not
require Account Code
011 (International)
Allowed - requires
Account Code
N/A
FEATURES 69
Features A
Account Codes
1
•
Number of Digits Dialed
If first digit is not 1
If first digit is 1
911
Allowed - does not require
Account Code
N/A
If you change the local call length inToll Restriction, this value changes accordingly.
Verified Account Codes
(384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher) With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up to 1000 pre-programmed codes. If the Account Code is in the list, the call goes through. If the code dialed is not in the list, the system prevents the
call. Verified Account Codes can be from 3-16 digits long using the characters 0-9 and #. During programming, you can use "wild cards" to streamline entering codes into system memory. For exammple,
the entry 123W lets users dial Verified Account Codes from 1230 through 1239.
Operator Notification
(384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher) To prevent Account Code abuse, the system can
notify the operator each time an Account Code violation occurs. This can happen if the user fails to enter an Account Code (if Forced) or enters a Verified Account Code that is not in the list. The notification is an automatic
Intercom call to the attendant and a "RESTRICT" message in the operator’s display. (If the attendant fails to enter a valid Account Code, the system drops the call.)
Account Codes for Incoming Calls
(384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher) The system can control the ability of extension
users to enter Accout Codes for incoming calls. When this option is enabled, a user can dial * while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code, and then dial * to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digits the
user dials after answering an incoming call outdial on the connected trunk.
Hiding Account Codes
(384i 3.07.18 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher) Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a
telephone’s display. This would prevent, for example, an unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display and making note of the digits that dial out. When hidden, the Account Code
digits show as the character "*" on the telephone’s display.
Account Code Capacity
Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes. In 384i System
Software prior to 3.07.10 and 124i prior to Base/EXCPRU 4.02, Account Codes can be from 1-8 digits long, using 0-9 and #. In 384i System Software 3.07.10 or higher, Account Codes can be from 1-16 digits long. Verified
Account codes can be from 3-16 digits long.
Conditions
(A.) If a user enters a code that exceeds the eight digit limit, the system ignores the Account Code entry.
(B.) If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., *1234*) appear on the SMDR report as
part of the number dialed.
Description (Cont’d)
Default Setting
•
Acount codes are disabled.
70 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Account Codes
Programming
384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher (1 of 2)
Start
In 3001:1, enter 0.
Disabled
Stop
Should your system have:
- Account Codes disabled,
- Optional Account Codes,
- Forced Account Codes, or
- Verified Account Codes?
Forced or Verified
Optional
Verified Account Codes
are automatically
Forced.
In 3001:1, enter 2 for
Forced or 3 for Verified
and go to the next step.
In 3001:2, enter 1.
In 0702:3, set the
maximum number of
digits the system will
permit in local calls.
Toll calls
Should Account
Codes be Forced/
Verified for all calls
or just toll calls?
In 3001:1, enter 1
Continued
at B on
next page.
All calls
In 3001:2, enter 0.
Verified
In 3002, set up the
Verified Account
Code table.
In 0701:3, enable the
Maximum Number of
Digits for Local Call
option.
- In 1004, assign Toll Restriction
class to extensions.
- Also, refer to the Toll Restriction
feature and set up the system's
entire Toll Restriction scheme.
Should Account
Codes be Forced
or Verified?
Forced
Continued
at A on
next page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 71
Features A
Account Codes
Programming
384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher (2 of 2)
Continued
from A on
previous
page.
In 0406:84, enter 0.
Leave 0414:11 at its
current settings.
Should the operator receive
an alert if a user improperly
enters an Account Code?
No
Yes
Continued
from B on
previous
page.
Yes
In 0406:84, enter 1.
After the system prompts
the user, do they have
enough time to enter an
Account Code?
No
Change the value of
0414:11 to meet the
site's requirements.
Should user be able to
press a function key
(instead of dialing *) to
enter an Account Code?
Yes
In 1006, assign an
Account Code key
(code 1054).
No
In 3001:3, enter 0.
In 3001:4, enter 0.
No
Should user be able to
enter Account Codes
for incoming calls?
Should Account Codes be
hidden on an extension's
display as they are entered?
No
Yes
Yes
In 3001:3, enter 1.
In 3001:4, enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions. This
assignments pertains to
Programs 0406 and 3001.
In 0921:4 for selected
trunk, enter 0.
No
Should trunk have
Account Code
Capability?
Yes
In 0921:4 for selected
trunk, enter 1.
Stop
72 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Account Codes
Programming (Cont’d)
384I Prior to 3.07.10 and 124i Prior to Base/EXCPRU 4.02
Start
In 0407, enter 0 to
disable Account Codes
for Tenant Group.
Disabled
Should Tenant Group
have Account Codes
enabled, disabled or
forced (required)?
Enabled
In 0407, enter 1 to
enable Account Codes
for Tenant Group.
Forced
In 0407, enter 2 to force
users to enter Account
Codes.
In 0406 Item 84, enter 0
to disable Account
Code entry.
No
If allowed for Tenant
Group, should extension
be able to enter an
Account Code?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Yes
In 0406 Item 84, enter 1
to enable Account Code
entry.
Always enable this option if
your system has Forced
Account Codes.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 73
Features A
Account Codes
Programming (Cont’d)
(384i 3.07.10 and Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or higher)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 84, Account Code Operator Alert
If enabled in an extension’s Class of Service (1), the system will alert the operartor when an extension
user improperly enters an Account Code. This can occur if the user enters an invalid Verified Account
Code or fails to enter a Forced or Verified Account Code when required to do so. Enter 0 in an extension’s Class of Service to disable this capability. (Note that this option had a different function prior to
software version 3.07.10). Blocked calls print with the designatin BRD on the SMDR report.
➣ 0414 - System Timers (Part B), Item 11: Forced Account Code Interdigit Time
After a user dials an outside call, the system waits this interval for them to enter a Forced Account Code.
If the user doesn’t enter a Forced Account Code by the time this interval repeats, the system alerts the operator or drops the call (depending on the setting of Program 0406 Item 84 above).
➣ 0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 3: Maximum Number of Digits for Local Call
Use this option to enable/disable the maximum number of digit restriction for local calls. You must enable this option (1) if you have entered 1 in Program 3001 Item 2 below.
!! IMPORTANT !!
If you change this program from its default value (0), you must set up an entire Toll Restriction scheme. If you don’t, users will not be able to place toll calls.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
74 FEATURES
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 3: Maximum Number of Digits in Local Call
Account Codes use this option to determine the maximum number of digits in a local call. Calls using
more digits than this entry are considered to be toll calls. You assign one of four tables in this program,
assign a table to a Toll Restriction Class in Program 0701 above, and then assign Toll Restriction Classes
to extensions in Program 1004 below. (Also see Program 3001 Item 2 below.)
0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B), Item 4: Account Code
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Account Codes for each trunk.
1004 - Toll Restriction Class
Use this option to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to an extension. See also Programs 0701 and
0702 above.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as an Account Code key (code 1054). Use this key instead of the dialpad to enter
the * before and after the Account Code.
3001 - Account Code Setup, Item 1: Account Code Mode
For each Class of Service (1-15) use this option to select the Account Code Mode. The options are:
0
Account Codes disabled. (Any codes you enter dial out as part of your initial call.)
1
Account Codes optional (not required).
2
Account Codes required (forced) but not verifiable.
3
Account Codes required (forced) and verifiable.
3001 - Account Code Setup, Item 2: Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup
For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 in this option to enable Forced Account Codes for just toll calls.
Enter 0 to enable Forced Account Codes for local and toll calls.
3001 - Account Code Setup, Item 3: Account Codes for Incoming Calls
For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 in this option to enable Account Codes for incoming calls. enter 0 to
disable Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes you enter dial out on the connected trunk.
3001 - Account Code Setup, Item 4: Hiding Account Codes
For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 to have the system hide Account Codes on an extension’s display as they are entered. Enter 0 to have the Account Codes displayed.
3002 - Verified Account Code Table
Use this option to enter data into the Verified Account Code Table. You can enter up to 1000 codes from
3-16 digits in length. For a wild card, press the FLASH key.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Account Codes
Programming (Cont’d)
(384i Prior to 3.07.10 and 124i Prior to Base/EXCPRU 402)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 84: Account Codes
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to enter Account Codes.
➣ 0407 - Account Codes
For each Tenant Group (1-4), set Account Code operation. the options are:
0
Account Codes disabled
1
Account Codes enabled (but not required)
2
Account Codes required (forced)
➣ 1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15 in 384i, 1-10 in 124i) to an extension.
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
ARS can force a user to enter an Authorization Code prior to using a certain route. The system verifies
the ARS Authorization Code dialed against the ARS Authorization Code list (Program 2109).
One-Touch Calling
To simplify Account Code entry, store the Account Code (e.g., *1234*) in a One-Touch Key. Just press
the key instead of dialing the codes.
Station Message Detail Recording
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the phone’s display).
Operation
384i 3.07.10 or Higher or 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or higher
To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter.
You can use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes enabled. You may also
be able to use this procedure for incoming calls.
This procedure is not available at SLTs.
1.
Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1054).
2.
Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an an "*" character on the telephone’s display.
3.
Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1054).
(Continued)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 75
Features A
Account Codes
Operation (Cont’d)
384i 3.07.10 or Higher and 124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or higher (Cont’d)
To enter an Account Code before dialing the outside number:
If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must use this procedure. If it has Verified Account
Codes, you can use this procedure instead of letting the system promt you for your Account Code.
You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code programmed into
your Verified Account Code list.
1.
Access trunk for outside call.
You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code (except 9).. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing on page 155 for more information.
2.
Dial *
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1054)
3.
Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).
If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If Account
Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an an "*" character on the telephone’s display.
4.
Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1054)
5.
Dial the number you want to call.
If you hear "stutter dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting that you enter an ARS
Authorization Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection on page 96 for more information.
To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when an Account Code is required:
1.
Access a trunk and dial the number you want to call.
If you hear "stutter dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting that you enter an ARS
Authorization Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection on page 96 for more information.
2.
Wait for your call to go through.
OR
If you hear "Please enter an Account Code," and your display shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE:
•
Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1054)
•
Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an an "*" character on the
telephone’s display.
•
Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1054)
To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:
This procedure is not available at STLs.
1.
Answer incoming call.
If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps will dial digits out onto the
connected trunk.
2.
Dial *.
3.
Enter the Account Code.
You can enter any code of the proper length. Incoming Account Codes cannot be Forced or Verified.
4.
Dial *.
76 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Account Codes
Operation (Cont’d)
384i Prior to 3.07.10 and 124i
To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter.
5.
Dial *.
6.
Dial your Account Code (1-8 digits, using 0-9 and #).
7.
Dial *
To enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call:
If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must follow this procedure.
1.
Access trunk for outside call.
You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls,
Placing for more information.
With Forced Account Codes, you hear, "Please enter an Account Code." Your display shows: ENTER ACCOUNT CODE.
2.
Dial *.
3.
Dial your Account Code (1-8 digits, using 0-9 and #).
4.
Dial *
If the system has Forced Account Codes and you don’t enter a code, your call cannot go
through. You can , however, dial ** to bypass Forced Account Code entry.
5.
Dial number you want to call.
If you hear "stutter" dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS
Authorization Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection feature for more information on ARS
Authorization Codes.
To enter an Account Code at a single line set:
1.
Hookflash + ##.
2.
Enter Account Code (1-8 digits).
3.
Hookflash
4.
Dial number you want to call.
If you hear "stutter" dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting you to enter an ARS
Authorization Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection feature for more information on ARS
Authorization Codes.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 77
Features A
Alarm
Alarm
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Alarm lets a keyset extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can have Alarm remind them of a
meeting or an appointment. There are two types of Alarms:
Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)
Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Alarm is enabled.
•
Programming
Start
In Program
0406 Item 25,
enter 0.
No
Should an
extension be
allowed to use
Alarm?
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 25,
enter 1.
In Program 1005,
assign a Class of
Service to an
extension.
Should the alarm
signal be
different than 30
seconds (the
default)?
Yes
In Program 0405 Item
23, set the duration of
the alarm signal
(0-64800 seconds).
No
Stop
78 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Alarm
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 23: Alarm Duration
➣
➣
Set the duration of the Alarm signal (0-64800 seconds).
0406 - COS Options, Item 27: Alarm
In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) Alarm setting.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
None
Operation
To set the alarm:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial 827.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
Alarm 1 sounds only once. Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time.
4.
Dial the alarm time (24-hour clock).
For example, for 1:15 PM dial 1315.
5.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
To silence an alarm:
1.
At keyset, press CLEAR.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
To check the programmed alarm time:
1.
Press CHECK.
2.
Dial 827.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
The programmed time displays.
4.
Press CLEAR.
To cancel an alarm:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial 827.
3.
Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
4.
Dial 9999.
5.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 79
Features A
Alphanumeric Display
Alphanumeric Display
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Multibutton display telephones have a 2-line, 20 character per line alphanumeric display that provides various
feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls, identify callers and customize features. Refer to Table 1-8 at the beginning of this section for a listing of the available multibutton telephone displays.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled for all display telephones.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the Following Page
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
80 FEATURES
0406, COS Options, Item 37: Trunk Name Display, Seizing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunk’s name/number
when the user seizes the trunk.
0406, COS Options, Item 38: Trunk Name Display, Incoming
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunk’s name/number
when the trunk is ringing.
0406, COS Options, Item 39: Extension Name Display, Answer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the incoming Intercom caller’s name and
number.
0406, COS Options, Item 40: Intercom Name Display, Incoming
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the pre-answer display of the incoming Intercom caller’s name and number.
0406, COS Options, Item 42: Transfer Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s incoming Transfer pre-answer
display.
0406, COS Options, Item 51: Group Call Pickup Information Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s Group Call Pickup display.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Alphanumeric Display
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
This also disables the Call Timer.
In Program
0406 Item 37,
enter 0.
No
When a user seizes a trunk,
should they see the trunk
name on their display?
Yes
In Program
0406 Iem 38,
enter 0.
No
When a trunk rings an extension,
should their display show the trunk
name and "RINGING" display?
In Program
0406 Item 39,
enter 0.
No
When a user answers an Intercom
call, should their display show the
calling extension's name and
"TALKING TO" answer display?
Yes
No
When a user receives an Intercom
call, should their display show the
callers name and "CALL FROM"
pre-answer display?
Yes
No
When a user receives a transferred
call, should their display show the
"TRANSFER <<" transfer
pre-answer display?
Yes
In Program
0406 Item
40, enter 0.
In Program
0406 Item 42,
enter 0.
In Program
0406 Item 51,
enter 0.
No
When a user employs Call
Pickup to intercept a call,
should their display show the
"CALL P/U" display?
In Program 1005,
assign a Class of
Service to an
extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
In Program
0406 Item 37,
enter 1
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 38,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 39,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 40,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 42,
enter 1.
In Program
0406 Item 51,
enter 1.
Yes
Stop
FEATURES 81
Features A
Alphanumeric Display
Related Features
Refer to Table 1-8 at the beginning of this section.
Operation
Operation is automatic if enabled in programming. Refer to Table 1-8 at the beginning of this section.
82 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Description
124i ☞
-
Available — six ACI software ports
(two 3-ACI Modules max.) and 4
ACI Department Groups (1-4).
ACI modules auto-ID when
plugged in.
384i ☞
-
Available — 192 ACI software ports
(64 3-ACI Modules max.) and 32
ACI Department Groups.
ACI modules do not auto-ID.
The Analog Communications Interface (ACI) provides three analog ports (with associated relays) for Music on
Hold, External Paging or auxiliary devices such as tape recorders and loud bells. The 384i allows up to 64
ACIs, for a maximum of 192 analog ports. The 124i allows up to 2 ACIs, for a maximum of 6 analog ports.
Each ACI unit requires an unused port on a DSTU PCB. The ACI gives you more flexibility when connected to
auxiliary devices since it doesn’t use up resources on PGDU (Page/Door Box), ASTU (Analog Station) or
ATRU (Analog Trunk) PCBs.
•
Music on Hold
You can connect up to three customer-provided Music on Hold music sources to an ACI. This lets you
add additional music sources if the external source on the CPU PCB or the internal source are not adequate. By using ACIs, you could even have a different music source for each trunk.
When the system switches the ACI analog port to a trunk on Hold, the ACI relay associated with the ACI
analog port closes. You can use this capability to switch on the music source, if desired.
Extension users can dial the ACI analog port extension number and listen to the connected music source.
The ACI relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through.
For Music on Hold, connect the music source to the ACI analog port IN (Input) jack. Connect the music
source control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details.
•
External Paging
An ACI analog port can also be an External Page output. When connected to customer-provided External Paging equipment, the ACI port provides External Paging independent of the PGDU PCB. To use the External
Paging, an extension user just dials the ACI analog port extension number and makes the announcement. The
system broadcasts the announcement from the ACI analog port and simultaneously closes the associated ACI
relay. You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging amplifier, if required.
This external paging zone is not included in external all call paging or combination paging (internal and
external).
For External Paging, connect the Paging amplifier to the ACI analog port OUT (output) jack. Connect the amplifier control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details.
•
Auxiliary Device Control
The ACI can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user dials the ACI analog
port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and activate the record function. When
the user hangs up, the recording stops and the tape recorder turns off. For tape recording, connect the
tape recorder AUX input jack to the ACI analog port OUT (output) jack. Connect the recorder control
leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details.
By using Department Calling, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool. When an extension
user dials the Department Group pilot number, they reach the first available tape recorder in the pool.
The relays on the ACI can optionally control customer-provided external ringers (loud bells) and buzzers.
When an extension user dials the ACI analog port extension number, the associated ACI relay closes and
activates the ringer. You could use this capability to control an emergency buzzer for a noisy machine
shop floor, for example.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 83
Features A
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Description (Cont’d)
•
ACI Call Recording
ACI Call Recording allows you to use a recording device connected to an ACI to automatically record
calls. The recording device is typically a customer-provided tape recorder. Once set up, ACI Call Recording starts automatically as soon as the user answers their call. You can set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port/recording device or to a pool of ACI ports/devices. With a single device, all calls
are stored in a centralized location. With a pool of devices, you’ll be sure to have a port available for recording — even in peak traffic periods.
Once set up, ACI Call Recording automatically occurs for all trunk calls that ring an extension. This includes
the following trunk types:
•
Central Office calls programmed to ring the extension.
•
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
•
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
•
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
•
Tie lines
ACI Call Recording is not available for outgoing trunk calls, transferred calls or Intercom calls. You can
set up recording on a per trunk or per extension basis.
PORT 3
LINE
To DSTU
PCB Port
IN
OUT
PORT 2
CTL
Software
Port 3
IN
OUT
Software
Port 2
PORT 1
CTL
IN
OUT
CTL
9200 - 166
Physical Ports and Software Ports
Each ACI consists of a physical port for connection to the phone system and three analog ports. For programming
purposes, the analog ports are also called software ports (see the illustration below). The physical port connects to a
station position on a DSTU PCB. During installation, the first ACI you set up is physical port 1; the second ACI is
physical port 2, etc. Each ACI has three software ports, which are numbered independently of the physical ports.
Normally, the first ACI set up has software ports 1-3; the second ACI has software ports 4-6, etc. In 384i there are a
total of 192 software ports (64 ACIs x 3 ports each). There are six software ports in 124i. During programming,
you assign ACI extension numbers, Department Group options and Tenant Group options to ACI software ports,
not physical ports. During installation, you connect equipment to the jacks on the ACI that correspond to the
software port. Refer to the system Hardware Manual for more installation details.
Software
Port 1
Physical
Port 1
84 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Description (Cont’d)
Conditions
The devices connected to the ACI must be compatible with the specifications below. Refer to the system Hardware Manual for additional details.
ACI Interface Specifications
Relay Contacts
Maximum Contact Ratings
30 V DC @ 60 mA
90 V AC @ 10 mA
Minimum Application Load
1 V DC @ 1 mA
Audio/Music Input
Input Impedance
47 K Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Maximum Input
TBD
Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance
600 Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Maximum Output
TBD
Default Setting
•
No ACI’s programmed, although in 124i an ACI will auto-ID as soon as you plug it in.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 85
Features A
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Programming
Start
Plug ACI into an available
DSTU station port.
Run 0004. The system
sets the software ports in
consecutive order starting with the lowest
available number.
Automatically
(Skip this decision for
124i)
Do you want to set the
ACI port programming
manually or
automatically?
Manually
In 0005, enter circuit type 5
for each ACI physical port.
Use "Order" option to set
software port number.
(Skip this decision for 124i)
In 1302, assign each ACI
software port to a tenant group.
In 1301, enter 2 for
output function.
External Paging/
Aux Device
Control
In ACI software port for Music
on Hold or External Paging/
Aux Device Control?
Music on
Hold
In 1301, enter 1 for
input function.
In 0504, enter an
extension number for
each ACI software port.
Direct dialing is required
for External Paging and
Ringer Control
Should system
users be able to
use Department
Calling to call ACI
software ports?
No
Yes
In 1303, assign ACI
software ports to
Department Groups.
In 0508, assign pilot
numbers to the ACI
Department Groups.
Stop
86 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Programming (Cont’d)
ACI Call Recording
Start
Stop
In 0920 and 1020 below,
enter an ACI group pilot
number (assigned in 0508)
as the recording
destination.
In 1020, enter:
- The ACI Call
Recording Destination.
- A=1 and S=0
No
Pool of
ports
Per
extension
Do you want to use ACI
Call Recording?
Should calls record
to a dedicated ACI
port or to a group
(pool) of ports?
Do you want ACI Call
Recording to activate
for every ringing call
on a designated trunk
or per extension?
Make sure ICM No. entry
in 0920 is cleared.
Yes
(Skip this step for 124i)
In 0308, assign a CDTU block
for speech recording (1).
Dedicated
port
In 0920 and 1020 below,
enter an ACI port's
extension number
(assigned in 0504) as the
recording destination.
Every
call
In 0920, enter:
- The ACI Call
Recording Destination.
- A=1 and S=0
Make sure ICM No. entry
in 1020 is cleared.
For each ACI port used for
recording, in 1301 be sure to
set the port for output (2).
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 87
Features A
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ (384i Only) 0004 - Automatic Extension Circuit Type Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
You can use this program to automatically set up ACI ports. When you run Program 0004, the system
automatically:
•
Assigns circuit type 5 to the ACI physical port.
•
Puts the ACI software ports in consecutive order - starting with the lowest available software port.
For example, the first ACI installed becomes ACI physical port 1 with software ports 1-3. Refer to
Understanding Port Assignments in Section 2 for more explanation.
(384i Only) 0005 - Manual Extension Circuit Type Setup
If you don’t want to use Program 0004, use this program instead. Use the Type option to set the circuit
type of the physical port at type 5. Use the Order option to set the software port number (1-192). Refer
to Understanding Port Assignments in Section 2 for more explanation.
(384i Only) 0308 - Conference Circuit Setup
Assign a CDTU block for speech recording (option 1).
0504 - ACI Extension Number
Assign extension numbers to ACI software ports (1-192). This lets system users dial ACI ports directly.
Select a number outside of the normal extension number range.
0508 - ACI Group Pilot Number
Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups (1-32). When a user dials the pilot number, they reach an available
ACI software port within the group.
0920 - ACI Call Recording Destination (Per Trunk)
Use this option to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per trunk basis. The destination
can be an ACI port’s extension number (assigned in Program 0504) or an ACI Department Group pilot number (assigned in Program 0508). In addition, make sure A=1 and S=0. When using this option,
also make sure that the entry for 1020 below is cleared.
1020 - ACI Call Recording Destination (Per Extension)
Use this option to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per extension basis. The destination can be an ACI port’s extension number (assigned in Program 0504) or an ACI Department
Group pilot number (assigned in Program 0508). In addition, make sure A=1 and S=0. When using this
option, also make sure that the entry for 0920 above is cleared.
1301 - ACI Port Function
Set each ACI software port (1-192) for input (1) or output (2). Use input ports for Music on Hold
sources. Use output ports for External Paging/ringer control.
(384i Only) 1302 - ACI Tenant Group
Assign each ACI software port (1-192) to a tenant group (1-4).
1303 - ACI Department Group
Assign ACI software ports (1-192) to ACI Department Groups (1-32 in 384i, 1-4 124i). This lets ACI
callers connect to ACI software ports by dialing the group’s pilot number (set in Program 0508).
Related Features
Background Music
ACI software ports cannot be Background Music music sources.
Hotline
An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports.
Music on Hold
ACI software ports can be Music on Hold music sources. Since the system allows up to 192 ACI software ports, each trunk can have its own music source.
One-Touch Calling
An extension can have One-Touch Keys for ACI software ports. The gives the extension user:
- One touch access to external music
- One touch External Paging
- One touch loud ringer control
Paging, External
ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control, independent of the External Paging circuits
on the PGDU PCB.
88 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Analog Communications Interface (ACI)
Operation
To call an ACI software port:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial ACI software port extension number.
OR
Dial ACI Department Group extension number.
OR
Press One-Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group.
After you call an ACI software port:
•
If the port is set for input (Program 1301=1) and a music source is connected, you hear music.
OR
•
If the port is set for output (Program 1301=2) and External Paging is connected, you can page into the external zone.
OR
•
If the port is set for output (Program 1301=2) and a loud ringer is connected, you activate the loud ringer.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 89
Features A
Attendant Call Queueing
Attendant Call Queueing
Description
124i ☞
Not available.
384i ☞
Available — requires system
software 3.01.02 or higher.
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy tone. This
helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination for unanswered
calls. For example, you can program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls to route to the attendant when
their primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queueing, these unanswered calls would normally "stack
up" for the attendant until they can be processed.
The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID, DIL, tie line and transferred calls. If the attendant
doesn’t have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line on a CALL key. If the attendant has more than 32
calls queued, an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled.
Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
Programming
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 19: Busy Transfer
➣
Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to Transfer calls to an attendant that has more than 32 calls is queue.
1105 - Operator’s Extension
Assign the operator (attendant’s) extension for each Tenant Group.
Related Features
"Call Forwarding" / "Personal Greeting"
Forwarding when unanswered or busy can only occur at the attendant if there are more than 32 calls
in queue.
Operation
None
90 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
Available.
Basic ACD operation requires
EXCPRU version 2.18 or higher.
ACD is not available with Base
software.
ACD — The Next Generation
requires EXCPRU software 4.02 or
higher. The inDepth and inDepth+ is
not available.
For more information, refer to the
ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
384i ☞
-
Available.
Basic ACD operation requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
-
ACD — The Next Generation requires
system software 3.07.18 or higher.
-
For more information, refer to the
ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) uniformly distributes calls among member agents of a programmed ACD Group.
When a call rings into an ACD Group, the system automatically routes the call to the agent that has been idle the longest. Automatic Call Distribution is much more sophisticated and comprehensive than Department Calling and other
group services — it can accurately judge the work load at each agent and distribute calls accordingly.
The system allows up to eight ACD Groups and up to 144 ACD agents. You can put any agent in any group. In
addition, an agent can be in more than one group as long as only one of the groups is active at a time. This allows, or example, a Technical Service representation to answer Customer Service calls at lunch time when many
of the Customer Service reps are unavailable.
The ACD Master Number is the "extension number" of the whole group. Calls directly ringing or transferred to
the ACD Master number enter the group and are routed accordingly. Although the master number can be any
valid extension number, you should choose a number that is out of the normal extension range.
Automatic Call Distribution operation is further enhanced by:
•
ACD Call Queuing
When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable, an incoming call will queue and cause the Queue
Status Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor’s display. The display helps the supervisor keep
track of the traffic load within their group. The Queue Status Displays shows:
- The number of calls queued for an available agent in the group.
- The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting.
For each ACD Group, you can set the following conditions:
- The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs.
- How often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs (see the Queue Status Display Timing illustration below).
- If the supervisor should hear a Queue Alarm whenever the time in queue portion reoccurs. This alarm
is a single beep tone that reminds the supervisor to check the condition of the queue.
•
ACD Overflow (With Announcements)
ACD offers extensive overflow options for each ACD Group. For example, a caller ringing in when all
agents are unavailable can hear an initial announcement (called the 1st Announcement). This announcement can be a general greeting like, "Thank you for calling. All of our agents are currently busy
helping other customers. Please stay on the line and we will help you shortly." If the caller continues to
wait, you can have them hear another announcement (called the 2nd Announcement) such as, "Your
business is important to us. Your call will be automatically answered by the first available agent. Please
stay on the line." If all the ACD Group’s agents still are unavailable, the call can automatically overflow
to another ACD Group or the Voice Mail Automated Attendant.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 91
Features A
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description (Cont’d)
You can assign an ACD Group with any combination of 1st Announcement, 2nd Announcement and overflow method. You can have, for example, a Technical Service group that plays only the 2nd Announcement to callers and then immediately overflows to Voice Mail. At the same time, you can have a
Customer Service group that plays both announcements and does not overflow.
•
•
•
Agent Log In and Log Out Services
An ACD Agent can log in and log out of their ACD Group. While logged in, the agent is available to receive ACD Group calls. When logged out, the agent is excluded from the group’s calls. The programmable keys and alphanumeric display on an agent’s phone show at a glance when they are logged in or
logged out.
Emergency Call
If an ACD Agent needs assistance with a caller, they can place an Emergency Call to their ACD Group
Supervisor. Once the supervisor answers the Emergency Call, they automatically monitor both the ACD
Agent and the caller. If the agent needs assistance, the supervisor can join in the conversation. Emergency Call can be a big help to inexperienced ACD Agents that need technical advise or assistance with a
difficult caller. The supervisor can easily listen to the conversation and then "jump in" if the situation gets
out of hand.
Enhanced DSS Operation
An ACD Supervisor (Group or System) can use their DSS Console to monitor the status of the ACD
Agents within a group. The DSS Console is an essential tool for supervisors. Once you assign a DSS
Console to a supervisor, the 10 function keys in the last row become ACD Group select buttons (see the
illustration below). When the supervisor presses a button for an ACD Group, the console key flash rates
tell the supervisor at a glance which of the group’s agents are:
- Logged onto the group (i.e., in service)
- Logged out of the group (i.e., out of service)
- Busy on a call
- Placing an Emergency Call to the supervisor
- Not available or installed
The ACD Supervisor can also use their console for placing and transferring calls — just like any other
extension user.
•
•
•
92 FEATURES
Flexible Time Schedules
An ACD Work Schedule lets you divide a day into segments (called Work Periods) for scheduling the activity in your ACD Groups. You can set up four distinct Work Schedules, with up to eight Work Periods
in each Work Schedule. Each day of the week has one Work Schedule, but different days can share the
same schedule. For example, your Monday through Friday Work Schedule could consist of only two
Work Periods. Work Period 1 could be from 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM — when your business is open. Work
Period 2 could be from 5:00 PM to 8:00 AM — which covers those times when your business is closed.
Headset Operation (With Automatic Answer)
An ACD Agent or ACD Group Supervisor can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. The headset conveniently frees up the user’s hands for other work and provides privacy while on the
call. In addition, an ACD Agent with a headset can have Automatic Answer. This allows an agent busy on
a call to automatically connect to the next waiting call when they hang up.
Incoming Call Routing
Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific ACD Groups. These types of calls ring directly
into the ACD Group without being transferred by a co-worker or the Automated Attendant.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description (Cont’d)
•
Rest Mode
Rest Mode temporarily logs-out an ACD agent’s phone. There are two types of Rest Mode:
- Manual Rest Mode
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Rest Mode anytime they want to temporarily log out of the ACD
Group. They might want to do this if they go to a meeting or get called away from their work area.
While logged out, calls to the ACD Group will not ring the agent’s phone.
- Automatic Rest Mode
When an ACD Group has Automatic Rest Mode, the system will automatically put an agent’s phone in
Rest Mode if it is not answered. This ensures callers won’t have to wait while ACD rings an extension
that won’t be answered. For keysets, the system enables Automatic Rest Mode for all phones with
Rest Mode keys. For SLTs, you must set an option in programming to enable Automatic Rest Mode.
•
Supervisor, ACD Group
You can designate an extension in an ACD Group to be the group’s supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD
Group Supervisor, the user can:
- Take the entire ACD Group out of service.
- Check the log out status of each agent after the group taken down.
- Restore the ACD Group to service.
During programming, you can choose one of three modes of operation for each ACD Group supervisor:
- Supervisor’s extension cannot receive calls to the ACD Group.
- Supervisor’s extension can only receive ACD Group calls during overflow conditions.
- Supervisor’s extension receives calls just like any other ACD Group agent (mode 2).
An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a supervisor for
only one ACD Group.
•
Supervisor, ACD System
You can designate an extension as an ACD System Supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD System Supervisor, the user can:
- Take the all the system’s ACD Groups out of service simultaneously.
- Check the log out status of each agent after the groups are taken down.
- Restore all the ACD Groups to service simultaneously.
The system can have only one ACD System Supervisor.
•
Traffic Management Reports
The system provides comprehensive Traffic Management (TMS) Reports that help when analyzing ACD
traffic, system usage and calling patterns. Refer to the Traffic Management feature for more information.
The TMS report is in five sections:
- Trunk Calls Sorted by Extension
- Trunk Calls Sorted by Trunk
- ACD Calls Sorted by Agent
- ACD Calls Sorted by ACD Group
- All Trunks Busy Report
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 93
Features A
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description (Cont’d)
•
Work Time
Work Time temporarily busies-out an ACD agent’s phone so they can work at their desk uninterrupted.
This gives the agent time to fill out important logs and records as soon as they are finished with their call.
There are two types of Work Time:
- Manual Work Time
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Work Time any time they need to work at their desk undisturbed.
You might prefer this Work Time mode if an agent only occasionally has to fill out follow-up paper
work after they complete their call. When the agent is through catching up with their work, they manually return themselves to the ACD Group.
- Automatic Work Time
The system implements Automatic Work Time for the agent as soon as they hang up their current call. This
is helpful in applications (such as Tech Service groups) where follow-up paperwork is a requirement for
every call. When the agent is done with their work, they manually return themselves to the ACD Group.
•
ACD — The Next Generation
The second generation of ACD provides a host of new call management productivity tolls:
- ACD Group Call Coverage Keys
To help cover calls during peak periods, a keyset can have Call Coverage keys for ACD Groups. When a
call rings into a covered ACD Group, it rings the appropriate ACD Group Call Coverage key. The key can
ring immediately, after a delay or just flash. The Call Coverage key also facilitates one-button Transfer for
an ACD Group. The covering extension does not have to be a member of the ACD Group.
- Hotline Key Shows Agent Status
An extension’s Hotline keys provide the "normal" Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for co-workers and a
unique BLF for ACD Agents. Similary to the supervisor’s DSS Console BLF, the unique BLF shows
when the covered agent is in service, out of service or busy on a call. This enhanced BLF gives a department manager, for example, ACD Group monitoring capabilities without having to become a supervisor with a DSS Console.
- Enhanced Supervisor Options
An ACD supervisor can individually assign extensions to ACD Groups, and set an agent’s status once assigned. This provides the supervisor with tremendous flexibility to reassign agetns as work loads vary.
- Queue Status Display with Scrolling
To aid in keeping track of call volumes, a display keyset user can view any ACD Group’s Queue
Status Display by pressing a uniquely programmed Programmable Function Key. The user can the
press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ to scroll through all the system’s ACD Group queues. The display keyset
does not have to be an ACD Agent or supervisor.
- Overflow Announcements from Voice Mail
The NVM-Series Voice Mail system can provide the ACD overflow announcements in systems that do
not have a Voice Announce Unit installed. When a caller queues for an available agent, designated
Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes provide the overflow messages.
- Escape from Queue with NVM-Series
Escape From Queue uses NVM-Series Call Routing Mailboxes for announcement messages to provide callers with enhanced options while in queue. After listening to this type of announcement, they
can either wait in queue or dial a digit for an alternate destination. The destination is typically the operator, a mailbox or an extension.
94 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description (Cont’d)
•
ACD — The Next Generation (Cont’d)
- Programmable Wrap-up Timer
When an agent finishes their call, the system automatically starts a wrap-up timer and blocks any ACD
calls to the agent. This gives them time to complete important logs and records before a new call comes in.
When the timer expires, the system returns the agent to the ACD Group to handle new callers.
- InDepth and inDepth+
(384i only)
InDepth and inDepth+ are Windows-based Management Information Systems that work with the system’s built-in ACD. These ACD/MIS systems enhance the 384i with real time statistics and reports on
ACD Group traffic patterns and usage. Refer to the inDepth and inDepth+ feature on page 324 for
more.
For more information on Automatic Call Distribution, refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Conditions
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Default Setting
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Programming
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Programming (Cont’d)
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Related Features
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
Operation
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 95
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
Automatic Route Selection
Description
124i ☞
-
-
Available.
Changing the tone detection setup
and trunk access code requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Dial Treatments can contain # and *
characters in Base 2.13, EXCPRU
2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
-
-
Available.
Changing the tone detection setup
and trunk access code requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
Dial Treatments can contain # and *
characters in system software
3.06.02 and higher.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides call routing and call restriction based on the digits a user dials. ARS
gives the system the most cost-effective use of the connected long distance carriers.
ARS is an on-line call routing program that you can customize (like other system options) from a display telephone. ARS accommodates over 14,000 theoretical call routing choices - without a custom-ordered rate structure database. With ARS, you can modify the system’s routing choices quickly and easily. This is often
necessary in today’s telecommunications world where the cost structure and service choices frequently change.
ARS Feature Summary
ARS provides:
Call Routing
ARS can apply 3-digit (area code) or 6-digit (area code and local exchange) analysis to every number dialed. For programming, ARS provides separate 3-digit and 6-digit tables. Each table can have as many
numbers as the installation requires.
•
•
•
•
•
Dialing Translation (Special Dialing Instructions)
ARS can automatically execute stored dialing instructions (called Dial Treatments) when it chooses a
route for a call. The system allows up to 15 Dial Treatments. The Dial Treatments can:
Automatically insert or delete a leading 1
Insert or delete an area code (NPA)
Add digits (such as a dial-up OCC number), pauses and waits to the dialing
sequence
Require the user to enter an authorization code when placing a call (see Forced
Authorization Code below)
Time of Day Selection
For routing purposes, ARS provides eight different time of day selections (called Rate Periods). You can
assign these Rate Periods to any time of day (in 1/2 hour intervals) or day of week (Monday-Friday, Saturday, Sunday or Holiday).
Hierarchical Class of Service Control
ARS allows or denies call route choices based on an extension’s ARS1 Class of Service. This allows
lower Classes of Service (e.g., 1) to access routes unavailable to higher Classes of Service (e.g., 27). The
system provides up to 28 (0-27) ARS Classes of Service.
Forced Authorization Code
The Dial Treatment for designated routes may require the user to enter an ARS Authorization Code before ARS allows routing. This code is verifiable and is enforced by an extension’s ARS Class of Service.
Each extension can have its own unique ARS Authorization Code.
1
Use Program 2110 to set an extension’s ARS Class of Service. An extension’s Class of Service (set in Programs 0406 and
1005) has no affect on ARS routing choices.
96 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
Description (Cont’d)
•
•
•
Separate Routing for Selected Call Types
To provide unique control, you can program separate routing instructions for:
Operator assisted (0 +) calls
International (011) calls
Directory assistance (411, 1411 and 555) calls
Emergency (911) calls
Separate Routing for Equal Access (10XXX) Calls
Choose different routing for directly-dialed (10XXX + 1) and operator-assisted (10XXX + 0) Equal Access calls.1
Separate Routing for 976 Calls
Restriction for 976 calls is hierarchical according to an extension’s ARS Class of Service.
Basic ARS Operation
When a user places an outside call, ARS analyzes the digits dialed and assigns one of 64 Selection Numbers to
the call. The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits the user dialed. ARS then checks the time of
day, the day of week and the extension’s ARS Class of Service. Based on these call routing options, ARS selects
a trunk group for the call and imposes the Dial Treatment instructions (if any).
Conditions
(A.) Do not use ARS behind a Centrex/PBX.
(B.) ARS is intended for areas that use the North American Number Plan (NANP).
Default Setting
ARS is not programmed.
•
1
This equipment is capable of providing user’s access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of Equal
Access codes. Modifications by aggregators to alter these capabilities may be a violation of the Telephone Operator
Consumer Services improvement act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 97
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
Programming
Should the
system use
ARS?
Start
No
In 0401 Item 21, enter
0 to disable ARS.
Stop
Yes
The trunk groups are also your ARS
Service Numbers.
Are your carriers
organized into
separate trunk
groups?
No
In 0905, assign trunks of the same carrier
type to the same trunk group.
Yes
Do your carriers
require Dialing
Translation?
You'll assign Dial Treatments to
trunk groups later on.
Yes
In 2107, program a different Dial
Treatment for each carrier with
special requirements.
No
No
Do any Dial Treatments
require ARS Authorization
Codes?
Yes
In 2109, assign Authorization
Codes to extensions.
Are your Rate Periods the
same as the default Rate
Periods?
No
In 2106, define the new Rate
Periods (eight max.).
Yes
In 2104, enter 0.
No
Is system in a conflict
area (i.e., area code
must be preceded by
1)?
Yes
In 2104, enter 1.
In 0401 Item 21, enter 1 to
enable ARS.
Continued on
next page.
98 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Make additional copies of
the worksheet as needed.
On each Call Route
Options Worksheet,
assign a Selection
Number to each unique
type of call.
For example:
NNX+nnnn calls use number 1.
1+NNX+nnnn calls use number 2.
1+NPA+NNX+nnnn calls use number 3.
Enter the range of Rate
Periods on the Call Route
Options Worksheet.
No
Does routing
change during
different times of
the day?
Yes
For each Selection Number, make
copies of the Call Route Options
worksheet for each Rate Period.
For each COS on the worksheet,
enter the Service Number (trunk
group) that the Selection Number
should use for the Rate Period
you are programming.
Enter the Call Route
Options Worksheet data
into program 2101.
In 2110, assign ARS Class
of Service to extensions.
Continued
on the
following
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 99
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
Programming (Cont’d)
Selection Number 0 always routes to Trunk Group 1.
Continued
from
previous
page.
Should system have
3-digit (NPA or NNX)
routing?
In 2103, define the 3-digit
routing table. Enter 0 for
codes 0-199.
Yes
No
Normally, most calls use 3-digit
(1+NPA or 1+NNX) routing.
Without 3-digit routing, calls use
the 6-digit table, separate routing
or Trunk Group 1.
Should system have
6-digit (NPA+NNX)
routing?
Yes
In 2102, define the 6digit routing table.
No
Should the system have
separate routing for 0+,
011, directory assistance
and 911 calls?
Normally, use 6-digit
(NPA+NNX) routing for
special cases.
Yes
Assign special
routing in 2108.
No
Should the system
have separate routing
for Equal Access calls?
Yes
Assign Equal Access
routing in 2111.
No
(384i Only) In 0116, change
the Tone Detection Setup
options, if required.
(384i Only) Do you
want users to dial
9 to access ARS?
In 0510, specify the Primary
Trunk Access Code for each
Tenant Group.
Yes
No
In 0402:7, enter 0.
Trunk
Group 1
If a user dials a call that is
not programmed in ARS,
should the system route
the call to Trunk Group1 or
play error tone?
After ARS seizes a trunk,
does the system wait an
adequate time before
outdialing the call?
Error
tone
No
In 0402:7, enter 1.
Change 0405:50 as
required. The default
is 3 seconds.
Yes
Stop
100 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
Programming (Cont’d)
Call Route Options Worksheet
Selection Number (1-64)
Rate Period (1-8)
Service Number (1-128)
Dial Treatment (1-15)
Class of Service 00
Class of Service 01
Class of Service 02
Class of Service 03
Class of Service 04
Class of Service 05
Class of Service 06
Class of Service 07
Class of Service 08
Class of Service 09
Class of Service 10
Class of Service 11
Class of Service 12
Class of Service 13
Class of Service 14
Class of Service 15
Class of Service 16
Class of Service 17
Class of Service 18
Class of Service 19
Class of Service 20
Class of Service 21
Class of Service 22
Class of Service 23
Class of Service 24
Class of Service 25
Class of Service 26
Class of Service 27
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 101
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0116 - Tone Detection Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Use Items 11-32 to set the criteria for dial tone detection for outgoing ARS calls. This capability requires
384i system software 3.04 or higher.
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 21: ARS Enable
Enable (1) or disable (0) ARS for each tenant.
0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B), Item 7: ARS Misdialed Call Handling
When a user dials a call not programmed in ARS, specify if the system should route the call over Trunk
Group 1 (0) or play error tone to the caller (1).
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 50: Dial Sending Start Time for SLT/ARS
After seizing a trunk, ARS waits this interval before outdialing the call.
0510 - Trunk Access Code
For each Tenant Group (1-4), specify the single digit code used to access ARS (normally 9).
0905 - Trunk Groups
Program trunks of the same carrier type into the same trunk group.
2101 - ARS Call Route Options Table
Specify the routing options for up to 64 Selection Numbers. Options include Rate Period (1-8), ARS
Class of Service (0-27), Service Number (trunk groups 1-128) and Dial Treatment (0-15)
2102 - ARS Six Digit Table
Program the Six Digit Table. Options include the Area Code you are programming, the Default (no match) Selection Number, the NNX list for the NPA you are programming and the Match Selection Number.
2103 - ARS Three Digit Table
Program the Three Digit Table. Options include the NPA/NNX you are programming (100-999), code
type (1 + or no 1 + dialing) and the Selection Number for each code. Be sure to enter 0 for all codes
from 0-199.
2104 - Conflict Area
If the system is in a conflict area, enter 1. If the system is in a non-conflict area, enter 0.
2105 - Minimum COS for Dialing 976
Allow or restrict users from dialing exchange 976 services. The system restricts according to the extension’s ARS Class of Service (set in Program 2110). Extensions with an ARS COS higher than the Program 2105 entry cannot dial 976. Extensions with an ARS COS equal to or lower than the Program 2105
entry can dial 976.
2106 - ARS Rate Period Table
Define the ARS Rate Periods. ARS lets you assign up to eight Rate Periods for different times of the day
and days of the week. The default Rate Periods are:
1
➣
102 FEATURES
Rate Period1
Time/Day
1
Mon-Fri, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM
2
Mon-Fri, 5:00PM to 11:00
PM Sat, Sun, Holiday, 8:00
AM to 11:00 PM
3
All days, 11 PM to 8:00 AM
4-8
Not defined
Sundays and holidays use the same Rate Periods as Saturday.
2107 - ARS Dial Treatments
Program up 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS dialing translation.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 2108 - Separate ARS Routing Options
➣
➣
➣
Program unique routing for:
- Operator-assisted (0+) calls
- International (011) calls
- Directory assistance (411, 1411 and 555) calls
- Equal Access (10XXX + 0 or 1) calls
- Emergency (911) calls
2109 - ARS Authorization Codes
Enter ARS Authorizations Codes for each extension. ARS Dial Treatments may require users to enter
Authorization Codes before dialing.
2110 - ARS Class of Service
Set an extension’s ARS Class of Service. Automatic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when
determining how to route an extension’s calls.
2111 - ARS Equal Access Control
Choose the Selection Numbers (1-64) ARS will use for Equal Access calls. Make a separate choice for
10XXX+1 and 10XXX+0 calls.
Related Features
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Speed Dial
Speed Dial bypasses ARS routing.
Tenant Service
All tenant groups share the same ARS programming. However, you can enable or disable ARS for each
individual tenant.
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction overrides ARS.
Trunk Group Routing
A system with Automatic Route Selection cannot also have Trunk Group Routing.
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
With ARS installed, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. The system automaticaly redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset.
Operation
To place a call using ARS.
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
You’ll hear normal Intercom dial tone.
2.
Dial 9.
You’ll hear a second, "stutter" dial tone.
3.
Dial outside number.
If you hear another "stutter" dial tone, you must enter your extension’s ARS Authorization Code.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 103
Features A
Automatic Route Selection
— For Your Notes —
104 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Background Music
Background
Music
Features B-D
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to speakers in keysets. If an extension user activates it, BGM plays whenever the user’s extension is idle.
The method the system uses to provide Background Music (and Music on Hold) depends on the setting of a
jumper on the CPRU PCB, how the music source is connected and the setting in program 0914. The table below
shows how these settings interact. Refer to Music on Hold on page 373 for more information.
BGM/MOH Operation Matrix
To get this result . . .
Set these options . . .
CPRU "S" Jumper
INT
EXT
External Music Source
MOH (1&2)
BGM (5&6)
Program
0914
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
None
Background Music
None
✔
255
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
Internally synthesized 1
Background Music
None
✔
254
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
None
Background Music
None
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
From connected music source
Background Music
From connected music source
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
Internally synthesized 1
Background Music
None
✔
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
✔
255
✔
✔
255
254
FEATURES 105
Features B-D
Background Music
BGM/MOH Operation Matrix
To get this result . . .
Set these options . . .
CPRU "S" Jumper
INT
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
Internally synthesized 1
Background Music
From connected music source
EXT
MOH (1&2)
✔
BGM (5&6)
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
From connected music source
MOH for Trunk Calls
From connected music source
Background Music
None
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
None
MOH for Trunk Calls
None
Background Music
From connected music source
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
From connected music source
MOH for Trunk Calls
None
Background Music
None
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
None
MOH for Trunk Calls
From connected music source
Background Music
From connected music source
✔
1
External Music Source
✔1
Program
0914
254
254
✔
✔1
254
255
✔
255
If Program 0302, Item 1: MOH Tone is set to ’0’, Music on Hold will not be provided.
Conditions
(A.) Background Music requires a customer-provided music source connected to the CPU auxiliary terminals.
Refer to the system Hardware Manual.
Default Setting
Not installed.
•
106 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Background Music
Programming
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 53: Background Music
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension from turning Background Music
on and off.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Start
In Program
0406 Item 53,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
allowed to turn
Background Music on
and off?
Yes
In Program
0406 Item 53,
enter 1.
In Program 1005,
assign a Class of
Service to an
extension.
Stop
Related Features
Music on Hold
The system can broadcast music to callers on Hold.
Single Line Telephones
Background Music is not available on single line telephones.
Operation
To turn Background Music on or off:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 825.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 107
Features B-D
Barge In
Barge In
Description
124i ☞
-
-
Available.
In Base 4.02 and EXCPRU 4.02
and higher, turning off the Barge In
tones also turns off the called
extension’s display.
Users cannot dial the Barge In code
(810) before calling a busy extension.
384i ☞
-
-
-
Users can Barge In only after
hearing busy tone.
-
-
Users cannot press a Barge In key
(or a Super Display Barge In soft
key) before calling a busy extension.
-
Available.
In system software 3.07.10 and
higher, turning off the Barge In tones
also turns off the called extension’s
display.
System software 3.07.24 and higher
allows users to dial the Barge In
code (810) before calling a busy
extension.
System software 3.07.24 and higher
allows users to Barge In after hearing
busy/ring tone in addition to busy
tone.
System software 3.07.30 and higher
allows users to press a Barge In key
(or a Super Display Barge In soft
key) before calling a busy extension.
Barge In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call. This sets up a threeway conversation between the intruding extension and the two parties on the initial call. With Barge In, an extension user can get a message through to a busy co-worker right away.
There are two Barge In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode. With Monitor Mode, the
caller Barging In can listen to another user’s conversation but cannot participate. With Speech Mode, the caller
Barging In can listen and join another user’s conversation.
CAUTION
Unauthorized intrusion on calls using this feature may be interpreted as an
invasion of privacy.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Refer to the Default Settings chart in the back of this book.
•
108 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Barge In
Programming
Start
In 0401:5, enter 0.
No
This also disables the
Barge In display.
Should extension
being Barged In on
hear warning tones?
Yes
In 0401:5, enter 1.
In 0406:65, enter 0
No
Should an extension
be allowed to initiate
Barge In?
Yes
In 0406:65, enter 1.
In 0406:66, enter 0.
No
Should an extension
be called to receive
Barge in?
Yes
In 0406:66, enter 1.
In 0406:44, enter 0.
Speech
Should Barge In use
Speech Mode or
Monitor (Silent
Monitor) Mode?
Monitor
In 0406:44, enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 0405:61, enter 0
Play Once
When a user Barges
In, should the Barge
In tone play once or
repeat?
Repeat
In 0405:61, set the
Barge In Tone Repeat
Time as required.
Should extensions
have single-digit
Barge In access?
Yes
In 0512:2, assign a
single digit code for
Barge In.
Yes
In 1006, assign a
function key as a
Barge In key (code
1019).
No
Should extensions
have one-button
Barge In access?
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 109
Features B-D
Barge In
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 5: Barge In Tone
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Barge In Tone. If disabled, this also turns off the Barge In display at the
called extension.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 61, Barge In Tone Repeat Time
After a user Barges In, the system repeats the Barge In tone after this interval. Normally, you should disable this timer by entering 0.
0406 - COS Options, Item 44: Barge In Mode
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable the Barge In Speech Mode (0) or Monitor Mode (1) at the initiating extension (i.e., Barge In initiator).
0406 - COS Options, Item 65: Barge In, Initiate
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge In at the initiating extension (i.e.,
Barge In initiator).
0406 - COS Options, Item 66: Barge In, Receive
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge In at the receiving extension (i.e.,
Barge In receive).
0512 - Single Digit Service Code Setup
Use this option to set up Item 02 for single digit Barge In. For example, you can unassign Item 05 (Call
Waiting/Camp On) and use digit 2 for Barge In. Be careful when you change this item that you don’t inadvertently disable any essential dialing function (such as Voice Mail or Message Waiting).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Barge In (code 1019).
Related Features
Conference
An extension user cannot Barge In on a Conference.
Intercom
An extension user cannot Barge In on an Intercom call if one of the Intercom callers is using Handsfree
Answerback. Both Intercom parties must have either lifted the handset or pressed SPK.
Off Hook Signaling
If the system has Automatic Off Hook Signaling, an extension user can Barge In on an Intercom call only
if the second extension appearance is busy or ringing.
Privacy (Data)
Privacy blocks Barge In attempts.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Barge In operation.
Operation
To Barge In after calling a busy extension:
The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before you can Barge In.
Listen for busy/ring or busy tone.
1.
Call busy extension.
2.
Press Barge In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1019).
To Barge in without first calling the busy extension:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 810.
OR
Press Barge In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1019).
3.
Dial busy extension.
110 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Coverage
Call Coverage
Please refer to the Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage
on page 368 for information on this feature.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 111
Features B-D
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Base software prior to 1.2R uses
different dial codes.
COS control for reminder messages
requires system software 2.13 Base,
2.18 EXCPRU or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
System software prior to 3.04 uses
different dial codes.
COS control over reminder message
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension. Call Forwarding ensures
that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area. The types of Call Forwarding are:
Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered
•
Calls to the extension forward when busy or not answered (requires system software 3.04 or higher).
Call Forwarding Immediate
•
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings.
Call Forwarding with Both Ringing
•
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the forwarded extension
ring (not for Voice Mail).
Call Forwarding when Unanswered
•
Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer).
Personal Answering Machine Emulation
•
Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Turn to "Voice Mail" for more.
Call Forwarding will reroute calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another extension. The extension user must enable Call Forwarding from their phone. To redirect calls while a user is at another phone, use "Call
Forwarding with Follow Me". A periodic VAU announcement may remind users that their calls are forwarded.
Conditions
(A.) Normally, the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension 316 forwards to
318, and 318 in turn forwards to 320. Calls to 316 route to 318. Calls to 318 route to 320. The system does allow a single chain, however, if the second extension in the chain is forwarded off-premise (*46 + trunk access
code + destination telephone number).
(B.) Periodic reminder message requires a Voice Announce Unit (VAU) Module.
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
112 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
telemanuals.com
Features B-D
Call Forwarding
Programming
— For Older Systems —
Start
No
In 0406 Item 23,
enter 0.
Should extension be able to
use Call Forwarding with Both
Ringing (Service Code*27)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 23,
enter 1.
(Optional) For one-button access, in
1006 assign a Call Forwarding with
Both Ringing key (code 1000).
No
In 0406 Item 31,
enter 0.
Should extension be able to use
Call Forwarding when Busy
(Service Code *22)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 31,
enter 1.
(Optional) For one-button
access, in 1006 assign a Call
Forwarding When Busy key
(code 1002).
In 0406 Item 32,
enter 0.
No
Should an Extension be able to use Call
Forwarding when Unanswered (Service
Code*26)?
Yes
In 0405 Item 1, set the Delayed Call
forwarding Time. Unanswered calls
forward after this interval.
Do you want one-button access to
call Forwarding Immediately
(Service Code *24)?
In 0406 Item 32,
enter 1.
(Optional) For one-button access, in
1006 assign a Call Forwarding when
Unanswered key (code 1003).
Yes
In 1006, assign a Call Forwarding
Immediately key (code 1055).
No
IN 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Stop
FEATURES 113
Features B-D
Call Forwarding
Programming (Cont’d)
— For Current Systems —
Start
In 0406:23, enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to use Call
Forwarding with Both
Ringing?
Yes
In 0406:23, enter 1.
In 0406:31, enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Call Forwarding
when Busy?
Yes
In 0406:31, enter 1.
In 0406:32, enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to use Call
Forwarding when
Unanswered?
Yes
In 0406:32, enter 1.
In 0405:1. set the Delayed
Call Forwarding Time.
Unanswered calls forward
after this interval.
Do you want one-button
access to the Call
Forwarding setup code (*2)?
Yes
In 1006, assign a
Call Forwarding key
(code 1080).
No
In 0419:3, enter 0.
No
Should extension
hear the periodic
reminder message?
Yes
In 0419:3, enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
114 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 1: Delayed Call Forwarding Time
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For an unanswered call, Call Forwarding when Unanswered
occurs after this interval.
0406 - COS Options, Item 23: Call Forwarding (Both Ringing)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call Forwarding
with Both Ringing.
0406 - COS Options, Item 31: Call Forwarding (When Busy)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call Forwarding
when Busy.
0406 - COS Options, Item 32, Call Forwarding (When Unanswered)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call Forwarding
when Unanswered.
0419 - COS Options (Part B), Item 3: VAU Reminder Message
Enable (1) or disable (0) the VAU reminder messages. This option requires system software 3.04 or higher.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
(Current Systems)
Assign a function key for Call Forwarding setup code *2 (code 1080).
(Older Systems)
Assign function keys for:
- Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (code 1000)
- Call Forwarding when Busy (code 1002)
- Call Forwarding when Unanswered (code 1003)
- Call Forwarding Immediately (code 1055)
Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Fixed Call Forwarding is a permanent type of forwarding that automatically reroutes calls under certain
condition — without any user action. User entered Call Forwarding overrides Fixed Call Forwarding.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
An extension user can forward their calls to an off-premise location.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
While away from their desk, a user can redirect their calls to a co-worker’s extension.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Override Call Forwarding or DND at another extension.
Department Calling
An extension user cannot forward their calls to a Department number.
Do Not Disturb
If an extension user activates DND option 4, the system prevents other extensions from forwarding calls
to them. If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4, callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding operation.
Voice Announce Unit
The periodic reminder message requires a Voice Announce Unit (VAU).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 115
Features B-D
Call Forwarding
Operation
(Current Systems)
To activate or cancel Call Forwarding:
1.
Press idle CALL key (or lift handset) + Dial *2
OR
Press Call Forwarding key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1080).
2.
Dial Call Forwarding condition:
1 = Personal Answering Machine Emulation (then skip to step 4 - refer also to "Voice Mail").
2 = Busy or not answered
4 = Immediate
6 = Not answered
7 = Immediate with simultaneous ringing (not for Voice Mail)
0 = Cancel
3.
Dial destination extension, Voice Mail master number or press Voice Mail key.
You cannot forward to a Department Group pilot number. Once you forward, only the destination user can place an Intercom call to you.
4.
Dial Call Forwarding type:
2 = All calls
3 = Outside calls only
4 = Intercom calls only
5.
Press SPK to hang up (hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated.
(Older Systems)
To activate or cancel Call Forwarding:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial Call Forwarding code:
*27 for Forward with Both Ringing
Transfers ring destination immediately
Intercom calls ring both extensions
Calls do not forward when extension busy
*22 for Forward when Busy
*26 for Forward when Unanswered (delayed)
*24 for Forward All Calls Immediately
OR
Press Call Forwarding key.
PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1000 for Forward with Both Ringing.
PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1002 for Forward when Busy
PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1003 for Forward when Unanswered
PGM 1006 or SC 851: code 1055 for Forward All Calls Immediately
When you enable Call Forwarding, your Call Forwarding key flashes slowly. If you don’t have a
Call Forwarding key, DND flashes slowly.
116 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding
Operation (Cont’d)
3.
4.
Dial 1 plus extension to enable; dial 0 to disable.
DND flashes slowly.
Your Call Forwarding destination must be an installed extension. It cannot be a Department
Group pilot number.
Once you activate Call Forwarding, only your Call Forwarding destination can place an Intercom call to you.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
You’ll hear stutter dial tone when to place a new call.
(Older Systems)
To cancel Call Forwarding if you don’t know the mode enabled:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial *20.
This is the universal cancel code. It also cancels Call Forward Follow Me, Personal Greeting,
Park and Page (VAU) and Selectable Display Messaging.
3.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 117
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Description
124i
☞
Available.
-
Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise
requires Base 1.2N or higher or any
version of EXCPRU.
Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining
requires Base 4.02 and EXCPRU
4.02 or higher.
-
384i ☞
-
-
Available— system software prior to
3.04 has different programming
options.
Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise
available in all versions.
Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining
requires system software 3.07.12 or
higher.
Fixed Call Forwarding is a type of forwarding that is permanently in force at an extension. Calls to an extension
with Fixed Call Forwarding enabled automatically reroute — without any user action. Unlike normal Call Forwarding (which is turned on and off by extension users), Fixed Call Forwarding is set by the administrator in system programming. Fixed Call Forwarding complements Voice Mail, for example. The administrator can
program Fixed Call Forwarding to send a user’s unanswered calls to their Voice Mail mailbox. Each individual
user no longer has to manually set this operation.
In system programming, the administrator can set the Fixed Call Forwarding destination and type for each extension and virtual extension. The forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise extension port or Voice Mail
port. The Fixed Call Forwarding Types are:
Fixed Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (Program 1027 Option 1)
•
Fixed Call Forwarding when Unanswered (Program 1027 Option 2)
•
Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate (Program 1027 Option 3)
•
Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered (Program 1027 Option 4)
•
Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise (Program 1030)
•
Fixed Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:
Intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions
•
Calls routed from the Automated Attendant (VAU) or Voice Mail
•
Direct Inward Lines
•
DISA, DID and tie line calls to the forwarded extension
•
Transferred calls
•
Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining
Fixed Call Forward Chaining allows Fixed Call Forwards to loop from one extension to the next. For example,
you could have the chain 301 ☛ 302 ☛ 303 ☛ 304 set up for Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy. If extension
301 is busy, calls to 301 route to 302. If 302 is also busy, the calls route to 303 and so on. Chaining allows you
to set up very basic hunting between co-workers.
Keep the following in mind when setting up Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining:
If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining forms a complete Call Forwarding loop (i.e., 301 ☛ 302 ☛ 303
•
☛ 301), the system rings the last extension in the chain (303). It does not complete the loop.
If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining finds an extension with user-implemented Call Forwarding in the mid•
dle of a chain, it rings that extension. It does not continue routing to the other extensions in the chain.
If one of the extensions in a Fixed Call Forwarding chain has its fixed option set for Both Ringing (1),
•
the system rings that extension. It does not continue routing to the other extensions in the chain.
The receiving extension’s display shows:
•
STA AAA
AAA is the extension that initially placed the call.
TRANSFER<< STA BBB BBB is the first extension in the Fixed Call Forwarding chain.
118 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Description(Cont’d)
Conditions
(384i Prior to 3.04 Only) Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate (Program 1027 Type 3) overrides Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy (Program 1029). Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy (Program 1029) overrides Fixed Call
Forwarding with Both Ringing (Program 1027 Type 1).
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
Programming
Refer to the flowcharts on the next two pages.
➣
➣
➣
➣
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 1: Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For an unanswered call, Fixed Call Forwarding When Unanswered occurs after this interval.
1027 - Fixed Call Forwarding Setup
For an extension port, assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0-4) and the destination extension port.
Available types are:
0 = Fixed Call Forwarding off
1 = Fixed Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (do not use for Voice Mail ports)
2 = Fixed Call Forwarding when Unanswered
3 = Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate
4 = Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered
Prior to 384i system software 3.04, type 4 was not available.
(384i Prior to 3.04 Only) 1029 - Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy
For an extension port, assign the destination extension port for Fixed Call Forwarding When Busy. Any
number of extensions can have the same Fixed Call Forwarding destination. This program is not available with system software 3.04 or higher.
1030 - Fixed Call Forwarding Off Premise
For each extension port, assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number (up to 24 digits). Be sure to include the trunk access code.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 119
telemanuals.com
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 1027, assign
the destination
port and enter 3.
Immediate
Which Fixed Call Forwarding
mode do you want:
- Both Ringing
- Unanswered
- Immediate
- Unanswered/Busy
- Off-premise?
Unanswered
or Busy
Off-premise
In 1027, assign
the destination
port and enter 4.
See A
below.
Does Forwarding
When Unanswered
occur after the proper
delay interval?
No
In 0405:1, enter the
correct Delayed Call
Forwarding Time.
This option is not
intended for Voice Mail.
Both
Ringing
In 1027, assign
the destination
port and enter 1.
Unanswered
In 1027, assign
the destination
port and enter 2.
A
In 1030, assign the
destination port and
enter the off-premise
telephone number.
In 0901:31, enable loop
supervision (1) for each
trunk that should be able
to use Fixed Call
Forwarding Off-Premise.
Stop
120 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Programming (Cont’d)
384i Prior to System Software 3.04 Only
Start
Do you want Forwarding
When Busy?
Yes
In 1029, assign the
destination port for each
extension port.
No
In 1027, enter the
destination port and enter
Type 3.
Immediate
Do you want Forwarding With
Both Ringing, When
Unanswered or Immediate?
Both Ringing
In 1027, assign the
destination port and enter
Type 1.
Unanswered
In 1027, enter the
destination port and enter
Type 2.
Does Forwarding When
Unanswered occur after the
proper delay interval?
Yes
No
In 0405 Item 1, enter the
correct Delayed Call
Forwarding Time.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 121
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
When a call is Fixed Call Forwarded, the display at the destination shows from which extension the call
was routed.
Call Forwarding
User entered Call Forwarding overrides Fixed Call Forwarding.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
An extension user can forward their calls to an outside telephone number.
Multiple Directory Numbers
Virtual extension numbers follow Fixed Call Forwarding.
Operation
None
122 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Description
124i
☞
Available.
-
DSL sets require Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available — system software prior
to 3.04 uses different procedures.
DSL sets require system software
3.06.02 or higher.
Off-Premise (OPX) Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By
enabling OPX Call Forwarding, the user can stay in touch by having the system forward their calls while they
are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any phone number the user enters, such as a car
phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can route the off-site phone number
over a specific trunk or through a trunk group, Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing.
Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:
Intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions
Calls routed from the Automated Attendant (VAU) or Voice Mail1
Direct Inward Lines1
DISA, DID and tie line calls to the forwarded extension1
Transferred calls1
•
•
•
•
•
OPX Call Forwarding does not reroute "Ring Group" calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Programs 0909 and 0910).
Conditions
(A.) Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or ground
start trunks.
(B.) The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 24 digits.
(C.) Normally, the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension 316 forwards to
318, and 318 in turn forwards to 320. Calls to 316 route to 318. Calls to 318 route to 320. The system does allow a single chain, however, if the second extension in the chain is forwarded off-premise (*46 + trunk access
code + destination telephone number).
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
1
Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect
supervision enabled (see Programming above).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 123
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0406 Item 128,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able to set
up Call Forwarding
Off-Premise?
Yes
In 0406 Item 128,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1006, do not assign
a function key code
1081.
No
Should extension have one-touch
access to the Call Forwarding
(Device) setup code?
Yes
In 1006, do assign a
function key code
1081.
In 0901 Item 31, enable loop
supervision (1) for each trunk
that should be able to use Call
Forwarding Off-Premise.
Stop
Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Fixed Call Forwarding can automatically forward an extensions calls to an outside number.
Toll Restriction
The outside number OPX Call Forwarding dials can only be a number normally allowed by the forwarded extension’s Toll Restriction.
Voice Announce Unit (VAU)
In systems with a VAU, callers to an extension forwarded off-premise hear, "Please hold on, your call is
being rerouted."
124 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 128: Off-Premise Call Forwarding
➣
➣
➣
In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) setting up Call Forwarding Off-Premise at the
extension. This option requires system software 3.04 or higher.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 31: Loop Supervision
Enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding Off-Premise.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programmable Function Keys
For one-touch access to the Call Forwarding Device setup code (*4), assign a function key for Call Forwarding (Device). This option requires system software 3.04 or higher.
Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key + Dial *4.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1081)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset Dial *4.
2.
Dial 6 + trunk access code.
Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 804 + Line Group (1-9, 01-99 or 001128) or #9 + Line number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5.
3.
Dial the outside number to which your calls should be forwarded.
4.
(Keyset only) Press HOLD.
5.
Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up if you dialed *4 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes.
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key + Dial *4.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1081)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial *4.
2.
Dial 6 + HOLD.
3.
Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up if you dialed *4 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key stops flashing.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 125
Features B-D
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Operation (Cont’d)
(384i Prior to System Software 3.04)
To forward your calls off-premise:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial *46.
3.
Dial the access code for the trunk over which your call should route:
#9 and the trunk number (001-128) for a specific trunk
•
804 and trunk group number (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128)
•
9 for ARS or Trunk Group Routing
•
4.
Dial the destination phone number.
To enter a pause in the destination phone number, press MIC.
5.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
You hear stutter dial tone when you make a new call.
When a co-worker calls your extension, the system will automatically route your call to the number you enter. If the called number is busy, your caller hears busy tone. If the called number is prevented by the system (through ARS or Toll Restriction), your caller hears reorder tone.
(384i Prior to System Software 3.04)
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial *20
This is the universal cancel code. It also cancels on-premise Call Forwarding, Call Forward Follow Me, Personal Greeting, Park and Page (VAU) and Selectable Display Messaging.
3.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
126 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available
Available — system software prior
to 3.04 uses different procedures.
While at a co-worker’s desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect their calls to the co-worker’s
extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-worker’s desk longer than expected. To prevent losing
important calls, the employee can activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me from the co-worker’s phone.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls from the initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
Programming
Start
No
In 0406 Item 26,
enter 0.
Should extension be able
to use Call Forwarding
with Follow Me?
Yes
In 0406 Item 26,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Prior to 384i system software 3.04,
you could enable a Call Forwarding
Follow Me key (code 1001).
Should extension
have one-button
access to the Call
Forwarding (Station)
setup code *2?
Yes
In 1006, assign a Call
Forwarding (Station) key
(code (1080).
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 127
Features B-D
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options,, Item 26: Call Forwarding with Follow Me
➣
➣
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) the setting of Call Forwarding with
Follow Me.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
(384i Prior to 3.04) 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Call Forwarding with Follow Me (code 1001).
(384i 3.04 or higher and 124i) 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for one-touch access to the Call Forwarding (Station) setup code *2 (code 1080).
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding with Follow Me operation.
Operation
To activate Call Forward Follow Me:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial *2.
OR
Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1080).
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial *2.
2.
Dial 3 + Dial your own extension number (i.e., the source).
3.
Dial Call Forwarding Type:
2 = All Calls
3 = Outside calls only
4 = Intercom calls only
4.
SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1.
Your Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding
is activated.
To cancel Call Forward Follow Me:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial *2.
OR
Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1080).
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial *2.
2.
Dial 0.
3.
SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed *2 in step 1.
Your Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key goes out.
128 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Operation (Cont’d)
384i System Software Prior to 3.04
To activate Call Forwarding with Follow Me:
Use this procedure at the extension that will receive Forwarded calls (destination).
1.
At keyset, press Follow Me key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1001).
OR
At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial *23.
OR
At single line set, lift handset and dial *23.
2.
Dial 1 to set Call Forwarding.
3.
Dial the extension who’s calls you want to intercept (source).
Repeat steps 1-3 to enable Call Forwarding with Follow Me for additional extensions.
4.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
384i System Software Prior to 3.04
To cancel or reroute Call Forwarding with Follow Me:
1.
At keyset, press Follow Me key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1001)
OR
At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial *23.
OR
At single line set, lift handset and dial *23.
2.
Dial 0.
3.
Dial another extension number to change the source.
OR
Dial 0 to cancel Call Forwarding.
4.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
384i System Software Prior to 3.04
To cancel Call Forwarding with Follow Me using Universal Cancel:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial *20.
This is the universal cancel code. It also cancels Call Forward Follow Me, Personal Greeting,
Park and Page (VAU) and Selectable Display Messaging.
3.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 129
Features B-D
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension. This is helpful, for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
Programming
Start
No
In 0406 Item 4,
enter 0.
Should extension be
able to initiate Call
Forwarding/DND
Override?
Yes
In 0406 Item 4,
enter 1.
No
Should extension
have one-button
access to Call
Forwarding/DND
Override?
Yes
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, assign a Call
Forwarding/DND Override
key (code 1022).
Stop
130 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 4: Call Forwarding/DND Override
➣
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to initiate Call Forwarding/DND
Override.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override (code 1022).
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding/DND Override operation.
Operation
To override an extension’s Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb:
1.
Call the forwarded or DND extension.
2.
Press Override key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1022).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 131
Features B-D
Call Timer
Call Timer
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Call Timer lets a keyset user time their trunk calls on the telephone display. This helps users that must keep
track of their time on the phone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call Timer begins as soon as the user answers the
call. For outgoing trunk calls, the Call Timer starts about 10 seconds after the user dials the last digit.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 46,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to use Call
Timer?
Yes
In 0406 Item 46,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Stop
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options, Item 46: Call Timer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use the Call Timer.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
Disabling the trunk name seize display (Program 0406:Item 37=0) also disables the Call Timer.
Operation
To time your trunk calls:
1.
Place trunk call.
The timer starts automatically.
132 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Call Waiting / Camp On
Call Waiting / Camp On
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without hanging up.
When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicating the waiting call. The
call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call Waiting helps busy extension users know when
they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 24,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
Camp On to a busy
extension?
Yes
In 0406 Item 24,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
This key is also used for Callback and
Trunk Queuing.
Should extension
have one-button
Camp On?
Yes
In 1006, assign a Camp On
key (code 1020).
No
Is 10 seconds an
adequate time between
Call Waiting tones?
No
In 0405 Item 4, change the
Call Waiting Tone timer.
Yes
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 133
Features B-D
Call Waiting / Camp On
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 4: Call Waiting Tone Timer
➣
➣
➣
Use this option to set the interval between Call Waiting tones. This timer also sets the interval between
Off Hook Signaling alerts.
0406 - COS Options (Part A), Item 24: Extension Camp On
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to Camp-On to a busy
extension.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Camp-On (code 1020). This key is also the Callback key.
Related Features
Callback
If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp On to a Callback.
Dual Line Appearance/Off Hook Signaling
If an extension busy on a call has Off Hook Signaling, an incoming Intercom calls rings the idle second
line appearance.
Off Hook Signaling
The Off Hook Signaling Enhancements give an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 2 to
Camp On.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Call Waiting/Camp On operation.
Transfer
An extension user may be able to Transfer a call to a busy extension.
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Trunk Queuing lets an extension user Camp-On to a trunk.
Operation
To Camp-On to a busy extension:
1.
Call busy extension.
You must hear busy tone.
2.
Dial 2 or press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
3.
Do not hang up.
To Camp-On to a trunk, see Trunk Queuing.
To cancel a Camp-On request:
1.
Hang up.
2.
At keyset, press idle CALL key and Dial 870.
OR
At keyset, press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
OR
At single line set, lift handset and dial 870.
To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone:
Listen for Camp On beep.
1.
Hookflash and dial 894.
To repeatedly split between the two calls.
134 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Callback
Callback
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
When an extension user calls a co-worker that doesn’t answer, they can leave a Callback request for a return call.
The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back, hoping to find it idle.
The system processes Callback requests as follows:
1.
Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.
Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time.
2.
When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.
3.
Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy) extension B.
If caller A doesn’t answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.
4.
As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.
Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset. When Callback Automatic
Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line appearance to answer the Callback ring.
Conditions
(A.) An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time.
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 14: Callback Automatic Answer
Enable (1) or disable (0) Callback Automatic Answer.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 6: Callback Ring Duration Time
Set the duration of the Callback ring (0-64800 seconds).
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 29: Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels Callback and Trunk Queuing requests after this interval (0-64800 seconds).
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Callback (code 1020). This key is also the Camp-On key.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 135
Features B-D
Callback
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0401 Item 14,
enter 0.
No
Should users be able
to just lift the handset
to answer the
Callback ring?
Yes
In 0401 Item 14,
enter 1.
In 0405 Item 6, set
how long Callback
rings an extension.
In 0405 Item 29, enter
the interval after which
the system cancels
Callback requests.
This is also the Camp On key.
Should extension user
have one-button access
to Callback?
Yes
In 1006, assign a
Callback key (code
1020).
No
Stop
136 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Callback
Related Features
Call Waiting (Camp-On)
If an extension user initiates a Callback but does not hang up, their extension Camps-On to the busy
extension.
Programmable Function Keys
Function Keys simplify Callback operation.
Operation
To place a Callback:
1.
Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension.
2.
Dial 2 or press Callback key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
3.
Hang up.
4.
Lift handset when busy extension calls you back.
If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through after your
co-worker uses their phone for the first time.
If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly busy extension when you lift the handset. If you don’t have Callback Automatic Answer, you must press the
ringing line appearance to place the call.
To cancel a Callback:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key and Dial 870.
OR
At keyset, press Camp-On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
OR
At single line set, lift handset and dial 870.
To test Callback at your keyset:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 899.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
4.
When you hear two beeps, press SPK again.
You hear synthesized Music on Hold.
5.
Press SPK to hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 137
Features B-D
Caller ID
Caller ID
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
Available
Multiple Message Format requires
system software 1.2N.
There are 200 Caller ID bins
available, numbered 000-199.
Automatically outdialing the Caller
ID Block Code (*67) is available.
Base 1.2R and earlier outdialed the
non-standard code *6.
Prior to Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18,
the Caller ID display can be up to 10
digits. In Base 2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18
or higher, the display can be up to 12
digits (for non-ACD calls).
384i ☞
-
-
-
Available
Multiple Message Format type codes 4
(number absence) and 8 (name
absence) require system software 3.04.
There are 1000 Caller ID bins
available, numbered 000-999.
Automatically outdialing the Caller
ID Block Code (*67) requires
system software 3.06.02 or higher.
Prior to system software 3.06.09, the
Caller ID display can be up to 10
digits. In 3.06.09 and higher, the
display can be up to 12 digits (for
non-ACD calls).
Caller ID allows a display keyset to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called the Directory Number
or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is available as either a post-answer or pre-answer display.
Normally, the system provides the Caller ID post-answer display. With the post-answer display, the user sees the
incoming caller’s number/name after they answer the call. With the pre-answer display, the user can preview the
caller’s number before picking up the ringing line. The pre-answer display is only available if the system has
Automatic Handsfree for incoming line/loop keys disabled. Refer to the table on the following for the available
Caller ID displays.
Caller ID supports the telco’s Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND) service,
when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages) between the first and second
ring burst of an incoming call. There are two types of Caller ID message formats currently available: Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format. With Single Message Format, the telco sends only the caller’s phone
number (DN). The DN is either 7 or 10 digits long. In Multiple Message Format, the telco sends the DN and the
caller’s name. The DN for this format is also 7 or 10 digits long, and the name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII characters.
In 384i system software prior to 3.06.09 and 124i, the telephone’s display can show up to 10 Caller ID digits. In
384i 3.06.09 and higher, the display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits (for non-ACD calls).
Once installed and programmed, Caller ID is enabled for all types of trunk calls, including:
Ring Group calls
Calls transferred from another extension
Calls transferred from the VAU Module (via the VAU Automated Attendant)
Calls transferred from Voice Mail (screened or unscreened)
Direct Inward Lines (DILs)
•
•
•
•
•
Caller ID temporarily stores 16 calls (total of abandoned and unanswered). New calls replace old calls when the
buffer fills.
138 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Caller ID
Description (Cont’d)
Caller ID Displays
Abbreviation
Description
Absence code
Absence Reason Code P displays as PRIVATE
Absence Reason Code O displays as OUT OF AREA
CID-num
CID-name
Trunk name
Caller ID number (provided by telco)
Caller ID name (provided by telco)
Trunk name provided by phone system (Program 0903)
NN:NN:NN
HH:MM:SS
YY:MM:DD
System’s Caller Timer display
System Time
System Date
Condition
Row
Pre-answer
Display
Post-Answer
Display
Display when
Reviewing
With Caller ID name and
number
1
CID-num
CID-num NN:NN:NN
CID-num HH:MM:SS
2
CID-name
CID-name
CID-name
With Caller ID number
Without Caller ID name
With name absence code
1
Trunk name
Trunk name NN:NN:NN
CID-num
2
CID-num
CID-num
HH:MM:SS
YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number
With Caller ID name
With number absence code
1
Trunk name
Trunk name NN:NN:NN
CID-name
2
CID-name
CID-name
HH:MM:SS
YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number
Without Caller ID name
With number & name
absence codes
1
Trunk name
Trunk name NN:NN:NN
Name Absence Code
2
Name Absence
Code
Name Absence Code
HH:MM:SS
YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number
Without Caller ID name
With number absence code
1
Trunk name
2
Number
Absence Code
Number Absence Code
HH:MM:SS
YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number
Without Caller ID name
With name absence code
1
Trunk name
Trunk name
NN:NN:NN
Name Absence Code
2
Name Absence
Code
Name Absence Code
HH:MM:SS
YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number
Without Caller ID name
Without any absence code
1
CID-num
CID-num nn:nn:nn
Trunk name
2
Ringing
NO CALLER INFO
HH:MM:SS
YY:MM:DD
Without time and date
With absence reason
1
-
-
Trunk name
2
-
-
Absence code
1
-
-
Trunk name
2
-
-
NO CALLER INFO
Without time and date
Without absence reason
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Trunk name NN:NN:NN Number Absence Code
FEATURES 139
Features B-D
Caller ID
Description (Cont’d)
Outputting Caller ID Data
The system includes the Caller ID data on the SMDR report. The report provides the incoming call’s DN in the
DIALED NUMBER field. The CLASS field shows PIN (just like all other incoming calls).
Caller ID data can also output to a PC or other type of computer through a DCI Module or 3-DCI Unit. This allows
for off-line database lookups. In a customer service department, for example, the computer could search for a caller’s
records and display their account status even before a customer service representative picked up the phone.
Hardware Considerations
In 384i, Caller ID requires Caller ID PCB P/N 92188, which is an eight-circuit daughter board that installs on an
8ATRU Loop Start Trunk PCB. In 124i, Caller ID requires Caller ID PCB P/N 92012, which is a four circuit daughter
board that installs on a 4ATRU Loop Start Trunk PCB. In either case the PCB provides Caller ID only for the trunks
on the ATRU PCB into which it is plugged.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
140 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Caller ID
Programming
Start
No
In 0401 Item 30,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 123,
enter 0.
No
No
In 0406 Item 124,
enter 0.
Should the system block
outgoing Caller ID
information?
Yes
Should an extension's display
show incoming Caller ID
information?
Yes
Should an extension be
allowed to edit the Caller ID
Table?
Yes
Should an extension have
Caller ID pre-answer display
capability?
Yes
In 0401 Item 30,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 123,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 124,
enter 1.
Disable Automatic Handsfree
for line/loop key calls (0406
Item 125 = 0).
No
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1006, do not assign a
Caller ID edit key (code
1-73).
No
Should extension have
one-touch access to editing
the Caller ID Table?
Yes
In 1006, assign a Caller ID
Edit key (code 1073).
Continued on
the following
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 141
Features B-D
Caller ID
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from the
previous page.
No
In 0921 Item 2, enter 0.
In 2401: Start = 0 and
Length = 1000.
Yes
Yes
Should all the Caller ID Table
entries be assigned to Tenant
Group 1?
No
In 0921 Item 2, enter 1.
In 2401, assign Caller ID Table
entry space as required.
In 2402, enter data in the
Caller ID Table as required.
Initially, there is no data in the
Caller ID Table.
In 2403, enter 0 (no DCI
software port assigned as
the Caller ID printer port).
Should a trunk be able to
receive and process Caller
ID information?
No
Should the system output
Caller ID data to a PC or
computer?
Yes
In 2403, assign a DCI
software port as the
Caller ID printer port.
Stop
142 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Caller ID
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 30: Block Outgoing Caller ID
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a
user places a call. If allowed (i.e., block enabled), the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block
code *67 before the user dialed digits. If prevented (i.e., block disabled), the system outdials the call just
as it was dialed by the user.
0406 - COS Options, Item 123: Caller ID Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to display incoming
Caller ID name/number information.
0406 - COS Options, Item 124: Edit Caller ID
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to edit the stored
Caller ID information.
0406 - COS Options, Item 125: Automatic Handsfree Incoming
To allow for the Caller ID pre-answer display, first disable (0) Automatic Handsfree for line/loop key
calls. (To enable Automatic Handsfree, also enable [1] Program 0401 Item 6.)
0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B), Item 2: Caller ID Enable
Enable (1) or disable (0) a trunk’s ability to receive Caller ID name/number information.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
1006 - Programmable Function Keys
Program a Caller ID Edit key to (code 1073) to allow easier editing of the system’s Caller ID tables.
2401 - Caller ID Table Setup
For each Tenant Group (1-4), define the starting address and length of the group’s Caller ID table.
2402 - Caller ID Table Entries
Use the Caller ID Table to associate an incoming Caller ID number with a name. When the Caller ID call
rings in, the system searches this table for a match. If it finds the number in the table, it sends the associated name to the telephone’s display.
2403 - Caller ID Printer Port
Assign the DCI Software Port number the system will use to output Caller ID information.
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
ARS can block outgoing Caller ID information on a call-by-call basis. To do this, insert the Caller ID
block code (e.g., *67) in the ARS Dial Treatments.
Station Message Detail Recording
Caller ID information outputs on the SMDR report.
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
ANI/DNIS can use the Caller ID tables for routing. Refer to page 483 for more.
Operation
DISPLAYING THE INCOMING NUMBER
To display the name/number for your incoming call:
With Automatic Handsfree on Incoming Line/Loop Key Calls
1.
Press FLASH and the incoming line loop key.
If the Caller ID data includes the name, you can scroll left and right by pressing * and #.
2.
Press line/loop key to answer the call.
1.
2.
3.
Without Automatic Handsfree on Incoming Line/Loop Key Calls
Do not lift the handset.
Press line/loop key.
If the caller ID data includes the name, you can scroll left and right by pressing * and #.
Lift handset or press SPK to answer the call.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 143
Features B-D
Caller ID
Operation (Cont’d)
AUTOMATICALLY ADDING NEW NUMBERS TO THE CALLER ID TABLE
While on a call, to automatically store the Caller ID number shown on your display:
You can store the Caller ID data in the system’s Caller ID Table or in one of your One Touch keys.
1.
Press Caller ID Edit key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1073). You see: PERSONAL: 7 CO:2
2.
To store a number in a One Touch key:
z
Dial 7 (Personal). You see: ENTER BIN
z
Press DIAL.
z
Press One touch key that will store the Caller ID information.
z
(Optional — if name is not sent from telco) If you see ENTER NAME, enter the name you want
to associate with the stored number (see Entering Names below).
You cannot edit a name if it was sent from the telco.
To store a number in the company Caller ID table:
z
Dial 2 (Company).
If the caller ID Table is full, you see TABLE IS FULL.
z
Press DIAL and dial the bin number in which you want to store the number.
z
(Optional — if name is not sent from telco) If you see ENTER NAME, enter the name you want
to associate with the stored number (see Entering Names below).
You cannot edit a name if it was sent from the telco. Press DND to toggle between upper
and lower case letters.
Entering Names
When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as
shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the
first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to
enter a C, press DSS1 three times.
DSS1 = A-D
DSS2 = E-H
DSS3 = I-L
DSS4 = M-P
DSS5 = Q-T
DSS6 = U-Z
DSS7 = -- (hyphen)
DSS8 = - (space)
DSS9 = Extended ASCII
characters
DSS10 = Punctuation marks
CHECK saves text entry after
you select it.
Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and *
CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e.,
backspaces over previous entries)
Note:
You don’t have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after
your last entry.
144 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Caller ID
Operation (Cont’d)
MANUALLY CHANGING, DELETING OR ADDING NEW ENTRIES TO THE CALLER ID TABLE.
To add an entry to the Caller ID Table:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 146 or press Caller ID Edit key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1073). You see: CHG:2,DEL:3,NEW:6
3.
Dial 6 (for New). You see: ENTER NEW NUMBER
If you see TABLE IS FULL, you cannot add additional entries to the Caller ID Table.
4.
Enter the number you want to add to the Caller ID Table.
For wild card entries, press FLASH. This allows you to associate several phone numbers with
the same name. For example, 926-540(FLASH) would associate all numbers from 5400-5409 with
the same name.
5.
Press HOLD.
6.
Enter the name for the number you just added (see the following chart).
Entering Names
When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as
shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the
first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to
enter a C, press DSS1 three times.
DSS1 = A-D
DSS2 = E-H
DSS3 = I-L
DSS4 = M-P
DSS5 = Q-T
DSS6 = U-Z
DSS7 = -- (hyphen)
DSS8 = - (space)
DSS9 = Extended ASCII
characters
DSS10 = Punctuation marks
CHECK saves text entry after
you select it.
Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and *
CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e.,
backspaces over previous entries)
Note:
You don’t have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after
your last entry.
7.
8.
Press HOLD.
Return to step 3 to add another number to the Caller ID Table.
OR
Press HOLD to exit.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 145
Features B-D
Caller ID
Operation (Cont’d)
To change an entry in the Caller ID Table:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 146 or press Caller ID Edit key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1073). You see: CHG:2,DEL:3,NEW:6
3.
Dial 2 (for Change). You see: CHNG. BY NAME?:Y/N
To find a name entry in the Caller ID Table:
4.
z
Dial 9 (for Yes).
z
Enter the name you want to change (see the Entering Names table above) and press HOLD.
The system finds the first name that matches the letters you entered. To search for other names
with the same letters, press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼.
If you see NO MATCH, the name doesn’t exist.
z
Re-enter the highlighted name and press HOLD when you are done. You return to step 3.
You can quickly edit the number for the selected name by pressing CHECK.
OR
To find a number entry in the Caller ID Table:
z
Dial 6 (for No).
z
Dial the number you want to change and press HOLD.
z
Re-enter the highlighted number and press HOLD when you are done. You return to step 3.
You can quickly edit the name for the selected number by pressing CHECK.
5.
Press HOLD to exit.
To delete an entry from the Caller ID Table:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 146 or press Caller ID Edit key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1073). You see: CHG:2,DEL:3,NEW:6
3.
Dial 3 (for Delete). You see: DEL. BY NAME?:Y/N
OR
Press HOLD to exit.
To delete a name entry in the Caller ID Table:
4.
z
Dial 9 (for Yes).
z
Enter the name you want to delete (see the Entering Names table above) and press HOLD.
The system finds the first name that matches the letters you entered. To search for other names
with the same letters, press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼.
If you see NO MATCH, the name doesn’t exist.
z
When you find the name you want to delete, press HOLD. You see: ARE YOU SURE? Y/N
z
Dial 9 (Yes) to delete or selected name or 6 (No) to cancel the deletion. In either case, you return
to step 3.
You can quickly edit the number for the selected name by pressing CHECK.
OR
To delete a number in the Caller ID Table:
z
Dial 6 (for No).
z
Dial the number you want to delete and press HOLD.
When you find the number you want to delete, press HOLD. You see: ARE YOU SURE? Y/N
z
Dial 9 (Yes) to delete or selected number or 6 (No) to cancel the deletion. In either case, you return
to step 3.
You can quickly edit the name for the selected name by pressing CHECK.
146 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Caller ID
Operation (Cont’d)
CHECKING YOUR UNANSWERED CALLER ID CALLS
To check if any Caller ID calls rang your phone while you were away:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 148. If you missed any calls, you see: MISSED CALL C:2 E:3
The second row of your display shows the Caller ID number you missed. To see the name (if
sent from the telco), press CHECK.
If you missed more than one call while you were out, press VOL ▲ and VOL ▼ to see the list.
3.
To call the displayed number, dial 2 (Call).
OR
To erase the displayed number without returning the call, dial 3 (Erase).
4.
Press SPK to hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 147
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Answering
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
Available — 52 trunks.
Adjusting the sidetone for analog
trunks is not available.
Customizing CODEC Gain Types
and Trunk ring Tones requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Unanswered calls can overflow to
Voice Mail in Base 1.2R or higher
and all versions of EXCPRU.
Unanswered calls can overflow to
the VAU Automated Attendantin
Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
384i ☞
-
-
-
Available— 128 trunks.
Adjusting the sidetone for analog
trunks is available.
Customizing CODEC Gain Types
and Trunk Ring Tones requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
Unanswered calls can overflow to
Voice Mail in system software
3.05.15 or higher.
Unanswered calls can overflow to
the VAU Automated Attendant in
system software 3.07.10 or higher.
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunk) calls to meet the exact site requirements. This lets
trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. For additional information on making trunks ring, refer to the Ring Group feature.
Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for trunks. If the trunk is not answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group. This could help a secretary that covers calls for their boss. If the
boss doesn’t answer the call, it rings the secretary’s phone after a programmable interval.
Universal Answer
Universal Answer allows an employee to answer a call by going to any keyset and dialing a unique Universal Answer code. The employee doesn’t have to know the trunk number or dial any other codes to pick up the ringing
trunk. You’ll normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night Answer (see "Night Service"). When
a Universal Night Answer call rings the External Paging, an employee can answer the call from the first available phone. You might also want to use Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing is not adequate. After hearing the ringing over the Paging, an employee can
then easily pick up the call from a shop phone. See "Night Service" for more on Universal Night Answer.
Conditions
(A.) The system provides analog trunk CO service via ATRU PCBs. ATRU PCBs can connect to either loop
start or ground start CO lines. However, ground start operation requires the installation of additional
ATRU daughter boards. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details.
(B.) Analog Trunk (ATRU) PCBs do not require circuit type programming. In addition, the system automatically detects the ATRU ground start daughter boards, if installed.
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
148 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming
See also:
- Direct Inward Dialing
- Tie Lines.
Start
By default, system trunks are
loop start DTMF.
Is trunk other
than CO loop
start DTMF?
Refer to 0901 to
match the system to
the connected trunk.
Yes
No
In 0910, assign trunks to Ring Groups.
Trunks that ring extensions the same way
should be in the same Ring Group. A trunk
can be in only one Ring Group for each
Night Service mode.
If trunk is programmed to ring
extension, incoming access (set
in 0911/0912) is not required.
In 0911, set up the Trunk Access
Maps. A trunk can be in more
than one map. Each map sets
incoming/outgoing options.
In 0909, assign
extension to trunk's
Ring Group and
enter 0 (no ringing).
Not Ring
Should non-ringing
extension be able
to answer calls on
the trunk?
No
Should extension
ring for incoming
calls on trunk?
Ring
In 0909, assign
extension to trunk's
Ring Group and
enter 1 (ringing).
In 0912, assign extension
to Access Map that
prevents user from
answering trunk.
Yes
In 0912, assign
extension to Access
Map that allows user
to answer the trunk.
The flowchart on the
following page is for
ringing extensions only.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
In 0903, assign
names to trunks to
make incoming call
identification easier.
Continued
on next
page.
FEATURES 149
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0405:62, enter 0.
In 0919 for each
trunk, enter 127
(384i) or 15 (124i).
No
VAU Auto
Attendant
Do you want unanswered
calls to reroute?
Yes
In 0405:62, enter the DIL
No Answer Time (>0).
Should calls reroute to
a Ring Group, Voice
Mail or the VAU
Automated Attendant?
Ring
Group
In 0919 for each trunk,
enter the no-answer
Ring Group.
Voice Mail
In 2205 for each trunk, enter
the VAU message number.
In 0919 for each
trunk, enter 128
(384i) or 16 (124i).
When a user is on an
outside call, is the
sidetone level correct?
No
In 0129, adjust the sidetone
level for trunks connected
to ATRU PCB ports.
Yes
Do you want to
change the way calls
ring keysets?
Change the Ring Tone Range in
0902 amd 1001:2, the tones
within each range in 0111 and
the ring cadence in 1008:4.
Yes
No
Do you want to change
the way calls ring
single line telephones?
Yes
Change the settings for
1001:6 and 1008:4.
No
Assign a different CODEC
Gain Type in 0901:3. If
required, change the CODEC
gains in 0117.
In 0401:3, enter 0.
Trunks
No
Do you want to adjust the
gain (volume) for trunks or
single line telephones?
If a call rings longer than a
specified interval, should the
ring cadence change to a
unique "alarm" sound?
SLTs
Yes
Change the
settings in
1001:4.
In 0401:3, enter 1. Set
the interval in 0405:7.
Continued
on next
page.
150 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0306, enter 0 to
disable pre-ringing for
trunk calls.
For ringing extensions,
should extension ring
when line key starts
flashing or wait for the
system ring cycle?
Wait for
ring cycle
The system changes the ring
cadence for ringing calls after
this interval.
When line
key flashes
In 0306, enter 1 to
enable pre-ringing for
trunk calls.
In 0405:7, set the
Ring No Answer
Alarm Time interval.
Does ring cycle
start and stop
irregularly?
Yes
Check 0901:2 (Delayed
Ringing) and review settings
of 0114:15,16 and 17.
No
In 1006, do not
assign function keys
as line keys.
In 1006, do not program
function keys as loop keys
(code 1012 + trunk group).
No
No
Do you want one-button
incoming access to
each trunk?
Do you want loop
keys for trunk groups?
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Yes
Yes
In 1006, program function
keys as line keys (codes
0001-0128).
In 1006, program function keys
as looop keys (code 1012 +
trunk group).
Non-ringing loop keys require access
programming. Ringing loop keys
require Ring Group programming.
FEATURES 151
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming (Cont’d)
Universal Answer
Continued
from previous
page.
No
Stop
Do you want Universal
Answer capability?
Yes
Using Trunk Groups
assigned in 0905, in 0906
set up a routing table.
Universal Answer will answer the trunk if it is in the
extension's programmed route.
In 1015, assign extensions to
the routes set up in 0906.
No
In 0406 Item 126, enter 0.
Should extension be able
to dial the Universal
Answer code?
Yes
In 0406 Item 126, enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
152 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0111 - Trunk Ring Tone
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Customize the ring tones within each Ring Tone Range. Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks in 0902.
Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 0902 and the user settings made
with Service Code 820.
0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types assigned in 0901 Item 3.
(384i Only) 0129 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Sidetone Setting
Set the side level for analog trunks connected to ATRU PCB ports.
0306 - Pre-ringing Enable
Enable (1) or disable (0) pre-ringing for outside calls.
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 3: Incoming Call Ring No Answer Alarm
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Incoming Call RNA Alarm. If enabled, the ring cadence will change for a
call that rings longer than the interval set in 0405 Item 7.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 7: Ring No Answer Alarm Time
Set the Ring No Answer Alarm interval (0-64800 seconds). If a trunk rings a keyset longer than this interval, the system changes the ring cadence.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 62: DIL No Answer Time
If an incoming trunk call rings longer than this interval, it reroutes to the Ring Group set in Program 0919.
0406 - COS Options, Item 126: Universal Answer Code
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial the Universal
Answer code (#0).
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 2: Delayed Ringing
For each trunk, enable delayed ringing (0) or immediate ringing (1).
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 3: CODEC Gain Type
Set the CODEC Gain Type for each trunk. Use 0117 to customize the transmit and receive levels of each
CODEC Gain Type.
0902 - Trunk Ring Tone Range
Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks. Customize the tones within each Ring Tone Range in 0111. Trunks
ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 0902 and the settings made with either
Service Code 820 or Program 1001 Item 2.
0903 - Trunk Names
Assign names to trunks to make identifying incoming calls easier.
0905 - Trunk Groups
For Universal Answer, assign trunks to trunk groups (1-128) then go to Program 0906 below to set up
Trunk Group Routing.
0906 - Trunk Group Routing
For Universal Answer, set up trunk routes (1-64) and then go to Program 1015 below to assign the trunk
routes to extensions. An extension user can use Universal Answer to answer a call if the ringing trunk is
in its assigned route.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
To have trunks ring extensions, assign extensions to ring groups (1-128). For each extension in the Ring
Group, indicate if trunks should ring (1) or not ring (0).
0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
To have the trunks ring extensions, assign trunks to Ring Group.
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-128). This sets the access options for trunks. Note that Ring Group
programming overrides Access Map programming.
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-128) to extensions.
0919 - DIL No Answer Destination
If an incoming trunk call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time (Program 0405 Item 62), it routes to
the Ring Group you specify in this option. In 384i, enter 127 if the destination should be the VAU Automated Attendant or 128 if you want the destination to be Voice Mail. In 124i, enter 16 if the destination
should be Voice Mail or 15 if it should ring the VAU Automated Attendant.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 153
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Answering
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 2: Trunk Ring Tone
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 0902 and the settings made with
either Service Code 820 or Program 1001 Item 2. Also see Program 0902.
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 4: CODEC Gain Type
Adjust the gain settings for single line telephones.
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 6: Incoming Ring for
500/2500 Sets
Use this option along with Program 1008 Item 4 to change the way calls ring single line telephones.
(Note that changing Program 1008 Item 4 affects the way calls ring keysets as well.)
1005 - Class of Service
For Universal Answer, assign a Class of Service (1-15) that enables Program 0406 Item 126 to an extension.
1015 - Universal Answer/Auto-Answer
For Universal Answer, assign trunk routes (1-64) set in Program 0906 to extensions. An extension user
can use Universal Answer to answer a call if the ringing trunk is in its assigned route.
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 4: Ring Cycle for Keysets
Use this option to change the way calls ring keysets. Use this option along with Program 1001 Item 6 to
change the way calls ring single line telephones.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
To have outside calls ring specific keys, assign trunks to line keys (codes 001-128). You can also have incoming and outgoing loop keys for Trunk Groups (code 1012 + trunk group).
2205 - OPA Message Assignment
If the DIL No Answer Destination set in Program 0919 is 127 (384i) or 15 (124i), use this program to assign the VAU message (1-16) that should play when the VAU Automated Attendant answers.
Related Features
Direct Inward Line
Direct Inward Lines ring an extension directly, without Ring Group or Access Map programming.
Night Service
Use Universal Answer to pick up Universal Night Answer calls.
Programmable Function Keys
Line keys and loop keys simplify answering outside calls.
Ringing Line Preference
An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset.
Tenant Service
An extension user cannot answer trunks that belong to another tenant group. The user can, however, answered trunk calls transferred from another tenant group.
154 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Answering
Operation
To answer an incoming trunk call:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
At keyset, press flashing line key.
If you don’t have a line or loop key for a trunk call ringing your phone, it rings an idle CALL key.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
You can dial after answering the call. This allows you, for example, to respond to computer-generated incoming calls.
To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial #0.
If you hear error tone, your extension’s Class of Service prevents Universal Answer.
To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices (keyset only):
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 811 + 2.
3.
Select the pitch (1 = High, 2 = Medium and 3 = Low) and the range (1-4) you want to check.
Refer to Table 1-7 for the four Trunk Ring Tone Ranges and the selections within each range.
4.
Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press SPK to hang up.
To change the pitch of your incoming trunk ring (keyset only):
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 820 + 2.
3.
Select the pitch (1 = High, 2 = Medium and 3 = Low).
4.
Press SPK to hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 155
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Placing
Central Office Calls, Placing
Description
124i ☞
-
-
Available — 52 trunks.
Customizing CODEC Gains and
setting up Alternate Trunk Access
Codes require Base 2.13, EXCPRU
2.18 or higher.
The ability to turn DTMF tones for
outgoing trunk calls on and off
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
384i ☞
-
-
Available — 128 trunks.
Customizing CODEC Gains and
setting up Alternate Trunk Access
Codes require system software 3.04
or higher.
The ability to turn DTMF tones for
outgoing trunk calls on and off is not
available.
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This lets you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individual’s needs. A user can place a call by:
Pressing Line Keys or "Loop Keys"
•
Pressing a Trunk Group (i.e., loop) key
•
Pressing a Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) key
•
Dialing a code for a specific trunk (#9 + the trunks number)
•
Dialing a code for a Trunk Group (804 + group number)
•
Dialing a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (9)
•
Dialing an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define)
•
Conditions
(A.) The system provides analog trunk CO service via ATRU PCBs. ATRU PCBs can connect to either loop
start or ground start CO lines. However, ground start operation requires the installation of additional
ATRU daughter boards. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details.
(B.) Analog Trunk (ATRU) PCBs do not require circuit type programming. In addition, the system automatically detects the ATRU ground start daughter boards, if installed.
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
156 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming
Start
In 0406:62, enter 0 to
disable outgoing calls for
Tenant Group.
Should system users be
able to place outgoing
calls on trunks?
No
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 0406:62, enter 1 to
enable outgoing calls for
Tenant Group.
Yes
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Stop
In 0901:18, enter 0 to
prevent outgoing calls.
No
Are outgoing
calls allowed on
specific trunks?
In 0901:18, enter 1 to
allow outgoing calls.
Yes
Build an outgoing restriction matrix.
Do you need to restrict
certain extensions
from placing calls on
certain trunks?
In the default program,
extensions have full
access to all trunks.
Yes
No
In 0901:29, enter 0.
No
(Skip this decision for 384i)
Should caller hear DTMF
confirmation tones as they are
dialing a trunk call?
In 0911 for each
Access Map, select
the access options
for each trunk.
In 0912, assign
extensions to
Access Maps.
Yes
In 0901:29, enter 1.
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 157
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
If a user preselects a line, how
long should the system
remember the preselection?
In 1006, do not assign
function keys as line keys
(codes 0001-0128).
In 1006, do not assign
Trunk Group Access or
trunk group keys.
Assign a different CODEC Gain
Type in 0901:3. If required,
change the CODEC gains in
0117 (384i only).
No
No
Trunks
Should extension users
have one-button placing
of outside calls?
Should extension users
have one-button access
to trunk groups for
placing calls?
Do you want to adjust
the gain (volume) for
trunks or single line
telephones?
In 0405:15, enter the
preselection interval.
Yes
Yes
Single Line
Sets
In 1006, assign function
keys as line keys (codes
0001-0128).
In 1006, assign Trunk Group
Routing/dial 9 keys (code
1011) and/or Trunk Group/
loop keys (1012 + group
number).
In 0129, adjust the
sidetone level for
trunks connected to
ATRU PCB ports.
No
Do you want to adjust the
gain (volume) for
conversations on single
line telephones?
Yes
Change the settings
in 1001:4.
No
Continued
on next
page.
158 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Check the Analog Trunk
Timers in 0114 and 0135 for
compatibility with the telco.
If desired, assign names
to trunks in 0903.
Stop
Do you want to set up
an Alternate Trunk
Route Access Code
(384i only)?
No
For example, to make
50 the Alternate Trunk
Route Access Code:
DIAL = 5
Digit = 2
Kind = 8
Yes
In 0501, set up a Service
Code for Alternate Trunk
Route Access.
No
In 0922, enter the
extension's port
number and enter 0
to prevent routing.
In 0518, assign the
Service Code set up in the
previous step for Alternate
Trunk Route Access.
In 0922, enter the
extension's port number
and enter the Trunk Group
Routing route number.
Yes
Should extension
be able to use
Alternate Trunk
Route Access?
Turn to the Trunk
Group Routing feature
and set up Trunk
Group Routing.
No
In Trunk Group
Routing defined?
Yes
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 159
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Placing
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part A)
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
160 FEATURES
0135 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers (Part B)
Review the Analog Trunk Timers for compatibility with the connected telco.
0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types assigned in 0901 Item 3.
(384i Only) 0129 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Side tone Setting
Set the side tone level for analog trunks connected to ATRU PCB ports.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 15: Preselection Time
Set the preselection interval (0-64800 seconds). When a keyset user preselects a line key, the system remembers the preselection for this interval.
0406 - COS Options, Item 62: Trunk Calls
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) trunk calling.
0501 - System Numbering
Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access. This requires system software 3.04 or higher.
0510 - Trunk Access Code
If required, change the single-digit Trunk Access Code (normally 9). If you change this code, you must
also review the settings in 0501 for the new code selected.
0518 - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in 0501 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 3: CODEC Gain Type
Set the CODEC Gain Type for each trunk. Use 0117 to customize the transmit and receive levels of each
CODEC Gain Type.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 18, Outgoing Calls
For each trunk, allow (1) or prevent (0) outgoing calls.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 29: DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls
For each trunk, enable (1) or disable (0) DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls.
0903 - Trunk Names
To make identifying calls easier, assign a name to each trunk.
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-128). This sets the access options for trunks.
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-128) to extensions.
0922 - Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions
Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to
"Trunk Group Routing" to set up outbound routing.
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 4: CODE Gain Type
Adjust the gain settings for single line telephones.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
To simplify placing calls, assign function keys for placing trunk calls: Line keys (code 1-128), Trunk
Group Routing/dial 9 keys (code 1011) and Trunk Group/loop keys (code 1012 + group).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Placing
Related Features
Alphanumeric Display/Call Timer
If the trunk name seize display is enabled in programming (Program 0406: Item 37=1), Call Timer starts
automatically after the user places a trunk call. Disabling the trunk name seize display (Program
0406:Item 37=0) also disables the Call Timer.
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Handsfree
With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call without first lifting
the handset or pressing SPK. Users without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a line key before lifting
the handset or pressing SPK.
Loop Keys
Loop keys simplify placing Central Office Calls.
Programmable Function Keys
Line keys and loop keys simplify placing outside calls.
Tenant Service
An extension user cannot place calls on another tenant’s trunks. The user can, however, receive trunk
calls transferred from another tenant group.
Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial 804.
3.
Dial line group number (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128).
4.
Dial number.
OR
1.
At keyset, press trunk group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + group).
Also see the "Loop Keys" feature.
2.
Dial number.
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial 9.
If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code, you may dial that instead.
3.
Dial number.
OR
1.
At keyset, press Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011).
Also see the "Loop Keys" feature.
2.
Dial number.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 161
Features B-D
Central Office Calls, Placing
Operation (Cont’d)
To place a call over a specific trunk:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial #9.
3.
Dial line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
4.
Dial number.
OR
1.
At keyset, press line key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 0001 to 0128).
2.
Also see the "Loop Keys" feature.
3.
Dial number.
162 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
telemanuals.com
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service
Description
124i ☞
-
Available — 10 Classes of Service
and 96 extension/virtual extension
ports.
An extension’s Class of Service
cannot be changed via a Service
Code.
384i ☞
-
Available — 15 Classes of Service in
each Tenant Group and 384
extension/virtual extension ports.
In system software 3.07.31 or higher,
an extension’s Class of Service can
be changed via Service Code 177.
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for extensions. The system allows
any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service. An extension can have a different Class of Service
for each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different set of dialing options for daytime operation, nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks. An extension’s Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (normally 177).
Conditions
None
Default Setting
(384i Only) The attendant (port 01/extension 301) has Class of Service 15 in all Night Service modes.
All other extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes.
(124i Only) The attendant (port 01/extension 301) has Class of Service 10 in all Night Service modes.
•
All other extensions have Class of Service 1 in all Night Service modes.
See the charts beginning on page 2 for the default settings of the individual options.
•
•
•
•
•
•
If changing Class of Service via Service Code:
The password required to change Class of Service via Service Code 177 is 0000 (Program 0202 Item
1 = 0000).
An extension can use Service Code 177 to change another extension’s Class of Service (Program 0406
Item 71 = 1).
An extension automatically blocks another extension’s attempt to change their Class of Service via Service Code 177 (Program 0419 Item 19 = 0).
The default Service Code for this option is 177 (Program 0514 Item 67 = 177).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 163
Features B-D
Class of Service
Programming
Start
Do you want to
change a Class of
Service option?
Stop
Yes
Find the COS option
(item) on the chart and
review the associated
feature.
In 0406 and 0419,
change the data for the
option as required.
In 0406:71, enter 0. This
also prevents an extension
from changing the system
Time and Date.
No
Refer to the COS
Options chart on the
following page.
Should an extension be
able to dial a Service Code
to change an extension's
Class of Service?
Yes
In 0406:71, enter 1. This
also lets an extension set
the system Time and Date.
Is the default
password (0000) for
changing Class of
Service OK?
No
In 0202:1, change the
Time and Date and
MOH Password.
Yes
In 0419:19, enter 0.
No
Should extension
allow another user to
change its COS via
Service Code 177?
Do you want to use
a Service Code
other than 177 to
change an
extension's COS?
Yes
Yes
In 0419:19, enter 1.
In 0514:67, enter a new
Changing Class of
Service Service Code.
No
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
Start
164 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Class of Service
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A)
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B)
Set the options in a Class of Service.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15 in 384i, 1-10 in 124i) to extensions. Any Class of Service assignments
you changing using Service Code 177 (see below) automatically update this program.
If changing Class of Service via Service Code:
0202 - Setting User Passwords, Item 1: Time and Date and MOH Password
Use this option to set the password a user dials (normally 0000) when using Service Code 177 to change
an extension’s Class of Service.
0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A), Item 71: Time and Date
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Service Code 177 to change an extension’s Class of Service. This option also controls an extension’s ability to set the system Time and Date.
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 19: Allow Station COS to be Changed
Use this option to permit (1) or block (0) another extension from changing this extension’s Class of Service via Service Code 177.
0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B): Item 67: Changing Class of Service
If required, use this option to change the Service Code a user dials to change an extension’s Class of Service.
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
1
Flash for Single
Line Telephones
Enables/disables Flash for single
line (500/2500 type) telephones
"Flash"
2
Manual Night
Service Enable
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use manual Night
Service Switching
"Night Service"
3
Long Conversation
Alarm
Enables/disables the Warning
Tone for Long Conversation
(not for SLTs)
"Warning Tone for
Long
Conversation"
(384i) (Disabled [0] 3.05. or
higher. Enabled [1] prior to
3.05)
(124i) 0 (Disabled)
4
Call
Forwarding/DND
Override
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Call
Forwarding/DND Override
"Call
Forwarding/DND
Override"
1 (Enabled)
5
Off Hook Signaling
Receive
Allows/prevents an extension
busy on a call from receiving
off-hook signaling
"Off-Hook
Signaling"
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
6
Automatic Off
Hook Signaling
Allows an extension to manually
(0) or automatically (1) send off
hook signals to a busy extension.
"Off-Hook
Signaling"
0
(Manual)
1
(Automatic)
7
Data Privacy
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to switch privacy at their
extension
"Privacy"
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
1 (Enabled)
FEATURES 165
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
8
Group Call Pickup
(Within Group)
Enables/disables Group Call
Pickup for calls ringing an
extension’s own Pickup Group
(Service Code *#)
"Group Call
Pickup"
1 (Enabled)
9
Group Call Pickup
(Another Group)
Enables/disables Group Call
Pickup for calls ringing outside
a group (Service Code 869)
"Group Call
Pickup"
1 (Enabled)
10
Group Call Pickup
for Specific Group
Enables/disables Group Call
Pickup for calls ringing a
specific group (Service Code
868)
"Group Call
Pickup"
1 (Enabled)
11
Unscreened Transfer
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Unscreened
Transfer
"Transfer"
1 (Enabled)
12
Do Not Disturb
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Do Not Disturb
"Do Not Disturb"
13
Intercom
Abandoned Call
Display
Enables/disables an extension’s
Intercom Abandoned Call
display
"Intercom
Abandoned Call
Display"
1 (Enabled)
14
Meet Me
Conference and
Paging
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Meet Me
Conference and Paging
"Meet Me
Conference Meet
Me Paging"
1 (Enabled)
15
Message Waiting
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to leave Messages
Waiting
"Message Waiting"
1 (Enabled)
16
Conference
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to initiate a Conference
or Meet Me Conference
"Conference
Meet Me
Conference"
1 (Enabled)
17
Voice Call
Conference
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to initiate a Voice Call
Conference
"Voice Call
Conference"
1 (Enabled)
18
Storing Abbreviated
Dialing Entries
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to store Abbreviated
Dialing numbers
"Abbreviated
Dialing
1 (Enabled)
19
Common
Abbreviated
Dialing
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Common
Abbreviated Dialing
"Abbreviated
Dialing"
1 (Enabled)
20
Group Abbreviated
Dialing
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Group Abbreviated
Dialing
"Abbreviated
Dialing"
1 (Enabled)
166 FEATURES
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
1 (Enabled)
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
0 (Disabled)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
21
Department Group
Step Calling
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Department Group
Step Calling
"Department
Group Step
Calling"
1 (Enabled)
22
External Paging
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to make an External Page
"Paging, External"
1 (Enabled)
23
Call Forwarding
(Both Ringing)
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to activate Call
Forwarding with Both Ringing
(Service Code *27)
"Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
24
Extension Camp
On /Callback
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to dial Service Code 2 for
a Camp On or Callback
"Call Waiting /
Camp On
Callback"
1 (Enabled)
25
Trunk Queuing
(Camp On)
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to Camp On to a busy
trunk
"Trunk Queuing"
1 (Enabled)
26
Call Forwarding
with Follow Me
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to initiate Call
Forwarding with Follow Me
"Call Forwarding
with Follow Me"
1 (Enabled)
27
Alarm
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to set an alarm
"Alarm"
1 (Enabled)
28
DSS Console
Alternate Answer
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use DSS Console
Alternate Answer
"Direct Station
Selection (DSS)
Console"
1 (Enabled)
29
Long Toll Call
Alert
TBD
TBD
1 (Enabled)
30
Call Transfer
TBD
TBD
1 (Enabled)
31
Call Forward When
Busy
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Call Forward
When Busy (Service Code *22)
"Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
32
Call Forwarding
When Unanswered
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Call Forward
When Unanswered (Service
Code *26)
"Call Forwarding"
1 (Enabled)
33
Toll Restriction
Override
Enables/disables Toll Restriction
Override (Service Code 875)
"Toll Restriction
Override"
34
Transfer Without
Holding
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Transfer Without
Holding
"Transfer"
0 (Disabled)
35
Group Hold Initiate
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to initiate a Group Hold
"Hold"
1 (Enabled)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
1 (Enabled)
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
0 (Disabled)
FEATURES 167
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
36
Group Hold
Answer
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to pick up a call on
Group Hold
"Hold"
1 (Enabled)
37
Trunk Name
Display, Seizing
Enables/disables the displaying
of a trunk’s name/number when
the user seizes the trunk
"Central Office
Calls, Placing"
"Name Storing"
1 (Enabled)
38
Trunk Name
Display, Incoming
Enables/disables the displaying
of a trunk’s name/number when
the trunk is ringing
"Central Office
Calls, Answering"
"Name Storing"
1 (Enabled)
39
Extension Name
Display, Answer
Enables/disables the displaying
of the incoming Intercom
caller’s name/number after
answer
"Intercom"
"Name Storing"
1 (Enabled)
40
Intercom Name
Display, Incoming
Enables/disables the pre-answer
display of the incoming
Intercom caller’s name and
number
"Intercom"
"Name Storing"
1 (Enabled)
41
Extension
Ringdown
Enables/disables Ringdown
Extension for extensions with
this COS
"Ringdown
Extension"
0 (Disabled)
42
Transfer Display
Enables/disables an extension’s
incoming Transfer pre-answer
display
"Transfer"
1 (Enabled)
0 (Speech)
43
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
Not used
44
Barge In Mode
Enables the extension’s Barge In
speech mode (0) or Monitor
mode (1).
"Barge In"
45
Changing the
Music on Hold
Tone
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to change the Music on
Hold tone
"Music on Hold"
46
Call Timer
Enable/disable an extension’s
Call Timer
"Call Timer"
1 (Enabled)
47
Memo Dial
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to use Memo Dial
"Memo Dial"
1 (Enabled)
48
Last Number Redial
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to use Last Number
Redial
"Last Number
Redial"
1 (Enabled)
49
Save Number Redial
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to use Save Number Dial
"Save Number
Dial"
1 (Enabled)
168 FEATURES
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
50
Dial Number
Preview
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to use Dial Number
Preview
"Dial Number
Preview"
1 (Enabled)
51
Group Call Pickup
Information Display
Enable/disable an extension’s
Group Call Pickup display
"Group Call
Pickup"
1 (Enabled)
52
Internal Paging
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to use Internal Paging
"Paging, Internal"
1 (Enabled)
53
Background Music
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to turn Background
Music on and off (Service Code
825)
"Background
Music"
1 (Enabled)
54
Room Monitor,
Initiating Extension
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to initiate Room Monitor
"Room Monitor"
0 (Disabled)
55
Room Monitor,
Extension Being
Monitored
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to be monitored
"Room Monitor"
0 (Disabled)
56
Dial Pad
Confirmation Tone
Allow/prevent an extension
from enabling/disabling the Dial
Pad Confirmation Tone
"Dial Pad
Confirmation
Tone"
0 (Prevented)
57
Continued Dialing
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to use Continued Dialing
"Continued
Dialing"
1 (Enabled)
58
ISDN Connected
Line Identification
59
Selectable Ring
Tone Selection
60
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
Refer to the PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or the BRI Manual (92000BRI**)
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to change the incoming
ring tones
"Selectable Ring
Tones"
1 (Enabled)
Not used
61
Intercom Calls
Enable/disable Intercom calling
for the extension
"Intercom"
1 (Enabled)
62
Trunk Calls
Enable/disable trunk calling for
the extension
"Central Office
Calls, Placing"
1 (Enabled)
63
Group Call Pickup
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to pick up a call ringing
into a Pickup Group (Service
Codes *# and 868)
"Group Call
Pickup"
1 (Enabled)
64
Department Calling
Enable/disable an extension’s
ability to call a department
number
"Department
Calling"
1 (Enabled)
65
Barge In, Initiate
Enables/disables Barge In at
initiating extension
"Barge In"
1 (Enabled)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 169
telemanuals.com
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
66
Barge In, Receive
Blocks/allows Barge In at the
receiving extension
"Barge In"
1 (Allowed)
67
Secretary Call
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Secretary Call
"Secretary Call"
1 (Allowed)
68
Setting Handsfree
Answerback and
Forced Intercom
Ringing
Allows/prevents an extension
from enabling Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls
"Handsfree
Answerback /
Forced Intercom
Ringing"
1 (Allowed)
69
Programmable
Function Key
Programming
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to program their function
keys
"Programmable
Function Keys"
1 (Enabled)
70
DCI Auto Answer
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to set the DCI Auto
Answer Mode (Service Code
883)
"Data
Communications"
1 (Enabled)
71
Time and Date
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to set the Time and Date
and an extension’s Class of
Service via Service Code 177.
"Time and Date"
"Class of Service"
1 (Enabled)
72
Switching from
Handsfree
Answerback to
Forced Intercom
Ringing
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom
Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls
"Handsfree
Answerback /
Forced Intercom
Ringing"
1 (Enabled)
73
Microphone Cutoff
Enables/disables and extension’s
ability to use Microphone
Cutoff
"Microphone
Cutoff"
1 (Enabled)
74
Repeat Redial
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Repeat Redial
"Repeat Redial"
1 (Enabled)
75
Selectable Display
Messaging
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Selectable Display
Messaging
"Selectable
Display
Messaging"
1 (Enabled)
76
Automatic On
Hook Transfer
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Automatic On
Hook Transfer
"Transfer"
1 (Enabled)
77-79
80
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
Not used
ISDN Calling Party
Number
81,82
170 FEATURES
Refer to the PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or the BRI Manual (92000BRI**)
Not used
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
83
ISDN Calling Party
Subaddress
84
(384i prior to
3.07.10 and 124i)
Account Codes
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to enter Account Codes
"Account Codes"
0 (Disabled)
84
(384i 3.07.10 or
higher)
Account Codes
Enables/disables operator alert
when an extension improperly
enters an Account Code.
"Account Codes"
0 (Disabled)
85
Extension Name
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to program its name
"Name Storing"
1 (Enabled)
86
Checking
Selectable Ring
Tones
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to check the Selectable
Ring Tones
"Selectable Ring
Tones"
1 (Enabled)
87-90
This option...
Is used with...
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
Refer to the PRI Manual (P/N 92000PRI**) or the BRI Manual (92000BRI**)
Not used
91
Operator Transfer
After Hold Callback
Not used
92
Directed Call
Pickup
Not used
93
E-Hold (2nd)
Not used
94
E-Hold Answer
(2nd)
Not used
95
Transfer Callback
Display
Enables/disables the Transfer
Callback display. If enabled,
second line of display shows
recall source.
"Transfer"
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
96
VAU Record
Enables/disables extension’s
ability to record, erase and listen
to VAU messages
"Voice Announce
Unit"
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
97
General Message
Listen
Enables/disables extension’s
ability to dial 4 or Service Code
111 and listen to the General
Message
"Voice Announce
Unit"
98
General Message
Record
Enables/disables extension’s
ability to dial Service Code 112
and record, listen to or erase the
General Message
"Voice Announce
Unit"
0 (Disabled)
99
Personal Greeting
Enables/disables extension’s
ability to dial Service Code *47
to record, listen to or erase a
Personal Greeting. This option
also affects Park and Page.
"Voice Announce
Unit"
1 (Enabled)
(Disabled [0] in 384i prior to
3.05)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
1 (Enabled)
1 (Enabled)
FEATURES 171
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
100
Voice Over Initiate
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to initiate Voice Over
101
Voice Over Receive
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to receive Voice Over
102-104
105
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
"Voice Over"
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
"Voice Over"
1 (Enabled)
0 (Disabled)
Not used
Group Listen
106
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Group Listen
"Group Listen"
0 (Disabled)
Not used
107
Long Conversation
Cutoff (Incoming)
Not used
108
Long Conversation
Cutoff (Outgoing)
Not used
109
Hotel DND Set Other Phone
Refer to the Hotel/Motel Guide (P/N 92000HMT**)
110
Hotel Wake Up
Call - Other Phone
111
Hotel Set Call
Restriction
Between Rooms
112
Hotel Set Toll
Restriction of Other
Rooms
113
Hotel Check-in
Operation
114
Hotel Check-out
Operation
115
Hotel Clean Room
Set - Own Phone
116
Hotel Clean Room
Set - Other Phone
117
Hotel Room Status
Printer Control
118
Hotel DND Set Own Phone
119
Hotel Wake Up
Call - Own Phone
172 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part A), Program 0406
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
120
Forced Trunk
Disconnect
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect
"Forced Trunk
Disconnect"
121,122
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
0 (Disabled)
1 (Enabled)
Not used
123
Caller ID Display
Enables/disables the Caller ID
display at an extension
"Caller ID"
1 (Enabled)
124
Edit Caller ID
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to edit the stored Caller
ID information
"Caller ID"
1 (Enabled)
125
Automatic
Handsfree Incoming
Enables/disables Automatic
Handsfree for incoming calls on
line/loop keys
"Handsfree and
Monitor"
126
Universal Answer
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to dial the Universal
Answer code (#0)
"Universal
Answer"
0 (Disabled)
"Call Forwarding,
Off-Premise"
0 (Disabled)
127
128
(384i) 1
(Enabled)
(124i) 0
(Disabled)
(384i) 0
(Disabled)
(124i) 0
(Disabled)
Not used
Call Forwarding
Off-Premise
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Enables/disables an extension’s
ability to set up Call Forwarding
Off-Premise for their phone
FEATURES 173
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part B), Program 0419
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
1
(384i 3.05.10 or
higher)
Manual Tandem
Trunking
Allows an extension user to set
up a tandem call by pressing
their CONF (TRF) key.
"Tandem Trunking
(Unsupervised
Conference)"
0 (Disabled)
2
(384i 3.05.10 or
higher)
Tandem Trunking
on Hang up
Allows an extension user to set
up a tandem call automatically
when they hang up.
"Tandem Trunking
(Unsupervised
Conference)"
0 (Disabled)
3
(384i 3.05 or
higher)
VAU Reminder
Messages
Enables/disables the Call
Forwarding, Message Waiting
and Voice Mail reminder
messages.
"Voice Announce
Unit"
0 (Disabled)
4
ACD Queue Status
Display
Enables/disables the Queue
Status Display for the ACD
Group Supervisor’s COS.
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N
92000ACD**) for additional
information.
ACD "Queue
Status Display"
0 (Disabled)
Use this option to enable (1) or
disable (0) Enhanced Dial
Buffering. If disabled, the
system uses the standard dial
buffering.
"Park"
0 (standard dial buffering
enabled)
5
6
Not used
(384i 3.06.06 or
higher)
Enhanced Dial
Buffering
7
Not used
8
(384i 3.07.10 or
higher)
Display 911 Dialed
Station Name and
Number
Enable (1) or disable (0) an
extension’s ability to display the
name and number of the
extension that activated E911
service. (If disabled, option 9
below is also disabled.)
"E911
Compatibility"
0 (Disabled)
9
(384i 3.07.10 or
higher)
E911 Alarm Ring
Enable (1) or disable (0) an
extension’ s ability to play the
E911 alarm ring. (This can only
occur if option 8 above is also
enabled.)
"E911
Compatibility"
0 (Disabled)
10
(384i 3.07.10 or
higher)
Clear E911 Alarm
Ring
If enabled (1), an extension user
can dial 886 to turn off the E911
alarm ring. If disabled, an
extension user cannot dial 886.
"E911
Compatibility"
0 (Disabled)
174 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Class of Service
Class of Service Options (Part B), Program 0419
Default
Item
Name
This option...
Is used with...
384i COS 1-14
124i COS 1-9
384i COS 15
124i COS 10
11
(384i 3.07.12 or
higher)
TAPI Auto Idle
Mode (Driver ID)
Enter 0 for this option if you are
installing the Nitsuko TAPI
Service Provider 1.02.01 driver.
Enter 1 for this option if you are
installing the Nitsuko 384i
Proprietary Mode Telephony
SPV 1.00.01 (or higher) driver.
"TAPI
Compatibility"
0 (Nitsuko TAPI Service
Provider 1.02.01 )
12
(384i 3.07.24 or
higher)
DID Off Hook
Ringing
Enable (1) or disable (0) an
extension’s Off Hook Signaling
for incoming DID calls.
"Off Hook
Signaling"
0 (DID Off Hook Ringing
disabled)
13
(384i 3.07.24 or
higher)
Block Manual Off
Hook Signaling
Enable (1) or disable (0) an
extension’s ability to block off
hook signals manually sent from
a co-worker.
"Off Hook
Signaling"
0 (Block Manual Off Hook
Signaling disabled)
14
(384i 3.07.24 or
higher)
Block Camp On
Enable (1) or disable (0) an
extension’s ability to block
callers from dialing 2 to Camp
On.
"Off Hook
Signaling"
0 (Block Camp On disabled)
15
(384i 3.07.24 or
higher)
DID Call Waiting
Enable (1) or disable (0) DID
Call Waiting for an extension.
"Off Hook
Signaling"
0 (DID Call Waiting disabled)
Enable (1) or disable (0) the
ability of an extension’s COS to
be changed via Service Code
177.
"Class of Service"
0 (Extension’s COS cannot
be changed)
16-18
19
16-64
Not used
(384i 3.07.31 or
higher)
Allow COS to be
Changed
Not used
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 175
Features B-D
Class of Service
Related Features
Night Service
An extension can have a different Class of Service for each Night Service mode: Day, Night, Midnight or Rest.
Operation
To change an extension’s Class of Service (via Service Code 177):
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 177.
You see: Enter Password3.
Dial password and press HOLD.
Use the Time and Date and MOH password (normally 0000). You see: Enter Station#.
You’ll hear error tone and have to start over if you dial an incorrect code.
4.
Dial the extension number you want to change.
You see: DAY:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
The extension you dial may be set to block your attempt to change their Class of Service.
5.
Enter the Day Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 4 and press HOLD.
You see: NIGHT:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
6.
Enter the Night Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 4 and press HOLD.
You see: MIDNIGHT:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
7.
Enter the Midnight Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 4 and press HOLD.
You see: REST:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
8.
Enter the Rest Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 4 and press HOLD.
You see: Enter Station#
9.
Go to step 4 and enter another extension number.
OR
Press SPK to hang up.
176 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) applications automate your office with TAPI compatibility and external
PC control. CTI puts your telephone system on the cutting edge of modern office productivity with:
Personal Computer Interface (PCI)
Use a DCI Module installed in your Super Display or 32-Button Display keyset as a Personal Computer Interface. Installing Nitsuko’s TAPI software driver (P/N 94000) and TAPI compatible software in your personal
computer will allow your PC to operate your telephone. Nitsuko’s TAPI software driver provides all TAPI Basic Services and a host of TAPI Supplemental Services. See "TAPI Compatibility" for more.
Note: You can obtain TAPI Driver P/N 94000 separately or as part of the TAPI Kit (P/N 92966B). The
TAPI Kit consists of the TAPI Driver in addition to DCI Module P/N 92266B.
Telemarketing Dial
Telemarketing Dial is PC-based dialing that enables your staff to canvas prospects quickly and efficiently.
Use third-party database software installed on your PC as auto-dialer which can automatically look up
your clients and dial their numbers. See "Data Communications Interface (DCI)" for more on setting up
this feature.
Database Lookup
Provided through Caller ID and TAPI Compatible third-party software (such as Symantec’s ACT!), Database Lookup displays your caller’s account information before their call is even answered. Go to "Data
Communications Interface (DCI)" for the details on programming the system to enable this feature.
Open Architecture Interface (OAI)
OAI allows unique PC-based system functions via third-party development.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
None
Programming
Refer to the "Data Communications Interface (DCI)" feature for programming specifics.
Related Features
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Turn to this feature for more on connecting and programming DCI Modules and 3-DCI Units.
TAPI Compatibility
See this feature for the details on the TAPI services provided by the system and Nitsuko’s TAPI driver.
Operation
None
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 177
Features B-D
Conference
Conference
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
The system allows either 8 fourparty conferences or 4 eight-party
conferences.
Split (From Conference) is not
available.
Adding a parked call to a Conference
requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or
higher.
The Conference initiator cannot
place conferenced trunks on Hold.
The Trunk Answer Code (867)
requires Base 4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or
higher.
384i ☞
-
-
-
Each DTU-A/C allows either 4
four-party conferences or 2 eightparty conferences per PCB.
Split (From Conference) requires
system software 3.07.24 or higher.
Adding a parked call to a Conference
requires system software 3.07.24 or
higher.
System software 3.07.24 or higher
allows the initiator to place
conferenced trunks on Hold.
The Trunk Answer Code (867)
requires system software 3.07.24 or
higher.
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. With Conference, a user may set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The system allows either
four or eight parties maximum per conference. No more than two parties in Conference can be outside callers.
Split (From Conference)
Split allows a user to alternate (i.e., switch) between their callers in Conference. This will allow a dispatcher, for
example, to control a telephone meeting between themselves, a customer and a service technician. The dispatcher can meet together with all parties, privately set up a service strategy with the technician and then meet
again to set the schedule.
Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially set up. If a user
places an outside call, conferences extension 302 followed by extension 303, Split will cycle from the trunk, to
302 and finally to 303. The Split cycle then repeats.
Conditions
(384i Only) Conference requires either a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB (eight PCBs maximum per system).
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
178 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Conference
Programming
— For Your Notes —
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 179
Features B-D
Conference
Start
No
(Skip this decision
for 124i)
Should the system have
Conference capability?
In 0302:2, enter 1.
Two
8-party
Should each CDTU
PCB allow four 4party conferences or
two 8-party
conferences?
Four
4-party
In 0302:2, enter 0.
In 0406:16, enter 0.
No
Should an extension
be allowed to initiate
a Conference?
Yes
In 0406:16, enter 1.
In 0308, assign the
blocks on the CDTU
PCB for entry 1.
Yes
In 0308, assign the blocks
on the CDTU PCB for
Conference (entry 0).
Stop
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
In 0402:6, enter 1.
Conference
Should CONF (TRF)
key be for Conference
or Transfer?
Transfer
In 0402:6, enter 0. Also
see the Transfer feature
and Program 0402:2.
In 1006, assign a function
key as a Conference key
(code 1016).
Is the default Split
(from Conference)
code (*7)
acceptable?
No
In 0511:98, change
the code to meet the
site's requirements.
Yes
In 0514:65, change
the code to meet the
site's requirements.
No
Is the default Trunk
Answer Code (867)
acceptable?
Yes
Stop
180 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Conference
Programming
➣ 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup, Item 2: Conference Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
(124i Only) Set the Conference mode of the system. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences
(0) or 4 eight-party conferences (1).
(384i Only) Set the Conference mode of each DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. The system allows either 4 fourparty conferences (0) or 2 eight-party conferences (1) per PCB.
0308 - Conference Circuit Setup
(384i Only) Assign the circuits on the DTU-A or DTU-C PCBs as Conference circuits (0).
0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B), Item 6: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part B)
For each Tenant Group, assign the CONF (TRF) key for Transfer (0) or Conference (1). If set for Transfer, also see Program 0402 Item 2, CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A).
0511 - Service Code Setup (Part A), Item 98: Call Waiting Answer/Split
If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Split while on a Conference call. This code
is normally *7.
0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B), Item 65: Trunk Answer Code
If required, use this program to change to code users dial to retrieve a Conferenced trunk on Hold.
0406 - COS Options, Item 16: Conference
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a Conference.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Conference (code 1016).
Related Features
Conference, Voice Call
Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area.
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.
Programmable Function Keys
In order for keyset to have Conference, it must have a Conference function key.
Transfer
You can optionally program the CONF (TRF) key for Transfer. In this case, the keyset must have a Conference function key.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 181
Features B-D
Conference
Operation
To establish a Conference:
Keyset
1.
Establish Intercom or trunk call.
2.
Press CONF (TRF) or Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
Beginning with 384i system software 3.01.02 and in 124i, you can press HOLD instead.
3.
Dial extension you want to add.
OR
Access outside call
OR
Retrieve call from Park orbit.
To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or dial a trunk/trunk group code.
You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference.
4.
When called party answers, press CONF (TRF) or Conference key twice.
If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system’s Conference limit.
5.
Repeat steps 2-4 to add more parties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Single Line Set
Establish Intercom or trunk call.
Hookflash and dial #1.
Dial extension you want to add.
OR
Access trunk call.
OR
Retrieve call from Park orbit.
Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties.
OR
Hookflash twice to set up the Conference.
If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the system’s Conference limit.
To Split (alternate) between the parties in Conference:
Keyset
1.
Press CONF (TRF) or Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
2.
Dial *7.
Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Press
CONF or Conference key twice to set up the Conference again.
1.
182 FEATURES
Single Line Set
Hookflash and dial*7.
Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference. Hookflash
twice to set up the Conference again.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Conference
Operation (Cont’d)
To place a Conference with outside callers on Hold (and return to it later on):
Keyset
1.
Set up the Conference with your outside callers.
2.
Press HOLD.
Your outside callers hear Music on Hold..
3.
To speak individually to one of the outside callers on Hold:
- Press flashing line key.
OR
- Dial 867 and the line number (e.g., 001 for line 1).
Press HOLD and repeat the above step to speak individually with other callers on Hold.
4.
Press CONF (TRF) to re-establish the Conference.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Single Line Set
Set up the Conference with your outside callers.
Hookflash.
To speak individually to one of the outside callers on Hold, dial 867 and the line number (e.g., 001 for
line 1).
Hookflash and repeat the above step to speak individually with other callers on Hold.
Hookflash twice to re-establish the Conference.
To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties:
Keyset
5.
Press HOLD.
If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear Music on Hold.
1.
Single Line Set
Hang up.
If you are not permitted to use Tandem Trunking, outside callers may hear Music on Hold.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 183
Features B-D
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Description
124i ☞
The system allows either 8 fourparty conferences or 4 eight-party
conferences.
384i ☞
Each DTU-A/C allows either 4
four-party conferences or 2 eightparty conferences per PCB.
Voice Call Conference lets extension user’s in the same work area join in a trunk Conference. To initiate a Voice
Call Conference, an extension user just presses the Voice Call Conference key and tells their co-workers to join
the call. The system releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users can just press the trunk’s line key to join
the call.
Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The person initiating the
Voice Call Conference just announces it "through the air."
Conditions
(384i Only) Conference requires either a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB (eight PCBs maximum per system).
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup
(124i Only) Set the Conference mode of the system. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences
(0) or 4 eight-party conferences (1).
(384i Only) Set the Conference mode of each DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. The system allows either 4 fourparty conferences (0) or 2 eight-party conferences (1) per PCB.
0308 - Conference Circuit Setup
(384i Only) Assign the circuits on the DTU-A or DTU-C PCBs as Conference circuits (0).
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 9: Meet Me Conference Time
Set the interval users have to join a Voice Call Conference after it is announced. (Note that this interval is
also used for Meet Me Conference.)
0406 - COS Options, Item 17: Voice Call Conference
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Voice Call Conference (code 1017).
Related Features
Conference
Set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office.
Programmable Function Keys
Voice Call Conference requires a Voice Call Conference function key.
Single Line Telephones
This feature is not available at single line telephones.
184 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0308, assign the
blocks on the CDTU
PCB for entry 1.
No
(Skip this decision in
124i.) Should the system
have Conference
capability?
Yes
In 0308, assign the
blocks on the CDTU
PCB for Conference
(entry 0).
Stop
In 0302 Item 2,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 17, enter 0
to prevent initiating
Voice Call Conference.
Two
8-party
Should each CDTU
PCB allow four 4-party
conferences or two 8party conferences?
Four
4-party
No
Should an extension
be allowed to initiate a
Voice Call
Conference?
Yes
In 0406 Item 17, enter 1
to allow initiating Voice
Call Conference.
No
In 0405 Item 9, adjust
the Meet Me
Conference Time.
In 0302 Item 2,
enter 0.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
After the Conference
is announced, do
users have an
adequate time to join
the Conference?
Yes
In 1006, assign a function key
as a Voice Call Conference
key (code 1017).
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 185
Features B-D
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Operation
To set up a Voice Call Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area:
1.
Place or answer trunk call.
2.
Press Voice Call Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1017).
3.
Announce Conference.
Just tell your co-worker about the call. Do not use telephone system features to announce it.
To join a Voice Call Conference (if invited).
1.
After Conference request, press indicated line key.
To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties:
1.
Press SPK to hang up.
186 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Continued Dialing
Continued Dialing
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer and then dial
additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail, automatic banking and Other Common
Carriers (OCCs).
There are two types of Continued Dialing:
Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls
•
Depending on an extension’s Class of Service, a keyset user may be able to dial additional digits after
their Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice Mail, for example, Continued Dialing lets extension
users dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers. Without Continued Dialing, extension
users cannot access these Voice Mail options.
•
Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls
Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside Automated
Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). After the outside service answers, the
user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow. Without Continued Dialing, the system’s Toll
Restriction will cut off the call after a specific number of dialed digits. See Programming below for additional information.
NOTICE
Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud.
Conditions
Since a 2500 set dial pad is always active, the system does not limit Intercom Continued Dialing from these
phones.
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 187
Features B-D
Continued Dialing
Programming
Start
Set Class of Service
in 0406:57 to '0'.
No
Is Continued
Dialing required for
Intercom calls?
Yes
Set Class of Service
in 0406:57 to '1'.
In 1005, assign the
COS programmed in
0406 to the extension.
Is Continued Dialing
required for local trunk
calls?
Yes
Enable 0701:3 for a Toll
Restriction level.
No
Enable 0701:4 for a
Toll Restriction level.
Yes
Is Continued Dialing
required for long
distance trunk calls?
In 0702:3 set the maximum
number of digits to be
dialed for a local call.
No
In 0702:4 set the
maximum number of
digits to be dialed for
non-local calls.
In 1004 assign a Toll
Restriciton COS to
each extension.
Stop
188 FEATURES
Long distance calls are calls where the
NPA or NNX is in either the Common
Permit Code Table (0702:7) or the Permit
Code Table (0702:5). Refer to the Toll
Restriction Feature for more information.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Continued Dialing
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 57: Continued Dialing
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Continued
Dialing for Intercom calls to 2500 type devices.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 3: Maximum Number of Digits in Local Call
Assign Program 0702 Item 3 entries to each Toll Restriction class.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 4: Maximum Number of Digits in Non-Local Call
Assign Program 0702 Item 4 entries to each Toll Restriction class.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 3: Maximum Number of Digits in Local Call
If enabled in 0701 Item 3, user cannot dial a local call longer than this number of digits.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 4: Maximum Number of Digits in Non-Local Call
If enabled in 0701 Item 4, user cannot dial a long distance call longer than this number of digits. NonLocal Calls are calls where the NPA or NNX is in either the Common Permit Code Table (Program 0702
Item 7) or the Permit Code Table (Program 0702 Item 5). Refer to the Toll Restriction feature for
additional information.
1004 - Toll Restriction Class
Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to an extension.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse trunks - and then dial DTMF digits after the service
answers.
Toll Restriction
The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming.
Operation
To use Continued Dialing:
1.
Place Intercom or trunk call.
2.
Continue dialing after call connects.
Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 189
Features B-D
Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko 900i)
Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko 900i)
Description
124i ☞
Available — requires Base 3.03 or
EXCPRU 3.03 or higher.
384i ☞
Available — requires system
software 3.07.10 or higher.
The Nitsuko 900i (P/N 85456D) is a 900 MHz digital cordless telephone that provides mobility, flexibility and
convenience for those who spend much of the workday away from their desk. Fully integrated with the telephone system, the Nitsuko 900i offers many standard features such as Park, Page, Do Not Disturb, Hotline Voice
Over and Voice Mail. The Nitsuko
900i is normally paired with a companion keyset during installation for
improved one-button call coverage capabilities.
Complemented by four fully programmable function keys (with LEDs), the
Nitsuko 900i achieves a whole new
level of convenience and mobility. An
easy-to-read LCD display, volume controls, a rechargeable battery and a
handy belt clip round out the elegant
and affordable Nitsuko 900i.
For complete installation and operation instructions, refer to the Nitsuko
900i Cordless Phone Installation and
User Guide (P/N 85456DINS**).
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
•
190 FEATURES
Priority
Ring Tone (set in
Program 1019)
1
0
2
1
3
2
4
3
All Call Coverage keys immediately ring (Program 1028 = 0).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko 900i)
Programming
Start
Refer to the Nitsuko 900i Installation
and User Guide (P/N 85456DINS**)
for additional information.
Run 0004. The
system sets the 900i
circuit type to 1.
In 1006, leave the
programmable keys at
their default setting (i.e.,
as line keys 1-4).
Stop
Automatically
No
No
Connect the 900i base
unit "LINE IN" jack to
an available DSTU
station port
(Skip this decision for 124i)
Do you want to set the 900i
port programming manually
or automatically?
Should the 900i have a
key appearance for all
incoming trunk calls?
Manually
Yes
In 0005, enter
circuit type 1 for
each 900i port.
In 1006, assign a "both
ways" loop key (code
1078 + 2) to one of the
900i programmable keys.
Should the 900i
have a companion
keyset?
Yes
Connect the 900i base
unit "LINE OUT" jack to
the companion keyset.
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 191
Features B-D
Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko 900i)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Do not make any
entries in 1009.
No
Should user be able to
use the "desk" button
on the 900i base to
Transfer calls to the
companion keyset?
Yes
In 1009, assign the 900i
port as the Boss STA
PORT and enter the
companion keyset port
as the STA_nn data.
Ring
In 1016, enable (1)
ringing for the selected
extension and function
key for each Night
Service mode.
In 1006, assign a Call
Coverage Key (1036 + ext.) on
the 900i for the companion
keyset and visa versa.
In 1016, disable (0)
ringing for the selected
extension and function
key for each Night
Service mode.
In 1028, enter 1 for
delayed ringing.
Flash
Should the Call
Coverage keys ring or
just flash?
Delayed
For calls ringing the
Call Coverage keys,
should the ringing be
immediate or delayed?
Immediate
In 1028, enter 0
for immediate
ringing.
In 0414 Item 5, adjust
the Call Coverage
Delay Interval if
required.
Do you want to
change the way
calls ring Call
Coverage keys?
Yes
In 1018, assign a ring
tone range for each
extension port assigned
to a Call Coverage key.
No
When an extension
has more than one Call
Coverage key, do you
want to change the
ringing priority?
Yes
In 1019, reassign the
Call Coverage key
ring tone priorities.
No
Stop
192 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Cordless Telephone (Nitsuko 900i)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ (384i Only) 0004 - Automatic Extension Circuit Type Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Use this program to automatically set up the Nitsuko 900i station port. When you run Program 0004, the
system automatically assigns circuit type 1 to all the Nitsuko 900i ports.
(384i Only) 0005 - Manual Extension Circuit Type Setup
If you don’t want to use Program 0004, use this program instead. Use the Type option to set the circuit
type of the Nitsuko 900i station port to circuit type 1. Refer to Understanding Port Assignments on
page 626 for more explanation.
0414 - System Timers (Part B), Item 5: Call Coverage Delay Interval
Multiple Directory Number/call Coverage Keys set for Delayed Ringing (see Program 1028 below) ring
the covering extension after this interval.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a Loop Key (code 1078 + option) to the Nitsuko 900i to make placing and answering out•
side calls easier. For example, code 1078 + 2 will provide a both ways loop key. The user can
press the key to place a call on the "dial 9" Trunk Group. In addition, the key provides an appearance for any incoming call that is not specifically assigned to one of the Nitsuko 900i line keys.
Assign a Call Coverage Key (code 1036 + covered) to both the Nitsuko 900i and the companion
•
keyset. The Nitsuko 900i should cover the companion and visa versa. This gives the Nitsuko 900i
and the companion keyset on-button access to each others calls.
1009 - Cordless/Desktop Extension Assignment
Make entries into this program if you want to enable the DESK button on the Nitsuko 900i base unit. For
the Boss STA PORT? prompt, enter the Nitsuko 900i port number. For the STA_nn prompt, enter the companion desk set’s port number.
1016 - Setting Ringing for Multiple Directory Numbers
Individually program the Nitsuko 900i and companion keyset Call Coverage keys to either ring (1) or not
ring (0).
1018 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Range
Use this program to assign a unique ring tone range (0-4) to each port assigned to a Call Coverage key.
This is important if the Nitsuko 900i and/or companion keyset have more than one Call Coverage key.
The unique ring tone helps the user quickly determine which key is ringing.
1019 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Priority
Use this program to set the priority (1-4) for the tones assigned in Program 1018 above. You make one assignment for each port. When multiple Call Coverage key calls ring an extension simultaneously, the
tone with the highest priority (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys just flash.
1028 - Multiple Directory Number Key Delayed Ringing
Individually program an extension’s Call Coverage keys for Delayed Ringing (1) or Immediate ringing
(0). Also see Program 0414 Item 5 above.
Related Features
Refer to the Nitsuko 900i Cordless Phone Installation and User Guide (P/N 85456DINS**) for Related Feature
information.
Operation
Refer to the Nitsuko 900i Cordless Phone Installation and User Guide (P/N 85456DINS**) for the specifics on
feature operation.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 193
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description
124i ☞
Available — 72 DCI software ports,
allocated between 72 DCI Modules
and six 3-DCI Units (two per
cabinet) maximum.
384i ☞
Available — 288 DCI software ports,
with 144 DCI Modules and 48 3DCI Units maximum. System
software prior to 3.04 uses different
DCI Types. System software 3.05
and higher has default assignments
for the first 3-DCI installed.
With the Data Communications Interface (DCI), you can use your telephone system to set up a data network.
DCI networking lets system users share common office resources such as PCs, modems and printers. Since the
phone system handles the network communications, you can eliminate the expense of separate wiring, network
adapters and network driver software. The DCIs can switch asynchronous RS-232-C data at speeds from 300 to
19.2K baud. Internal X.25 packet switching ensures maximum data reliability with a minimum of disruption to
other system activities.
There are three types of DCIs:
RS-232-C DCI Module (DCI-A: P/N 92266)
•
The DCI-A is a single port data module that installs in a multibutton phone for serial (RS-232-C)
communications. Although it installs in the phone, the DCI-A has its own unique port and extension number. Use DCI-A to easily add RS-232-C data capabilities to any keyset. The 384i system can have up to
144 DCI Modules; the 124i up to 72 (DCI-A plus DCI-B - see below).
•
•
Centronics DCI Module (DCI-B: P/N 92267)
The DCI-B is also a single port data module that installs in a multibutton telephone, but it is used for
parallel (Centronics) communication. Like the DCI-A, DCI-B also has its own unique port and extension number. Use the DCI-B to connect a parallel printer to your data network. The DCI-B operates in
one direction only. A switch on the DCI-B lets you send data OUT (from DCI-B to printer) or IN (from
printer to DCI-B). The 384i system can have up to 144 DCI Modules,; the 124i up to 72 (DCI-A plus
DCI-B - see above). The DCI-B requires a unique cable — consult with your sales representative.
3-Port DCI Unit (3DCI-A: P/N 92258)
The 3DCI-A is a stand-alone unit that connects to a single DSTU PCB port and provides three RS-232-C
ports. The 3DCI units are helpful in areas that have a high concentration of data devices. Since you can have
three devices connected to each 3DCI, you use up 1/3 the number of DTSU PCB ports (when compared to the
DCI Module). Keep in mind, however, that 3DCI Units do not have an associated telephone. The 384i system can have up to 48 3DCI Units (144 data ports); the 124i up to three (six data ports).
DCI Features
Keyset-Originated Data Call
•
Place a call to another DCI by using your telephone dial pad. The data call automatically sets up if the
called DCI answers.
•
•
194 FEATURES
Terminal-Originated Data Call
Place data calls directly from your PC. You can dial using Hayes compatible dialing commands (e.g.,
ATDT) or use the powerful auto-dialing features of your communications software.
Terminal-Originated Voice Call (Telemarketing Dial)
Use your PC to place an outgoing call, then switch to a voice call after the number dials out. This is a
great feature for telemarketers that have a list of names to call stored in their communications software.
Let the communications software dial the call - then switch it to a voice call after the stored number dials
out. Each phone with Telemarketing Dial should have a Telemarketing Dial key (code 1045). See Programming for more.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description (Cont’d)
•
DCI Department Group
Group DCIs into departments for pooled DCI operation. For example, you can program several network
printers into a DCI Department Group (see the illustration below). When a user calls the department,
they connect to the first available printer.
DCI Department Groups also allow modem pooling for trunk calls without using a proprietary Modem
Pooling PCB (see the illustration below). Users placing outside calls select one of the pooled modems as
part of the dialing sequence. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional installation details.
92 0 - 168 f
3DCI
16DSTU
Modem
PC
Serial Printer
3DCI
ASTU
Modem
Modem
Modem
(384i System Shown)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 195
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description (Cont’d)
•
•
•
Hayes Compatibility
The DCI is compatible with many Hayes AT commands. For example, you can use S-registers to change
DCI communications parameters (refer to Table DCI-2). In addition, Result Codes help you monitor the
progress of your call (refer to Table DCI-4). You can also enter over 20 Hayes commands from your terminal to control dialing and terminal options, Result Code display and S-register
programming (refer to Table DCI-5).
DCI Hotline
DCI Hotline sets up a "nailed-up" (permanent) connection between a DCI Module and another DCI.
During programming, you set the DCI Module as the "source" and the other DCI as the "target." When
the user at the source presses the keyset data key, the system automatically sets up the data link to the target DCI. You could use a DCI Hotline at a terminal connected through the phone system to a mini-computer. When the terminal user presses the keyset Hotline key, the terminal goes on-line to the
mini-computer.
Speed Conversion
The system can automatically compensate for speed differences between two connected data devices.
For example, a PC receiving at 2400 baud can accept files sent by another PC at 19.2K baud. There is no
need for the two devices to match their communications speed
Physical Ports and Software Ports
DCIs have physical ports and corresponding software ports. The software ports are used during system programming. For DCI Modules, the physical port is the same as the phone port into which the module is installed. In 384i,
the software port (1-144) depends on the installation order (set in Program 0005). Order 1 specifies software port 1;
order 144 specifies software port 144. Normally you’ll assign DCI Order 1 to the first DCI Module you install and
Order 144 to the last. In 124i, the software port is the same as host telephone’s physical port. The total of all 124i data
device software ports cannot exceed 72.
Each 3DCI consists of a physical port for connection to the phone system and three software ports. The physical
port is the station port into which the 3DCI line cord is plugged. In 384i, the 3DCIs have a different software
port numbering scheme which is also determined by the installation order set in Program 0005. The 3DCI with
order 1 (shown below) has software ports 145, 146 and 147. The 3DCI with order 48 (the highest 3DCI order
number available) has software ports 286, 287 and 288. Normally, you assign 3DCI Order 1 to the first 3DCI
you install and Order 48 to the last. In 124i, the software port is the same as the extension port to which the module is connected and the next two consecutive ports. The total of all 124i data device software ports cannot exceed 72.
384i Data Communications Interface Devices
196 FEATURES
Device
Total Number of
Physical Ports
Installation Order
Numbers
Software Ports
DCI Modules
144 (in phone)
1-144
1-144
3DCI Units
48
1-48
145-288
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description (Cont’d)
PORT 2
PORT 1
Software
Port 146
Software
Port 145
- 1 6 6A
PORT 3
FG
To DSTU
PCB Port
920
LINE
Software
Port 147
Physical
Port (Order 1)
(384i System Shown)
During programming, you assign DCI extension numbers, Department Group options and Tenant Group options
to DCI software ports, not physical ports. During installation, the equipment plugged into the connectors
correspond to the DCI software ports. Refer to the system Hardware Manual for more installation details.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 197
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description (Cont’d)
DCI S-Registers (Register Type 1)
Register
198 FEATURES
Description
Range
Default
0
Number of Rings Until Auto-Answer
The number of rings required before the DCI port
answers the call.
0 (No auto-answer)
1-255 (2-510 seconds)
0
1
Ring Count
The register that stores the number or rings
detected by the DCI
0-255 (0-510 seconds)
0
2
Escape Character
The decimal value of the ASCII character used for
Escape
0-127 (decimal)
43
3
Carriage Return Character
The decimal value of the ASCII character used for
carriage return
0-127 (decimal)
13
4
Line Feed Character
The decimal value of the ASCII character used for
line feed.
0-127 (decimal)
10
5
Backspace Character
The decimal value of the ASCII character used as
a backspace.
0-32, 127 (decimal)
8
7
Wait for Carrier After Dial
During call setup, sets time DCI waits for carrier
from remote modem before hanging up. Also Sets
time DCI pauses when it encounters a W in the
dial string.
1-255 (seconds)
30
9
Carrier Detect Response Time
Minimum duration of valid carrier signal.
1-255 (10-2550 mS)
6 (60 mS)
10
Lost Carrier to Hang Up Delay
Length of time DCI waits before hanging up after
loss of carrier (must be greater than register 9)
1-255 (10-2550 mS)
14 (140 mS)
12
Escape Code Guard Time
Delay (guard) time before and after entering
escape character.
0, 1-255
(0, 20-5100 mS)
50 (1 second)
25
Delay to DTR
In synchronous mode, sets interval between
connection and examination of DTR. Also
After connection, sets minimum duration of
valid DTR signal.
1-255 (10-1550 mS)
5 (50mS)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
DCI S-Registers (Register Type 1)
Register
Description
Range
Default
58
DTE/DCE Terminal Type
You can configure a DCI-A Module (P/N 92266)
as either a DCE of DTE device. Use the DCE (1)
configuration if you have a straight-thru cable and
you want to connect directly to a terminal or PC
serial port. Use the DTE (0) configuration if you
have a straight-thru cable and you want to connect
directly to a modem. (This option requires system
software 3.04. Prior to 3.04, this options was
Register 59, Data Watchdog Timer.)
0 = DTE
1 = DCE
0 (DTE)
59
Data Watchdog Timer (Low)
If a data low condition exists for longer than this
interval, the system disconnects the data call. This
option is only available in system software prior
to 3.04.
1-255 seconds
0=disabled
0 (disabled)
60
Data Watchdog Timer (High)
If a data high condition exists for longer than this
interval, the system disconnects the data call. This
option is only available in system software prior
to 3.04.
1-255 seconds
0 = disabled
0 (disabled)
61
Packet Size
Sets the size of the data packet. Packets exceeding
this size are transmitted. Packets less than this size
are not (unless timeout occurs - see register 63).
0-255 (0-255 byte)
255
62
Terminate Code
The decimal value of the ASCII code used to end
(terminate) a command line.
0-127 (decimal)
13 (CR)
63
Data Transmission Time
Sets how long DCI waits before transmitting an
incomplete packet. Use register 61 to set packet
size.
0, 1-255
(0, 50-12750 mS)
0=disabled
5 (250 mS)
64
Result Code Send/Block
Allows/prevents sending of Result Codes to
device connected to DCI.
0=Send
1=Do Not Send
0 (Send)
Result Code Type
Enables sending of Result Codes as words or
numbers.
0=Numeric
1=Words
1 (Words)
Result Code Mode
Determines which set of Result Codes are sent to
device connected to DCI (Basic or Extended - see
Table with DCI feature).
0=Basic
1=Extended
0 (Basic)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 199
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
DCI S-Registers (Register Type 1)
Register
65
66
200 FEATURES
Description
Range
Default
1=300 BPS
2=600 BPS
3=1200 BPS
4=2400 BPS
5=4800 BPS
6=9600 BPS
7=19,200 BPS
6 (9600 BPS)
Stop Bit
Sets the number of stop bits the DCI expects in the
data stream
0=1 stop bit
1=2 stop bits
0 (1 stop bit)
Data Bits
Sets the number of data bits the DCI expects in the
data stream.
0=7 data bits
1=8 data bits
1 (8 data bits)
Parity
Sets the parity method the DCI expects in the data
stream
0=No parity
1=Not used
2=Odd parity
3=Even parity
0 (no parity)
Request to Send (RTS) Control
Enables (0) or disables (1) RTS (pin 4) control. If
disabled, the DCI holds RTS on.
0=Control enabled
1=Disabled (normally
on)
0 (control
enabled)
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Control
Enables (0) or disables (1) DTR (pin 20) control.
If disabled, the DCI holds DTR on.
0=Control enabled
1=Disabled (normally
on)
0 (control
enabled)
Clear to Send (CD Control)
Enables (0) or disables (1) CTS (pin 5) control. If
disabled, CTS follows RTS (pin 4).
0=Control enabled
1=Disabled (follows
RTS)
0 (control
enabled)
Flow Control
Sets flow control.
0=No flow control
1=RTS/CTS
(hardware) flow
control enabled
2=XON/XOFF
between DCI and
connected terminal
3=XON/XOFF
between sender and
receiver (DCI
transparent)
1 (hardware
flow control)
Baud Rate
Sets the baud rate of the DCI port.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
DCI X.25 Packet Switching (LAPB) Registers (Register Type 2)
Register
Description
Range
Default
1
T1 Timer
After the DCE (DCI) sends a packet, it must
receive a response from the connected DTE within
the T1 interval. If a response is not received, the
DCE resends the packet.
0-65535 mS
500 mS
2
T2 Timer
After the connected DTE receives a packet from
the DCE, it must respond within the T2 interval.
(T2 must be less than T1.)
0-65535 mS
250 mS
3
N1
The maximum number of bits in an I (Information
Transfer) frame.
0-65535 bits
2080 bits
4
N2
After T1 expires, N2 is the maximum number of
transmissions and retransmissions of a packet
allowed.
0-65535 times
20 times
5
K
The maximum number of I (Information Transfer)
frames a connected device may have
unacknowledged (outstanding).
0-7 frames
7 frames
Internal Calls
External Calls
6
T1 Timer
After the DCE (DCI) sends a packet, it must
receive a response from the connected DTE within
the T1 interval. If a response is not received, the
DCE resends the packet.
0-65535 mS
2000 mS
7
T2 Timer
After the connected DTE receives a packet from
the DCE, it must respond within the T2 interval.
(T2 must be less than T1.)
0-65535 mS
1000 mS
8
N1
The maximum number of bits in an I (Information
Transfer) frame.
0-65535 bits
2080 bits
9
N2
After T1 expires, N2 is the maximum number of
transmissions and retransmissions of a packet
allowed.
0-65535 times
7 times
10
K
The maximum number of I (Information Transfer)
frames a connected device may have
unacknowledged (outstanding).
0-7 frames
7 frames
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 201
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-3, DCI RS-232-C Connector
202 FEATURES
Pin
Designation
Function
Direction
1
FG
Protective
Ground
2
TX
Transmitted Data
To Terminal
3
RX
Received Data
To DCI
4
RTS
Request to Send
To Terminal
5
CTS
Clear to Send
To DCI
6
DSR
Data Set Ready
To DCI
7
SG
Signal Ground
8
CD
Carrier Detect
To DCI
20
DTR
Data Terminal
Ready
To Terminal
22
RI
Ring Indicator
To DCI
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-4, Result Codes
Numbers
Words
Definition
Result Code Set
0
1
2
3
4
Returned when command entered
without error.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
0
OK
1
CONNECT
Connection is established (any speed)
with result code set 0.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
2
RING
Displays at destination terminal while
call is ringing.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
3
NO CARRIER
No carrier received from destination call disconnected.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
4
ERROR
Incorrect command entered.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
5
CONNECT 1200 Call connected at 1200 baud.
7
BUSY
Destination extension busy or no
pooled modem available.
8
NO ANSWER
Destination doesn’t answer within
allowed time.
10
✔
CONNECT 2400 Call connected at 2400 baud.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
21
CONNECT 300
Call connected at 300 baud.
✔
✔
✔
✔
22
CONNECT 600
Call connected at 600 baud.
✔
✔
✔
✔
23
CONNECT 4800
Call connected at 4800 baud.
✔
✔
✔
✔
24
CONNECT 9600
Call connected at 9600 baud.
✔
✔
✔
✔
25
CONNECT 19200 Call connected at 19200 baud.
✔
✔
✔
✔
26
CAMP ON SET
After getting BUSY result code, caller
uses ATK to Camp-On.
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
27
CAMP ON FAIL
Camp on attempt fails (see CAMP On
SET above).
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
28
CAMP ON
CALL BACK
Extension waiting for CAMP ON to go
through
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 203
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Description (Cont’d)
Table DCI-5, Hayes Commands
Command
Title
AT
Attention
A/
Re-execute Command
A
Answer
Dn
Dial
E0
Echo Off
Terminal does not echo commands input by user.
E1
Echo On
Terminal echoes commands input by user.
H
Hang Up
Hang up (disconnect) current call.
I
ROM Version
K
Camp On
0
Description
Precedes all commands - place at beginning of command line.
Re-executes the most recent AT command.
Answers incoming call.
Dial according to the value of n, where n can be: 0-9, A to D,
# and * (in telephone number) [, ], - or space (used to make
number easier to read, but ignored at time of dialing).
Returns the version on the ROM chip in the DCI.
Camp On to busy system extension.
Return to Communication Mode After entering command mode (by entering an escape
sequence), use AT0 to return to the communications mode.
Q0
Result Codes On
Result codes are displayed.
Q1
Result Codes Off
Result codes are not displayed.
Sx?
Register Contents
The contents of register x are displayed (e.g., S1?) displays
the contents of register 1). (x=two digits).
Sx=y
Change Register
V0
Numeric Result Codes Set
DCI provides numeric result codes, instead of verbal result
codes. See also Q0 and Q1.
V1
Verbal Result Codes Set
DCI provides verbal result codes, instead of numeric result
codes. See also Q0 and Q1.
X0
Result Code Set 0
Enable result code set 0 (basic result codes).
X1
Result Code Set 1
Enable result code set 1.
X2
Result Code Set 2
Enable result code set 2.
X3
Result Code Set 3
Enable result code set 3.
X4
Result Code Set 4
Enable result code set 4.
Z
Reset
&F
Initialize Registers
The DCI returns all registers to their factory default settings.
&W
Store Registers
The DCI saves (stores) the current register values . Register
values saved are S0, S2-S5, S12, S61-S66.
204 FEATURES
The contents of register X are changed to entry y. (x=2
digits, y=3 digits).
Reset the DCI, using the last values saved by system
programming or the &W command.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Programming
Start
In 0005, assign 3DCI's station port
circuit type 4. Order 1-48
corresponds to software ports
145-288.
3DCI Unit
DCI
Is DCI a DCI Module or
3DCI Unit? (In 124i, skip
this decision.)
In 0005, assign DCI's station port
circuit type 2. Order 1-144
corresponds to software ports
1-144.
In 0503, assign unused extension
numbers to the DCI software ports.
In 1202 (DCI Type) for the
DCI software port, enter 4.
Modem
Is DCI software port
connect to DTE (Terminal),
DCE (Modem) or
Centronics (parallel) device.
Terminal
In 1202 (DCI Type) for the
DCI software port, enter 1.
Parallel
In 1202 (DCI Type)
for the DCI software
port, enter 2.
In 1202 (DCI Sub-type) for the
DCI software port, enter 1 for
each sub-type .
You can also use Hayes
commands to change S-registers
and other options.
Same
Do DCI's require
unique register
(option)
programming?
Do you want to change
a DCI software port's
default communications
options?
Unique
Yes
In 1202 (DCI Sub-type) for the
DCI software port, enter a
unique sub-type number
(1-10).
In 1201 for each sub-type (1-10), set the
values for the DCI S-registers (Register
Type 1) and LAPB (X.25 packet
switching) registers (Register Type 2).
No
(384i only) In 1203, assign
each DCI software port to a
Tenant Group (1-4).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Go to the flow
chart on the
following page.
FEATURES 205
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
Do you want to have
DCI Department
(pooled) operation?
Yes
In 1204, assign DCI
software ports to DCI
Department Groups
(1-32).
No
In 0507, assign extension
(pilot) numbers to the DCI
Department Groups.
In 1205, assign each DCI
software port to a
non-restrictive Toll Restriction
Class (1-15). Also refer to the
Toll Restriction feature.
No
Do you want to Toll
Restrict outgoing
(trunk) DCI calls?
Do you want DCI
Hotlines for
"nailed-up"
connections?
Yes
Yes
In 1205, assign each DCI
software port to a restrictive
Toll Restriction Class (1-15).
Also refer to the Toll
Restriction feature.
In 1207, set DCI Hotline
originator and target
extension numbers.
No
In 1206, initialize
DCI software port.
If you don't initialize, any
changes you made in 1201
won't take effect.
Go to the flow
chart on the
following page.
206 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
No
Is DCI a DCI Module
installed in a keyset?
Do you want the
Telemarketing Dial
feature?
Yes
Yes
In 1006, assign a data key
(code 1029) to the keyset.
In 1006, assign a
Telemarketing Dial key
(code 1045) to the keyset.
No
No
In 0406 Item 70,
enter 0.
Should keyset be able
to set DCI Automatic
Answer (Service Code
883)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 70,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Continued
on following
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 207
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Is the terminal connected
to the DCI software port
also for SMDR?
Yes
Refer to the Station
Message Detail
Recording feature.
No
Is the terminal
connected to the DCI
software port also for
system reports?
Yes
In 0007, enter the DCI
software port number as
the system report port
number.
No
Is the terminal
connected to the DCI
software port also for
the alarm report?
Yes
In 0008, enter the DCI
software port number as
alarm report port number.
No
In 0130, set the report date
format (0=American).
(384i only)
Is inDepth/inDepth+
installed?
Yes
In 1914:1 enter the
channel/modem
number to be used
by the LAPB PCB.
No
Stop
208 FEATURES
In 1914:2 enter the
software port to
which the DCI has
been assigned in
Program 0005.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ (384i Only) 0005 - Extension Circuit Type
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Assign circuit type 2 for keysets with a DCI Module. Assign circuit type 4 for a 3DCI Module. The
"Order" entry sets the software port number. For DCI Modules, order 1-144 corresponds to software
ports 1-144. For 3DCI Modules, order 1-144 corresponds to software ports 145-288.
0007 - System Report Setup
If the device connected to the DCI will also be for system reports, enter the DCI software port number as
the system report port number.
0008 - Alarm Report Port Setup
If the device connected to the DCI will also be for alarm reports, enter the DCI software port number as
the alarm report port number.
0130 - Date Format for SMDR and System Reports
Set the date format for SMDR (0=American, 1=European or 2=Japanese).
0406 - COS Options, Item 70: DCI Auto-Answer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to set the DCI auto-answer mode (Service Code 883).
0503 - DCI Extension Number
Assign an unused extension number (e.g., 500) to the DCI port. This allows other users to place data calls
to the DCI.
0507 - DCI Department Pilot Numbers
Assign unused extension numbers (e.g., 500) to the DCI Department Groups set in Program 1204.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a data key (code 1029) to each keyset with a DCI Module.
If DCI Module user wants to use the PC to dial voice calls, assign a Telemarketing Dial key (code 1045).
1201 - DCI Setup
For each of the DCI sub-types (1-10 set in Program 1202), set the values for the modem S-registers
(Register Type 1) and the X.25 packet switching (LAPB) registers (Register Type 2). Refer to Tables
DCI-1 and DCI-2 provided with this feature. (You can also change these registers interactively from
the DCI’s terminal).
1202 - DCI Port Type
Assign a DCI port type to each DCI software port (1-144 or 145-288 in 384i; 1-72 in 124). Also, assign
the sub-type (1-10 used in Program 1201) to each software port. The types are:
0 = None
1 = DCI connected to RS-232 DTE (terminal) port (1201 S-register 58 should be 0).
2 = DCI connected to Centronics port
3 = Not used
4 = DCI connected to RS-232 DCE (modem) port (1201 S-register 58 should be 1).
Prior to system software 3.04, the available types were 1 (RS-232-C) or 2 (Centronics).
(384i Only) 1203 - DCI Tenant Group
Assign each installed DCI software port (1-144 and 145-288) to a tenant group (1-4).
1204 - DCI Department Group
To pool DCIs into a Department, assign DCI software ports (1-144 and 145-288 in 384i, 1-72 in 124i) to
DCI Department Groups (1-32). Assign Pilot Numbers to DCI Departments in Program 0507.
1205 - DCI Toll Restriction Class
For outgoing data calls, set the Toll Restriction Class (1-15, used in program 0701) for each DCI software port (1-144 and 145-288).
1206 - Initialize DCI
After changing register values in Program 1201, be sure to use this program to initialize the DCI software
port (1-144 and 145-288 in 384i, 1-72 in 124i ). You must initialize a DCI software port before any
changes made in Program 1201 will take effect.
1207 - DCI Hotline Setup
Use this program to set up a DCI Hotline between an extension with a DCI Module and a destination
DCI. When the user at the DCI Hotline originator presses the data key, the system automatically calls the
programmed destination.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 209
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ (384i only) 1914 - PC Connection Port for Operation Control, Item 1: Using PDM Modem Number
➣
If PMS/inDepth is installed, enter the channel/modem number to be used by the LAPB PCB (01-16 maximum [4 per each LAPB PCB installed]).
(384i only) 1914 - PC Connection Port for Operation Control, Item 2: DCI No. of Connecting WS
If PMS/inDepth is installed, enter the software port to which the DCI has been assign in Program 0005
(DCI=1-144, 3DCI=145-288).
Related Features
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
CTI applications automate the office with TAPI compatibility and external PC control.
Prime Line Selection
Do not set up Prime Line Selection for extensions with Telemarketing Dial.
Programmable Function Keys
A keyset with a Data Module must have a data key. Optionally, keysets can also have Telemarketing Dial keys.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use the Data Communications capabilities of the system.
Station Message Detail Recording
The system uses DCIs for SMDR and system reports.
TAPI Compatibility
The system has Telephony Programming Applications Interface (TAPI) capability.
Operation
KEYSET-ORIGINATED DATA CALL
To place a keyset-originated data call:
Your extension must have a data key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1029)
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial DCI extension number.
The data key lights when the call connects.
If you see "BUSY" on your terminal display, you may be able to type ATK (Enter) to Camp On. Refer to
Table DCI-4 for other Result Codes. Refer to Table DCI-5 for a complete list of Hayes-compatible commands.
If you call a busy DCI-B, your data key continues to flash.
TERMINAL-ORIGINATED VOICE CALL (Telemarketing Dial)
To place a terminal-originated voice call:
1.
Press Telemarketing Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1045).
2.
Using the terminal, type ATDT , the extension you want to call and press Enter.
To save time, you can use your communication software’s dialing directory feature.
3.
Press Telemarketing Dial key after call dials out.
TERMINAL-ORIGINATED DATA CALL
To make sure your terminal is working properly:
1.
Type AT (Enter).
OK displays on the next line. If you don’t see OK, check the communications parameters of your
DCI and communications software.
When calling from a DCI-B, you can only place keyset-originated data calls.
To place a call from your terminal:
1.
Type ATDT nnn (where nnn is the DCI extension you want to call) press Enter.
You see CONNECT if your call goes through. For other Result Codes you may see, refer to Table DCI-4.
210 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
Operation
To reset your DCI from your telephone (DCI Modules only):
Resetting your DCI Module drops the data call in progress.
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 880.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
USING DCI HOTLINE
To use DCI Hotline:
For DCI Hotline, the calling (source) DCI must be a DCI Module installed in a telephone.
1.
Press data key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1029) on extension with DCI Module.
The system automatically sets up the call.
USING HAYES COMMANDS
To use a Hayes command from your terminal:
Hayes commands let you dial numbers, change DCI registers and set other options. Refer to Table DCI-5 for the Hayes commands available with the DCI.
1.
Type AT.
2.
Type the command plus any options, then press enter.
If you use ATSx=y to change S-register values, be sure to use AT&W to save your entries.
ANSWERING DATA CALLS
To answer an incoming data call:
1.
Press flashing data key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1029).
OR
Your PC communications software answers the call automatically.
You can also type the Hayes command ATA (Enter) to answer the call.
To review the DCI information for an extension (DCI/port number), press CHECK + DND.
To enable Auto Answer for a DCI Module:
1.
Press idle CALL key Dial 883.
DISCONNECTING AN ACTIVE DATA CALL
To disconnect your active data call:
1.
Use your PC communications software to hang up.
OR
(DCI Module Only) Press idle CALL key and dial 884.
OR
Press data key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1029).
INITIALIZING A DCI MODULE
To initialize your DCI Module:
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial 880.
2.
Press SPK to hang up.
You can also use Program 1206 to initialize DCIs.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 211
Features B-D
Department Calling
Department Calling
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Enhanced hunting requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Enhanced hunting requires system
software 3.06.02 or higher.
With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed Department
Group by dialing the group’s pilot number. The call would ring the first available extension in the group. For example, this would let a caller dial the Sales department just by knowing the Sales department’s pilot number.
The caller would not have to know any of the Sales department’s extension numbers. The system allows up to 32
Department Calling Groups per Tenant Group.
There are two types or routing available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and Circular Routing. With
Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first. Lower priority extensions ring
only if all higher priority extensions are busy. With Circular Routing, each call rings a new extension. In a Department Group with extensions 310 (Priority 1), 311 (Priority 2) and 312 (Priority 3)
The first call rings 310.
•
The second call rings 311.
•
The third call rings 312.
•
The fourth call rings 310 and the cycle repeats.
•
Note: When programming, the high priority extensions have low priority numbers. For example, priority 1 has
a higher priority than priority 10.
Overflow Routing
Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group. If a user directly dials a
busy extension within a Department Group, the system can optionally route the call to the first available group
member.
User Log Out/Log In
An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group. By logging out, the user removes their
extension from the group. Once logged out, Department Calling bypasses their extension. When they log back
in, Department Calling routes to their extension normally. All users can dial a code to log in or log out of their
Department Calling Group. A keyset can optionally have a function key programmed for one-button log in and
log out operation.
212 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Department Calling
Description (Cont’d)
Enhanced Hunting
Department Calling is enhanced with expanded hunting capabilities. Hunting sets the conditions under which
calls to a Department Group pilot number will cycle through the members of the group. The hunting choices are:
Busy (Option 0)
•
A call to the pilot number will hunt past a busy group member to the first available extension. (Enabling
this option makes Department Calling operate the same way as it in the unenhanced system software.)
•
•
•
Not answered (Option 1)
A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call
will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. If the Department Group has Priority Routing enabled, and the highest priority member is busy, the call will not route.
Busy or not answered (Option 2)
A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group. The call
will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. Calls into groups with Priority
Routing and Circular Routing route identically.
Simultaneous ringing (Option 3)
All idle members of the Department Group ring simultaneously. Calls do not cycle between group members.
If all members of the Department Group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group’s pilot number will queue for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold up to 10 waiting calls. Once
the queue fills, additional callers hear busy tone and cannot queue for an available member. If a display
phone is waiting in queue, the user will see: WAITING (group name). If a transferred call in queue is an outside call, and the system has a VAU Module installed, the queued caller will hear, "Please hold on. All lines
are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free."
The VAU Automated Attendant can also Transfer calls to Department Groups. Refer to "Voice Announce Unit"
feature for more information on setting up the VAU Automated Attendant.
The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is:
Busy on a call
•
In Do Not Disturb
•
Call Forwarded
•
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 213
Features B-D
Department Calling
Description (Cont’d)
Priority Routing
Call
Call
92
0
-
20
0A
Call
214 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Department Calling
Description (Cont’d)
Circular Routing
Call 1
Call 2
92
0
-
20
0B
Call 3
Call 4
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 215
Features B-D
Department Calling
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0406 Item 64, enter 0 to
prevent Department Calling.
No
Should an extension
be allowed to call a
Department Group?
Yes
In 0406 Item 64, enter 1 to
allow Department Calling.
Circular
Routing
In 0410 Item 1, enter 1 to
enable Circular Routing.
In 1005, assign a Class
of Service to extensions.
In 0410 Item 1, enter 0 to
enable Priority Routing.
Priority
Routing
Should calls into a
Department Group use
Priority Routing or
Circular Routing?
The 384i allows up to 32 Department
Groups. The 124i allows up to 8.
In 1003, assign
extension to
Department Group 0.
No
Extension users dial pilot numbers
to call Department Groups.
Should extension be part
of a Department Group?
Yes
In 1003, assign
extension to
Department Group.
If you are using Priority Routing,
use 1003 to set the extension's
priority within the group.
In 0506, assign pilot numbers to
each Department Group set up
in 1003.
This only applies to Intercom calls to
department members, not pilot numbers.
In 0410 Item 2,
enter 1.
Overflow
If extension user calls a
busy Department Group
member, should call
overflow or be busy?
Should extension
have one-button
log in/log out
operation?
Busy
Yes
In 0410 Item 2,
enter 0.
In 1006, assign a key
for Department Calling
log out (code 1074).
No
Continued
on next
page.
216 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Department Calling
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Do you want a DIL to
ring a Department
Group directly?
No
In 384i, this option
requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
In0901:14-17, assign
Service Type 4 for each
trunk you want to set up
as a DIL.
Yes
In 0917, assign the
Department Group pilot
number as the DIL destination.
In 384i, for Department Groups
1-32 enter 385-417.
In 124i, for Department Groups
1-8 enter 97-104.
Do you want to set
up Enhanced
Hunting?
No
Stop
Yes
In 0410:4, select the enhanced
hunting type you want:
0 = When busy
1 = When not answered
2 = When busy or not answered
3 = Simultaneous ringing
Does a call ring a
Department Group
member the right
interval before hunting?
No
In 0405:80, change the
Department Hunting No
Answer Time.
Yes
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 217
Features B-D
Department Calling
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 80: Department Hunting No Answer Time
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
218 FEATURES
Set how long a call will ring a Department Group extension before hunting occurs.
0406 - COS Options, Item 64: Department Calling
In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) Department Calling.
0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options, Item 1: Department Calling Cycle
For each tenant, set the routing cycle for calls into a department (i.e., when a user dials the department
pilot number). The system can ring the highest priority extension available (Priority Routing, 0) or cycle
in circular order through the group (Circular Routing, 1).
0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options, Item 2: Department Routing when Busy
For each tenant, set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member. The
caller can hear busy tone (0) or overflow to the first available Department Group member (1). This option
is for Intercom calls to an extension, not a pilot number.
0410 - Extension (Department) Group Options, Item 4: Hunt Type
Set the type of hunting for each Department Group:
0 = Hunting when busy
1 = Hunting when not answered
2 = Hunting when busy or not answered
3 = Simultaneous ringing (all members)
0506 - Department Group Numbers
Assign names and pilot numbers to the Extension (Department) Groups you set up in Program 1003.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type
If you want a trunk to be a DIL to a Department Group, assign Service Type 4 for each Night Service
Mode. Also see 0917 below. In 384i, this option requires system software 3.04 or higher.
0917 - DIL Assignment
For each trunk assigned Service Type 4 in 0901:14-17 above, assign the DIL destination as the Department Group pilot number.
- In 124i, enter 97-104 for Department Groups 1-8.
- In 384i, enter 385-417 for Department Groups 1-32. This option requires system software 3.04 or higher.
1003 - Extension (Department) Groups
Assign extensions to Department Groups (1-9 or 01-32) and set the priority assignment.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a Department Calling key so extension users can install or remove themselves from the Department Calling Group.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features B-D
Department Calling
Related Features
Department Step Calling
Easily step call to an idle Department Group member if the member called is busy.
Tenant Service
Each Tenant Group can have their own set of Department Group numbers (up to 32 per group).
Transfer
An extension user can Transfer a call to a Department Group master number. If unanswered, the call will
recall the transferring extension after the Transfer Recall Time (Program 0405 Item 5).
Operation
To call a department:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial department’s extension number.
The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department.
To log out of your Department Calling Group:
While you are logged out, Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension.
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 150 + 1.
OR
1.
Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1074).
The key lights while you are logged out.
To log back in to your Department Calling Group:
While you log back in, Department Calling will route calls to your extension.
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 150 + 0.
OR
1.
Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1074).
The key goes out when you log back in.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 219
Features B-D
Department Calling
— For Your Notes —
220 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Department Step Calling
Department
Step Calling
Features D-M
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have Department Step Calling
quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and place another Intercom call if
the first extension called is unavailable. Department Step Calling also allows an extension user to cycle through
the members of a Department Group.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the Following Page
➣
➣
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options, Item 21: Department Step Calling
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Department Step
Calling.
0512 - Single Digit Service Code Setup
If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code (normally #).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key Department Step Calling (code 1021).
Related Features
Department Calling
An extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed Department Group by dialing the
group’s pilot number. Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions within the
group - which simulates Step Calling.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Department Step Calling operation.
Operation
To make a Step Call:
You step through Extension Groups set in Program 1003.
1.
Place call to busy Department Group member.
OR
Place call to Department Group pilot number.
2.
Dial #.
OR
Press Step Call key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1021).
3.
Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 221
Features D-M
Department Step Calling
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
Step Calling can only occur if
0410:2=0. Refer to the
Department Calling feature.
Set up Department Groups.
Refer to the Department
Calling feature.
No
Does system have
Department Groups
programmed?
Yes
In 0406:21, enter 0 to
disable Step Calling.
No
After calling a busy
Department Group
member, should caller be
able to step call to
another group member?
Yes
In 0406:21, enter 1 to
enable Step Calling.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1006, be sure not to
assign a Step Calling
key (code 1021).
No
Should extension have
one-button Step Calling?
In 0512:1, enter the digit
you want to use for
stepping through a
Department Group.
Another
digit
Should users dial # or
another digit to step
through a Department
Group?
Yes
#
In 1006, assign a Step
Calling key (code 1021).
In 0512:1, make
sure the entry is #.
Stop
222 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Dial Number Preview
Dial Number Preview
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Dialing Number Preview lets a display keyset user dial and review a number before the system dials it out. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors.
Conditions
An extension user cannot edit the displayed number.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 50, enter 0
to disable Dial Number
Preview.
No
Should extension have
Dial Number Preview
capability?
Yes
In 0406 Item 50, enter 1
to enable Dial Number
Preview.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 223
Features D-M
Dial Number Preview
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 50: Dial Number Preview
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Dial Number Preview.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
None
Operation
To use Dial Number Preview to place a call:
1.
Do not lift the handset or press a CALL key.
2.
Dial *.
3.
Dial number you want to call.
The number displays.
4.
To dial out the displayed trunk number, press a line key.
If the previewed number as a trunk access code (e.g., 9), you can press
CALL instead.
OR
To dial out the displayed Intercom number, press a CALL key.
OR
To cancel the number without dialing it out, Press HOLD.
224 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Changing the tone requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Changing the tone requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they press a key.
This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk calls, since these calls provide no Call Progress tones.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 56, enter 0 to
disable turning Dial Pad
Confirmation Tone on and off.
No
Should extension be able to
turn the Dial Pad Confirmation
Tone on and off?
Yes
In 0406 Item 56, enter 1 to
enable turning Dial Pad
Confirmation Tone on and off.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
(384i Only) Do you want to
change the Dial Pad
Confirmation Tone?
Yes
In 0110, select another
frequency and duration for the
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone.
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 225
Features D-M
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0110 - Keyset Confirmation Tone
➣
➣
If required, change the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone frequency and duration.
0406 - COS Options, Item 56: Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to turn Dial Pad Confirmation tone on and off.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Single Line Telephones
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones.
Operation
To enable/disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 824.
226 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Dial Tone Detection
Dial Tone Detection
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Allocating circuits for Dial Tone
Detection is not required.
Tone Detection Setup requires Base
2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
The Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial
Tone option requires Base 4.02,
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Allocating CDTU circuits for Dial
Tone Detection is required.
Tone Detection Setup requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
The Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial
Tone option requires system software
version 3.07.10 or higher.
If a trunk has Dial Tone Detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the telco or PBX when a user
places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk directly (by pressing a line key or dialing #9 and the
trunk’s number), the system will drop the trunk if dial tone does not occur. If the user access the trunk via a
Trunk Group (by dialing a trunk group code or automatically through a feature like Last Number Redial), the
system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group. Refer to the chart under Programming below for more.
Dial Tone Detection is available for the following features:
Automatic Route Selection
Abbreviated Dialing
Central Office Calls, Placing
Last Number Redial
Loop Keys (outbound)
Save Number Dialed
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Tie Lines
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled for manually dialed calls; enabled for automatically dialed calls.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 227
Features D-M
Dial Tone Detection
Programming
Start
In 0901:11, enter 0.
In 0921:3, enter 0.
In 0901:11, enter 1. Be sure
this doesn't conflict with the
site requirement for directly
accessed trunks.
No
No
Drop
Do you want Dial
Tone Detection for
Directly Accessed
trunks?
For Trunk Group calls,
should the system skip to
the next trunk if dial tone
is not detected?
Yes
In 0901:11, enter 1
Yes
In 0921:3, enter 1.
No
Change the setting
for 0405:60.
If dial tone is not
detected, should
trunk hang (not
disconnect) or drop?
Hang
In 0901:11, enter 0. Be sure
this doesn't conflict with the
site requirement for directly
accessed trunks.
Does the system wait
the correct interval
before dropping/
disconnecting when
there is no dial tone?
Yes
If required, use program
0116:11-32 to set the criteria
for dial tone detection.
(384i Only)
In 0303, be sure at least one
DSTU block is reserved for
dial tone detection (type 4).
228 FEATURES
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Dial Tone Detection
Programming (Cont’d)
Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction
Method
0901:11
0921:3
Result if dial tone not present . . .
Press a line key
OR
Dial #9 + Trunk number
0
0
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
0
1
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
1
0
Trunk drops
1
1
Trunk drops
0
0
Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
0
1
Trunk reroutes after timeout
1
0
Trunk drops
1
1
Trunk reroutes after timeout
Dial a Trunk Group
code
OR
Automatically through
a feature
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0116 - Tone Detection Setup
Use Items 11-32 to set the criteria for dial tone detection.
(384i Only) 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Circuit Setup
If dial tone detection is enabled, be sure to allocate at least one CDTU block for dial tone detection (type 4).
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 60, Dial Tone Detection Timer
If dial tone detection is enabled, the system will wait this interval for the telco to return dial tone. When
this interval expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this timer (and have the system wait continuously), enter 0.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 11, Dial Tone Detection for Directly Accessed Trunks
Enable(1) or disable (0) dial tone detection for manually dialed trunk calls. This option only pertains to
calls placed using line keys or Direct Trunk Access.
0921 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part B), Item 3: Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
If enabled, the system will skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to calls
placed using Loop Keys, Abbreviated Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save Number Dialed. It does
not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls.
Related Features
See Description above.
Operation
Dial Tone Detection is automatic if enabled in programming.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 229
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
-
Available — Four DID Translation
Tables with 200 entries each. Prior to
Base 1.2R, Wink Start Dial Pulse
DID operation was unavailable.
Intercept routing to Voice Mail requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
DTMF DID requires a Tone
Detector (DTDU) PCB. Tone
Detection Setup requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher. See page 844.
DID Routing Through the VAU
Automated Attendant requires Base
2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Routing by trunk to a specific VAU
message requires Base 4.02,
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher..
384i ☞
Intercept routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant requires Base
4.02, EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
-
-
-
-
Available — eight DID Translation
Tables with 1500 entries each.
Intercept routing to Voice Mail requires
system software 3.02 or higher.
Tone Detection Setup requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires system software 3.05.15 or
higher. See page 844.
DID Routing Through the VAU
Automated Attendant requires system
software 3.06.16 or higher. Limited
capabilities available with 3.06.09.
Routing by trunk to a specific VAU
message requires system software
3.07.10 or higher.
Intercept routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant requires
system software 3.07.10 or higher.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers who know
the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the local exchange (NNX) and
additional digits to ring the telephone system extension. For example, DID number 926-5400 can directly dial extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on attendant or secretary call screening to complete the call.
Note: Direct Inward Dialing requires DID service from telco.
In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides:
DID Dialed Number Translation
Flexible DID Service Compatibility
DID Intercept
DID Camp-On
•
•
•
•
DID Dialed Number Translation
DID allows eight different tables for DID number translation. This gives you more flexibility when buying DID
service from telco. If you can’t buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g., 301-556), use the translation tables to convert the digits received. For example, a translation table could convert digits 501-756 to extension
numbers 301-556.
The 384i system has 1500 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the eight DID Translation
Tables. There is one translation made in each entry. For a simple installation, you can put all 1500 entries in the
same table. For more flexibility, you can optionally distribute the 1500 entries among the eight tables.
The 124i system has 200 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among four DID Translation Tables. There is one translation made in each entry. Just as in 384i, in a simple installation you can put all 200 entries in the same table. Or, you can distribute the 200 entries among the four tables.
In addition to number conversion, each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it. When the
DID call rings the destination extension, the programmed name displays.
230 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Description (Cont’d)
Flexible DID Service Compatibility
You can program the system to be compatible with three and four digit DID service. With four digit service, the
telco sends four digits to the system for translation. With three digit service, the telco sends three digits to the
system for translation. Be sure to program your system for compatibility with the provided telco service. For
example, if the telco sends four digits, make sure you set up the translation tables to accept the four digits.
The system is compatible with Dial Pulse (DP) and DTMF DID signaling. DID trunks can be either wink start
or immediate start.
DID Intercept
DID Intercept automatically reroutes DID calls under certain conditions. There are three types of DID Intercept:
Vacant Number Intercept
•
If a caller dials an extension that does not exist or misdials, Vacant Number Intercept can reroute the call
to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without Vacant Number Intercept,
the caller hears error tone after misdialing.
•
•
Busy Intercept
Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension. If Busy Intercept is enabled, the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail.
If Busy Intercept is disabled, the call follows DID Camp-On programming (see below).
Ring-No-Answer Intercept
Ring-No-Answer Intercept sets the routing options for DID calls that ring unanswered at the destination
extension. With Ring-No-Answer Intercept enabled, the unanswered call reroutes to the DID Intercept
extension ring group or Voice Mail after the DID Ring-No-Answer Time interval. If Ring-No-Answer Intercept is disabled, the unanswered call rings the destination until the outside caller hangs up.
DID Camp-On
DID Camp-On sets what happens to DID calls to busy extensions when you have Busy Intercept disabled. With
DID Camp-On enabled, a call to a busy extension camps-on for the DID Ring No Answer Time interval. It then
diverts to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. Without DID Camp-On, the caller
to the busy extension just hears busy tone.
DID Routing Through the VAU Automated Attendant
DID calls can optionally route through the Automated Attendant. The DID caller hears an initial Automated Attendant Greeting explaining their dialing options. If the caller misdials, they can hear a second greeting with additional instructions. For example, the first Automated Attendant Greeting can be, "Thank you for calling. Please
dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for the operator." If the caller inadvertently dials an extension that doesn’t exist, they could hear, "The extension you dialed is unavailable. Please dial 0 for assistance or
dial # to leave a message so we can call you back."
You assign Automated Attendant greetings (i.e., VAU Messages) to the numbers in each Translation Table. This
provides you with extensive flexibility when determining which greetings the system should play for which dialed numbers. You could, for example, set up 926 5401 through 926 5449 to route to extensions 301-349, and
have 926 5450 route to the automated attendant.
Federal Communications Commission DID Requirements
Allowing this equipment to operate in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervision signaling is in
violation of Part 68 rules.
This equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Telephone Network when the DID trunk is:
Answered by the called station
•
Answered by the attendant
•
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user
•
Routed to a dial prompt
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 231
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Description (Cont’d)
Federal Communications Commission DID Requirements (Cont’d)
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the Public Switched Telephone
Network. Permissible exceptions are when:
A call is unanswered
•
A busy tone is received
•
A reorder tone is received
•
When ordering DID service, provide the telco with the following information:
FCC Registration Number ........................................1ZDJPN-nnnnn-KF-E
DID Facility Interface Code......................................02RV2-T
DID Service Order Code...........................................9.0F
DID Answer Supervision Code.................................A S.2
DID USOC Jack Type...............................................RJ21X
Conditions
(A.) DID requires the installation of a 4ATRU-DID PCB. Each PCB provides four DID ports but uses eight
trunk software ports. For example, a DID PCB that provides trunks 1-4 automatically disables trunks 5-8.
Refer to the hardware manual for additional details.
(B.) DID service must be purchased from your local telephone company.
(C.) (124i Only) DTMF DID requires a Tone Detector (DTDU) PCB.
Default Setting
Disabled.
232 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming
Start
(384i Only) If required, in 0116
check the Tone Detection Setup.
In 0905, assign each unique
type of DID trunk to its own
trunk group. Enter data in
worksheet page 1.
In 0901 Item 27, enter 0
for Dial Pulse. Enter data
in worksheet page 1.
No
DP
Are all your DID trunks
in the same telco block?
Is trunk for Dial
Pulse or DTMF
DID service?
Yes
DTMF
In 0132, make sure
the DID Trunk Timers
are compatible with
the local telco.
In 2301, enter 0 for
immediate start. Enter
data in worksheet page 1.
In 0901 Items 14-17, enter
trunk service type for each
Night Service mode. Enter
data in worksheet page 1.
Immed.
No
Does telco provide
wink or immediate
start DID service?
Should trunk be
DID all the time?
In 0905, assign all DID
trunks to the same group.
Enter data in worksheet
page 1.
In 0901 item 27, enter 1
for DTMF. Enter data in
worksheet page 1.
(384i Only) In 0303,
reserve at least one
DTU block for DTMF
reception (type 2).
Wink
Yes
In 2301, enter 1 for
wink start. Enter data
in worksheet page 1.
In 0901 Item 14-17, enter 3 for
each Night Service mode. Enter
data in worksheet page 1.
For example, a trunk can be a DID
trunk (type 3) in the day and a
normal (type 0) trunk at night.
In 1006, make sure the
DID trunk doesn't appear
as a line key.
Line
Appearance
Should DID ring
extension's function
key or line
appearance?
Function
Key
In 1006, assign a function
key as a line or loop key
for the DID.
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 233
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Make copies of worksheet
page 2 for each trunk group.
No
In 1808, assign each DID
trunk group to a different
Translation Table (1-8).
Enter the data on
worksheet page 2.
Determine how many
Translation Table entries
you need for each table.
Allocate Translation Table
entries to each Translation
Table. On worksheet page
2, use "Table No. Entry" to
record the entry number, and
"Address No." for the entry's
corresponding address.
Are all DID trunks
in the same trunk
group?
Yes
For each Translation Table, set
the number of digits the DID
service provides. Enter the data
on worksheet page 2 (one entry
per table).
Yes
Do you have more
than one
Translation Table?
Enter the data from
worksheet page 2 into
1805 and 1807.
Make a copy of worksheet
page 2 for trunk group 1.
In 1808, assign the DID
trunk group to Translation
Table 1. Enter the data
in worksheet page 2.
No
Determine how may
Translation Table entries
you need for Table 1.
Allocate Translation Table
entries to Translation Table 1.
On worksheet page 2, use
"Table No. Entry" to record the
entry number, and "Address
No." for the entry's
corresponding address.
For each Translation Table
Entry on worksheet page 2,
use 1806 to enter data in the
"Digits Received", "Digits
Dialed" and "Name" fields.
Continued
on next
page.
234 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Do you want
DID Intercept?
No
Stop
Yes
In 1809, assign 127
(384i) or 15 (124i) to
each Translation
Table.
VAU
Auto
Attn.
Should the intercept
destination be a Ring
Group, the VAU
Automated Attendant
or Voice Mail?
Ring
Group
Determine which
extension Ring Group you
want for DID Intercept.
Set up Ring Groups in
0909 and 0910.
Voice Mail
In 1809, assign 128
(384i) or 16 (124i)
to each Translation
Table.
In 2205, enter the VAU
message number that
should play for each trunk.
In 1810:1, enter 0.
No
Do you want Vacant
Number Intercept?
In 1809, assign an
extension Ring
Group to each
Translation Table.
Yes
In 1810:1, enter 1.
In 0405:10, set the
Intercom Interdigit
Time (for DID callers
that fail to dial).
In 1810:2, enter 0.
In 1810:3, enter 0.
No
No
Do you want Busy
Intercept?
Do you want RingNo-Answer Intercept?
Yes
Yes
In 1810:2, enter 1.
In 1810:3, enter 1.
In 0405:4, set the
Ring-No-Answer
Time interval.
In 1810:4, enter 0
for DID Camp-On.
No
Do you want
DID Camp-On?
Yes
In 1810:4, enter 1
for DID Camp-On.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 235
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming (Cont’d)
DID Routing Through the Automated Attendant (124i Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18, 384i 3.06.16 or Higher)
Start
Stop
No
Should a DID
number route to the
VAU Automated
Attendant?
Yes
Optionally, you can enter 127 in the TRF
field to have the call route to the VAU
message defined in Program 2205. If
you do, skip the rest of this chart.
In 1806 for the DID
number dialed, enter
882 in the TRF entry.
This message could be similar
to your main company
greeting. Callers can dial
Automated Attendant options
after hearing this message.
After entering 882 above, enter the
number of the VAU message (01-16) the
caller should hear when the Automated
Attendant answers (e.g., 882
02 ).
Enter the same VAU
message number as
you entered above
(e.g., 88202 02 ).
No
Should callers hear a unique
VAU message if they misdial
after the Automated
Attendant answers?
Yes
Enter the number of the
VAU message (01-16) that
has the unique message
(e.g., 88202 03 ).
Normally, you should let callers dial
additional Automated Attendant
options after hearing this message.
Stop
236 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0116 - Tone Detection Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
•
•
➣
Use items 1-10 and 19-32 to set the DTMF criteria for DTMF DID calls.
0132 - DID Trunk Timers
Make sure the DID Trunk Timer settings are compatible with your local telco.
(384i Only) 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Circuit Setup
If the system has DTMF DID trunks, be sure to reserve at least one DTU block for analog trunk DTMF
reception (type 2). There must be an available receiver for each DTMF DID trunk.
Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers (i.e., DTU blocks):
•
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 10: Intercom Interdigit Time
Set the time-out interval for DID callers that don’t dial. After this interval, the DID call routes according
to Vacant Number Intercept programming.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 31: DID Ring-No-Answer Time
Set the DID Ring-No-Answer (RNA) Intercept interval (0-64800 seconds). In systems with RNA Intercept, the DID call rings the destination extension for this interval and then rings Intercept Ring Group.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type
For each Night Service Mode, enter service type 3 when the trunk should be a DID trunk.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 27: DID/E&M Receive Signaling Type
Enter 0 if DID trunk is Dial Pulse (DP). Enter 1 if DID trunk is DTMF.
0905 - Trunk Groups
Put DID trunks in the same trunk group (other than group 1). If you have several types of DID trunks,
put each type in a separate trunk group.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring the extensions according to programming.
0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
DID Intercepts use your system’s CO trunk Ring Group programming.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
You can assign line keys for DID trunks (0001-0128). Without line keys, DID calls ring line appearance
(CALL) keys.
1805 - DID Translation Table Setup
Assign the range of DID Translation Table entries (1-1500) to each DID Translation Table (1-8). When
entering data:
For each table, specify the starting address that corresponds to the DID Translation Table entries.
The address is always one less than the entry (e.g., address 0000 is entry 1).
After specifying the starting address, enter the total number of entries in the table. For example, if table 1 begins at address 0000 and has 11 entries, the DID Translation Table entries are 1-10.
1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-1500), specify:
The digits received by the system (Digits Rcvd in the worksheet) (8 digits max.).
•
The extension the system dials after translation (Digits Dialed in the worksheet) (24 digits max.).
•
In 124i Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or 384i system software 3.06.16 or higher, you can route the
call to the VAU Automated Attendant. For the TRF entry, enter 882, the VAU message number for the
first greeting followed by the VAU message number for the second greeting. The second greeting
plays if the caller misdials. For example, 8820203 will cause the Automated Attendant to answer,
play VAU message 02 to the caller and the play VAU message 03 if they misdial. In system software
3.06.09, you could enter only the first VAU message number (not both).
Optionally (384i requires 3.07.10 or higher, 124i requires Base 4.02 or EXCPRU 4.02 or
higher), you can enter 127(384i) or 15 (124i) in the TRF field to have the call route to the VAU
message assigned to the trunk in Program 2205.
The name that should show on the dialed extension’s display when it rings (eight characters max).
•
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 237
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 1807 - DID Translation Table Expected Number of Digits
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
For each DID Translation Table (1-8), enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the
CO. For example, for a table used with 3-digit DID service, enter 3.
1808 - DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Assign the DID trunk groups (1-128) to translation tables. If all the DID trunks use the same type of DID service, you may have only one DID trunk group and one DID Translation Table (with many entries).
1809 - DID Intercept Ring Group
For each DID Translation Table, program the DID Intercept destination. The destination can be a
Ring Group (1-127 in 384i, 1-14 in 124i), Voice Mail (128 in 384i, 16 in 124i), the VAU Automated
Attendant (127 in 384i or 15 in the 124i) or the operator (0).
1810 - DID Intercept Options
Selectively enable (1) or disable (0) Vacant Number Intercept, Busy Intercept, Ring-No-Answer Intercept
and DID Camp-On.
2205 - OPA Message Assignment
If the DID Intercept destination set in Program 1809 is 127 (384i) or 15 (124i), use this program to assign the VAU message (1-16) that should play when the VAU Automated Attendant answers.
2301 - DID/E&M Start Signaling
Enter 0 if DID trunk uses immediate start signaling. Enter 1 if DID trunk uses wink start signaling.
Related Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly.
Off Hook Signaling
The Off Hook Signaling Enhancemetns provide DID calls with additional Off Hook Signaling options.
Refer to this feature for the specifics.
Programmable Function Keys
To simplify answering DID calls, assign function keys as line keys for the DID trunks.
Operation
DID calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls.
238 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
DID Options Worksheet
Trunk Service Type
Option
Trunk
Number
Trunk
Group
Signaling
Type
Start
Type
Day
Night
Midnight
Rest
0905
0901-27
2301
0901-14
0901-15
0901-16
0901-17
1-128
1-128
DP=0
DTMF=1
Immed.=0
Wink=1
Normal=0
DISA=2
DID=3
Normal=0
DISA=2
DID=3
Normal=0
DISA=2
DID=3
Normal=0
DISA=2
DID=3
1
2
0
1
3
0
0
3
2
2
0
1
3
0
0
3
3
2
0
1
3
0
0
3
Program No.
Entry Range
Sample Entries
Your Entries
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 239
Features D-M
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
DID Options Worksheet
AREA
TABLES
Option
Trunk
Group
DID Table
Number 1
Expected
Digits
Table
No. Entry
Address
No.
Digits Rcvd
Program No.
1808
1805
1807
1805
1805
1806
1806
1806
Entry Range
1-128
1-8
1-8
1-1500
0000-1499
8 dgts max.
24 dgts max.
8 char
max.
Sample Entries
Digits Dialed
Name
2
1
1
1
1
3
1
0000
218
218
DID
2
1
1
1
1
3
2
0001
220
220
DID
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
0002
224
224
DID
Your Entries
1
240 FEATURES
Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Description
124i ☞
-
-
Available — 52 trunks, 96
extensions/virtual extensions and
eight Department Groups.
Department Group as DIL
destination always available.
DIL overflow to Voice Mail requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
DIL overflow to the VAU Automated
Attendant is not available.
384i ☞
-
-
Available — 128 trunks, 384
extensions/virtual extensions and 32
Department Groups.
Department Group as DIL
destination requires system software
3.04 or higher.
DIL overflow to Voice Mail requires
system software 3.05.15 or higher.
DIL overflow to the VAU Automated
Attendant requires system software
3.07.10 or higher.
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or Department Group directly.
Since DILs only ring one extension or group (i.e., the DIL destination), employees always know which calls are
for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information.
When outside callers dial the DIL’s phone number, the call rings the operator on the International Sales line key.
The DIL does not ring other extensions.
DIL Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extension’s DIL. If the DIL is not answered at
its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group. This could help a Technical Service department, for example, that covers calls for an Inside Sales department. If the Inside Sales calls are not answered,
they ring into the Technical Service department.
Conditions
(A.) If unanswered, a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party hangs up. The
DIL does not automatically reroute.
(B.) If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy, the system routes the call as follows:
1. The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in 0919.
2. If there is no 0919 assignment, the trunks rings the PC Attendant Console (if installed).
3. If there is 0919 assignment or PC Attendant, the call rings according to the Ring Group assignments
in 0909 and 0910.
4. If none of the destinations in steps 1-3 above are available, the call continues to ring until a
destination becomes free.
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 241
Features D-M
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Programming
Start
Stop
No
Should extension
have a DIL?
DILs initially ring CALL keys without any
additional programming.
In 0901:14-17, enter
4 for each Night
Service Mode.
Yes
In 0917, enter
DIL destination.
Incoming DILs show as busy
on other extension's line keys.
Should DIL also ring
extension's line key?
In 1006, enter the
DIL trunk number for
line key.
Yes
No
All extensions should have at
least Hold access for DIL.
Should extensions
have outgoing
access to DIL?
Program 0911
for trunks; 0912
for extensions.
Yes
No
If a DIL rings too long,
does it route to the
overflow destination after
the proper interval?
In 0405:62, change the
DIL No Answer Time.
No
Yes
In 0919, enter 128
(384i) or 16 (124i).
Voice
Mail
Should the DIL overflow
destination be a Ring
Group, Voice Mail or the
VAU Automated Attendant?
Ring
Group
In 0919, enter
destination Ring
Group (1-126 in
384i, 1-15 in 124i).
VAU
In 0919, enter
127 (384i only).
In 0909, assign the extensions that
should receive the overflow to the
Ring Group programmed in 0919.
Enter 1 to enable ringing.
In 2205, enter number
of VAU Message that
should play to caller.
Stop
242 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 62: DIL No Answer Time
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the DIL No Answer Time (0-64800 seconds). If DIL Delayed Ringing is set in program 0919, this
option sets the DIL Delayed Ring interval.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14 to 17: Trunk Service Type
Assign each DIL Service Type 4. Make an entry for each Night Service mode.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow to the ring group programmed in 0919 (0=trunks
don’t ring [just flash line keys], 1=trunks ring).
0911- Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. All extensions should have at least Hold access to the DIL (entry 3). Without
Hold access, transferred DILs and DILs on hold can be answered only while they are ringing or recalling.
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-128) to extensions.
0917 - DIL Assignment
Set the destination extension port for each DIL — for each Night Service mode. The destination can be:
- An extension port (1-256 in 384i, 1-72 in 124i).
- A virtual extension port (257-384 in 384i, 73-96 in 124i).
- A Department Group (384-416 for groups 1-32 in 384i, 97-104 for groups 1-8 in 124i).
0919 - DIL No Answer Destination
For each DIL with delayed ringing, enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this
group after the DIL No Answer Time. In 384i, enter 127 to overflow to the VAU or 128 to overflow to Voice
Mail. In 124i, enter 16 to overflow to Voice Mail. Make an entry for each Night Service mode.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
To have the DIL ring a key, program a line key for the DIL trunk.
(384i Only) 2205 - OPA Message Assignment
If the Transfer Destination set in Program 0919 is 127, use this program to assign the VAU message (116) that should play when the VAU Automated Attendant answers.
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding does not reroute DILs. If an extension forwards their trunk calls, the trunk rings according to Ring Group programming.
Central Office Calls, Placing
You can place DILs in trunk groups to make outgoing DIL calls easier.
Department Calling
A DIL cannot have an Extension (Department) Group as its destination.
Do Not Disturb
If an DILs destination extension is in DND, an incoming call rings according to Ring Group programming.
Group Call Pickup
A user can activate Group Call Pickup to intercept a DIL ringing another extension.
Name Storing
Program a name for a DIL. This makes it easier to identify the incoming call.
Private Line
To simulate Private Line operation, create a unique Access Map for the DIL that allows full access only
for the destination. Give all other extensions only Hold access
Off Hook Signaling
If a keyset’s first channel is busy, a DIL always signals the idle second channel if available. If the second
channel already has a call waiting, DIL waits in line for a channel to become free. The outside caller
hears ringback tone while this occurs.
Programmable Function Keys
If an extension has a line key for a DIL, the call will ring the key. If not, the call rings an available line
appearance. For other extensions, the DIL indicates as busy.
Ring Groups
A DIL will ring its assigned extension without Ring Group programming. A DIL only rings its assigned
extension. If will not ring other extensions in a Ring Group.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 243
Features D-M
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Operation
To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
At keyset, press flashing line key for DIL.
If you don’t have a line key for the DIL, the DIL rings an idle CALL key.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
If you don’t answer the call, it may ring other extensions (i.e., the DIL No Answer Ring Group).
To place a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
At keyset, press line key for DIL
OR
Dial #9 and the DIL trunk number (e.g., 005).
OR
Dial 804 and the DIL trunk group number (e.g., 05).
OR
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Access
3.
Dial number.
244 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
-
Available — 15 users, 8 DISA
Classes of Service and 52 trunks.
Requires DTDU PCB for DTMF
DISA trunks.
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher. See page 844.
Oveflow routing to Voice Mail
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18
or higher.
Tone Detection Setup and setting the
CODEC Gain Type transmit and
receive levels requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Overflow routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant is not available.
384i ☞
-
-
-
-
Available — 15 users per Tenant
Group, 15 DISA Classes of Service
and 128 trunks.
Requires DTMF receivers on CDTU
PCB for DTMF DISA trunks.
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires system software 3.05.15.
See page 844.
Overflow routing to Voice Mail is
avaiable.
Tone Detection Setup and setting the
CODEC Gain Type transmit and
receive levels requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Overflow routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant requires
system software 3.07.10 or higher.
DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected features. This could help an
employee away from the office that wants to directly dial co-workers or use the company’s trunks for long distance calls. To use DISA, the employee:
Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk
•
Waits for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone
•
Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code)
•
Waits for a second unique dial tone
•
Accesses a system trunk, uses a selected feature or dials a system extension
•
DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key for the DISA trunk, the
call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line key, the call rings an idle CALL key.
You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a trunk can be a normal
trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night. You can also set the routing for DISA trunks when the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial.
DISA Class of Service
DISA Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for DISA callers. This allows you to control the
capabilities of the DISA callers dialing into your system. When a DISA caller first accesses the system, they
must enter a DISA password before proceeding. The system associates the password entered with a specific
user number, which in turn has a Class of Service. If the Class of Service allows the action (such as making outgoing trunk calls), the call goes through. If the DISA Class of Service doesn’t allow the action, the system prevents the call. The DISA Class of Service options are:
•
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
When a DISA caller dials into the system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls. Any toll
charges are incurred by the system. The call follows the system’s Trunk Group Access or Automatic
Route Selection - whichever is enabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 245
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description (Cont’d)
•
•
•
•
•
Trunk Group Access
DISA callers may be able to access a specific trunk group for outgoing calls through the system. To access a Trunk Group, the user dials Service Code 804 followed by the Trunk Group number (e.g., 1). This
allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected group. Trunk Group Access bypasses
the system’s Trunk Group Routing/ARS. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are incurred by the system. Also see Direct Trunk Access below.
Common Abbreviated Dialing
The system’s Common Abbreviated Dialing bins may be available to DISA callers. This could save the
DISA caller time when dialing.
Operator Calling
A DISA caller may be able to dial 0 for the system’s operator.
Paging
Internal and External Paging may be available to DISA callers. This allows co-workers in adjacent facilities, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other.
Direct Trunk Access
DISA callers may be able to select a specific trunk for outgoing calls through the system. To directly access a trunk, the user dials Service Code #9 followed by the trunk’s number (e.g., 001). This allows the
DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected trunk. Direct Trunk Access bypasses the system’s
Trunk Group Routing/ARS. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are incurred by the system. Also see
Trunk Group Access above.
DISA Toll Restriction
The digits a DISA caller dials for an outgoing call may be subject to the system’s Toll Restriction. For example,
Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing a 1-900 service. When an incoming DISA caller tries to use system trunks to dial 1-900, Toll Restriction will deny the call.
DISA Operating Modes
The DISA Operating Modes determine what happens when a DISA caller forgets to dial, calls a busy or unanswered extension or dials incorrectly. The system can either drop the call or send it to a preset Ring Group
(called a the DISA Transfer Destination).
Department Calling with Overflow Message
If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group, the system can periodically play the voice prompt,
"Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free." while the caller waits.
The interval between the voice prompts is the DISA Overflow Message Time. When an extension in the Department Group becomes available, the call automatically goes through. If the Department Calling Group remains
busy past the DISA No Answer time (see the flow chart on page 251), the DISA call routes to the overflow destination or disconnects. (What happens to the unanswered call is set by the DISA Operating Mode). The Overflow
Message requires a Voice Announce Unit.
Conditions
The DISA caller must use a 2500 type (DTMF) telephone. DISA is compatible with calling devices that meet the DTMF
signaling requirements of EIA Specification RS-464. DISA trunks must be ground start or supervised loop start.
Default Setting
Disabled.
246 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming
Start
(384i Only) In 0303, reserve at
least one CDTU block for
DTMF reception (entry 2).
If DISA callers should be able to place
outgoing calls through the system, enable
loop supervision in 0901:31 for outgoing
trunks and the DISA trunks.
In 0901:14-17, set
the circuit type for
DISA trunks (type 2).
In 1802:1-3, enter 0.
Item 1 = Timeout
Item 2 = RNA/busy
Item 3 = Mistake in dialing
Disconnect
Does system play busy
tone for an adequate
interval before
disconnecting caller?
Should dialing
mistakes from DISA
callers cause Transfer
or disconnect?
In 1802:1-3, enter 1 for each trunk
that should transfer. Each trunk
may be programmed differently.
Item 1 = Timeout
Item 2 = RNA/busy
Item 3 = Mistake in dialing
Ring
group
In 1803, enter
destination Ring
Group (1-126 in 384i,
1-15 in 124i).
VAU
Voice
Mail
In 1803, enter 127.
Yes
In 0414:3, change the DISA
Busy Tone Interval.
In 1803, enter 128
(384i) or 16 (124i).
No
Should DISA caller's
Class of Service allow
dialing 9 for Trunk Group
Routing or ARS?
Continued
on following
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
In 1801, set up the 6digit DISA password and
Class of Service for
each user.
Transfer
Should Transfer destination
be a Ring Group, Voice
Mail or VAU Automated
Attendant?
No
In 0412:2, enter 0 to
prevent dial 9 access
to trunks.
Each Tenant Group in 384i and each 124i
system can have up to 15 users. There is
one DISA Class of Service and one
password per user.
In 2205, enter
number of VAU
Message that should
play to caller.
Yes
In 0909, assign
extensions to the
ring group
programmed in 1803
that should receive
DISA transfers.
In 0412:2, enter
1 to allow dial 9
access to trunks.
In 1811, set the Trunk
Group Route the DISA
caller accesses when
they dial 9.
FEATURES 247
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0412 Item 3, enter 0 to
prevent dialing trunks via
Service Code 805.
No
In 0412 Item 4, enter 0
to prevent DISA caller
from using Common
Abbreviated Dialing.
No
In 0412 Item 5, enter 0
to prevent DISA caller
from dialing telephone
system operator.
No
In 0412 Item 6, enter 0 to
prevent DISA caller from
using Internal Page.
No
In 0412 Item 7, enter 0 to
prevent DISA caller from
using External Page.
No
Should DISA caller's Class
of Service allow dialing
Service Code 804 and a
Trunk Group for outside
calls?
Should DISA caller's Class
of Service allow use of
Common Abbreviated
Dialing?
Yes
Yes
In 0412 Item 3, enter 1 to
allow dialing trunks via
Service Code 805.
In 0412 Item 4, enter 1
to allow DISA caller to
use Common
Abbreviated Dialing.
Yes
In 0412 Item 5, enter 1
to allow DISA caller to
dial telephone system
operator.
Should DISA caller's Class
of Service allow caller to use
Internal Page?
Yes
In 0412 Item 6, enter 1
to allow DISA caller to
use Internal Page.
Should DISA caller's Class
of Service allow caller to use
External Page?
Yes
In 0412 Item 7, enter 1
to allow DISA caller to
use External Page.
Should DISA caller's Class
of Service allow caller to dial
telephone system operator?
Continued
on following
page.
248 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0412:8, enter 0 to
prevent Direct Trunk
Access.
No
Should DISA caller's
Class of Service allow
dialing #9 to select a
specific trunk for an
outside call?
Should the system
Toll Restrict calls the
DISA caller places
over system trunks?
Yes
Yes
In 0412:8, enter
1 to allow Direct
Trunk Access.
In 1812, enter a Toll
Restriction Class (1-15 in
384i, 1-8 in 124i) for
each DISA user (1-15).
No
After the system
answers, does DISA
caller have adequate time
to dial their number?
Set Toll
Restriction in
0701 and 0702.
No
Yes
Check the settings of:
0405:17 - DTMF Receiver Active Time
0405:34 - DISA Dial Tone Time
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 249
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
When DISA caller rings an
extension, does the system
ring for an adequate time
before setting the call as Ring
No Answer?
No
In 0405 Item 35,
change the DISA
No Answer Time.
Yes
When DISA caller makes an
Internal Page, does the
system allow the Page to
continue for an adequate
duration?
No
In 0405 Item 75,
change the DISA
Internal Paging Time.
No
In 0405 Item 76,
change the DISA
External Paging Time.
Yes
When DISA caller makes
an External Page, does the
system allow the Page to
continue for an adequate
duration?
Yes
In 0116, check the criteria for
DTMF tones for compatibility
with the telco.
Are the gains
(volumes) on the DISA
trunks correct?
No
For each DISA trunk,
in 0901 Item 3 set the
CODEC Gain Type.
Yes
Go to the
flowchart on
the following
page.
250 FEATURES
If required, in 0117
change the transmit and
receive levels for the
CODEC Gain Types.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming (Cont’d)
Department Calling with Overflow Message
Start
DISA Call rings in, caller dials
DISA password and destination
Department Calling Group.
DISA No Answer Timer
starts (0405 Item 35).
Yes
Is an extension in the dialed
Department Calling Group
available?
No
System plays ringback to caller and starts DISA
Overflow Message Timer (0414 Item 4).
Is an extension in the dialed
Department Calling Group
available?
Yes
Call routes to available
extension in Deparment
Calling Group.
No
Caller hears ringback until
timer expires.
No
Has DISA Overflow
Message Timer (0414
Item 4) expired?
Stop
Yes
Caller hears VAU message,
"Please hold on. . ."
No
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Has DISA No Answer
Time expired (0405
Item 35)?
Yes
Call routes to overflow
destination or disconnects as determined by other DISA
programming.
FEATURES 251
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0116 - Tone Detection Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
252 FEATURES
Use Items 1-10 to set the criteria for DTMF tones for inbound DTMF DISA calls.
0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings
Customize the CODEC gain types (transmit and receive levels) for DISA trunks. Use 0901 Item 3 to assign gain types to trunk circuits.
(384i Only) 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Circuit Setup
Reserve at least one CDTU DTMF receiver for analog trunks DTMF reception (entry 2).
Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers (i.e., DTU blocks):
•
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 17: DTMF Receiver Active Time
After answering the call, the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the DISA trunk for this interval (064800 seconds).
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 34: DISA Dial Tone Time
After answering the DISA trunk, the system waits this interval (0-64800 seconds) for the caller to dial
the first digit of the password. If the caller fails to dial within this interval, the system drops the call.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 35, DISA No Answer Time
A DISA caller can ring an extension for this interval (0-64800 seconds) before the system sets the call as
a Ring No Answer. After this interval expires, the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing
(see Program 1802 below).
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 75: DISA Internal Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer
than this interval (0-64800 seconds), the system terminates the DISA call.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 76: DISA External Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer
than this interval (0-64800 seconds), the system terminates the DISA call.
0412 - DISA Class of Service Options
Enable (1) or disable (0) the following options for each DISA Class of Service (1-16 in 384i, 1-10 in 124i):
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access (Item 2)
•
Trunk Group Access (Item 3)
•
Common Abbreviated Dialing (Item 4)
•
Operator Calling (Item 5)
•
Internal Paging (Item 6)
•
External Paging (Item 7)
•
Direct Trunk Access (Item 8)
•
0414 - System Timers (Part B), Item 3: DISA Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program 1803 Item 2 = 0), the system plays busy tone for
this interval before disconnecting.
0414 - System Timers (Part B), Item 4: VAU ACD Overflow Message Delay Time (T1)
This timer sets how often the overflow voice prompt repeats while a DISA caller waits for an extension
in a busy Department Calling Group to become free.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 3: CODEC Gain Type
Select the CODEC Gain Type (1-5) for each DISA trunk. Customize the CODEC Gain Type transmit and
receive levels in 0117.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type
For DISA operation, set the trunk service type to 02. You can have a different service type for each Night
Service mode.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 31: Loop Supervision
If DISA caller can place outgoing calls through the system (see Program 0412), enable loop supervision
(1) for the DISA trunk. If DISA caller cannot use the system’s trunks for outgoing calls, enter 0 to disable loop supervision.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow (0=trunks don’t ring [just flash line keys],
1=trunks ring).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 1801 - DISA Password
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
For each DISA user, set the 6-digit password and DISA Class of Service for each user. In 384i, there are
15 users per Tenant Group, with one password and DISA Class of Service (1-15) for each user. This allows for up to 60 assignments. In 124i, there are 15 users with one password and one DISA Class of Service assignment (1-10) for each user. The DISA Class of Service cannot be 0. You cannot use Programs
0406 and 1005 to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.
1802 - DID and DISA Operating Modes
Set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA caller doesn’t
dial (Item 1), calls a busy or unanswered extension (Item 2) , dial incorrectly (Item 3). The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (1). Set the alternate destination in program 1803.
1803 - DID and DISA Transfer Destination
If you set a DISA trunk’s operating mode at 1, use this program to assign the transfer destination. You
make a different entry for each Night Service mode. The destination can be a Ring Group (1-127 in
384i, 1-15 in 124i), Voice Mail (128 in 384i, 16 in 124i) or the VAU Automated Attendant (127 in
384i only).
1811 - DISA Route
Use this program to assign the Trunk Group Route (1-64 in 384i, 1-36 in 124i) chosen when a user
places a DISA call into the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 0906. If the system
has ARS, dialing 9 accesses ARS. The route chosen is based on the DISA Class of Service, which is determined by the password the caller dials.
1812 - DISA Toll Restriction Level
If the system uses Toll Restriction, enter a Toll Restriction Class (1-15 in 384i, 1-8 in 124i) for each
DISA user (1-15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 0701. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service, which is determined by the
password the caller dials. You cannot use Program 1004 to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.
1813 - Alternate Trunk Route for DISA Calls
Assign the trunk route that DISA Caller’s access if they dial the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to "Central Office Calls, Placing" for more on setting up Alternate Trunk Route Access.
2205 - OPA Message Assignment
If the Transfer Destination set in Program 1803 is 127, use this program to assign the VAU message (116) that should play when the VAU Automated Attendant answers.
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
In a system with ARS enabled:
When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system routes the call via ARS.
In a system with ARS disabled:
When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system uses the routes programmed for
Trunk Group Routing.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Direct Inward Dialing also allows outside callers to directly access system extensions.
Voice Announce Unit
Department Calling with Overflow Message requires a VAU Module.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 253
Features D-M
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Operation
To place a DISA call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone):
1.
Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.
2.
Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3.
Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).
4.
Wait for a second unique dial tone.
5.
Dial an extension (300-556).
OR
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS.
OR
Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (if enabled).
OR
Dial 804 + a trunk group number (1-128 in 384i, 1-16 in 124i) for an outside call.
OR
Dial #9 + a trunk number (1-128 in 384i, 1-52 in 124i) for an outside call.
OR
Dial #2 + Common Abbreviated Dialing bin number.
OR
Dial 0 for the operator.
OR
Dial 801 + an Internal Paging Zone number (1-9 or 01-32, 0 or 00 for All Call).
OR
Dial 803 + an External Paging Zone number (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
254 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Description
124i ☞
-
-
Available
Eight consoles maximum (two
maximum per extension).
Storing additional digits after a Service
Code requires system software Base
2.13 or EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
DSS Console flash rates may be
customized in Base 4.02 or
EXCPRU 4.20 or higher.
384i ☞
-
-
Available
32 consoles maximum (four
maximum per extension.
Storing additional digits after a
Service Code requires system
software 3.06/14 or higher.
DSS Console flash rates may be
customized in system software
3.07.14 or higher.
11
6
The DSS Console (P/N 92255) gives a keyset user a Busy Lamp Field (BLF) and one-button access to extensions, trunks and system features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call processing (e.g., operators or dispatchers). The DSS Console simplifies:
Calling extensions and Door Boxes
•
Placing, answering and transferring
•
outside calls
Making an External or Internal Page
•
Switching the Night Service mode
•
Activating DSS Console Alternate
•
Answer
92
00
0
-
The DSS Console also provides DSS
Console Alternate Answer. This lets a
keyset user with a DSS Console quickly
reroute their calls to a co-worker. When the
user places their console off-duty (by pressing the
ALT. key), their calls route automatically to the programmed
co-worker.
You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Service Codes and Programmable Feature Key codes (up
to four digits long). This provides the DSS Console user with many of the features available on One-Touch and
Programmable Feature Keys. The DSS Console keys can optionally store additional associated digits after the
Service Code. For example, storing 8041 under a DSS Console key accesses Trunk Group 1 when the console
user presses the key.
The system allows a specific number of extensions to have DSS Consoles. These are called the DSS Console Installations. In 384i, each installation can have up to four consoles. In 124i, each installation can have up to two
consoles. (These are termed the DSS Console Connections.) The maximum number of DSS Consoles allowed in
384i is 32 (8 console installations x 4 consoles maximum per extension). The maximum allowed in 124i is eight
(4 console installations x 2 consoles maximum per extension). Refer to the chart below. If an extension has more
than one DSS Console, each additional console requires a separate power supply.
DSS Console Capacities
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
System
Console Installations
Max. per Extension
384i
8
4
124i
4
2
FEATURES 255
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Description (Cont’d)
Conditions
If a 384i extension has four DSS Consoles connected, program one of the consoles for Direct Line Selection
(i.e., placing and answering outside calls). In 124i, press EXT.2 to access Direct Line Selection.
Default Setting
Disabled.
256 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Programming
Start
DSS number corresponds to console
installation number. There are eight
installations - with up to three consoles
connected at each installation.
In 1101, assign DSS
Consoles to extensions.
In 1102, select DSS
Console range 1-3. (Skip
to next step in 124i.)
Is DSS Console for
extensions or trunks?
Extensions
Do you want to
customize the DSS
Console's keys for
extensions?
No
Trunks
Do you want to
customize the DSS
Console's keys for
trunks?
No
Yes
Yes
In 1103, enter
extension, Service
Code or function.
In 1104, select 0 for
the alternate
destination.
In 1102, select DSS
Console range 4. (Skip
to next step in 124i.)
In 1106, enter trunk
number for each key.
No
Does console use
Alternate Answering?
Yes
In 1104, select
alternate destination's
console number.
Do you want to
customize the DSS
Console flash rates?
Yes
In 1107, assign flash
rates to DSS Console
functions.
No
A (Go to B
on next
page)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 257
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Programming (Cont’d)
B
(From A on
previous page)
Do you want user to
change Night Service
mode?
Yes
Refer to Night Service
feature for
programming details.
No
Yes
Do you want user to
make External and
Internal Paging?
Refer to Paging, External and
Paging, Internal features for
programming details.
No
Do you want
user to call
Door Boxes?
Yes
Refer to Door Box
feature for
programming details.
No
In 0406 Item 28,
enter 0.
No
Should the console
be able to use
Alternate Answer?
Yes
In 0406 Item 28,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Stop
258 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 20: BLF Control and
0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Automatic Off Hook Signaling
Programs 0401 Item 20 and 0406 Item 6 set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or
DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the following chart, the BLF
LED is on only when both extension line appearances are busy. In conditions 2-4, the BLF LED is on
when one line appearance is busy.
1
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Program 0406:
Item 6
Program 0401:
Item 20
BLF 1
Status
Busy
Status
1
1
0
Off
No
2
1
1
On
Yes
3
0
0
On
Yes
4
0
1
On
Yes
BLF is on for extension receiving a voice announced Intercom call.
0406 - COS Options, Item 28: DSS Console Alternate Answer
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use DSS Console Alternate Answer.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
1101 - DSS Console Extension Assignment
Designate the DSS Console installations (i.e., the extensions that have DSS Consoles connected to them).
(384i Only) 1102 - DSS Console Key Range
For each connection at each console installation, designate the range of the DSS Console’s keys: 1 (extension ports 1-200), 2 (extension ports 201-400), 3 (extension ports 401-600) or 4 (DLS).
1103 - DSS Console Key Assignment
Customize DSS Console keys to function as DSS keys, function keys and Service Code keys.
1104 - DSS Console Alternate Answering
If the console should have Alternate Answering, use this program to assign the Alternate Answering Destination.
1106 - Direct Line Selection
If a DSS Console has program 1102 set for option 4 (DLS), use this program to assign trunks to DSS
Console keys.
1107 - DSS Lamp Table
If required, use this program to customize the DSS Console flash rates. Also see the chart on page 55.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 259
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing
A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls.
Door Box
The DSS Console provides one-touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Door Boxes. Refer to the Door
Box Feature when programming Door Boxes.
Night Service
The DSS Console provides one-touch Night Service switching. Refer to the Night Service feature when
programming Night Service options.
One-Touch Calling
Like a One-Touch Key, a user can have DSS Console keys for Direct Station Selection, Trunk Calling
and Service Code access.
Paging, External and Internal
The DSS Console provides one-touch External and Internal Page zone access. Refer the External Paging
and Internal Paging features when programming Paging.
Programmable Function Keys
A DSS Console can have any of the functions of a Programmable Function key.
260 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Operation
Calling an extension from your DSS Console:
1.
(Optional for 384i) Press EXT.1 or EXT.2 to select the range.
In 124i, pressing EXT.2 accesses Direct Line Selection.
2.
Press DSS Console key.
If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by dialing 1.
If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift handset to speak.
Extension Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The assigned extension is...
On
Busy on a call
Off
Idle
Flashing fast
In Do Not Disturb
Placing a trunk call from your DSS Console:
1.
(124i Only) Press EXT.2.
2.
Press DSS Console key assigned to trunk.
3.
Dial outside number.
If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Trunk Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The assigned trunk is...
On
Busy on a call
Off
Idle
Flashing slowly
Ringing
Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console:
1.
Press flashing DSS Console key assigned to trunk.
If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.
Calling a Door Box from your DSS Console:
1.
Press DOOR.
2.
Press DSS Console key for Door Box you want to call (1-8).
If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to talk to the Door Box.
Door Box Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
The assigned Door Box is...
On
Busy or ringing in
Off
Idle
FEATURES 261
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Operation (Cont’d)
Transferring a call using your DSS Console:
1.
Place or answer call.
If you are on an Intercom call, press HOLD before going to the next step.
2.
Press DSS key for extension that will receive transfer.
You cannot Transfer to an extension that is busy or in Do Not Disturb.
3.
(Optional) Announce call.
If called party doesn’t want the call, press flashing line or CALL key to retrieve it.
4.
Press SPK to hang up.
Making a External Page using your DSS Console:
1.
Press PAGE.
2.
Press DSS Console External Page zone key (1-8).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
If you don’t have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
External Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The External Page zone is...
On
Busy
Off
Idle
Making an Internal Page using your DSS Console:
1.
Press GROUP.
2.
Press DSS Console Internal Page zone key (Group key 1-32).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
If you don’t have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
Internal Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is...
The Internal Page zone is...
On
Busy
Off
Idle
Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console:
1.
Press Night Service key (NIGHT, DAY, BREAK or NITE 2).
Night Service Busy Lamp Field
262 FEATURES
When this key is ON...
The system is in the...
NIGHT
Night Mode
DAY
Day Mode
BREAK
Rest Mode
NITE2
Midnight Mode
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Operation (Cont’d)
Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer:
1.
Press ALT.
You hear a short confirmation tone.
If you hear a long tone, you cannot enable Alternate Answer. Another user has already enabled
your console as their Alternate Answer destination.
Alternate Answer Busy Lamp Field
When the ALT key is...
Alternate Answer is...
On
Enabled
Off
Disabled
Using a DSS Console key as a One-Touch or Programmable Function Key:
You can store Service codes, Programmable Function Key codes and other digits under DSS
Console keys. The stored code can not be longer than four digits.
1.
Press DSS Console key for function.
For example, you can Forward your calls by pressing CALL + DSS Key + 1 + destination. Your
DSS key must have been previously programmed for the Call Forward feature.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 263
Features D-M
Directed Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. This allows a user
to conveniently answer a co-worker’s call from their own telephone. With Directed Call Pickup, an extension
user can pick up:
Trunk calls (i.e., Ring Group calls)
•
Direct Inward Lines
•
Transferred trunk calls
•
Transferred Intercom calls
•
Ringing and voice-announced Intercom calls
•
Conditions
(A.) Directed Call Pickup does not pick up calls recalling an extension (such as Hold and Transfer recalls).
(B.) An extension can use Directed Call Pickup to intercept calls to which it is denied access in Programs
0911 and 0912.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
None
Related Features
For other features which let you cover a co-worker’s calls, refer to:
Department Calling
•
Group Call Pickup
•
Hotline
•
Multiple Directory Numbers
•
Secretary Call Pickup
•
Voice Mail
Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.
Operation
To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co-worker’s extension:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial **.
3.
Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept.
If more than one call is coming in, the system sets the priority for which call it will answer first.
264 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing
Description
124i ☞
-
384i ☞
-
Not available.
Requires Base 2.13 or EXCPRU
2.18 or higher.
Available.
Requires system software 3.06.02 or
higher.
Directory Dialing allows a display or Super Display keyset user to select a co-worker or outside call from a list
of names, rather than dialing the phone number. There are four types of Directory Dialing:
C - Company (Common) Abbreviated Dialing
•
D - Department (Group) Abbreviated Dialing
•
P - Personal Abbreviated Dialing (One-Touch) Keys
•
X - Co-worker’s extensions
•
Conditions
(A.) Directory Dialing sorts directory names in alphabetical order (based on the first four characters of the
name) when the system starts up or reboots. In addition, the system will re-sort extension names when:
– You change Program 1002 (Extension Tenant).
– You change Program 0502 (Extension Numbers and Names).
– Any user dials 800 and changes their extension’s name.
(B.) Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Abbreviated Dialing, Intercom
Calling and One-Touch Calling.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Start
In 1006, do not assign a
Directory Dialing key (code
1082).
No
Should extension be able to
review Directory Dialing
entries while on a call?
When the user waits
between Directory Dialing
steps, does Directory
Dialing cancel at the proper
time?
Yes
No
In 1006, assign a Directory
Dialing key (code 1082).
In 0405 Item 10, change the
Interdigit Time to meet the
system's requirements.
Yes
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 265
Features D-M
Directory Dialing
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 10: Intercom Interdigit Time
➣
If a user waits longer than this interval between Directory Dialing steps, Directory Dialing automatically cancels.
1006 - Programming Function Keys (Part A)
If you want a display keyset to be able to review Directory Dialing entries while on a call, assign a Directory Dialing key (code 1082).
Related Features
None
Operation
To use Directory Dialing from a display keyset:
1.
Do not lift handset or press SPK.
2.
Dial 3.
OR
Press Directory Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1082).
OR
Press DIRECTORY (Super Display only).
If you wait too long between your selections, Directory Dialing automatically cancels.
3.
Dial type of Directory Dialing from the table below.
Pressing this key . . .
4.
5.
6.
266 FEATURES
Selects Directory Dialing for . . .
2
C
Company (Common) Abbreviated Dialing
3
D
Department (Group) Abbreviated Dialing
7
P
Personal Abbreviated Dialing (One-Touch ) Keys
9
X
Extensions
Directory Dialing follows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled. For example, if your extension cannot normally use Common Abbreviated Dialing, Directory Dialing can’t access it either.
If you dial 7 from a Super Display keyset, your One-Touch Key names will display. Pressing ▲
or ▼ scrolls through the names in key number order (not alphabetically).
Dial the first letter/number for the name/number you want to call.
For example, dial 2 if the name begins with A, B, C or 2.
If the name begins with Q or Z, dial 0.
Look at your phone’s display and dial the digit for the letter/number selected in step 4 above.
For example, if you dialed 2 in step four, you’ll see: 1=A 2=B 3=C 4=2.
You’ll want to dial 1 to select the letter A, 2 to select B and so on.
The first name/number that begins with your selection displays.
If you see, "UNLISTED NAME," there is no name stored for your selection.
If you have a Super Display keyset, the first 10 numbers that match your selection will display.
To see the next 10 matches, press [SCROLL]. To see the previous 10 matches, press [->].
Press VOLUME ▲ or ▼ to scroll through all the names/numbers that begin with that letter/number.
OR
Lift handset or press DIAL, CALL1 or SPK to place the selected call.
If you selected an outside call, the call will route according to your system’s Trunk Group
Routing/ARS setup.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Directory Dialing
Operation (Cont’d)
To cancel Directory Dialing:
7.
Press CLEAR.
To review your Directory Dialing entries while on a call:
1.
Press Directory Dialing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1082).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 267
Features D-M
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Customizing the Keyset Splash Tone,
Keyset Confirmation Tone, Trunk
Ring Tone, Intercom Ring Tone and
Alarm Ring Tone requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Customizing the Keyset Splash Tone,
Keyset Confirmation Tone, Trunk
Ring Tone, Intercom Ring Tone and
Alarm Ring Tone requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns provide extension users with audible and visual call status signals.
This lets users tell the types of calls by listening to the ringing/tones and watching the keys. It also helps users
monitor the progress of their calls. In addition, Distinctive Ringing lets keyset users customize their Intercom
and trunk call ringing. This is helpful for users that work together closely. For example, if several co-workers
set their keysets to ring at different pitches, the co-workers can always tell which calls are for them. Refer to the
following tables at the beginning of this section:
Table 1-7
System Tones
Table 1-9
System Ring Rates
Table 1-10
System Flash Rates
You can also customize the tones the system uses for splash tone, confirmation tone, trunk ring tone, Intercom
ring tone and Alarm ring tone. Refer to the chart below and the Programming section for more details.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Program
Description
0109 - Keyset Splash Tone
Set the frequency of the system’s splash tone. This is the
tone the system uses, for example, to alert the user of an
incoming voice-announced Intercom call.
0110 - Keyset Confirmation Tone
Set the frequency and duration of the Dial Pad
Confirmation Tone. When an extension user enables Dial
Pad Confirmation Tone (Service Code 824), they hear this
tone each time they press a key.
0111 - Trunk Ring Tone
0112 - Intercom and Alarm
Ring Tone
Set the trunk ring tones, which are the tones a user hears
when a trunk rings an extension.
Set the Intercom and the External Alarm Sensor ring tones.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
268 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Programming
Start
No
Do you want to
change the
range for trunk
ringing?
Yes
In 1001 Item 3, select the Intercom
ring tone for each keyset extension.
Use 0112 to customize the Intercom
(and Alarm) Ring Tone.
In 0902, select the ring tone range
for each trunk. Use 0111 to
customize these ranges.
In 1001 Item 2, select the
trunk ring tone for each
keyset extension.
In 1001 Item 6, select the ring
cycle for each 500/2500 set.
These settings affect
both Intercom and
trunk call ringing.
Yes
Do you want to
change the way
Intercom calls ring
extensions?
In 1008, set the incoming call
ring cycle for keyset
extensions.
No
Should keyset users
be able to change or
check the incoming
ring tones?
Yes
Enable changing tones in
Class of Service Program
0406 Item 59.
Enable checking tones in
Class of Service Program
0406 Item 86.
No
In 0109, select
a new keyset
splash tone
frequency.
Yes
(384i Only) Do you want to
change the frequency of
the keyset splash tone?
Assign a Class Service to an
extension in Program 1005.
No
In 0110, select a
new frequency
and duration for
the Dial Pad
Confirmation
Tone.
Yes
(384i Ony) Do you wnat to
change the frequency and
duration of the Dial Pad
Confirmation Tone?
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 269
Features D-M
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0109 - Keyset Splash Tone
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the frequency of the system’s splash tone.
0110 - Keyset Confirmation Tone
Set the frequency and duration of the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone.
0111 - Trunk Ring Tone
Customize the trunk ring tones (i.e., the tones a user hears when a trunk rings an extension).
0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone
If desired, change the Intercom and External Alarm Sensor ring tones.
0406 - COS Options, Item 59: Selectable Ring Tone Selection
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to change the incoming ring tones.
0406 - COS Options, Item 86: Checking Selectable Ring Tones
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to check the selectable
Ring Tones.
0902 - Trunk Ring Tone Range
Set the ring tone range (1-4) for each trunk.
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 2: Trunk Ring Tone
From the range specified in Program 0902, select the keyset extension’s trunk ring tone (High=1, Med=2
or Low=3). Refer also to Trunk Ring Tone Range on Table 1-7.
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 3: Intercom Ring Tone
Select the extension’s intercom ring tone (High=1, Med=2 or Low=3). Refer to Extension Ring Tone
Range on Table 1-7.
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 6: Ring Cycle for 500/2500 Sets
Select the incoming call ring cycle for 500/2500 sets. The choices are 0 (short bursts) or 1 (long bursts).
For single line phones, this option interacts with Program 1008 Item 4. Refer to Program 1001 Item 6
and Program 1008 Item 4 for more information.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 4: Ring Cycle for Keysets
Set the incoming call ring cycle for each keyset extension. The choices are two bursts with a pause (0), continuous (1) or single short burst with a pause (2). Refer to Program 1008 Item 4 for additional information.
Related Features
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephone users cannot listen to or change the pitch of their phone’s incoming ring.
.
270 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Operation
To listen to the incoming ring choices (keyset only):
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 811.
3.
Dial 1 to check ringing for Intercom calls
OR
Dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls.
4.
For Intercom calls, select the pitch you want to check (1= High, 2 = Medium and 3 = Low).
OR
For trunk calls, select the pitch (1 = High, 2 = Medium and 3 = Low) and the range (1-4) you want to
check.
Refer to Table 1-7 for the four Trunk Ring Tone Ranges and the selections within each range.
5.
Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press SPK to hang up.
To change the pitch of your incoming ring (keyset only):
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 820.
3.
Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls.
OR
Dial 2 to change ringing for trunk calls.
4.
Select the pitch (1 = High, 2 = Medium and 3 =Low).
5.
Press SPK to hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 271
Features D-M
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Do Not Disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an extension user to work by
the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. The user can activate DND while their phone is
idle or while on a call. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line keys. The user may use the phone
in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.
There are five Do Not Disturb options available at each extension:
1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked
3 = All calls blocked
4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked
0 = Do Not Disturbed canceled
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled for all extensions except the attendant.
Programming
Start
In 0406:12 enter 0 to
prevent extension
from using Do Not
Disturb.
No
No
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Stop
272 FEATURES
Should extension be able to
use Do Not Disturb?
Should extension be
able to use Do Not
Disturb Override?
Yes
Yes
In 0406:12 enter 1 to
allow extension to
use Do Not Disturb.
In 0406:4 enter 1 to
enable DND
Override.
In 1006 assign a
DND Override key
(code 1022).
Process
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Do Not Disturb
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 4: Call Forward/DND Override
➣
➣
➣
➣
Determine whether or not an extension should be able to override DND (0=denied, 1=allowed)
0406 - COS Options, Item 12: Do Not Disturb
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Do Not Disturb.
0511 - Service Code Setup (Part A), Item 2: Call Forwarding/DND Override
In order to use the DND Override service code if voice mail is installed, the single digit service code
(0512:9) must be deleted or changed as it conflicts with the DND Override code.
0512 - Single Digit Service Code Setup, Item 6: DND/Call Forward Override
If a single digit service code is to be used, assign an available code number.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Call Forwarding
If an extension user activates DND option 4, the system prevents other extensions from forwarding calls
to them. If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND option 4, callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension.
Operation
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle:
Keyset
1.
Do not lift the handset.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Press DND key.
OR
Press idle CALL key and dial 847.
If you wait longer than 10 seconds before going to the next step, the system automatically enables option 3 below. If you have already enabled DND, waiting more than 10 seconds before the
next step automatically cancels DND.
Dial the DND option code
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked
3 = All calls blocked
4 = Call Forwards blocked
Single Line Telephone
Lift handset.
Dial 847.
Dial the DND option code
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked
3 = All calls blocked
4 = Call Forwards blocked
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 273
Features D-M
Do Not Disturb
Operation (Cont’d)
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while you are on a call:
Keyset Only
1.
Press DND.
The system enables DND immediately (if not activated) or disables DND immediately (if already activated).
Your display indicates your DND status when you hang up.
274 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Door Box
Door Box
Description
124i ☞
Available — eight Door Boxes and
one Chime Tone.
384i ☞
Available — eight Door Boxes and
three Chime Tones.
The Door Box is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the door
can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones to all extensions
programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime, the called extension user just lifts the handset. This lets
the extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box. The Door Box is convenient to have at a delivery entrance,
for example. It is not necessary to have company personnel monitor the delivery entrance; they just answer the
Door Box chimes instead. Any number of system extensions can receive Door Box chime tones.
Each Door Box has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an electric door strike. Use these
contacts to remotely control the entrance door. After answering the Door Box chimes, a keyset user can press
FLASH to activate the Door Box contacts. This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door. The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the contact ratings shown in the table below:
Door Box Specifications
Contact Configuration
Normally Open
Macimum Load
[email protected] VDC
[email protected] VDC
Maximum Initial Contact Resistance
50 mOhms
The system can have up to eight Door Boxes.
Conditions
For each Door Box port, slide the selector switch on the PGDU PCB to the DH position. Refer to the system
hardware manual for additional details.
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 275
Features D-M
Door Box
Programming
Start
Refer to the Hardware
Manual for Door Box
installation?
No
In 1502, select the
station port you want to
have not ring and enter 0.
No
Is Door Box
installed?
(384i only)
In 1501, assign
Door Box to a
Tenant Group.
Yes
Should extensions ring
when Door Box user
presses call button?
Yes
(Skip this decision for 124i)
Do you want to change the
Door Box chime patterns?
Yes
In 1502, select the
station port you want to
have ring and enter 1.
In 1503, select the
chime pattern (1-3) for
each Door Box.
No
Is the Door Box
caller's voice at a
normal level?
Yes
Once a Door Box starts
ringing an extension, does
user have adequate time
to answer?
In 0120, assign a Door Box
gain type that either decreases
or increases the volume.
No
Use 0119 to customize the
gain entries you set in 0120.
No
In 0405 Item 14,
change the Door Box
Answer Time.
Yes
In 0405 Item 59,
change the Door Lock
Cancel Time interval.
No
When single ine (2500 type)
user hookflashes or keyset user
presses the Flash key, does it
release the Door Box strike for
the proper amount of time?
If the Door Box chimes stop before
users can answer them, consider
extending the Door Box Answer Time.
Yes
Stop
276 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Door Box
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0119 - External Page and Door Box CODEC Gain Type Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the five CODEC gain types for External Page and Door Box ports.
0120 - External Page and Door Box CODEC Gain Setup
Assign a CODEC gain type to the External Page and Door Box ports.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 14: Door Box Answer Time
Set the interval within which a user must answer the Door Box chimes.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 59: Door Lock Cancel Time
Set the length of time the Door Box strike stays open when the single line user hookflashes or keyset user
presses Flash.
(384i Only) 1501 - Door Box Tenant
Assign a tenant (1-4) to each Door Box.
1502 - Door Box Ring Assignments
Determine which Door Boxes (1-8) should ring which extensions (0=no ring, 1=ring).
1503 - Door Box Chime Pattern
Set the chime pattern (1-3) for each Door Box. In 124i, you can only choose chime 1.
Related Features
Paging, External
If a PGDU PCB has a Door Box connected, you cannot use that port for External Paging.
Operation
To call a Door Box:
Keyset
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 802.
3.
Dial Door Box Number (1-8).
Single Line 2500 Type
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Dial 802.
3.
Dial Door Box Number (1-8).
To activate the Door Box strike:
Keyset
1.
While talking to the Door Box, press the Flash key.
Single Line 2500 Type
1.
While talking to the Door Box, hookflash.
To answer a Door Box chime:
1.
Lift handset.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 277
Features D-M
Dual Line Appearance
Dual Line Appearance
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Each keyset has two line appearance keys (CALL1 and CALL2) for placing and answering calls. These line appearance keys, assigned to the extension’s number, simplify operations for busy users. For example, the user
can easily process a new call on one appearance with a call in progress on the other.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
None
Related Features
Off Hook Signaling
Off Hook Signaling rings an extension’s second line appearance when the first appearance is busy.
Operation
None
278 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
E911 Compatibility
E911 Compatibility
Description
124i ☞
Available — Requires system software Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or
higher.
384i ☞
Available — Requires system
software 3.07.10 or higher.
E911 Compatibility ensures that emergency calls always get through. If an emergency occurs, a user simply
goes to any phone, lifts the handset and dials 911. The system’s built-in E911 compatibility places the emergency call even if the user forgets to dial an access code or press a line key. The E911 capabilities include:
•
•
•
Attendant Notification
The attendant receives a notification each time a co-worker dials an emergency 911 call. This notification
is the co-worker’s name and number display optionally accompanied by an audible alarm. Notification
occurs regardless of whether the attendant is idle or busy on a call. You can optionally extend this capability to other supervisory extensions as well.
Emergency Routing
When an extension user dials 911, the system can automatically find a trunk for the call. The system can
choose a route to which the user normally does not have access. If all normal routes are busy, the system
can even disconnect an active call and place the emergency call. E911 Compatibility uses the flexibility
of the Automatic Route Selection Call Route Options to route 911 emergency calls (even in systems in
which ARS is not enabled).
Compatibility with Customer Provided E911 Equipment
The system can automatically send a 911 call to customer-provided E911 equipment (such as the Proctor
911 ANI-LINK System II). The E911 equpment will intercept the call, dial emergency service and provide the caller’s extension number to the emergency personnel.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 279
Features D-M
E911 Compatibility
Programming
Start
in 0419:8, enter 0.
In 0419:9, enter 0.
No
When a user dials 911,
should the attendant and
supervisors see the E911
alarm display (i.e., user's
name and number)?
Yes
In 0419:8, enter 1.
No
When the E911 alarm
displays, should the
attendant and
supervisors also hear an
audible alarm?
Yes
In 0419:9, enter 1.
Change 0414:8
to meet the site's
requirements.
Does the default
alarm duration (60
seconds) meet the
site requirements?
No
Yes
When an alarm is
sounding, should the
user be able to dial
886 to turn it off?
No
Yes
In 0419:10, enter 1.
To change the code,
modify 0514:62.
In 0419:10, enter 0.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
In 0420:1, enter 0.
Yes
Should extension users
have to enter a trunk
access code (e.g., 9)
before dialing 911?
No
In 0420:1, enter 1.
An extension user can
just lift the handset and
dial 911.
Continued
on next
page.
280 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
E911 Compatibility
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0401:21, enter 1.
Yes
Does your system
require ARS?
No
In 0401:21, enter 0.
ARS is not required for
E911 service.
Refer to Automatic
Route Selection for
additional information
on setting up ARS.
In 0905, put the trunks
you want to use for E911
routing in the same Trunk
Group (e.g., 2).
In 2108, for the Emergency Call
option specify the Selection
Number (e.g. 2) the system
should use for E911 routing.
In 2108, choose a Dial
Treatment for E911 routing
(e.g., 2) and enter RE.
No
Does the E911 Trunk
Group connect to
customer-provided
E911 equipment?
Yes
In 2108, choose a Dial
Treatment for E911 routing
(e.g., 2) and enter XRE .
In 2101, set up the Call Route Options
Table for the E911 route as follows:
- Enter the Selection Number specified
in 2108 above (e.g., 2).
- For each Rate Period, enter the ARS
Class of Service (e.g., 27), the E911
Trunk Group (e.g., 2) and the Dial
Treatment number (e.g., 2).
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 281
Features D-M
E911 Compatibility
Programming (Cont’d)
For additional explanation of ARS options 2101, 2107 and 2108, refer
to the Automatic Route Selection Feature on page 96.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 21: ARS Enable
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) ARS. E911 routing follows the routing specified in 2101 and
2108 below regardless of whether or not it is enabled in this option. For more information on Automatic
Route Selection, refer to page 96.
0414 - System Timers (Part B), Item 8: E911 Alarm Ring Timer
Use this option to set the duration of the E911Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0, the E911 Alarm rings for 60
seconds and then stops.
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 8, Display 911 Dialed Station Name and Number
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the the extension’s ability to display the name
and number of the extension that activated E911 service. If disabled (0), the E911 Alarm (set in 0419:9
below) will never occur.
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 9, E911 Alarm Ring
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to play the Alarm
Ring. This can only occur if 0419:8 above is also enabled (1).
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 10, Clear E911 Alarm Ring
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial 886 to turn off
the E911 alarm ring.
0420 - E911 Options, Item 1: Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access
If enabled (1), extension users can dial 911 without first dialing a trunk access code or pressing a line
key. This allows a user to go to any phone in an emergency, lift the handset and dial 911 for emergency
service. If disabled (0), extension users must dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key before
diaing 911.
0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B), Item 62: E911 Alarm Shut Off
Select the Service Code (normally 886) that an extension user can dial to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring.
0905 - Trunk Groups
Assign the outbound trunks you want to use for E911 service to the same Trunk Group (1-128).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service to an extension (1-15).
2101 - ARS Call Route Options Table
Use this program to assign the call routing parameters for the Selection Number you specified in 2108 below. To make entries in this program:
Enter the Selection Number you specified in 2108 below.
•
Enter the Rate Period you want to program. There are three default Rate Periods (1-3) that corre•
spond to the normal work schedule. Be sure to program all three Rate Periods. See the table below
for the default Rate Periods.
Rate Period1
Time/Day
1
Mon-Fri, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM
2
Mon-Fri, 5:00PM to 11:00
PM Sat, Sun, Holiday, 8:00
AM to 11:00 PM
3
All days, 11 PM to 8:00 AM
4-8
Not defined
1
Sundays and holidays use the same Rate Periods as Saturday.
(Continued)
282 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
E911 Compatibility
Programming (Cont’d)
•
➣
➣
Enter the ARS Class of Service that should be able to access the E911 route you are programming. To give all extensions the ability to use the E911 route, enter 27.
Enter the Trunk Group the system will use for routing E911 calls. This is the entry you made in
•
Program 0905 above.
Enter a Dial Treatment that the system will use exclusively for E911 routing. If your system
•
doesn’t use ARS, consider using Dial Treatment 2. The Dial Treatment data must must be XRE.
2107 - ARS Dial Treatments
Use this option to enter the data for the ARS Dial Treatment you chose for the E911 route specified in
2101 above. The data should be XRE. If your system doesn’t use ARS, consider using Dial Treatment 2.
2108 - Separate ARS Routing Options
Use the Emergency Call option in this program to specify the Selection Number (1-64) the system will
use for routing E911 calls. The system uses this assignment regardless of whether or not ARS is enabled.
The system uses the Selection Number you choose in Program 2101 above. If your system doesn’t use
ARS, consider using Selection Number 2.
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
Refer to the ARS feature for more information on setting up Selection Numbers, Dial Treatments, Call
Route Options and Work Periods.
Operation
To place an emergency 911 call:
When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is enabled . . .
1.
Go to any phone.
2.
Lift handset or press idle CALL key.
3.
Dial 911.
When Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is disabled . . .
1.
Go to any phone.
2.
Lift handset or press idle CALL key.
3.
Dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9) or press a line key.
4.
Dial 911.
To turn off the E911 Alarm at your telephone:
1.
Lift handset or pres idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 886.
The alarm goes off. If the alarm does not turn off, your Class of Service prevents this option.
OR (if you have a display telephone)
1.
Press CLEAR once to turn of the alarm.
2.
Press CLEAR again to clear the alarm display.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 283
Features D-M
External Alarm Sensors
External Alarm Sensors
Description
124i ☞
-
Each PGDU PCB has 4 sensors, with
8 maximum per system (2 PCBs).
All sensors set for alarm.
Changing the Alarm Ring Tone
frequencies requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
Each PGDU has 8 sensors, with 16
maximum per system (2 PCBs).
Sensors 1-4 and 9-12 as set for alarm.
Sensors 5-8 and 13-16 set for fax.
Changing the Alarm Ring Tone
frequencies requires system software
3.04 or higher.
The system provides up to 16 alarm sensors that you can connect to customer-provided alarm contacts. When
the alarm contact activates, designated extensions broadcast a unique alert tone. This lets the extension users
know that the alarm has been activated. External Alarm Sensors could help a receptionist, for example, that frequently has to leave the reception desk to do some filing. When a visitor opens the company’s door, an alarm
contact on the door could signal a telephone in the filing area. When the receptionist hears the alarm alert tone,
they know it’s time to return to the reception area and greet the visitor. The alarm alert tone continues as long as
the door remains open.
Conditions
(A.) Each external alarm uses an alarm sensor circuit in the PGDU PCB. The PGDU alarm sensor circuit requires a 10-30 VDC power supply in series with the alarm contacts. Refer to the hardware manual for additional details.
(B.) The alarm sensors in the 124i are polarity sensitive. Be sure to follow the instructions in the hardware
manual when connecting alarm sensors.
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
284 FEATURES
0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone
If required, change the Alarm Ring Tone frequencies. This option requires system software 3.04 or higher.
0304 - PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup
For external alarm sensors, program the PGDU sensor for alarm (type 1) and alarm ring tone (1-3).
0305 - PGDU PCB Sensor Activation Mode
Program each alarm sensor for normally closed (0) or normally open (1) operation.
1010 - External Alarm Extensions
Determine which alarms should alert which extensions. For each sensor, enter 1 to ring extension or 0 to
not ring extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
External Alarm Sensors
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
Refer to the Fax Machine
Compatibility feature for
information on Bridged Fax Lines.
In 0304, make sure
PGDU sensors are type 0
(not used) or 2 (for
bridged fax operation).
In 0304 Additional
Information for each sensor,
assign the same alert tone
to each sensor.
In 0305, enter 0 for each
sensor connected to a
normally closed relay.
In 1010, enter 0 for each
sensor that should not
alert extension.
No
Do you need External
Alarm Sensors?
No
Should alarms provide
distinctive alert tones
to extensions?
Yes
Yes
In 0304, program
PGDU sensors for
type 1 (alarm).
In 0304 Additional
Information for each sensor,
assign one of the three alert
tones (1-3) to each sensor.
Normally
Closed
Is sensor's associated
alarm contact normally
open or normally
closed?
Normally
Open
In 0305, enter 1 for each
sensor connected to a
normally open relay.
No
Do you want extension
to broadcast an alert
tone when the alarm
activates?
Yes
In 1010, enter 1 for each
sensor that should alert
extension.
Do you want to
change the alarm
Ring Tones?
Yes
In 0112, change the
frequencies assigned to the
Alarm Ring Tone Types.
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 285
Features D-M
External Alarm Sensors
Related Features
Fax Machine Compatibility
Bridged Fax Lines also use PGDU PCB sensors.
Operation
If you program an extension to activate for an alarm and the alarm occurs, the alarm alert tone continues at the
extension until the alarm condition goes away.
286 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Fax Machine Compatibility
Fax Machine Compatibility
Description
124i ☞
Each PGDU PCB has 4 sensors, with
8 maximum per system (2 PCBs).
All sensors set for alarm.
384i ☞
Each PGDU has 8 sensors, with 16
maximum per system (2 PCBs).
Sensors 1-4 and 9-12 as set for alarm.
Sensors 5-8 and 13-16 set for fax.
Fax Machine Compatibility lets you integrate a customer-provided fax machine into your telephone system. You
have the following options:
•
•
•
Transfer to Fax
Transfer to Fax allows an extension user to Transfer their active voice call to a company fax machine. After the Transfer completes, the user’s outside caller can start their fax machine and send the fax. This
would benefit a salesperson on the road, for example. The salesperson could call their secretary and give
a general report - and then fax detailed figures when the conversation is over.
Direct Inward Line to Fax
DILs provide direct routing to fax machines installed as system extensions. Use a DIL for a "fax only"
line for unattended sending and receiving of faxes.
Bridged Fax Line
With a Bridged Fax Line, a trunk is shared by the fax machine and the system. When a call comes in,
both the system and the fax machine ring. If the fax machine answers the call, a relay closure in the fax
machine (if provided) signals the system. The system then busies out the fax line to other users. Since a
Bridged Fax Line is in front of the system, fax operation is not affected by a system power failure or programming.
Conditions
The Bridged Fax Line feature uses a fax sensor circuit in the PGDU PCB. The PGDU fax sensor circuit requires
a 10-30 VDC power supply in series with the fax machine relay contacts. Refer to the hardware manual for additional details.
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 287
Features D-M
Fax Machine Compatibility
Programming
Start
Do you want fax
machine to be a
system internal
extension?
Yes
Make sure you have a circuit on an
ASTU PCB or 2/OPX module for the
fax machine.
No
Plug fax machine into
ASTU/OPX circuit.
System users can transfer calls to
the fax machine without any
additional programming.
In 0005, assign correct circuit type
(type 3 for ASTU port and type 8 for
OPX port).
Refer to the Direct Inward Line feature for
more programming details.
Should the system route
specific trunks directly to
the fax machine?
Yes
For each trunk you want to directy route,
assign the fax extension as the DIL
destination.
No
If fax machine bridges
directly to a trunk, do you
want to busy out trunk to
system when trunk is in
use?
To use this feature, the fax
machine must have contacts
that close when fax answers.
No
Yes
In 0304, program PGDU sensor
for fax (type 2) and associate it
with fax trunk.
Refer to the system hardware
manual for more details.
Connect fax machine alarm
contacts to PGDU sensor.
In 0305, enter 0 for each
sensor connected to a
normally closed relay.
Normally
Closed
Is sensor's associated
contact normally open or
normally closed?
Normally
Open
In 0305, enter 1 for each
sensor connected to a
normally open relay.
Stop
288 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Fax Machine Compatibility
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ (384i Only) 0005 - Manual Extension Circuit Type Setup
➣
➣
If fax machine is a system extension, assign correct circuit type for port:
ASTU PCB port = Circuit type 3
2/OPX port = Circuit type 8
0304 - PGDU PCB Alarm/Fax Sensor Setup
For bridged trunks, program the PGDU sensor for fax (type 2) and associate it with the fax trunk.
0305 - PGDU PCB Sensor Activation Mode
Program each alarm sensor for normally closed (0) or normally open (1) operation.
Related Features
Direct Inward Line
Use DILs to route system trunks directly to fax machines installed as extensions.
External Alarm Sensors
External alarm sensors also use PGDU PCB sensor circuits.
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Keys provide one-button transfer to fax machines installed as extensions.
Operation
To transfer a call to the fax machine:
Keyset
1.
Press HOLD.
You hear Transfer dial tone.
2.
Dial fax machine extension number.
If you have Automatic On Hook Transfer and the extension you call is busy, pressing CONF
(TRF) returns you to the call.
If the called extension doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or press CALL to
return to the call.
3.
Hang up.
If you don’t have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press CONF (TRF) to Transfer the call.
1.
2.
3.
Single Line Set
Hookflash.
Dial fax machine extension number.
If the called extension doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or hookflash to return to the call.
Hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 289
Features D-M
Flash
Flash
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting trunk loop current. Flash
lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or PBX offers. You must set
the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.
Conditions
The system does not provide a ground flash.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Note: See programming flow chart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
290 FEATURES
0114 - Analog Trunk Timers, Item 9: Flash (Hooking 1)
Set the Flash duration (16-4080 mS) for analog trunk (ATRU PCB) circuits.
0114 - Analog Trunk Timers, Item 10: Flash (Hooking 2)
Set the open loop disconnect duration (16-4080 mS) for analog trunk (ATRU PCB) circuits.
0402 - Tenant Group Options, Part B, Item 2: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A)
If CONF (TRF) key should access Flash, enter 2. Otherwise, enter 0 or 1.
0406 - COS Options, Item 1: Flash for Single Line Telephones
In a single line (500/2500 type) telephone’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to hookflash for system feature access.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 5: Flash Type
Make sure this item is set for open loop Flash (0).
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 6: Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect
For each trunk, indicate if Flash is for Flash (0) or open loop disconnect (1).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Flash
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In Program 0901 Item 5,
always set the Flash type
for open loop (0).
In Program 0114 Item
10, set the open loop
disconnect duration.
Disconnect
Call
Should Flash
access trunk's
features or
disconnect call?
Trunk's
Features
In Program 0901 Item
6, set trunk for
disconnect (1).
In 0406 Item 1, disable
flash for 500/2500 sets
(0).
In Program 0114 Item
9, set the Flash
duration.
In Program 0901 Item
5, set trunk for open
loop Flash (0).
No
Should 500/2500
sets be able to
Flash trunks?
Yes
In 0406 Item 1, enable
Flash for 500/2500 sets
(1).
Assign a Class of
Service to 500/2500
sets.
Should keyset TRFR
key activate Flash?
Yes
In Program 0402 Item
2, enter 2.
No
In Program 0402 Item 2,
enter 0 (for Transfer) or 1
(for Serial Call).
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 291
Features D-M
Flash
Related Features
PBX Compatibility
If the system is behind a PBX, Flash normally gives the extension user access to many PBX features.
Toll Restriction
The system applies Toll Restriction (if applicable) to the number a user dials after flashing a trunk.
Operation
To flash the trunk you are on:
Keyset
1.
Press FLASH.
OR
Single Line Set
1.
Hookflash.
2.
Dial #3.
292 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Flexible System Numbering
Flexible System Numbering
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Complete numbering flexibility
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Complete numbering flexibility
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Flexible System Numbering lets you reassign the system’s port-to-extension assignments. This allows an employee to retain their extension number if they move to a different office. In addition, factory technicians can
make comprehensive changes to your system’s number plan. You can have factory technicians:
Set the number of digits in internal (Intercom) functions. For example, extension numbers can be up to
•
four digits long.
Change your system’s Service Code numbers
•
Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes
•
Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you.
You can also use Flexible System Numbering to change the system’s Trunk Group Routing code. Although the
default code of 9 is suitable for most applications, you can alter the code if you have to.
For more information on the systems standard numbering, refer to Tables 1-1, 1-2 and 1-5 at the beginning of
this section.
The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan. Refer to the chart below and the Programming section for more details.
Flexible System Numbering
Program
Description
0501 - System Numbering
Set the system’s internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The
numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must
dial to access features and other extensions.
0510 - Trunk Access Code
Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 9).
This is the code users dial to access Automatic Route
Selection or Trunk Group Routing.
0511 - Service Code Setup ( Part A)
Customize the first set of Service Codes. Also see program
0514.
0512 - Single Digit Service
Code Setup
Assign the Single Digit Service Codes. These are the postdialing codes a user can dial after placing an Intercom call
to a co-worker.
0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B)
Customize the second set of Service Codes.
Conditions
Programming follows a telephone’s port number, not the extension number. If you relocate a phone, you may
need to change additional programming.
Default Setting
Extensions are numbered consecutively from 301 (port 001) to 556 (port 256) (Program 0502). Refer to Table 16 for the system’s default numbering plan.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 293
Features D-M
Flexible System Numbering
Programming
Do you want to change the
telephone port's extension
number?
Start
No
Yes
In 0502, select telephone port you
want to change and then enter the
new extension number.
The extension number you entered
is in use by another port. You can
only use available (unassigned)
extension numbers.
Yes
Does the system
programming show
"Duplicate Data?"
No
Go to 0501 - System
Numbering.
Yes
Do you want to change the
system's internal (Intercom)
numbering plan?
No
Go to 0511 - Service Code
Setup (Part A) and 0514 Service Code Setup (Part B).
Yes
Do yo want to customize
the system's Service
Codes?
No
Go to 0512 - Single Digit
Service Code Setup.
Yes
Do you want to modify the
Single Digit (post-dialing)
Service Codes?
No
Go to 0510 - Trunk
Access Code.
Yes
Do you want to change the
Trunk Access Code
(normally 9)?
No
Stop
294 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Flexible System Numbering
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0501 - System Numbering
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Customize the system’s internal (Intercom) numbering plan.
0502 - Extension Numbers and Names
Assign extension numbers to extension ports. The telephone’s programming identity follows the port
number - not the extension number.
0510 - Trunk Access Code
Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 9) for ARS/Trunk Group Routing.
0511 - Service Code Setup (Part A)
Customize the first set of Service Codes. Also see Program 0514.
0512 - Single Digit Service Code Setup
Assign the Single Digit (post-dialing) Service Codes.
0514 - Service Code Setup (Part B)
Customize the second set of Service Codes. Also see Program 0511.
Related Features
Tenant Service
The system may allow tenant groups to use the same extension numbers.
Operation
Refer to Tables 1-1, 1-2 and 1-5 at the beginning of this section.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 295
Features D-M
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available
Available
Forced Trunk Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension’s active outside call.
The user can then place a call on the released trunk. Forced Trunk Disconnect lets a user access a busy trunk in
an emergency, when no other trunks are available. Maintenance technicians can also use Forced Trunk Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversation. This can happen if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up.
CAUTION
Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the line. Only use this feature in an emergency
and when no other lines are available.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 120,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect?
Yes
In 0406 Item 120,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
Stop
➣
➣
296 FEATURES
0406 - COS Options, Item 120: Forced Trunk Disconnect
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
A user can use Forced Trunk Disconnect only for trunks to which it would normally have access.
Operation
To disconnect a busy trunk:
Keyset
1.
Press line key for trunk.
OR
Dial trunk access code (#9 + trunk number).
You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001-128.
2.
Dial *3.
You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the trunk.
You can now place a call on the free trunk.
1.
2.
3.
Single Line Telephone
Dial trunk access code (#9 + trunk number)
You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001-128.
Dial *3.
You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line.
Hookflash.
You hear dial tone. You can now place a call on the free line.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 297
Features D-M
Group Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup
Description
124i ☞
Available — eight Call Pickup
Groups.
384i ☞
Available — 32 Call Pickup Groups.
Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in a Pickup Group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer each other’s calls. The user can intercept the ringing
call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed Group Call Pickup key. If several extensions within the group
are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the call based on the extension’s priority within the
Pickup Group.
With Group Call Pickup, a user can intercept the following types of calls:
A call ringing the user’s own pickup group
•
A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number
•
A call ringing another pickup group when the user doesn’t know the group number
•
Conditions
A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name.
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
298 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Group Call Pickup
Programming
Start
In 1012, assign
extensions to
Pickup Group 0.
In 0406 Item 63,
enter 0.
No
No
Should extension be
in a Pickup Group?
Yes
Should extension be able
to use Group Call Pickup?
In 1012, assign extensions to
Pickup Groups (1-8 in 124i, 1-32
in 384i) and set each extension's
priority within the group (1-96 in
124i, 1-384 in 384i).
Yes
In 0406 Item 63,
enter 1.
Service Code 856 cannot pick
up Ring Group Calls.
In 0406 Item 8,
enter 0.
In 1006, make sure a
function key is not
assigned code 1007.
No
No
Should extension be able to
pick up a call ringing their
own Pickup Group (Service
Code 856 or 867)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 8,
enter 1.
Should extension have onebutton pickup for calls ringing
their own Pickup Group?
Yes
In 1006, assign
a function key
(code 1007).
Use Service Code 869 when the ringing
Pickup Group number is unknown.
In 0406 Item 9,
enter 0.
In 1006, make sure a
function key is not
assigned code 1008.
No
No
Should extension be able to
pick up a call ringing another
(unknown) Pickup Group
(Service Code 869)?
Should extension have
one-button pickup for calls
ringing another (unknown)
Pickup Group?
Yes
Yes
In 0406 Item 9,
enter 1.
In 1006, assign
a function key
(code 1008).
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 299
Features D-M
Group Call Pickup
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from the
previous
page.
Use Service Code 868 when the
ringing group number is known.
In 0406 Item 10,
enter 0.
In 1006, do not assign a
function key (code 1009 +
Pickup Group number).
No
Should extension be able to
pick up a call ringing in
another (known) Pickup
Group (Service Code 868)?
Yes
No
Should extension have
one-button pickup for calls
ringing another (known)
Pickup Group?
Yes
Trunk
In 0406 Item 51,
enter 0.
After picking up a call,
should extension's display
show number of trunk
intercepted or Pickup
Group?
Pickup Group
In 0406 Item 10,
enter 1.
In 1006, assign a function
key (code 1009 + Pickup
Group number).
In 0406 Item 51,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Stop
300 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Group Call Pickup
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 8: Group Call Pickup Within Group
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up calls ringing
their pickup group (Service Code 856 or *#).
0406 - COS Options, Item 9: Group Call Pickup from Another Group
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up calls ringing
telephones that are not in their pickup group (Service Code 869).
0406 - COS Options, Item 10: Group Call Pickup for Specific Group
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up calls ringing
a specific group (Service Code 868).
0406 - COS Options, Item 51: Group Call Pickup Information Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s Group Call Pickup display. If
disabled, extension’s display shows the number of the trunk intercepted, not the pickup group.
0406 - COS Options, Item 63: Group Call Pickup
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Group Call
Pickup.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign Group Call Pickup keys:
Code 1007 for an extension’s own Pickup Group (Service Code *#)
Code 1008 for a phone ringing in another Pickup Group (Service Code 869)
- used when the caller doesn’t know the group number
Code 1009 (+ group) for a phone ringing in another specific Pickup
Group (Service Code 868)
1012 - Call Pickup Groups
Assign extensions to Pickup Groups (1-9, 01-32). 124i has eight Call Pickup Groups (1-8). 384i has 32
Call Pickup Groups (1-32). Also, use this option to assign an extension’s priority within a Pickup Group
(1-96 in 124i, 1-384 in 384i).
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Group Call Pickup operation.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 301
Features D-M
Group Call Pickup
Operation
To answer a call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
(Keyset only) Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1007).
OR
Dial 856 or *#.
Service Code *# can pick up any call. Service Code 856 cannot pick up Ring Group calls.
To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you don’t know the group number:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
(Keyset only) Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1008).
OR
Dial 869.
To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
(Keyset only)
Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1009 + group).
OR
Dial 868 and the group number (1-9 or 01-32).
302 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Group Listen
Group Listen
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Enhanced operation is available in
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Enhanced operation available in
system software 3.05.15 or higher.
Group Listen permits a keyset user to talk on the handset and have their caller’s voice broadcast over the telephone speaker. This lets the keyset user’s co-workers listen to the conversation. Group Listen turns off the
keyset’s Handsfree microphone so the caller does not pick the coworker’s voices during a Group Listen.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 105, enter 0
to disable Group Listen.
No
Should extension be
able to use Group
Listen?
Yes
In 0406 Item 105, enter 1
to enable Group Listen.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 303
Features D-M
Group Listen
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 105: Group Listen
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to activate Group Listen.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Headset Operation
An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen.
Single Line Telephones
Group Listen is not available to single line telephones.
Operation
(Enhanced Operation)
To initiate Group Listen:
1.
Place or answer call using the handset.
2.
Press SPK twice (but do not hang up).
SPK flashes slowly.
You can talk to the caller through your handset. Your co-workers hear your caller’s voice over
your phone’s speaker.
When you press SPK once, you turn your Speakerphone on and your handset off. The second
press turns on Group Listen.
To Talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen:
1.
Hang up.
You must have a speakerphone for Handsfree operation.
To cancel Group Listen (without hanging up your call):
1.
Do not hang up.
2.
Press flashing SPK.
You can talk to your caller over your handset. Your co-workers can no longer hear your
caller’s voice.
(Operation in Older Systems)
To initiate Group Listen:
1.
Place or answer call using the handset.
2.
Press SPK, but do not hang up.
Your SPK key flashes slowly.
You can talk to your caller through your handset. Your co-workers hear your caller’s voice over
the speaker in your telephone.
To talk to your caller Handsfree, just hang up the handset. (You must have a Speakerphone for
Handsfree operation.)
To cancel Group Listen (without hanging up your call):
1.
Do not hang up.
2.
Press flashing SPK.
You can talk to your caller over your handset. Your co-workers can no longer hear your
caller’s voice.
304 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree and Monitor
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Handsfree allows a keyset user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone (instead of
the handset). Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to enter data with both hands while talking on the phone.
The system provides three variations of Handsfree operation:
Handsfree
User can place and answer calls by pressing SPK instead of
using the handset.
Automatic Handsfree
User can press a line or line appearance key without first
lifting the handset or pressing SPK. An extension can have
Automatic Handsfree for just outgoing calls or both outgoing
calls and incoming line/loop key calls. Normally, extensions
without Speakerphones should have Automatic Handsfree for
outgoing calls only.
Monitor
User can place a call without lifting the handset, but must lift
the handset to speak.
Conditions
Handsfree is only available on keysets with Speakerphones. Keysets without Speakerphones have Handsfree Answerback for Intercom calls and Monitor.
Default Setting
Enabled.
•
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 6: Automatic Handsfree
Enable (1) or disable (0) Automatic Handsfree. If enabled, user can press a line or line appearance key
without first lifting the handset.
0406 - COS Options, Item 125: Automatic Handsfree Incoming
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Automatic Handsfree for incoming calls on
line/loop keys.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback
Answer Intercom calls without lifting the handset - just speak toward the phone.
Microphone Cutoff
For privacy, mute the phones microphone while on a call.
Single Line Telephones
Group Handsfree and Monitor are not available to single line telephones.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 305
Features D-M
Handsfree and Monitor
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
Make sure telephone does not
have Speakerphone.
Monitor
No
In 0406 Item 6, enter 0.
Should phone
have Handsfree
or Monitor?
Handsfree
Should extension have
Automatic Handsfree for
outgoing calls?
Yes
Should extension also
have Automatic
Handsfree for incoming
calls on line/loop keys?
Yes
Make sure telephone has
Speakerphone.
In 0401 Item 6, enter 1.
Stop
No
In 0406 Item 125, enter 0.
In 0406 Item 125, enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
Operation
To talk Handsfree:
1.
Press SPK, CALL key or line key.
2.
Place call.
3.
Speak toward phone when called party answers.
To change a handset call into a Handsfree call:
1.
Press SPK.
2.
Press SPK to hang up.
To change a Handsfree call into a handset call:
1.
Lift handset.
306 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who don’t have
a free hand to pick up the handset.
Conditions
Handsfree Answerback does not require a Speakerphone.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 10: Forced Intercom Ringing
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Intercom Ringing. If disabled (0), Intercom calls voice-announce.
0406 - COS Options, Item 68: Setting Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Handsfree Answerback (Service Code 821) and Forced Intercom Ringing (Service Code 823) for incoming Intercom
calls.
0406 - COS Options, Item 72: Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced Intercom Ringing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to toggle between
Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls (dial 1 or Service Code
812).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Handsfree and Monitor
A keyset user can process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone (instead of the handset).
Microphone Cutoff
With Microphone Cutoff enabled, Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep (instead of two).
Single Line Telephones
Incoming Intercom calls always ring single line telephones.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 307
Features D-M
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
No
In 0406 Item 68,
enter 0.
No
In 0406 Item 72, enter 0.
Should extension be able to set
Handsfree Answerback and
Forced Intercom Ringing for
their incoming calls (Service
Codes 821 and 823)?
Should extension be able to toggle
between Handsfree Answerback
and Forced Intercom Ringing for
outgoing Intercom calls (dial 1 or
Service Code 812).
Voice-announce
In 0401 Item 10, enter 0.
Should incoming Intercom calls
normally ring or voice-announce?
Yes
In 0406 Item 68,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0406 Item 72, enter 1.
Ring
In 0401 Item 10, enter 1.
Stop
308 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Operation
To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 821.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
This disables Forced Intercom Ringing.
To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 823.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
This disables Handsfree Answerback.
To change the way your Intercom call signals the extension you are calling:
1.
Dial 1 or 812.
If ringing, your call voice-announces. If voice-announced, your call starts to ring the destination. This option is also available at single line telephones.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 309
Features D-M
Headset Operation
Headset Operation
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
A keyset user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using Handsfree, using the
headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, Headset Operation provides privacy not available
from Handsfree.
An extension in the headset mode has two options for when it appears busy to incoming callers. The headset extension can be:
Busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy (i.e., Off-Hook Signaling prevented)
•
OR
Busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy (i.e., Off Hook Signaling allowed)
•
An example of a compatible headset is UNEX Model Pro-MP10A.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
•
Programming
Start
Both
appearances
In 0401 Item 22,
enter 1.
Should headset extension
be busy when one
appearance is busy or
when both appearances
are busy?
One
appearance
In 0401 Item 22,
enter 0.
In 1006, assign a function
key for Headset Operation
(code 1028).
Stop
310 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Headset Operation
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 22: Headset Busy Mode
➣
Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers:
The Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy (0).
•
OR
Headset extension is busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy (1).
•
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Headset operation (code 1028).
Related Features
Handsfree and Monitor
While in the headset mode, do not use the Speakerphone for calls.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
An extension with Headset Operation enabled can still receive voice-announced Intercom calls and respond Handsfree.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify enabling or disabling the headset mode.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use the Headset feature.
While in the headset mode, the hook switch is not functional.
Operation
To enable the headset mode.
1.
Unplug the telephone handset and set it aside.
2.
Plug in the headset.
3.
Press the Headset key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1028).
OR
Press idle CALL key and dial 834.
You hear a confirmation beep. The Headset key lights when you enable headset mode.
You can still receive and respond to voice-announced Intercom calls while in the headset mode.
When in the headset mode:
Press a line key to make a trunk call.
•
OR
Press SPK to get Intercom dial tone
•
OR
If on a call, press SPK to hang up.
•
To disable the headset mode.
1.
Unplug the headset.
2.
Plug in the telephone handset.
3.
Press the Headset key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1028).
OR
Press idle CALL key and dial 834.
The Headset key goes out when you disable headset mode.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 311
Features D-M
Hold
Hold
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Hold Recall to Operator requires
system software Base 2.13 or
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Hold Recall to Operator requires
system software 3.06.14 or higher.
Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence or Music on
Hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on Hold, the extension user may
process calls or use a system feature. Calls left on Hold too long recall the extension that placed them on Hold.
There are four types of Hold:
System Hold
An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all other keysets. Any
keyset user with the flashing line key can pick up the call.
Exclusive Hold
•
When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold. The trunk appears busy to all other keysets that have a key for the trunk. Exclusive hold is important if a user doesn’t
want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold.
Group Hold
•
If a user places a call on Group Hold, another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick up
the call. This lets members of a department easily pick up each other’s calls.
Intercom Hold
•
A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any other extension.
•
Hold Recall to Operator
Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles calls that have been left on hold too long. With Hold
Recall to Operator:
A trunk call recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall time.
•
The recalling trunk will ring the extension that placed it on Hold for the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Call•
back Time.
After the Hold/ExclusiveHold Recall Callback Time, the trunk call will ring the operator.
•
Hold Recall to Operator applies to trunk calls placed on System Hold, Exclusive Hold and Group Hold. It does
not apply to Intercom calls.
Conditions
The called extension must lift the handset or press the SPK key before the call can be placed on hold.
Default Setting
Enabled.
312 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Hold
Programming
Start
In 0402 Item 4,
enter 0.
System
Should extension Hold
keys be for System or
Exclusive Hold?
When a call is left on System
Hold too long and recalls,
does the recall occur after an
acceptable interval?
Exclusive
In 0402 Item 4,
enter 1.
No
In 0405 Item 22,
change the Hold Recall
Time to meet the site
requirements.
No
In 0405 Item 27, set
the Hold Recall
Callback Time to meet
the site requirements.
Yes
Do trunks on System Hold
recalling an extension ring
the extension for an
acceptable interval?
Yes
When a call is left on
Exclusive Hold too long and
recalls, does the recall occur
after an acceptable interval?
No
In 0405 Item 2, set
the Exclusive Hold
Recall Time to meet
the site requirements.
Yes
Do trunks on Exclusive Hold
recalling an extension ring
the extension for an
acceptable interval?
No
In 0405 Item 3, set the
Exclusive Hold Recall
Callback Time to meet
the site requirements.
Yes
In 0406 Item 91,
enter 1 to enable
Hold Recall to
Operator.
Yes
In 0406 Item 91,
enter 0 to disable
Hold Recall to
Operator.
No
Should calls an
extension leaves on
Hold too long recall to
the operator?
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 313
Features D-M
Hold
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0901 Item 20, enter 0
to disable Forced
Release of Held Call for
trunk.
No
Should calls left on
Hold too long
automatically
disconnect?
In 0901 Item 20, enter 1
to enable Forced
Release of Held Call for
trunk.
Yes
In 0405 Item 40, set the
Forced Release of Held
Calls Interval.
With Group Hold, another
Department Group member
can pick up the call.
Yes
In 1003, assign
extensions to
Department Groups.
Should extensions have
Group Hold Capabilty?
No
In 0406 Item 35,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 36,
enter 0.
No
No
Should an extension in a
Department Group be able to
put a call on Group Hold
(Service Code 832)?
Should an extension in a
Department Group be able
to pick up a call on Group
Hold (Service Code 862)?
Yes
Yes
In 0406 Item 35,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 36,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class
of Service to
extensions.
Continued
on the next
page.
314 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Hold
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
If an extension puts a trunk
call on Hold, should they be
able to retrieve it from Hold?
Yes
In 0911 for each Access
Map, select the access
options for each trunk
(3,4,5 or 7).
No
In 0912, assign
extensions to Access
Maps.
In 1006, do not assign a
function key for Exclusive
Hold (code 1044).
No
Does extension need
one-button Exclusive Hold
access?
Yes
In 1006, assign a function
key for Exclusive Hold
(code 1044).
You may need to do this if you have
reassiged Hold keys in 0402 Item 4.
In 1006, do not assign a
function key for System
Hold (code 1043).
No
Does extension need
one-button (function key)
System Hold access?
Yes
In 1006, assign a function
key for System Hold (code
1043).
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 315
Features D-M
Hold
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B), Item 4: Hold Key Operating Mode
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
316 FEATURES
Set the function of the extension’s HOLD key: System (0) or Exclusive (1) Hold.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 2: Exclusive Hold Recall Time
Set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A call on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension
that placed it on Hold after this interval.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 3: Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension for this interval. If still unanswered, the call changes to System Hold.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 22: Hold Recall Time
Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold
after this interval.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 27: Hold Recall Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Callback Time (0-64800 seconds). A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension
for this interval.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 40: Forced Release of Held Calls Interval
Set the Forced Release of Held Calls interval (0-64800 seconds). If enabled in Program 0901 (Item 20),
the system disconnects a call if on Hold longer than this interval.
0406 - COS Options - Item 35: Group Hold Initiate
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate Group Hold
(Service Code 832).
0406 - COS Options - Item 36: Group Hold Answer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up a call placed
on Group Hold (Service Code 862).
0406 - COS Options - Item 91: Hold Recall to Operator
Enable (1) or disable (0) Hold Recall to Operator. If enabled, a call recalling an extension longer than the
Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time will recall the operator (normally 300). If disabled, the call
will continually recall the extension that placed it on Hold.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 20: Forced Release of Held Call
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Release of Held Call.
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-128). This sets the access options for trunks on Hold.
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-128) to extensions.
1003 - Extension (Department) Groups
Assign extensions to Department Groups (1-9, 01-32).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Exclusive Hold (code 1044). If an extension has its fixed Hold key reassigned
(in Program 0402 Item 4), assign a function key for System Hold (code 1043).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Hold
Related Features
Music on Hold
Callers on Hold hear Music on Hold, if programmed.
Programmable Function Keys
An extension can have function keys for System Hold and Exclusive Hold.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones can only use Exclusive Hold and Group Hold.
Operation
System Hold
To place an outside call on System Hold:
1.
Press HOLD.
A line key flashes slowly while on Hold; flashes fast when recalling.
To pick up an outside call on System Hold:
1.
Press flashing line key.
Exclusive Hold
To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold:
Keyset
1.
Press Exclusive Hold key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1044).
A line key flashes slowly while on Hold, flashes fast when recalling.
1.
2.
3.
Single Line Telephone
Hookflash.
Dial 849.
Hang up.
To pick up an outside call on Exclusive Hold:
Keyset
1.
Press flashing line key.
1.
2.
Single Line Set
Lift handset.
Dial 859.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 317
Features D-M
Hold
Operation (Cont’d)
Group Hold
To place a call on Hold so anyone in your extension group can pick it up:
Keyset
1.
Press HOLD.
2.
Dial 832.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
1.
2.
3.
Single Line Telephone
Hookflash.
Dial 832.
Hang up.
To pick up a call on Group Hold:
Keyset
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 862.
1.
2.
Single Line Telephone
Lift handset.
Dial 862.
Intercom Hold
To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:
1.
Press HOLD.
The CALL key flashes. (In 384i, this requires system software 3.02 and higher.)
2.
Press SPK to hang up.
To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:
1.
Press SPK.
2.
Press flashing CALL key.
318 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Hotel/Motel
Hotel/Motel
Description
124i ☞
-
Consult your Sales Representative
for availability.
Year 2000 Compliance not available.
384i ☞
-
Available — refer to the Hotel/Motel
User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**) for
additional information.
Year 2000 Compliance requires
system software 3.07.25 or higher.
The system can provide comprehensive hotel/motel services in addition to the features normally available to
business users. Hotel/motel features include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do Not Disturb
A guest can enable and disable Do Not Disturb for their room telephone. In addition, a hotel/motel employee with a keyset can enable and disable Do Not Disturb for a specific room telephone.
Message Waiting
A hotel/motel employee with a keyset can send a Message Waiting to a room telephone. The message
lamp on the room telephone flashes until the guest answers the Message Waiting.
Room Telephone Status
To better manage room usage, an employee with a keyset can change the status of a room telephone, including:
Room Available
Room Occupied
Room Ready to be Cleaned
Room to Room Call Restriction
To control inter-room guest calling, a hotel/motel employee with a keyset can enable and disable room-toroom calling.
Room Status with Printout
An employee’s DSS Console can indicate the status of the hotel/motel rooms. Optionally, a printer connected to a DCI Module can print out room status reports:
Room Status (occupied, available, ready and to be cleaned)
Room Telephone Call and Toll Restriction Information
Do Not Disturb and Clean Up Extension List
Message Waiting Report
Wake-up Call No-Answer Report
Single Digit Extension Access
To simplify guest calling, room telephones can have single digit access to selected extensions. For example, this allows guests to dial 1 for the front desk, 2 for house cleaning etc.
Toll Restriction Changing
An employee can change the Toll Restriction for a guest’s telephone. For example, the receptionist can
enable long distance calling for each room telephone as the guests check in.
Wake-up Call
A guest can set or cancel a wake-up call request. A hotel/motel employee with a keyset can also set or
cancel a wake-up call for a room telephone.
For additional information on Hotel/Motel features, refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000MHT**).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 319
Features D-M
Hotel/Motel
Description (Cont’d)
Conditions
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**).
Default Setting
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**).
Programming
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**).
Related Features
Year 2000 Compliance
The Hotel Room Status banner shows four digits for the year (e.g., 2001).
For additional information, refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**).
Operation
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N 92000HMT**).
320 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Hotline
Hotline
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Hotline gives a keyset user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hotline partner). Hotline
helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other just by
pressing a single key.
In addition, the Hotline key shows the status of the partner’s extension:
When the key is . . .
The extension is . . .
Off
Idle
On
Busy or ringing
Fast Flash
DND – All calls (option 3) or
Intercom calls (option 2)
Conditions
An extension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partner’s extension.
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 20: BLF Control and
0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Automatic Off Hook Signaling
Programs 0401 Item 20 and 0406 Item 6 set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or
DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the following chart, the BLF
LED is on only when both extension line appearances are busy. In conditions 2-4, the BLF LED is on
when one line appearance is busy.
1
➣
Program 0406:
Item 6
Program 0401:
Item 20
BLF 1
Status
Busy
Status
1
1
0
Off
No
2
1
1
On
Yes
3
0
0
On
Yes
4
0
1
On
Yes
BLF is on for extension receiving a voice announced Intercom call.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Hotline (code 1058 + partner’s extension number)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 321
Features D-M
Hotline
Related Features
Do Not Disturb
Hotline does not override Do Not Disturb.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Hotline always follows the Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing mode set at the called extension. The Hotline caller can override the setting, if desired.
Off Hook Signaling
If the partner’s extension is busy, Hotline does not automatically activate Off Hook Signaling.
Programmable Function Keys
A Hotline is a uniquely programmed function key.
Operation
To place a call to your Hotline partner:
1.
Press Hotline key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1058 + partner’s extension number)
You can optionally lift handset after this step for privacy.
To transfer your outside call to your Hotline partner:
1.
Press Hotline key.
2.
Announce call and hang up.
OR
Hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unannounced.
If unanswered, the call recalls like a regular transferred call.
To answer a call from your Hotline partner:
1.
If you hear two beeps, speak toward phone.
Or
1.
If your telephone rings, lift handset.
322 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Hotline, External
Hotline, External
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
With External Hotline, an extension automatically dials a Common Abbreviated Dialing number when the user
lifts the handset. External Hotline would be beneficial in an Airport Lobby, for example, to provide simplified access to an off-site Reservation Desk. A traveler need only lift the handset on the External Hotline phone to automatically ring for reservations. (If the Reservation Desk is an extension on the same system, use Ringdown
Extension instead.)
The system allows up to 10 External Hotline extensions. All extensions can share the same Common Abbreviated Dialing number, if desired.
External Hotline is a variation of Ringdown. To find out more about Ringdown Extensions (which automatically
call a co-worker when the user lifts the handset), refer to the "Ringdown Extension" feature.
Conditions
Ringdown Extension (Program 1013) has priority over External Hotline (Program 1024).
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
➣ 1024 - External Hotline Setup
For each External Hotline (10 maximum), assign the External Hotline extension and the Common Abbreviated Dialing bin used.
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
External Hotline uses the trunk routing set in Abbreviated Dialing.
Ringdown Extension
A Ringdown Extension automatically calls another extension when the user lifts the handset.
Operation
To use External Hotline:
1.
Lift handset.
Your phone automatically seizes an outgoing trunk and places a call using the Common Abbreviated Dialing number.
To bypass External Hotline (keyset only):
1.
Press SPK or CL1 before lifting the handset.
You can process calls normally — the External Hotline does not go through.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 323
Features D-M
InDepth and inDepth+
InDepth and inDepth+
Description
124i ☞
Not available.
384i ☞
Available — requires system
software 3.07.18 or higher.
InDepth (P/N 94100) and inDepth+ (P/N 94105) are Windows-based Management Informatin Systems that
work in conjunction with the built in 384i ACD. These ACD/MIS systems enhance the 384i ACD with real time
statistics and reports on ACD group traffic patterns and usage. Communicating through the 384i Open Architecture Interface (OAI), inDepth and inDepth+ are an extensive set of user-configuratble Real Time Windows and
Reporter subsystems.
InDepth+ is the more comprehensive and capable of the ACD/MIS systems and offers:
•
•
•
•
•
Real Time Status Window
This window displays ACD agent status,
state and connection state.
Real Time Statistics Window
The statistics window provides a visual
performance summary for lines, agents
and ACD Groups.
Call Queue and Wait Time Windows
These windows show the number of calls
in queue, the longest wait time, as well
as the number of calls answered and
abandoned.
Wallboard Template
Use the wallboard template display to
motivate and inform ACD agents
through a dynamic display of real time
statistics and messages.
Reporter
ACD administrators can create fully-configurable reports for display and printing.
Similar in many respects to inDepth+, inDepth is streamlined for more modest ACD applications. InDepth provides a single real time screen template, up to seven reports and can track report data for up to one full month. InDepth includes ACD/MIS features like Report View/Print and Audible/Visual Alarms, but excludes the
Sub-Supervisor Positions and the Wallboard Support.
324 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
InDepth and inDepth+
Description (Cont’d)
Hardware, Software and System Requirements
PC 486 DX2-66 or higher with 8MByte RAM
•
Windows 95 or Windows NT
•
SVGA mode (800 x 600)
•
4 Serial ports
•
Network card for multiple MIS workstations
•
Sound card
•
384i LAP-B Open Architecture Interface PCB (P/N 92156)
•
For more information, refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N 94105INS**) for the specifics.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
InDepth/inDepth+ not installed.
Programming
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N 94105INS**) for the specifics.
Related Features
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N 94105INS**) for the specifics.
Operation
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N 94105INS**) for the specifics.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 325
Features D-M
Intercom
Intercom
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Changing the Intercom ring tone
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Changing the Intercom ring tone
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete internal calling capability.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward
the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand
to pick up the handset. Refer to Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing feature on page 306 for more.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
326 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Intercom
Programming
Intercom
Start
In 0406:61 enter 0.
No
Should an extension
be able to place
Intercom calls?
Yes
In 0406:61 enter 1.
Yes
In 1105, assign the
operator extension port
for each Tenant Group.
In 1005,assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1105, make sure each
Tenant Group has the same
operator extension port.
No
Should each Tenant Group
have a different operator
(attendant) extension?
Is the time allowed for
users to dial Intercom
numbers acceptable?
No
In 0405:10, set the
Intercom Interdigit Time to
correct the problem.
Yes
After getting Intercom dial
tone, do users have
adequate time to dial the
first ICM digit?
No
In 0405:28, extend
the Extension Dial
Tone Time.
Yes
Do you want to change
the way Intercom calls
ring keysets?
Yes
Change the
entry for 1008:4.
No
Do you want to change the
way Intercom calls ring
single line sets?
Yes
Change the entries for
1001:6 and 1008:4.
No
Do you want to
customize the
Intercom Ring Tone?
Yes
In 0112, change the
frequencies assigned to
each type.
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 327
Features D-M
Intercom
Programming (Cont’d)
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Start
No
In 0406 Item 68,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 72,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to set Handsfree
Answerback and Forced
Intercom Ringing for their
incoming calls (Service
Codes 821 and 823)?
Should extension be able to
toggle between Handsfree
Answerback and Forced
Intercom Ringing for outgoing
Intercom calls (dial 1 or
Service Code 812).
Yes
In 0406 Item 68,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0406 Item 72,
enter 1.
Stop
328 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Intercom
Programming (Cont’d)
For Intercom . . .
➣ 0112 - Intercom and Alarm Ring Tone
Customize the Intercom ring tone.
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 10: Intercom Interdigit Time
Set the Intercom Interdigit Time (0-64800 seconds). When placing Intercom calls, users must dial each
digit within this interval.
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 28: Extension Dial Tone Time
Set the Extension Dial Tone Time (0-64800 seconds). After getting Intercom dial tone, a keyset user has
this interval to dial the first digit of the Intercom call.
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 61, Intercom Calls
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to place Intercom calls.
➣ 1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 6: Incoming Ring for 500/2500
Use this option along with Program 1008 Item 4 to change the way calls ring single line telephones.
➣ 1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 4: Ring Cycle for Keysets
Use this option to change the way calls ring keysets.
➣ 1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
➣ 1105 - Operator’s Extension
Assign the operator’s extension for each tenant.
For Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing . . .
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 10: Forced Intercom Ringing
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Intercom Ringing. If disabled (0), Intercom calls voice-announce.
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 68: Setting Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Handsfree Answerback (Service Code 821) and Forced Intercom Ringing (Service Code 823) for incoming Intercom
calls.
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 72: Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced Intercom Ringing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to toggle between
Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls (dial 1 or Service Code
812).
➣ 1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Intercom calls can ring or be voice-announced at the called extension.
Line Preference
Ringing Line Preference can automatically answer ringing Intercom or trunk calls when the user lifts the
handset.
Name Storing
An extension can have a name assigned that identifies the extension to callers.
(384i Only) Tenant Service
Tenant Service may restrict Intercom calling.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 329
Features D-M
Intercom
Operation
To place an Intercom call:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial extension number (or 0 for your operator).
Your call may voice-announce or ring the called extension. Dial 1 to change the way your call
alerts the called extension.
If the extension you call is busy or doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension without hanging up.
To answer an Intercom call:
1.
If you hear two beeps, speak toward phone.
Your telephone picks up your voice.
OR
If your telephone rings, lift handset.
To check your extension’s data:
1.
Press CHECK.
2.
Press CALL1.
You display shows your telephone’s extension number, port number and extension/Department
Group.
3.
Press CLEAR to return the normal time/date display.
330 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Intercom Abandoned Call Display
Intercom Abandoned Call Display
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Intercom Abandoned Call Display shows a display keyset user a list of Intercom calls placed to them that they
did not answer. This is a convenience if a user has to temporarily leave their desk. When they return, they can
display the list to find out who called while they were out.
Conditions
Intercom Abandon Call Display remembers the last five Intercom calls to an extension.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
In 0406 Item 13,
enter 0.
Should extension user
be able to display list of
Intercom calls they did
not answer?
Yes
In 0406 Item 13,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class
of Service to
extensions.
Stop
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options, Item 13: Intercom Abandoned Call Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Intercom Abandoned Call Display.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 331
Features D-M
Intercom Abandoned Call Display
Related Features
Intercom
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions.
Operation
To display the list of Intercom calls you did not answer.
1.
Press CHECK.
2.
Press CALL2.
Repeatedly press CALL2 until no more calls display.
3.
Press CLEAR to return to the normal Time and Date display.
332 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
ISDN Compatibility
ISDN Compatibility
Description
124i ☞
Currently not implemented.
384i ☞
Contact your sales representative for
availability.
!! Important !!
ISDN is an emerging technology on the leading edge of international digital communication’s networking. Always
check with your Nitsuko America Technical Service Representative before setting up your ISDN application.
Working together will ensure maximum compatibility and reliable ISDN performance.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
The system is compatible with ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) services. PRI services currently supported include:
Basic PRI Call Control (BCC)
•
Display of incoming caller’s name and number
•
Routing in the system based on the number the caller dialed
•
ISDN maintenance functions (such as In Service/Out of Service Messaging)
•
Speech and 3.1 KHz audio
•
Capacity of 5 PRI circuits and 120 PRI channels
•
PRI capability requires the installation of T1/PRI Interface PCBs (P/N 92190). Each PCB (also called a PRI circuit) provides 24 PRI channels (23B + D)1 with 64K Clear Channel response. The T1/PRI Interface PCB uses a
single universal slot. Your can install up to five PCBs for a maximum of 120 PRI channels.
When installed, the T1/PRI Interface PCB uses the first block of 24 consecutive trunks. For example, if you have
an ATRU PCB installed for trunks 1-8, the T1/PRI Interface PCB will automatically use trunks 9-32. If you have
ATRU PCBs installed for trunks 1-8 and 17-24, the T1/PRI PCB will use trunks 25-48. The T1/PRI Interface
cannot use trunks 9-16 (even if available) since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks.
Notes:
•
•
In addition to T1/PRI Interface PCBs, PRI also requires a CSU/DSU Unit and interconnecting cables to
interface with the telco.
Each T1/PRI Interface PCB is switch selectable between T1 and PRI operation. For more on T1 Trunking, go to "T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatiblity)".
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)
Your system also provides compatibility with ISDN Basic Rate (BRI) services, including:
Basic BRI Call Control (BCC)
•
Point-to-Point BRI Terminal Connection (no daisy-chaining)
•
Multipoint BRI Terminal Connection (daisy-chaining)
•
Capacity of 32 BRI circuits and 64 BRI channels
•
BRI services require the installation of 2ISTU BRI Interface PCBs (P/N 92191). Each BRI Interface PCB has
two BRI circuits. There are two channels (ports) per circuit (2B + D), providing 64K Clear B-Channel and 16K
Clear D-Channel response. The BRI Interface PCB uses a single universal slot. You can install up to 16 BRI Interface PCBs for system maximums of 32 BRI circuits and 64 BRI channels.
When installed, the BRI Interface PCB uses a block of eight consecutive trunks. Only the first four trunks in the
block are available. For example, if your BRI Interface PCB is the first trunk PCB installed, it reserves trunks 18. Trunks 1-4 are available — trunks 5-8 are not.
1
Each T1/PRI Interface PCB provides 23 voice (B) and 1 data (D) channel.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 333
Features D-M
ISDN Compatibility
Description (Cont’d)
Note: In addition to BRI Interface PCBs, BRI Services require the installation of NT1 Network Terminators and
interconnecting cabling.
ISDN services are currently not implemented in 124.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
None
Programming
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) and ISDN-PRI Manual (92000PRI**) for the specifics.
Related Features
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) and ISDN-PRI Manual (92000PRI**) for the specifics.
Operation
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N 92000BRI**) and ISDN-PRI Manual (92000PRI**) for the specifics.
334 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Labelmaker
Labelmaker
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
The 124i/384i Labelmaker provides template software and preprinted, precut forms for producing custom keyset
labels. Use the software and forms to make unique keyset labels for each extension which can include key functions, Hotline names or your own company’s imprinted logo.
The 124i/384i Labelmaker requires:
A Windows-compatible sheet fed printer (e.g., laser or ink jet)
•
Microsoft Windows 3.1 or higher
•
Microsoft Excel 3.0 or higher
•
OR
Lotus 123 Release 4 or higher
OR
Lotus AmiPro 3.0 or higher
The 124i/384i Labelmaker is not compatible with Lotus WordPro.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
None
Programming
None
Related Features
None
Operation
None
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 335
Features D-M
Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed. For example, a user may
quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits.
Last Number Redial saves in system memory the last 24 digits a user dials. The number can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call. However, the extension
user can preselect a specific trunk if desired.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
In 0406 Item 48,
enter 0.
Should an extension
be able to use Last
Number Redaial?
Yes
In 0406 Item 48,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
Stop
➣
➣
336 FEATURES
0406 - COS Options, Item 48: Last Number Redial
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Last Number
Redial.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Last Number Redial
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects.
Repeat Redial
The system can periodically redial an unanswered trunk call.
Operation
To redial your last call:
1.
(Optional at keyset) Press idle line key.
If you skip this step, the system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call.
2.
Press LND.
3.
Press idle CALL key (if you skipped step 1).
OR
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial #5.
The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call.
To check the number saved for Last Number Redial:
1.
Press LND.
The stored number displays for six seconds.
The stored number dials out if you:
- Lift the handset,
- Press an idle line key,
- Press an idle CALL key, or
- Press SPK
2.
Press CLEAR.
To erase the stored number:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 876.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 337
Features D-M
Line Preference
Line Preference
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Line Preference determines how a keyset user places and answers calls. There are two types of Line Preference:
Incoming Line Preference and Outgoing Line Preference.
Incoming Line Preference
Incoming Line Preference establishes how a keyset user answers calls. When a call rings the keyset, lifting the
handset answers either the ringing call (for Ringing Line Preference) or seizes an idle line (for Idle Line Preference). The idle line can provide either Intercom or trunk dial tone (see Outgoing Line Preference below).
Ringing Line Preference helps users whose primary function is to answer calls (such as a receptionist). Idle
Line Preference is an aid to users whose primary function is to place calls (such as a telemarketer).
Outgoing Line Preference
Outgoing Line Preference sets how a keyset user places calls. If a keyset has Outgoing Intercom Line Preference, the user hears Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset. If a keyset has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference, the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset. Outgoing Line Preference also determines what
happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference. The user hears either trunk ("dial 9") or Intercom dial tone.
Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines
With Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, an extension user can automatically answer trunk calls that ring other
extensions (not their own). This would help a user that has to answer calls for co-workers that are away from
their desks. When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group
Routing programming. The extension user’s own ringing calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing
other co-worker’s extensions.
Conditions
If a keyset extension has more than one call ringing its line keys, Ringing Line Preference answers the calls on a
first-in first-answered basis.
Default Setting
Enabled.
338 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Line Preference
Programming
Incoming Line Preference
Start
No
In Program
0401 Item 12,
enter 0.
No
In program 0401
Item 13, enter 0.
In Program
0401 Item 8,
enter 0.
Intercom
When users lift handset,
should they answer
ringing Intercom call?
Yes
In Program
0401 Item 12,
enter 1.
When users lift handset,
should they answer
ringing trunk call?
Yes
In Program
0401 Item 13,
enter 1.
With both Intercom and
trunk call ringing, which
should have priority?
Trunk
In Program
0401 Item 8,
enter 1.
In Program 0909, assign
extensions to Ring
Groups.
In Program 0910, assign
trunks to Ring Groups.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 339
Features D-M
Line Preference
Programming (Cont’d)
Outgoing Line Preference
Start
Also see the Prime Line
Selection feature.
In Program
1008 Item 3,
enter 0.
In Program
1008 Item 2,
enter 1.
Intercom
dial tone
When user lifts
handset, should they
get Intercom dial tone
or trunk dial tone?
Trunk
dial tone
In Program
1008 Item 3,
enter 1.
Program Trunk Group Routing:
- Assign trunks to groups in 0905.
- Assign trunk groups to routes in 0906.
- Assign routes to extensions in 0907.
For additional interaction between
Program 1008 Items 2 and 3, see
the chart below.
In Program 0911, set up
the trunk access maps.
In Program 0912, assign
trunk access maps to
extensions.
Stop
340 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Line Preference
Programming (Cont’d
Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines
Start
Is the trunk you want
to be non-ringing
currently ringing?
Yes
In Programs 0909 and 0910, set
trunk to not ring extension.
Refer to the Ring Group feature.
No
In Programs 0911 and 0912,
make sure extension has
incoming access to
non-ringing trunk.
No
Does extension
have access to
non-ringing trunk?
Yes
In Program 0905, assign
trunks to groups. Refer to the
Trunk Group feature.
No
Is Trunk Group
Routing
programmed?
Yes
In Program 0906, program
the Trunk Group Routing
table. Refer to the Trunk
Group Routing feature.
In Program 1015, select
the routing sequence for
auto-answer of non-ringing
lines.
Choose from the routes you
programmed in Trunk Group Routing
(Program 0906). Make one entry for
each Night Service mode.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 341
Features D-M
Line Preference
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 8: Incoming Call Priority
➣
➣
For each tenant group, determine if ringing Intercom calls (0) or ringing trunk calls (1) should have answer priority. See the table below for interaction.
0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 12: Ringing Line Preference for Intercom Calls
For each tenant group, enable Idle (0) or Ringing (1) Line Preference for Intercom calls. See the table below for interaction.
0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 13: Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls
For each tenant group, enable Idle (0) or Ringing (1) Line Preference for trunk calls. See the table below
for interaction.
Program 0401
Ringing Ringing
Intercom Trunk
Call
Call
Item 12
Item 13
(Intercom
Preference)
(Trunk
Preference)
0
0
X
X
Seizes idle line appearance.
0
0
X
—
Seizes idle line appearance.
0
0
—
X
Seizes idle line appearance.
0
1
X
X
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, answers ringing trunk
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0, seizes idle line appearance.
0
1
X
—
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, seizes idle line appearance.
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 0, seizes line appearance.
0
1
—
X
Answers ringing trunk.
1
0
X
X
Seizes idle line appearance.
1
0
X
—
Answers ringing line appearance.
1
0
—
X
Seizes idle line appearance.
1
1
X
X
If Program 0401 Item 8 is 1, answers ringing trunk.
Intercom call then rings second line appearance. If Program
0401 item 8 is 0, answers Ringing line appearance.
1
1
X
—
Answers ringing Intercom call
(Line appearance).
1
1
—
X
Answers ringing trunk.
Lifting the handset
Note: Program 0401 Item 8 sets Intercom (0) or trunk (1) call priority.
➣
342 FEATURES
0905- Trunk Groups
For Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign trunks to trunk groups. This is part of Trunk Group
Routing programming.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Line Preference
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0906 - Trunk Group Routing
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
For Auto Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, program the Trunk Group Routing table. Auto Answer uses this
table to determine the answer sequence for ringing calls.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to ring groups (1-128). Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines only works for trunks
that do not ring an extension.
0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign trunks to ring groups (1-128). Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines only works for trunks that
do not ring an extension.
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, set up the trunk Access Maps (1128).
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign trunk Access Maps to extensions.
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 2: Outgoing Intercom Line Preference
Enable (1) or disable (0) Outgoing Intercom Line Preference for extensions. See the table below for interaction.
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 3: Outgoing Trunk Line Preference
Enable (1) or disable (0) Outgoing Trunk Line Preference for extensions. See the table below for interaction.
Outgoing Line Preference (Program 1008, Items 2 and 3)
➣
Item 2
Item 3
(Intercom
Preference)
(Trunk
Preference)
0
0
You hear nothing.
0
1
You hear trunk dial tone (follows "dial 9"
routing).
1
0
You hear intercom dial tone.
1
1
You hear trunk dial tone (follows "dial 9"
routing).
After lifting handset at idle phone...
1015 - Universal Answer/Auto-Answer
For each extension, select the route that it will use for Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines. The routes
correspond to the Trunk Group Routing table set in Program 0906.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 343
Features D-M
Line Preference
Related Features
Direct Inward Line
DILs do not affect Incoming Line Preference operation.
Ring Groups
Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.
Trunk Group Routing
If an extension gets trunk dial tone when the user lifts the handset, the system uses the "dial 9" routing to
select the trunk.
Operation
To answer a ringing call if your phone has Ringing Line Preference:
1.
Refer to the chart on the previous page.
To place a call if your phone has Outgoing Line Preference:
1.
Refer to the chart above.
To use Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines:
1.
At keyset, lift handset.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 872.
344 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Loop Keys
Loop Keys
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Loop keys are uniquely programmed function keys that simplify placing and answering trunk calls. There are
three types of loop keys: Incoming Only, Outgoing Only and Both Ways.
•
•
•
Incoming Only Loop Keys
Incoming Only loop keys are for answering trunk calls. An extension can have an incoming loop key for a
specific trunk group (fixed) or a "catch all" loop key for any trunk group (switched). Fixed loop keys allow
an extension user to tell the type of call by the ringing key. Switched loop keys are ideal for an extension
with a large number of feature keys. In addition, switched loop keys are a destination for any trunk not on
a line key or fixed loop key. Without a switched loop key, calls not appearing on a line key or fixed loop
key will ring only the CALL key. Incoming Only loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls.
Outgoing Only Loop Keys
Outgoing Only loop keys are for placing trunk calls. An extension can have outgoing loop keys for a specific trunk group or for ARS access. When a user presses the loop key, they get dial tone from the first
available trunk in the group (or from ARS if programmed). Outgoing Only loop keys help ensure that an
extension will always have a key available for placing calls.
Both Ways Loop Keys
Both Ways loop keys combine the functions of both Incoming Only and Outgoing Only loop keys. Both
Ways loop keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of calls and don’t separate
keys for incoming and outgoing calls. Both Ways loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls.
An extension can have many loop keys — of any type. You can program an operator, for example, with four loop
keys for incoming calls and four for outgoing calls.
Once a loop key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other trunk call. For example, the user can place the
call on Hold, Transfer it to a co-worker or send it to a Park Orbit.
An incoming call will ring the first available loop key, beginning with the lowest numbered key. If keys 1-3 are
loop keys, for example, the first incoming call rings key 1. If key 1 is busy, the next call rings key 2. If keys 1
and 2 are busy, the next call rings key 3. If all three keys are busy, additional incoming calls queue for the first
available key. The telephone display will show "WAITING – LOOP KEY" if the user presses a loop key when
there are additional calls waiting.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 345
Features D-M
Loop Keys
Programming
Start
In 1006, assign key as type
1078 with additional data = 1.
Outgoing
Do you want Incoming
Only, Outgoing Only or
Both Ways loop keys.
Incoming
In 1006, assign key as type
1078 with additional data = 0.
Both Ways
In 1026, for data 1 (outgoing options)
enter trunk group number or 0 for ARS.
For data 2 (incoming options), enter 0.
Loop keys use trunk
group assignments
when answering and
placing calls.
In 1006, assign key as type
1078 with additional data = 2.
In 1026, for data 1 (outgoing
options) enter trunk group
number or 0 for ARS. For data 2
(incoming options), enter trunk
group number or 0 for all
groups.
In 0905, assign trunks to trunk
groups.
Program Ring Groups: In 0910, assign
trunks to Ring Groups. In 0909, assign
extensions to Ring Groups.
Make sure the Trunk Access Map
assignments match the loop key's
requirements.
In 1026, for data 1 (outgoing
options) enter 0. For data 2
(incoming options), enter trunk
group number or 0 for all groups.
Incoming loop keys flash and ring for
Ring Group calls.
Program Trunk Access Maps: In 0911,
set up the access options for Access
Maps. In 0912, assign Trunk Access
Maps to extensions.
Stop
346 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Loop Keys
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0905 - Trunk Groups
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-128). In general, loop keys access trunks within specific trunk groups.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to Ring Groups (1-128). An incoming loop key will ring only for those trunks programmed to ring. Also see Program 0910.
0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign trunks to Ring Groups (1-128). An incoming loop key will ring only for those trunks programmed to ring. Also see Program 0909 above.
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. For example, if an extension’s loop key is for incoming and outgoing,
make sure the Trunk Access Map allows incoming and outgoing access. Also see Program 0912 below.
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Also see Program 0911 above.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Program function keys as loop keys (1078). For Additional Data, enter 0 (incoming only), 1 (outgoing
only) or 2 (both ways). Also see Program 1026 below.
1026 - Loop Key Data
For each loop key on an extension, program options for Data 1 and Data 2 (see the chart below).
Data 1
Outgoing Options
Data 2
Incoming Options
0
Assigns the loop key for ARS
access
0
Assigns the loop key to all trunk
groups
1-128
Assigns the loop key to the
trunk group specified (1-128)
1-128
Assigns the loop key to the
trunk group specified (1-128)
Also see Program 1006 above.
Related Features
Off Hook Signaling
If enabled, a user hears Call Waiting beeps if additional calls are waiting behind a loop key.
Programmable Function Keys
If you have a line and loop key for the same trunk, the line key has precedence. An incoming call rings
the line key, not the loop key. When you press the loop key for an outgoing call, the line key lights.
Ring Groups
Trunks ring telephones according to their Ring Group assignments (Programs 0909 and 0910).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 347
Features D-M
Loop Keys
Operation
To place a call on a loop key:
1.
Press outgoing or both ways loop key.
You hear dial tone and the key lights green.
2.
Dial number.
To answer a call on a loop key:
Listen for ringing a look for a flashing (red) loop key.
1.
Press loop key.
The key lights green and you connect to the call.
If there are additional calls waiting to be answered, your display shows:
WAITING – LOOP KEY
To program a loop key:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 851.
3.
Press the key you want to program as a loop key.
4.
Dial 1078.
5.
Dial the loop key type:
0 = Incoming only
•
1 = Outgoing only
•
2 = Both ways (incoming and outgoing)
•
6.
Dial the loop key routing option:
001-128 = Trunk Groups 1-128
•
If you selected option 2 in step 5 above, enter the incoming Trunk Group followed by the
outgoing Trunk Group.
000 = Trunk Group Routing or ARS (if installed)
•
7.
Press SPK to hang up.
348 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference
Description
124i ☞
The system allows either 8 fourparty conferences or 4 eight-party
conferences.
384i ☞
Each DTU-A/C allows either 4
four-party conferences or 2 eightparty conferences per PCB.
With Meet Me Conference, an extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other
inside parties. Each party joins the Conference by dialing a Meet Me Conference code. Meet Me Conference
lets extension users have a telephone meeting -- without leaving the office.
The system permits up to eight parties to join in a Meet Me Conference.
Conditions
(384i Only) Conference requires either a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB (eight PCBs maximum per system).
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup
(124i Only) Set the Conference mode of the system. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences
(0) or 4 eight-party conferences (1).
(384i Only) Set the Conference mode of each DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. The system allows either 4 fourparty conferences (0) or 2 eight-party conferences (1) per PCB.
(384i Only) 0308 - Conference Circuit Setup
Assign the circuits on the DTU-A or DTU-C PCBs as Conference circuits (0).
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 9: Meet Me Conference Time
Set the Meet Me Conference Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates Meet Me Conference, the
system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation.
0406 - COS Options, Item 14: Meet Me Conference and Paging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a Meet Me
Conference or Meet Me Page.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Conference (code 1016), External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone), External
All Call Paging (code 1005), Internal Zone Paging (code 1006 + zone) and Meet Me Conference/Paging
Pickup(code 1010).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 349
Features D-M
Meet Me Conference
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0308, assign the blocks on
the CDTU PCB for
entry 1.
No
Should the system have
Conference capability?
In 0308, assign the blocks on
the CDTU PCB for Conference
(entry 0).
Yes
Stop
Two 8-party
In 0302 Item 2, enter 1.
In 0406 Item 14, enter 0 to
prevent initiating Meet Me
Conference.
Four 4-party
Should each CDTU PCB allow
four 4-party conferences or two
8-party conferences?
No
Should an extension be
allowed to initiate a Meet Me
Conference?
In 0302 Item 2, enter 0.
Yes
In 0406 Item 14, enter 1 to allow
initiating Meet Me Conference.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Is the time users have to join a
Meet Me Conference
adequate?
No
In 0405 Item 9, set the Meet Me
Conference Time to meet the
application.
Yes
Setting the Meet Me
Conference Time too long can
unnecessarily tie up
Conference circuits.
In 1006, assign a function key as a
Conference key (code 1016).
You can simplify Meet Me Conference
operation by assigning the following function
keys in 1006: External Zone Paging (code
1004), External All Call Paging (code 1005),
Internal Zone Paging (code 1006) and Meet
Me Conference/Paging pickup (code 1010).
Stop
350 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Meet Me Conference
Related Features
Meet Me Paging
An extension user can have a telephone meeting with a co-worker on a Page zone.
Programmable Function Keys
Meet Me Conference requires a Conference key. In addition, Internal and External Paging keys simplify
Meet Me Conference operation.
Operation
Meet Me External Conference
To make a Meet Me External Conference:
Keyset
1.
While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
2.
Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call)
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
OR
Press Page key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 + zone & 1005).
3.
Announce the zone.
4.
When co-worker answers your page, press the Conference key twice.
5.
Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Single Line Telephone
While on a call, hookflash and dial #1.
Dial 803 and the External Paging zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
Announce the zone.
When co-worker answers your page, hookflash twice.
Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.
To join a Meet Me External Conference:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 865.
3.
Dial the announced External Paging Zone code (0-8).
You connect to the other parties.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 351
Features D-M
Meet Me Conference
Operation (Cont’d)
Meet Me Internal Conference:
To make a Meet Me Internal Conference:
Keyset
1.
While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
2.
Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-9 or 00-32).
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
3.
Announce the zone.
4.
When co-worker answers your page, press the Conference key twice.
5.
Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Single Line Telephone
While on a call, hookflash and dial #1.
Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-9 or 00-32).
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
Announce the zone.
When co-worker answers your page, hookflash twice.
Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.
To join a Meet Me Internal Conference:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).
OR
Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).
OR
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1010) if your extension is in
the zone called.
352 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Meet Me Paging allows an extension user to Page a co-worker and privately meet with them on a Page zone.
The Paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting takes place. While the co-workers meet on the zone,
no one else can hear the conversation, join in or make an announcement using that zone. Meet Me Paging is a
good way to talk to a co-worker when their location is unknown. If the co-worker can hear the Page, they can
join in the conversation.
Conditions
Meet Me Paging only permits two-party conversations.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 14,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to initiate a Meet Me
Page?
Yes
In 0406 Item 14,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
You can simplifiy Meet Me Paging operation
be assigning the following function keys in
1006: External Zone Paging (code 1004),
External All Call Paging (code 1005) and
Internal Zone Paging (code 1006) and Meet
Me Conference/Paging Pickup (code 1010).
Is the time users have to
join a Meet Me Page
adequate?
No
In 0405 Item 11, set
the Meet Me Paging
Time.
Yes
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 353
Features D-M
Meet Me Paging
Programming (Cont’d)
Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features.
➣
➣
➣
➣
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 11: Meet Me Paging Time
Set the Meet Me Paging Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates Meet Me Page, the system
waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation.
0406 - COS Options, Item 14: Meet Me Conference and Paging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a Meet Me
Conference or Meet Me Page.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone), External All Call Paging (code
1005), Internal Zone Paging (code 1006 + zone) or Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup (code 1010).
Related Features
Meet Me Conference
An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other inside parties.
Programmable Function Keys
Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging operation.
354 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Meet Me Paging
Operation
Meet Me External Page
To make a Meet Me External Page:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
3.
Announce the zone.
OR
1.
At keyset, press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 + zone & 1005).
2.
Announce the zone.
To join a Meet Me External Page:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 865.
3.
Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-8).
You connect to the other party.
Meet Me Internal Page
To make a Meet Me Internal Page:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 801 and dial the Internal Paging Zone code (0-9 or 00-32).
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
3.
Announce the zone.
OR
1.
At keyset, press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 + zone & 1005).
2.
Announce the zone.
To join a Meet Me Internal Page:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).
OR
Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).
OR
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1010) if your extension is in
the zone called.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 355
Features D-M
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
If a user wants to Transfer a call to a co-worker but they don’t know where the co-worker is, they can use Meet
Me Paging Transfer. With Meet Me Paging Transfer, the user can Page the co-worker and have the call automatically Transfer when the co-worker answers the Page. Since Meet Me Paging Transfer works with both Internal
and External Paging, a call can be quickly extended to a co-worker anywhere in the facility.
Conditions
Meet Me Paging Transfer only permits two-party conversations.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal features.
➣
➣
➣
➣
356 FEATURES
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 11: Meet Me Paging Time
Set the Meet Me Paging Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates Meet Me Paging Transfer, the
system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation.
0406 - COS Options, Item 14: Meet Me Conference and Paging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a Meet Me
Paging Transfer.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 1004 + zone), External All Call Paging (code
1005), Internal Zone Paging (code 1006 + zone) and Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup (code 1010).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
Do you want to have
Meet Me External
Paging Transfer?
Yes
Program
External Paging.
Refer to the External
Paging feature.
Program Internal
Paging.
Refer to the Internal
Paging feature.
No
Do you want to have
Meet Me Internal
Paging Transfer?
Yes
No
Be sure Meet Me Paging Time (Program
0405 Item 11) allows adeguate time for
the transfers to complete.
In COS, enable/disable Meet Me
Conference and Paging (Program 0406
Item 14). Assign COS in Program 1005.
Should extension have
Function Key access to
Meet Me Paging
Transfer?
Yes
In Program 1006, assign function keys for
Paging: External Zone=1004, External All
Call=1005, Internal Paging =1006 and Meet
Me Conference/Paging Pickup = 1010.
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 357
Features D-M
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Related Features
Meet Me Conference
An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to six other inside parties.
Meet Me Paging
An extension user can Page a co-worker and meet with them on a Page zone.
Paging, External
With External Paging, an extension user can broadcast an announcement over Paging equipment connected to external Paging zones.
Paging, Internal
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keysets.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Meet Me Paging Transfer operation.
Operation
Meet Me External Paging Transfer
To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:
1.
At keyset, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, hookflash.
2.
Press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 + zone & 1005).
OR
Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
3.
Announce the call.
4.
When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.
To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 865.
3.
Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-8).
You connect to the Paging party.
4.
Stay on the line.
After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.
358 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Operation (Cont’d)
Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer
To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:
1.
At keyset, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, hookflash.
2.
Press Internal Paging Zone key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1005 + zone).
OR
Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-9 or 00-32).
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
3.
Announce the call.
4.
When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.
The answering party connects to the trunk call when you hang up.
To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).
OR
Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).
OR
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1010) if your extension is in
the zone called.
3.
Stay on the line.
After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 359
Features D-M
Memo Dial
Memo Dial
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
While on an outside call, Memo Dial lets a display keyset user store an important number for easy redialing later
on. The telephone can be like a notepad. For example, a user could dial Directory Assistance and ask for a client’s telephone number. When Directory Assistance plays back the requested number, the caller can use Memo
Dial to jot the number down in the telephone’s memory. They can quickly call the Memo Dial number after
hanging up.
When a user enters a Memo Dial number, the dialed digits do not output over the trunk. Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress.
Conditions
When Memo Dial calls out, it outdials the entire stored number. Memo Dial does not automatically strip out
trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number.
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Start
In 0406 Item 47,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to use Memo
Dial?
Yes
In 0406 Item 47,
enter 1.
Assign Class of
Service to
extensions.
In 1006, assign a Memo
Dial key (code 1015).
Stop
360 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Memo Dial
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 47: Memo Dial
➣
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Memo Dial.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Memo Dial (code 1015).
Related Features
Last Number Redial
Quickly redial the last outside number dialed.
Save Number Dialed
Save the last outside number dialed.
Single Line Telephones
Memo Dial is not available at single line telephones.
Operation
To store a number while you are on a call:
1.
While on a call, press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
2.
Dial number you want to store.
3.
Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation.
To call a stored Memo Dial number:
1.
Do not lift the handset.
2.
Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
3.
Press idle CALL key
The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the
number.
OR
Press line key.
The stored number dials out.
To check to see the stored Memo Dial number:
1.
Do not lift handset.
2.
Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
The stored number displays.
To cancel (erase) a stored Memo Dial number:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Press Memo Dial key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1015).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 361
Features D-M
Message Waiting
Message Waiting
Description
124i ☞
-
-
Available.
Single line telephones can leave and
cancel Messages Waiting. Single line
telephones cannot receive Messages
Waiting.
COS control for reminder messages
requires system software 2.13 Base,
2.18 EXCPRU or higher.
384i ☞
-
-
Available.
Single line telephones can leave,
cancel and receive Messages
Waiting. Prior to system software
3.02, single line telephones cannot
receive a Message Waiting
COS control for reminder messages
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension requesting a return
call. The indication is a flashing MW lamp at the called extension and a steadily lit MW lamp on the calling extension. Answering the Message Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication. Message
Waiting ensures that a user will not have to recall an unanswered extension. It also ensures that a user will not
miss calls when their extension is busy or unattended. Additionally, Message Waiting lets extension users:
View and selectively answer messages left at their extension (display keyset only)
•
Cancel all messages left at their extension
•
Cancel messages they left at other extensions
•
An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions. Also, any number of extensions
can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension. A periodic VAU announcement may remind users that they
have Messages Waiting.
Conditions
Reminder messages require a Voice Announce Unit (VAU Module).
Default Setting
Enabled.
362 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Message Waiting
Programming
Start
In 0406:15, enter 0.
In 1021, enter 0.
In 0419:3, enter 0.
No
No
No
Should extension be
able to leave a
Message Waiting?
Should single line set
be able to receive
Messages Waiting?
Should extension hear
periodic reminder
message?
Yes
Yes
Yes
In 0406:15, enter 1.
In 1021, enter 1.
In 0419:3, enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
In 1006, do not
assign a function key
for Message Waiting
(code 1023).
No
Should extension
have one-button
access to Message
Waiting?
Yes
In 1006, assign a
function key for
Message Waiting
(code 1023).
Stop
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options (Part A), Item 15: Message Waiting
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to leave Messages Waiting.
0419 COS Options (Part B), Item 3: VAU Reminder Message
Enable (1) or disable (0) the VAU Reminder Messages.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
(384i Only) 1021 - Hotel Telephone Setup
Enter 1 for this option if Single Line Telephone should be able to receive Messages Waiting.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Message Waiting (code 1023).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 363
Features D-M
Message Waiting
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
When a user responds to a Message Waiting, the system does not cancel the Message Waiting indication
if the called party uses Handsfree Answerback. The system cancels the indication only if the called party
lifts the handset or presses SPK.
Programmable Function Key
A Message Waiting key simplifies this feature’s operation.
Single Line Telephones
If the single line set has a Message Waiting lamp, you must install an ASTU/MW PCB and a Message
Wait Power Supply PCB.
Voice Announce Unit
Reminder messages require a Voice Announce Unit (VAU) Module.
Programming (Cont’d)
Operation
To leave a Message Waiting:
1.
Call busy or unanswered extension.
2.
Dial 0 or press Message Waiting key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1023)
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
Your MW LED lights.
To answer a Message Waiting:
When you have a message, your MW LED flashes fast.
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial *0
OR
Press Message Waiting key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1023).
If the called extension doesn’t answer, dial 0 or press your Message Waiting key to automatically leave them a message.
Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have new messages in your
"Voice Mail" mailbox or a new "General Message". Go to "To check your messages" below.
To cancel all your Messages Waiting:
This includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have
left for you.
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 873.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
364 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Message Waiting
Operation (Cont’d)
To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 871.
3.
Dial number of extension you don’t want to have your messages.
4.
Press SPK to hang up.
To check your messages:
1.
Press CHECK
2.
Dial *0.
You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your phone.
If you see. . .
You have. . .
VOICE MESSAGE
New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox
n MESSAGES
CHECK MESSAGE
VAU GENERAL MESSAGE
CHECK MESSAGE
3.
4.
Not listened to the current General Message
Message Waiting requests left at your phone by
(name) your co-workers
Press VOL ▲ or VOL ▼ to scroll through your display.
When you find the message you want to answer, press CALL1. You’ll either:
Go to your Voice Mail mailbox.
Listen to the new General Message.
Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 365
Features D-M
Microphone Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Microphone Cutoff lets a keyset user turn off their phone’s handsfree or handset microphone at any time. When
activated, Microphone Mute prevents the caller from hearing conversations in the user’s work area. The user
may turn off the microphone while their telephone is idle, busy on a call or ringing. The microphone stays off
until the user turns it back on.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled (using MIC key).
•
Programming
Start
No
In 0406 Item 73,
enter 0.
In 1006, do not program a
Microphone Cutoff key
(code 1026).
No
Should extension
be able to use
Microphone
Cutoff?
Should extension have a
Microphone Cutoff key for
Handset Microphone
Cutoff?
Yes
In 0406 Item 73,
enter 1.
Yes
In 1006, program a
Microphone Cutoff
key (code 1026).
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Stop
366 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Microphone Cutoff
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 73: Microphone Cutoff
➣
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Microphone Cutoff.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-10 in 124i, 1-15 in 384i) to an extension.
1006 - Programmable Function Keys
If an extension needs handset microphone cutoff, program a Microphone Cutoff key (code 1026).
Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Microphone Cutoff does not operate if the user calls another extension and the called extension responds
without lifting the handset or pressing SPK. With Microphone Cutoff enabled, Handsfree Answerback
callers to an extension hear a single beep (instead of two).
Programmable Function Keys
Handset Microphone Cutoff requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Microphone Cutoff.
Operation
To mute your telephone’s handset or Handsfree microphone while on a call:
1.
Press MIC.
This only turns off the Handsfree microphone.
OR
Press Microphone Cutoff key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1026).
This turns off both the handset and Handsfree microphone.
To turn your telephone’s microphone back on:
1.
Press MIC.
Use MIC only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone.
OR
Press Microphone Cutoff key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1026).
Use the Microphone Cutoff key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your handset or
Handsfree microphone.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 367
Features D-M
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
In Base 4.02 and EXCPRU 4.02 and
higher, a Call Coverage key will
flash when the covered extension has
a second call waiting.
384i ☞
-
Available.
In system software 3.07.10 and
higher, a Call Coverage key will
flash when the covered extension has
a second call waiting.
Multiple Directory Numbers let a keyset have more than one extension number. Calls can route to the keyset’s
installed number or to the keyset’s "virtual extension" Multiple Directory Number key. This helps users identify
incoming calls. For example, an extension installed at 304 (Sales) could have a virtual extension for 460 (Service). Calls to 304 ring the extension normally. Calls to 460 ring the Multiple Directory Number key. This lets
the user at extension 304 differentiate Sales calls from Service calls.
Call Coverage
A keyset can have Multiple Directory Number keys set up as Call Coverage keys for co-worker’s extensions.
The Call Coverage key lights when the co-worker’s extension is busy and flashes slowly when the co-worker has
an incoming call. The Call Coverage key can ring immediately when a call comes into the covered extension,
ring after a delay or not ring at all. In addition, the keyset user can press the Call Coverage key to intercept their
co-worker’s incoming call. The user can also go off hook and press the Call Coverage key to call the covered extension.
If the covered extension is busy and they receive a second call, the covering extension’s Call Coverage key will
flash. The user just presses the flashing key to pick up the call.
A keyset can have Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage keys for may different extensions and virtual extensions. In addition, co-workers can share the same Multiple Directory Numbers. For example, everyone in the
Service Department could have a key for the Sales Department’s virtual extension.
Conditions
(A.) More than one extension can share the same Multiple Directory Number.
(B.) An extension can have more than one Multiple Directory Number (limited only by the number of available function keys).
Default Setting
Disabled.
368 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Programming
Start
In 0502, assign unused
extension numbers (e.g., 700)
to virtual extension ports (73-96
in 124i, 257-384 in 384i).
In 1006, do not assign
a function key for
Multiple Directory
Number (code 1036).
No
Skip this step if your are
programming Call Coverage keys.
Should extension
have function key
appearance for
Multiple Directory
Number?
Yes
In 1016, select the
Multiple Directory
Number function key
and enter 1.
Yes
In 1006, assign function key for
Multiple Directory Number
(code 1036 + virtual or covered
port's extension number).
Stop
Should Multiple
Directory Number
key ring?
No
Continued
on next
page (B).
In 1028, enter the
Multiple Directory
Number function
key and enter 1.
Delayed
Should key have
Delayed or
Immediate Ringing?
In 0414 Item 5,
enter a new
Delayed Ringing
Interval.
No
Is the Delayed
Ringing Interval
(normally 10
seconds) adequate?
Immediate
In 1028, enter the
Multiple Directory
Number function
key and enter 0.
Yes
Continued
on next
page (A).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 369
Features D-M
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page (A).
In 1018, assign one of four ring
tones to each extension and
virtual extension port that
appears under a Multiple
Directory Number key.
Do you want an
extension's Multiple
Directory Number keys to
ring with unique tones?
Yes
Continued
from
previous
page (B).
In 1016, select the
Multiple Directory
Number function key
and enter 0.
No
Do you want to change
the ringing priority of
simultaneous ringing
Multiple Directory
Number calls?
No
Yes
In 1019, change the
priority of the Multiple
Directory Number ring
tones.
Stop
370 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0414 - System Timers (Part B), Item 5: Call Coverage Delay Interval
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage Keys set for Delayed Ringing (see Program 1028 below) ring
the covering extension after this interval.
0502 - Extension Numbers and Names
Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extensions (ports 257-384).
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Multiple Directory Numbers (code 1036 + extension number).
1016 - Setting Ringing for Multiple Directory Numbers
Individually program an extension’s Multiple Directory Number keys to either ring (1) or not ring (0).
1018 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Range
Assign a ring tone (0-4) to each extension port and virtual extension port assigned to a Multiple Directory Number key. If ringing is enabled for the key in Program 1016, the key rings with the tone set in this
program. Each port can have one of four different rings.
Program 1019 - Multiple Directory Number Ring Tone Priority
Set the priority (1-4) for the Multiple Directory Number Ring Tones set in Program 1018. When Multiple Directory Number calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest priority (e.g., 1)
rings. The other keys just flash.
Program 1028 - Multiple Directory Number Key Delayed Ringing
Individually program an extension’s Multiple Directory Number keys for Delayed Ringing (1) or Immediate Ringing (0). Also see Program 0414 Item 5 above.
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Extensions can have Call Coverage Keys for ACD Groups. Refer to Multiple Directory Numbers / Call
Coverage for ACD Groups in the ACD Manual (P/N 92000ACD**) for the specifics.
Class of Service
Class of Service options apply to Multiple Extension Appearances.
Department Calling
Multiple Extension Appearances can be in Department Calling Groups.
Group Call Pickup
Multiple Extension Appearances can be in Call Pickup Groups.
Programmable Function Keys
This feature requires uniquely programmed function keys.
Toll Restriction
The system restricts calls made from Multiple Extension Appearance keys.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 371
Features D-M
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Operation
To answer a call ringing a Multiple Directory Number:
1.
Press flashing Multiple Directory Number key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1036 + ext.).
To place a call to a Multiple Directory Number (including a Call Coverage key):
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial Multiple Directory Number number or press Multiple Directory Number key.
To set up a Call Coverage Key:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 851.
3.
Press the programmable key you want to program.
The previously programmed entry displays.
4.
Dial 1036.
5.
Dial the number of the extension you want to cover and press HOLD.
You see the SET RING option.
6.
Dial 1, 2, 3 and 4 to set the ringing for the Day, Night, Midnight and Rest modes repsectively.
You can make flexible entries. For example, you can have ringing in the day and night modes
and turn off ringing for the midnight and rest modes.
The ringing mode (delayed or immediate) follows system programming.
7.
Press SPK to hang up.
372 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Music on Hold
Music on Hold
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Music on Hold (MOH) sends music to calls on Hold and parked calls. The music lets the caller know that his call is
waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the system provides silence to these types of calls. The Music on
Hold source can be internal (synthesized) or from a customer-provided music source (i.e., tape deck, receiver, etc.).
The customer-provided source can connect to an ACI port or to a connector on the CPRU PCB. There is a switch on
the CPRU PCB to determine which CPRU source is active: the connector or the internally synthesized music.
The method the system uses to provide Music on Hold (and Background Music) depends on the setting of a
jumper on the CPRU PCB, how the music source is connected and the setting in program 0914. The table below
shows how these settings interact.
BGM/MOH Operation Matrix
To get this result . . .
Set these options . . .
CPRU "S" Jumper
INT
EXT
External Music Source
MOH (1&2)
BGM (5&6)
Program
0914
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
None
Background Music
None
✔
255
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
Internally synthesized 1
Background Music
None
✔
254
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
None
Background Music
None
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
From connected music source
Background Music
From connected music source
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
Internally synthesized 1
Background Music
None
✔
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
✔
255
✔
✔
255
254
FEATURES 373
Features D-M
Music on Hold
BGM/MOH Operation Matrix
To get this result . . .
Set these options . . .
CPRU "S" Jumper
INT
MOH for Intercom Calls
Internally synthesized 1
MOH for Trunk Calls
Internally synthesized 1
Background Music
From connected music source
EXT
MOH (1&2)
✔
BGM (5&6)
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
From connected music source
MOH for Trunk Calls
From connected music source
Background Music
None
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
None
MOH for Trunk Calls
None
Background Music
From connected music source
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
From connected music source
MOH for Trunk Calls
None
Background Music
None
✔
MOH for Intercom Calls
None
MOH for Trunk Calls
From connected music source
Background Music
From connected music source
✔
1
External Music Source
✔1
Program
0914
254
254
✔
✔1
254
255
✔
255
If Program 0302, Item 1: MOH Tone is set to ’0’, Music on Hold will not be provided.
Note:
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations, if radio, television broadcasts or music other
than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music on Hold feature of telecommunications
systems. Nitsuko America hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled (internally synthesized).
374 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features D-M
Music on Hold
Programming
Start
In 0914, enter
option 254 for
selected trunk.
Set Music on
Hold switch on
CPRU to EXT.
CPRU (Internal
or External)
External
Terminals
Should MOH use ACI
or CPRU (internal or
external) for source?
ACI
In 1301, set ACI
software port assigned
above to input(1).
Is CPRU source
internally
synthesized or from
CPRU terminals?
No need to change 0302
- entering an ACI
software port in 0914
overrides it.
Internal
In 0302 Item 1,
enter 1 for
external.
If you enter 0,
MOH doesn't
occur.
In 0914, assign ACI
software port (1-192 in
384i, 1-6 in 124i) to
selected trunk.
Set Music on Hold
switch on CPRU to INT.
Stop
Stop
In 0302 Item 1, enter
1 (for Minuet in G) or
2 (for Nocturne).
Should extension user be
able to change the Music
on Hold tone (by dialing
Service Code 881)?
Yes
In 0202, set the Music on
Hold/Time Date Password
(normally 0000).
No
In 0406 Item 45, enter
0 to disable dialing
Service Code 881.
In 0406 Item 45, enter
1 to enable dialing
Service Code 881.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 375
Features D-M
Music on Hold
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0202 - Setting User Passwords, Item 1: Password Setting for Time and Date and Setting and Chang➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
ing the Music on Hold Tone
Set the password a user must dial before changing the MOH tone (four digits).
0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup, Item 1: Music on Hold Tone
Set the Music on Hold selection. The options are 0 (no tone), 1 (synthesized Minuet in G), and 2 (synthesized Nocturne).
0406 - COS Options, Item 45: Changing the Music on Hold Tone
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to change the Music on
Hold tone (Service Code 881).
0914 - Setting the Music on Hold Source
Set the Music on Hold source (1-192=384i ACI software port, 1-6=124i software port, 254=CPRU MOH
terminals).
1005 -Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1301 - ACI Port Function
If ACI software port is designated for MOH in 0914, set port’s function to 1 (input).
Note: When connecting your music source to an ACI port, additional ACI programming is required. Refer to the
"Analog Communications Interface (ACI)" feature for the specifics on setting up a 3-ACI Module
Related Features
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot change the Music on Hold tone.
Operation
To change the Music on Hold tone:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 881.
3.
Dial the password (normally 0000).
4.
Dial Music on Hold tone code:
0
No tone
1
Minuet
2
Nocturne
5.
Press SPK to hang up.
376 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Name Storing
Name
Storing
Features
N-Z
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Extensions and trunks can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a keyset’s display
when the user places or answers calls. Extension and trunk names make it easier to identify callers. The user
does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls. A name can be up to 10 digits long, consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and spaces.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowcharts on the following pages.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options, Item 37: Trunk Name Display, Seizing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunk’s name/number
when the user seizes the trunk (incoming or outgoing).
0406 - COS Options, Item 38: Trunk Name Display, Incoming
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunk’s name/number
when the trunk is ringing.
0406 - COS Options, Item 39: Extension Name Display, Answer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of the incoming Intercom callers name/number after the extension user answers the call. (The user answers by pressing SPK or lifting
the handset.)
0406 - COS Options, Item 40: Intercom Name Display, Incoming
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of the incoming Intercom
caller’s name/number. This is for the pre-answer and Handsfree Answerback display.
0406 - COS Options, Item 85: Extension Names
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to program their name.
0502 - Extension Numbers and Names
Program names for system extensions (ports 001-256).
0903 - Trunk Names
Program names for system trunks (001-128).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 377
Features N-Z
Name Storing
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0903, do not assign
names to trunk ports
001-128.
No
No
In 0406 Item 37,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 38,
enter 0.
In 0502, do not assign
names to extension
ports 001-256.
No
No
No
In 0405 Item 85,
enter 0.
Do you want trunks
to have names?
Yes
Do you want a trunk's
name/number displayed
when a user seizes the
trunk?
Yes
Do you want a trunk's
name to display while it
is ringing?
Yes
Do you want
extensions to have
names?
Do you want an
extension to be able to
program their own
name?
In 0903, assign
names to trunk ports
001-128.
In 0406 Item 37,
enter 1.
Yes
In 0406 Item 38,
enter 1.
In 0502, assign
names to extension
ports 001-256.
Yes
In 0406 Item 85,
enter 1.
Continued
on next
page.
378 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Name Storing
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Answering the call means the called user
presses SPK or lifts the handset.
In 0406 Item 39
enter 0.
After a user answers
an Intercom call,
should caller's
name/number
display?
No
Yes
In 0406 Item 39,
enter 1.
This is for the pre-answer and
Handsfree Answerback display.
In 0406 Item 40,
enter 0.
No
Should extension user see
the name/number of an
incoming Intercom caller
before answering the call?
Yes
In 0406 Item 40,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 379
Features N-Z
Name Storing
Related Features
Directory Dialing
Super Display Telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing.
Single Line Telephones
Single line extensions cannot program names.
Operation
To program your extension’s name:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 800
3.
Enter name (see below).
Your name can be up to 10 digits maximum. When entering a letter, press DND to toggle between upper and lower case.
When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as
shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the
first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to
enter a C, press DSS1 three times.
DSS1 = A-D
DSS2 = E-H
DSS3 = I-L
DSS4 = M-P
DSS5 = Q-T
DSS6 = U-Z
DSS7 = -- (hyphen)
DSS8 = - (space)
DSS9 = Extended ASCII
characters
DSS10 = Punctuation marks
CHECK saves text entry after
you select it.
Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and *
CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e.,
backspaces over previous entries)
Note:
You don’t have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after
your last entry.
4.
5.
380 FEATURES
Press HOLD.
Press SPK to hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Networking
Networking
Description
124i ☞
Not Available.
384i ☞
Available — requires system
software 3.07.15 or higher.
Use the built in networking feature to integrate multiple phone systems into a single "virtual" communications
system. Interconnected with T1 tie lines, each phone system becomes a node on the network that can communicate with any other phone system node.
•
•
Centralized Network Attendant
Centralized Network Attendant allows multiple networked systems to share a single centralized attendant. This centralized attendant can receive calls from and transfer calls to any destination in any network
node. Unanswered calls recall and route as if they were part of a single, much larger system.
Shared (Common) Voice Mail (NVM-2000)
With Shared Voice Mail, a single NVM-2000 (version 7.0 or higher) can handle the voice messaging requirements of an entrie network. Many powerful Voice Mail integration features are available over the
network, including:
- Voice Mail key operation (including message lamps)
- Call Forward to Voice Mail
- Personal Answering Machine Emulation
- Conversation Record
Optionally, up to four Voice Mail systems can share the voice messaging requirements of an entire network. Each of the Voice Mail systems is dedicated to a portion of the total network and is responsible
only for supporting that portion
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 381
Features N-Z
Networking
Description (Cont’d)
•
Flexible Network Routing
Use network routes to set up "single channel" networking between many separate systems — or use multiple networking channels per system for greater network performance. Data tables in the system
program define the routing for each extension in each network node. These tables are easily customized
to meet the requirements of each networking configuration.
For additional information on Networking, refer to the 384i Networking Guide (P/N 92000LAN**).
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the 384i Networking Guide (P/N 92000LAN**).
Related Features
Refer to the 384i Networking Guide (P/N 92000LAN**).
Operation
Refer to the 384i Networking Guide (P/N 92000LAN**).
382 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Night Service
Night Service
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Night Service lets system users activate one of the Night Service modes. Night Service redirects calls to their
night mode destination, as determined by Assigned and Universal Night Answer programming. A user typically
activates Night Service after normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls. The
system also provides external contacts to enable Night Service.
There are four Night Service modes:
Day Mode -for normal working hours
•
Night Mode - after hours (usually evening)
•
Midnight Mode - late at night to early in the morning
•
Rest mode - interval usually used for lunch
•
Assigned Night Answer (ANA)
With Assigned Night Answer, Night Service has calls ring extensions directly. Assigned Night Answer provides
an answering point for Night Service calls. For certain applications, this may be more appropriate than Universal Night Answer. For example, you could program trunks to ring the security station telephone during off hours.
Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers. With UNA, an employee
can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key or use "Universal Answer" to pick up the call. For more on
setting up Universal Answer, turn to the "Central Office Calls, Answering" feature.
Conditions
The CPRU PCB has connections for a Night Mode switch. During installation, you connect a mechanical
switch to these contacts to provide an additional method of Night Mode switching. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details.
Default Setting
System is always in the Day Mode.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 383
Features N-Z
Night Service
Programming
For example:
Use Ring Group 120 for
Night Mode, 121 for
Midnight Mode and 122
for Rest Mode.
Start
In 0910, assign trunks to Ring
Groups that you won't use for
night ringing. Trunks that ring
the same way should be in the
same Ring Group.
No
Should system have
Assigned Night
Answer (ANA)?
Yes
In 0910, assign trunks to
Ring Groups for night ringing.
Trunks that ring the same
way at night should be in the
same Ring Group.
In 0909, select night ringing
Ring Group (e.g., 120), assign
extensions to that group and
make them ring (1).
In 1605, do not assign
trunks to External
Paging zones.
No
Should system have
Universal Night
Answer (UNA)?
Refer also to the
External Paging
Feature.
In 1006, assign function
keys to the UNA trunks
(0001-0128).
Yes
In 0911, make sure
UNA trunks are in
Access Maps that allow
incoming access.
In 1605, indicate which
trunks should ring External
Paging zones.
In 0912, make sure the
Access Maps the
extension uses at night
allow incoming access for
the UNA trunks.
Continued
on next
page.
384 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Night Service
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0802, assign
entry 0 to each
day of the week.
No
Should system have
Automatic Night
Service switching?
Yes
In 0801, set the
Automatic Night Service
patterns (time periods).
IN 0802, assign the
patterns set in 0801 to
days of the week.
In 0401:2, enter 0.
In 0803, assign one of
the Automatic Night
Service patterns to
holidays.
In 0401:1, enter 0.
In 0406:2, enter 0.
No
No
Should system have
Manual Night
Service switching?
Should extensions be able
to switch the Night Mode
(i.e., dial Service Code 818
or press function key)?
Yes
Yes
In 0401:1, enter 1.
In 0406:2, enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 385
Features N-Z
Night Service
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Should extension
user be able to
change the Night
Mode by pressing a
function key?
Yes
For Day Mode switching, in
1006 assign a function key
code 1039 (plus password).
No
In 1006, do not assign
a function key to codes
1039-1042.
For Night Mode switching, in
1006 assign a function key
code 1040 (plus password).
For Midnight Mode switching,
in 1006 assign a function key
code 1041 (plus password).
For Rest Mode switching, in
1006 assign a function key
code 1042 (plus password).
The default password
is 0000.
In 0202 Item 2, set the
Night Service Password.
The system requires the password
for function keys 1039-1042 and
Service code 818.
Stop
386 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Night Service
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0202 - Setting User Passwords, Item 2: Night Service Password
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the password an extension user must dial before activating Night Service (four digits).
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 1: Manual Night Service Enable
Allow (1) or prevent (0) tenant group members from activating Night Service.
0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B), Item 3: Night Mode Switch Operating Mode
Set the function of the CPU Night Service Mode switch (Not Used = 0, Day Mode = 1, Night Mode = 2,
Midnight Mode = 3 and Rest Mode = 4).
0406 - COS Options, Item 2: Manual Night Mode Switching
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to manually switch the
Night Mode (Service Code 818).
0801 - Automatic Night Service Patterns
Configure the Automatic Night Service patterns. Pattern 1 should begin at 00:00 (midnight).
0802 - Weekly Night Service Switching
Assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns programmed in 0801 to each day of the week.
0803 - Holiday Night Service Switching
Assign on of the five Automatic Night Service patterns to holidays.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
To have trunks ring extension during the different Night Service modes (for ANA), assign extensions to
Ring Groups (1-128). For each extension in the Ring Group, indicate if trunk should ring (1) or not ring
(0).
0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
To have trunks ring extensions for ANA, assign trunks to Ring Groups. You make a different entry for
each Night Service mode.
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
To allow for UNA answering, set up the trunk Access Maps (1-128). For UNA, extension must have incoming access to trunk ringing the External Paging speakers.
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
For UNA answering, assign trunk Access Maps (1-128) to extensions. Make one entry for each Night
Service mode.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programmable Function Keys
Assign Night Service function keys to extensions:
Day Mode = 1039
Night Mode = 1040
Midnight Mode = 1041
Rest Mode = 1042
Assign trunks to function keys (codes 0001-0128).
1605 - Universal Night Answer
For each Night Service Mode, assign which trunks should ring which External Paging Zones.
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing/Ring Groups
There are separate Access Map and Ring Group programming entries for each Night Service mode (Day,
Night, Midnight, and Rest). Also, "Universal Answer" allows an extension user to pick up a UNA call.
Paging, External
With Universal Night Answer, outside calls can ring External Paging Zones.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify activating Night Service.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 387
Features N-Z
Night Service
Operation
To activate Night Service by dialing codes:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 818.
3.
Dial Night Service Password (normally 0000).
4.
Dial Night Service code:
0
Day mode
1
Night mode
2
Midnight mode
3
Rest mode
5.
Press SPK to hang up.
To activate Night Service by using programmable keys:
1.
Press Night Service key (see below).
Day mode key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1039 + password)
Night mode key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1040 + password)
Midnight mode key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1041 + password)
Rest mode key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1042 + password)
388 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
telemanuals.com
Features N-Z
Off Hook Signaling
Off Hook Signaling
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Off Hook Signaling Enhancements
are not available.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Off Hook Signaling Enhancements
require system software 3.07.24 or
higher.
When a user calls an extension busy on a call, they can send an off hook signal indicating they are trying to get
through. The signal is either off hook ringing or a voice announcement over the idle (second ) line appearance.
Off Hook Signaling helps important callers get through, without waiting in line for the called extension to become free. Note that a voice announcement over the idle (second) line appearance can only occur if the called extension is busy on a handset call.
The system provides the following Off Hook Signaling options:
Called Extension Block
The called extension’s Class of Service may block incoming Off Hook Signaling attempts. This is beneficial to users that don’t want interruptions while on a call.
Automatic Signaling
•
Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Off Hook Signaling. This option is useful to receptionists, operators and others that must quickly process calls. This is set in the calling extension’s Class of
Service.
Manual Signaling
•
After reaching a busy extension, manual signaling gives the caller the choice of using Off Hook Signaling or activating other features. Extension’s without automatic signaling have manual signaling.
Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode
•
The Off Hook Signal can be idle channel ringing, a single beep in the handset, two beeps in the speaker
or a voice announcement — at the callers discretion.
•
Off Hook Signaling Enhancements
The system enhances Off Hook Signaling with the following four Class of Service options:
DID Off Hook Ringing
•
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s Off Hook Signaling for incoming DID calls. If enabled, Off Hook Signaling occurs normally. If disabled, DID calls queue behind the extension’s busy line
appearance and the user gets no Off Hook Signaling indication. The second line appearance stays idle.
The DID caller hears ringback tone while their call waits.
DID Call Waiting
•
An extension can optionally have a visual indication for waiting DID calls. If DID Call Waiting is enabled, the busy user will see a flashing line/loop key for the incoming incoming DID call. If disabled, the
user will have no indication that a DID call is waiting. This option is used when DID Off Hook Ringing
is also disabled (see above).
Block Manual Off Hook Signals
•
This option enables/disables a busy extension’s ability to block off hook signals manually sent from a coworker. If disabled (not blocked), callers can dial 7 at busy or busy/ring to signal the extension. If enabled (blocked), nothing happens when the caller dials 7 to off hook signal.
Block Camp On
•
If an extension has Block Camp On enabled, callers to the extension cannot dial 2 to Camp On after hearing busy or busy/ring. If the extension has Block Camp On disabled, callers are not prevented from dialing 2 to Camp on after hearing busy or busy/ring.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 389
Features N-Z
Off Hook Signaling
Description (Cont’d)
Conditions
(A.) For extensions with Handsfree . . .
If Off Hook Signaling voice-announces, the called extension user can use Handsfree Answerback to respond. The telephone’s Handsfree microphone picks up their voice. The initial handset call continues uninterrupted.
(B.) For extensions without Handsfree . . .
The called extension receives Off Hook Signaling ring. The called extension user must first place their initial call on Hold before they can respond. Handsfree Answerback is not available.
(C.) While busy on a handset call, 926000 Series 16 button telephones cannot receive off-hook voice announcements on the idle second channel.
Default Setting
Enabled (voice-announce).
390 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Off Hook Signaling
Programming
Start
An extension user can dial Service
Code 892 to override this setting.
An extension user can dial Service
Code 893 to override this setting.
In Program 0401
Item 11, enter 1.
Ring
Should Off-Hook
Signals ring or voice
announce?
Voice
Announce
In Program 0401
Item 11, enter 0.
Set 0406 Item 5
to 0.
No
Should extension be
able to receive Off
Hook Signals?
Yes
Set 0406 Item 5
to 1.
Automatically
Set 0406 Item 6
to 1.
Set 0406 Item 6
to 0.
Manually
Should extension send
Off Hook Signals
manually or
automatically?
Set 0419:12 to 0.
No
Should an extension be
able to receive Off Hook
Signals from DID callers?
Yes
Set 0419:12 to 1.
Set 0419:13 to 1.
No
Should callers be able
to dial 7 to signal the
busy extension?
Set 0419:14 to 1.
No
Should callers be able
to dial 2 to Camp On to
the busy extension?
Yes
Set 0419:14 to 0.
Set 0419:15 to 0.
Light
Steady
When DID calls
queue, should line key
flash or light steady?
Flash
Set 0419:15 to 1.
In 1005, assign a Class
of Service to an
extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Yes
Set 0419:13 to 0.
(This option requires
that 0406:6 = 0.)
Continued
on next
page.
FEATURES 391
Features N-Z
Off Hook Signaling
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Is the interval between
Off Hook Signaling alerts
(normally 10 seconds)
adequate?
No
In Program 0405 Item
4, change the Call
Waiting Tone interval.
Yes
Should extension
have one-button
sending for Off
Hook Signaling?
Yes
In Program 1006, assign
a function key for Off
Hook Signaling (code
1018).
No
In Program 1008 Item 5,
enter 2. The setting of
0401:11 toggles
between normal ringing
and Voice Announce.
Normal
Should Off Hook Signaling
alert extension with normal
ringing, muted ringing, no
ringing, one beep in handset or
two beeps over speaker?
Two beeps
in speaker
None
In Program 1008
Item 5, enter 1.
One beep
in handset
Muted
In Program 1008
Item 5, enter 3.
In Program 1008
Item 5, enter 4.
In Program 1008 Item 5,
enter 0. The setting of
0401:11 toggles
between muted ringing
and Voice Announce.
Stop
392 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Off Hook Signaling
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 11: Off Hook Signaling Mode
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
For each tenant, enter 1 to have Off Hook Signals ring the called extension. Enter 0 to have Off Hook
Signals voice-announce. An extension user can override these settings by dialing Service Code 892 (for
voice-announce) or 893 (for ring).
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 4: Call Waiting Tone Timer
Use this timer to set the interval between Off Hook Signaling alerts.
0406 - COS Options, Item 5: Off Hook Signaling Receive
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to receive Off Hook
Signaling.
0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Automatic Off Hook Signaling
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to automatically send
Off Hook Signals to an extension busy on a handset call.
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 12: DID Off Hook Ringing
Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s Off Hook Signaling for incoming DID calls. If
enabled (1), Off Hook Signaling occurs normally. If disabled (0), DID calls queue behind the extension’s
busy line appearance and the user gets no Off Hook Signaling indication. The second line appearance
stays idle. The DID caller hears ringback tone while their call waits.
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 13: Block Manual Off Hook Signaling
This option enables (1) or disables a busy extension’s ability to block off hook signals manually sent
from a co-worker. If disabled (not blocked), callers can dial 7 at busy or busy/ring to signal the extension.
If enabled (blocked), nothing happens when the caller dials 7 to off hook signal.
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 14: Block Camp On
If an extension has Block Camp On enabled (1), callers to the extension cannot dial 2 to Camp On after
hearing busy or busy/ring. If the extension has Block Camp On disabled (0), callers are not prevented
from dialing 2 to Camp on after hearing busy or busy/ring.
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 15: DID Call Waiting
An extension can optionally have a visual indication for waiting DID calls. If DID Call Waiting is enabled (1), the busy user will see a flashing line/loop key for the incoming incoming DID call. If disabled
(0), the user will have no indication that a DID call is waiting. This option is used when DID Off Hook
Ringing is also disabled (see Program 0419 Item 12 above).
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Off Hook Signaling (code 1018).
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 5: Off Hook Ringing
For each extension, set Off Hook Ringing type: 0 (muted), 1 (none) or 2 (normal), two beeps in the
speaker (3) or one beep in the handset (4).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 393
Features N-Z
Off Hook Signaling
Related Features
Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback
An extension user cannot Camp On to a busy extension or leave a Callback if Off Hook Signaling has already gone through. The Off Hook Signaling Enhancements allow an extension to block a caller’s ability
to dial 2 to Camp on.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Two of the Off Hook Signaling Enhancements improve the handling of DID calls to a busy extension.
Handsfree and Monitor
You cannot send Off Hook Signals to an extension busy on a Handsfree (Speakerphone) call. The called
extension’s idle CALL key flashes fast, with no ringing.
Hotline/Reverse Voice Over
The setting of Program 0406 Item 6 affects the BLF display for Hotline and Reverse Voice Over. Refer
to these features for additional information.
Intercom
You cannot send Off Hook Signals to an extension that is already receiving a voice announcement.
One-Touch Calling
An extension user can store the Off Hook Signaling Service Code (7) under a One-Touch Key to provide
quick Off Hook Signaling access.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify sending Off Hook Signals.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones can only send Off Hook Signals.
Operation
To send Off Hook Signals to an extension busy on a call:
Your extension may send Off Hook Signals automatically.
1.
Dial 7.
OR
Press Off Hook Signaling key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1018).
You hear ringback.
To have your call voice-announce, dial 1.
To have Off Hook Signals ring your extension:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 893.
To answer the signal, you must first hang up your current call or place it on Hold.
To have Off Hook Signals voice-announce at your extension:
You can only receive voice-announce while you are busy on a handset call.
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 892.
If your extension has Handsfree, you can respond to an off-hook voice announcement by using
Handsfree Answerback. If your extension doesn’t have Handsfree, you must first place your initial
call on Hold before responding.
394 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Calling
Description
124i ☞
-
Available
Entering names at a keyset requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Storing a Flash command requires
system software Base 2.13 or
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i. ☞
-
Available
Entering names at a keyset requires
system software 3.06.02 or higher.
Storing a Flash command requires
system software 3.06.14 or higher.
One-Touch Calling gives a keyset user one button access to extensions, trunks and selected system features.
This saves users time when accessing co-workers, clients and features they use most often. Instead of dialing a
series of codes, the user need only press the One-Touch Key. An extension user can have One-Touch Keys programmed for:
Direct Station Selection - one button access to extensions
•
Personal Speed Dial - one button access to stored numbers (up to 25 digits long)
•
Abbreviated Dialing - one button access to stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers
•
Trunk Calling - one button access to trunks or trunk groups
•
Service Codes - one button access to specific Service Codes
•
6
7
8
9
10
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10
92
0
-1
55
i
1
2
3
4
5
An extension user can chain dial with One-Touch Keys. For example, a user can store the number for a company’s Automated Attendant in key 1 and employee extension numbers in keys 2-5. The user presses key 1 to
call the company, then one of keys 2-5 to ring the employee want to speak with.
An extension user or system administrator can optionally store a Flash command under a One-Touch Key. This
is helpful for One-Touch Keys used as Personal Speed Dial bins. The stored Flash may be helpful to access features of the connected telco, PBX or Centrex.
One-Touch Calling is the first level of operation of One-Touch Keys. In other words, One-Touch Calling occurs
when the user just presses the key. There is a second level of One-Touch Key operation called One-Touch Serial
Calling. The user accesses these functions by first pressing the Serial Operation key. Refer to the One-Touch Serial Operation feature.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 395
Features N-Z
One-Touch Calling
Description (Cont’d)
Conditions
One-Touch Keys do not provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF).
Default Setting
One-Touch Keys have no assigned functions.
Programming
➣ 1007 - Programming One-Touch Keys
Set the functions of an extension’s One-Touch Keys. An extension user can also program their OneTouch Keys.
Related Features
One-Touch Serial Operation
An extension user can use One-Touch Keys to store a series of operations.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys can also give an extension user one-touch access to selected system features.
Transfer
When transferring a call, an extension user can press a Once-Touch Key instead of dialing the extension
number.
Operation
When entering names in the procedures below, refer
to this chart. Names can be up to 8 digits long.
When entering names, use the One-Touch Keys and dial pad keys as
shown below. When using the DSS keys, press the key once for the
first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to
enter a C, press DSS1 three times. Press DND to toggle between
upper and lower case letters.
DSS1 = A-D
DSS2 = E-H
DSS3 = I-L
DSS4 = M-P
DSS5 = Q-T
DSS6 = U-Z
DSS7 = -- (hyphen)
DSS8 = - (space)
DSS9 = Extended ASCII
characters
DSS10 = Punctuation marks
CHECK saves text entry after
you select it.
Dial pad digits = 1-9, # and *
CONF (TRF) deletes entries (i.e.,
backspaces over previous entries)
Note:
You don’t have to press CHECK after numerical entries or after
your last entry.
396 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
One-Touch Calling
Operation (Cont’d)
Direct Station Selection
To program a One-Touch Key for Direct Station Selection (extension) calling:
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2.
Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3.
Dial extension number you want assigned to that key.
In 124i, skip to step 7. In 384i, entering names requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
4.
Press HOLD.
5.
Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
6.
Press HOLD.
7.
Press SPK to hang up.
Personal Speed Dial
To program a One-Touch Key for Personal Speed Dial:
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2.
Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3.
Dial general trunk access code (9).
OR
Dial Specific Trunk Service Code (#9) plus the trunk number (e.g., 005).
OR
Dial Trunk Group Service Code (804) plus the trunk group number (e.g., 1).
4.
Dial number you want to store.
The total of the digits stored in steps 3 and 4 cannot exceed 24. In 124i, skip to step 8. In 384i,
entering names requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
To store a Flash command, press the FLASH key.
5.
Press HOLD.
6.
Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
7.
Press HOLD.
8.
Press SPK to hang up.
To enter a pause, press MIC.
To program a One-Touch Key for Personal Speed Dial (if your phone doesn’t have One-Touch keys):
Use this procedure for Digital Single Line (DSL) sets, analog single line (SLT) sets and older 16-button keysets without One-Touch keys.
1.
(Keyset) Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
OR
(DSL or SLT) Lift handset.
2.
Dial 855
3.
Dial the Personal Abbreviated Dialing bin (0-9).
Bins 1-9 correspond to One-Touch keys 1-9; bin 0 corresponds to One-Touch key 10.
4.
Dial the number you want to store.
To store a Flash, press the FLASH key.
5.
(Keyset) SPK to hang up.
OR
(DSL or SLT) Hang up.
To dial the stored number: Call (or lift handset) + #7 + bin number (0-9).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 397
Features N-Z
One-Touch Calling
Operation (Cont’d)
Abbreviated Dialing
To program a One-Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing:
6.
Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
7.
Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
8.
Dial #2 to store a Common Abbreviated Dialing number.
OR
Dial #4 to store a Group Abbreviated Dialing number.
9.
Dial Abbreviated Dialing number storage code (e.g., 001).
In 124i, skip to step 8. In 384i, entering names requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
10.
Press HOLD.
11.
Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
12.
Press HOLD.
13.
Press SPK to hang up.
Central Office Calls, Placing (Trunk Calling)
To program a One-Touch Key for trunk calling:
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2.
Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3.
Dial general trunk access code ( 9).
OR
Dial Specific Trunk Service Code (#9) plus the trunk number (e.g., 005).
OR
Dial Trunk Group Service Code (804) plus the trunk group number (e.g., 1).
In 124i, skip to step 7. In 384i, entering names requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
4.
Press HOLD.
5.
Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
6.
Press HOLD.
7.
Press SPK to hang up.
Service Codes
To assign a Service Code to a One-Touch Key:
This lets you make your own set of one-touch feature keys.
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2.
Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3.
Dial Service Code you want stored.
For example, if you want a One-Touch Key to automatically clear your Last Number Redial, enter 876. In 124i, skip to step 8. In 384i, entering names requires system software 3.06.02 or higher.
4.
Press HOLD.
5.
Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
6.
Press HOLD.
7.
Press SPK to hang up.
Using One-Touch Keys
To use a One-Touch Key:
1.
Press One-Touch Key.
398 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
One-Touch Calling
Operation (Cont’d)
Chaining One-Touch Keys
To chain One-Touch Keys:
2.
Press first One-Touch Key.
Let the stored function dial out.
3.
Press another One-Touch Key.
The stored digits dial out.
Checking One-Touch Keys
To check the function of a One-Touch Key:
1.
Press CHECK.
2.
Press One-Touch Key.
The stored function displays.
Repeat this step to check additional keys. If you cannot see the entire number stored, dial *.
3.
Press CLEAR.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 399
Features N-Z
One-Touch Serial Operation
One-Touch Serial Operation
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
An extension user can have One-Touch Serial Operation store a series of feature steps under a One-Touch Key.
This simplifies extension operation by giving each user the ability to have customized feature keys. For example, an extension user could have a One-Touch Serial Operations Key automatically forward all their calls to extension 310. One-Touch Serial Operation can store up to 24 of the following operations:
Allowed Serial Operations
Service Codes
SPK, DND, VOLUME
Digits 0-9, # and*
▲ and VOLUME ▼,
One-Touch Keys
CALL, HOLD, DIAL,
Function Keys
FLASH, LND, CONF (TRF),
Pause (by pressing MIC)
CHECK, and CLEAR keys
One-Touch Serial Operation is the second level of operation of One-Touch Keys. The user must press the Serial
Operation key before the One-Touch Key. The first level of operation is One-Touch Calling, which occurs when
the user just presses the key. Refer to the One-Touch Calling feature.
Conditions
(A.) One-Touch Serial Operation does not provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF).
(B.) If a user stores a One-Touch Key as part of a serial operation, the system uses the first level (One-Touch
function). If there is a serial operation stored under the key selected, the system ignores it.
Default Setting
No Serial Operation key programmed.
•
Programming
➣ 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Serial Operation (code 1034).
Related Features
One-Touch Calling
Once-Touch Calling gives an extension user one button access to extensions, trunks and selected system
features.
Programmable Function Keys
One-Touch Serial Operation requires a uniquely programmed function key.
400 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
One-Touch Serial Operation
Operation
To store a series of operations in a One-Touch Key:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 852.
3.
Press the One-Touch Key you want to program.
4.
Enter the sequence of operations you want to store (up to 24 entries).
You can store the following operations:
Service Codes
Digits 0-9, # and *
SPK, DND, VOLUME ▲ and VOLUME ▼, CALL, HOLD
DIAL, FLASH, LND, CONF (TRF), CHECK, and
CLEAR keys
One-Touch Keys1
Function Keys
Pause (by pressing MIC)
5.
Press the Serial Operations key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1034)
6.
Press SPK to hang up.
To dial using One-Touch Serial Operation:
1.
Press Serial Operation key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1034).
2.
Press One-Touch Key.
The stored serial operation dials out.
Do not lift the handset or touch any keys on your telephone until
the One-Touch Serial Operation completes.
To check the serial operation stored in a One-Touch Key:
1.
Press CHECK.
2.
Press One-Touch Key twice.
The stored serial operation displays.
To check another key, press it twice before going to step 3.
If the stored number does not fit in the display, dial * to see the entire number.
3.
Press CLEAR.
To clear a One-Touch Serial Operation:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 852.
3.
Press One-Touch Key you want to delete.
4.
Press the Serial Operations key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1034).
5.
Press SPK to hang up.
1
If you store a One-Touch Key as part of a serial operation, the system uses first level (One-Touch) function.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 401
Features N-Z
Paging, External
Paging, External
Description
124i ☞
-
Available — eight External
Paging zones and eight alarm
circuits maximum.
Combined Paging is always available.
384i ☞
-
Available — eight External Paging
zones and 16 alarm circuits
maximum.
Combined Paging is available prior
to system software 3.04 only if a
PGDU is installed.
With External Paging, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment connected to external Paging
zones. When a user pages on of these external zones, the system broadcasts the announcement over the speakers. Like Internal Paging, External Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement
without calling each extension individually.
The system allows up to eight External Paging zones. Each zone requires a port on a PGDU PCB, with a maximum of four external paging circuits per PCB. You must have two PGDU PCBs to get all eight external zones.
In addition, each external zone has an associated relay contact. When a user pages to a zone, the corresponding
contact activates (closes). This provides for Paging amplifier control. Refer to the system hardware manual for
additional details.
Combined Paging
Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding external zone. For
example, you can Page your company’s warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time. Combined Paging is
available for Paging zones 1-8 and All Call. Refer to page 406 for more on setting up Combined Paging. In 384i system software 3.04 or higher and 124i, Combined Paging is available even without a PGDU PCB installed.
Conditions
External Paging requires PGDU PCBs and customer-provided Paging equipment.
Default Setting
External Paging functions once connected.
402 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Paging, External
Programming
Start
Refer to the system
Hardware Manual.
Stop
No
This is used for calling
the zones.
In 1604 Item 1,
enter 0.
In 1604 Item 2,
enter 0.
(384i Only) In 1604
Items 3-18, enter 0.
(124i Only) In 1604
Items 3-10, enter 0.
No
Should system have
External Paging?
Yes
(384i Only) In 1603, assign
an External Paging zone
(PGDU port 1-8) to a Tenant
Group (1-4).
In 1606, assign the External
Zones set in 1603 to External
Paging Groups 1-8.
Should two beeps (i.e.,
splash tone) precede
External Paging
announcements?
Set up PGDU PCB
for External Paging.
Yes
In 1604 Item 1,
enter 1.
No
When an External
Paging zone is idle,
should it broadcast
Background Music?
Yes
In 1604 Item 2,
enter 1.
No
When an External Paging
zone is idle, should it
broadcast alarms?
Yes
(384i Only) In 1604
Items 3-18, enter 1.
(124i Only) In 1604
Items 3-10, enter 1.
Continued
on next
page.
To have outside calls ring External
Paging at night, refer to the Night
Service feature and Program 1605.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 403
Features N-Z
Paging, External
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
If necessary, you can set up the
PGDU CODEC gain types in 0119.
After adjusting the Paging
amplifier and the PGDU
volume controls, is the
External Paging volume
adequate?
No
In 0120, select a different
CODEC gain type for the
PGDU ports.
Yes
Too short a setting can cut off
Pages in progress.
No
Is the Page duration
setting adequate?
In 0405 Item 18, adjust the
Page Announcement
Duration.
Yes
In 0406 Item 22,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to use External
Paging?
Yes
In 0406 Item 22,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, do not assign
function keys for External
Zone Paging (code 1004 +
zone) and External All Call
Paging (code 1005).
No
Should extension have
one-button access to
External Paging?
Yes
In 1006, assign function
keys for External Zone
Paging (code 1004 +
zone) and External All Call
Paging (code 1005).
Stop
404 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Paging, External
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0119 - External Page and Door Box CODEC Gain Type Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the five CODEC gain types for External Page and Door Box ports.
0120 - External Page and Door Box CODEC Gain Setup
Assign a CODEC gain type from Program 0119 to external Page and Door Box Ports.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 18: Page Announcement Duration
Set the maximum allowable duration for a Paging announcement.
0406 - COS Options, Item 22: External Paging
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use External Paging.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Paging zones (1004 + zone) and External All Call Page (1005)
(384i Only) 1603 - External Paging Zone Tenant
Assign a tenant (1-4) to each External Paging Zone (PGDU ports 1-8).
1604 - External Paging Zone Control
Assign options for each External Paging Zone (1-8): Splash Tone before Page (Item 1), Background Music when idle (Item 2) and Alarms 1-16 (Items 3-18).
1606 - External Paging Zone Group
Assign each External Paging Zone (1-8) to an External Paging Group (1-8) used for accessing the zone.
Related Features
Door Box
If a PGDU PCB has a Door Box connected, you cannot use that port for External Paging.
Night Service (Universal Night Answer)
To have outside calls ring External Paging Zones at night, refer to the Night Service feature and Program 1605.
Paging, Internal
Internal Paging broadcasts announcements to extensions in programmed Internal Paging Zones.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify External Paging operation.
Tenant Service
The system does not allow cross-tenant External Paging.
Operation
To Page into an external zone:
1.
Press External Paging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1004 + zone for External Paging zones or 1005 for External All Call Paging).
2.
Make Announcement.
OR
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
3.
Make Announcement.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 405
Features N-Z
Paging, Internal
Paging, Internal
Description
124i ☞
Available — eight Internal Paging
Groups (Zones).
384i ☞
Available — 32 Internal Paging
Groups (Zones).
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keyset users. The 384i system allows All
Call (all zone) Paging and up to 32 separate Internal Paging Zones in each tenant group. The 124i system allows
up to eight Internal Paging Zones. When a user makes a Zone Paging announcement, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions in the zone dialed. With All Call Paging, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions programmed to receive All Call Paging. An extension can be a member of only one Internal Paging
Zone. Like External Paging, Internal Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announcement
without calling each extension individually.
Combined Paging
Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding external zone.
For example, you can Page your company’s warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time. Combined
Paging is available for Paging zones 1-8 and All Call. Optionally, you can change the Combined Paging assignments. For example, you can associate External Paging Zone 1 with Internal Paging Zone 4. In 384i system software 3.04 or higher and 124i, Combined Paging is available even without a PGDU PCB installed.
Conditions
(A.) Internal Paging does not require a PGDU PCB.
(B.) You can assign any number of extensions to an Internal or All Call Paging Zone.
Default Setting
Enabled.
406 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Paging, Internal
Programming
Start
In 1601, assign an
extension to an Internal
Paging zone (1-8 in 124i,
01-32 in 384i).
In 1601, enter 0.
No
Should extension
be in an Internal
Paging zone?
In 1602, do not program
names for the Internal
Paging zones (1-8 in
124i, 01-32 in 384i).
Number
When Paging, should user
see a Paging zone name
or the zone number on the
telephone display?
Name
In 1602, program names
for the Internal Paging
zones (1-8 in 124i, 01-32
in 384i).
Should the tones that
precede an Internal Page
be normal volume, muted
or turned off?
Normal
IN 1607, enter 0 for
normal volume.
IN 1607, enter 2
for no beeps.
Turned
Off
The system mutes the tones
only if the user sets the
telephone volume control
switch to medium or high.
Yes
Muted
In 1607, enter 1 for
muted volume.
If the interval is too short, Internal Paging
announcements may be cut off.
Is the maximum duration
setting for Internal Paging
adequate?
No
In 0405 Item 18, set the Page
Announcement Duration.
Yes
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 407
Features N-Z
Paging, Internal
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0406 Item 52,
enter 0.
No
Should extension
be able to use
Internal Paging?
Yes
In 0406 Item 52,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Paging zones are 1-8 in
124i, 01-32 in 384i).
In 1006, do not assign
function keys for
Internal Paging zones
or Internal All Call.
No
Should extension
have one-button
Internal Zone Paging?
In 1608 for each
extension, enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to receive All
Call (All Zone)
Internal Paging?
In 1609, do not assign a
name to the All Call
Internal Paging Zone.
Standard
Display
When All Call Paging,
should extension paging
see All Call Paging name
or standard display?
Yes
Yes
Name
In 1006, assign function keys
for Internal Paging zones
(code 1006 + zone) and
Internal All Call (code 1076).
In 1608 for each
extension, enter 1.
In 1609, assign a
name to the All Call
Internal Paging Zone.
Enter 0 for All Call.
For the default assignments,
turn back to the chart under the
Default Setting heading.
Are the default Combined
Paging assignments
acceptable?
No
In 1610, for each External
Zone (Zone No.) enter a
corresponding Internal
Zone (Group No.).
Yes
Stop
408 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Paging, Internal
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 18: Page Announcement Duration
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the maximum allowable duration (0-64800 seconds) for a Paging announcement.
0406 - COS Options, Item 52: Internal Paging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to make an Internal Paging announcement.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Internal Paging Zones (code 1006 + 1-9 or 01-32) and Internal All Call Paging
(code 1076).
1601 - Internal Paging Zones
Assign extensions to Internal Paging Zones (1-9 or 01-32 in 384i, 108 in 124i).
1602 - Internal Paging Zone Names
Program names for the Internal Paging Zones.
1607 - Internal Paging Tone
For each Internal Paging Zone (1-9 or 01-32 in 384i and 1-8 in 124i), have normal (0), muted (1) or no
(2) Internal Paging alert tones. If enabled (0 or 1), extensions hear two beeps before Paging announcements. If disabled, the extensions hear the announcement without the beeps. Muted tones can occur only if the extension user sets the telephone volume control switch to medium or high.
1608 - All Call Internal Paging
Allow (1) or prevent (0) All Call Internal Paging for each extension. If allowed, extension can make and
receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If prevented, extension can only make All Call Internal
Paging announcements.
1609 - All Call Paging Zone Name
Assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging Zone. The name shows on the display of the telephone
making the announcement.
1610 - Combined Paging Assignments
For each External Paging Zone (1-8 and 0 for All Call), assign a corresponding Internal Zone for Combined Paging.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 409
Features N-Z
Paging, Internal
Related Features
Paging, External
An extension user can broadcast an announcement over an External Paging Zone.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Internal Paging operation.
Tenant Service
An extension user cannot broadcast an announcement into another tenant’s Paging Zones.
Operation
To make an Internal Page announcement:
Keyset
1.
Press the zone’s Internal Paging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1006 + 1-9 or 01-32 for zones, 1076 for
All Call).
OR
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number (0-9 or 00-32).
Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging.
OR
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
3.
Make announcement.
4.
Press SPK to hang up.
1.
2.
3.
4.
410 FEATURES
Single Line Telephone
Lift handset.
Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number (0-9 or 00-32).
Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging.
Dial *1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for Internal/External All Call).
Make announcement.
Hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Park
Park
Description
124i ☞
-
Available — 8 System Park orbits.
Personal Park requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Enhanced Dial Buffering not
implemented.
Splitting between calls on Park keys
not available.
384i ☞
-
Available — 32 System Park orbits.
Personal Park requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Enhanced Dial Buffering requires
system software 3.06.06 or higher.
Splitting between calls on Park keys
requires system software 3.06.14 or
higher.
Park places a call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up. There are two
types of Park: System and Personal. Use System Park when you want to have the call wait in a system orbit.
(The 384i system has up to 32 System Park Orbits; the 124i has eight.) Personal Park allows a user to Park a call
at their extension so a co-worker can pick it up. After parking a call in orbit, a user can Page the person receiving
the call and hang up. The paged party dials a code or presses a programmed Park key to pick up the call. With
Park, it is not necessary to locate a person to handle their calls. A call parked for too long will recall the extension that initially parked it.
Enhanced Dial Bufferingg
The system can optionally provide additional dial buffering. In certain high traffic sites, (e.g., with a high volume of dialed paging and parking), standard dial buffering can occasionally lose digits that a user dials. By enabling enhanced buffering, an additional level of buffering occurs which helps ensure that the system processes
all digits a user dials.
Splitting Between Parked Calls
A keyset user can retrieve two calls from Park Orbit (for which they don’t have line appearances) and easily split (alternate) between them. The split operation brings the calls to the user’s telephone and frees up the Park Orbits.
Conditions
(A.) An extension can park a call in any Park Orbit. However, an extension can only pick up a call Parked by
a member of its own Park group (see Program 1014).
(B.) When a DSL user parks a call, they must wait the Interdigit Time (normally 10 seconds) before trying to retrieve it.
Default Setting
Enabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 411
Features N-Z
Park
Programming
Start
In 124i, Park Groups are
1-8. In 384i, Park
Groups are 01-32.
An extension can only pick up
calls parked by members of
its own group.
In 1014, assign all
extensions to different
Park Groups.
No
Should extension
user be able to pick
up any parked call?
Yes
In 1014, assign all
extensions to the same
Park Group (e.g., 01).
In 1006, do not assign function
keys for Park Orbits (code
1033 + orbit number).
No
Should extension have
one-button access to
Park Orbits?
Yes
In 1006, assign function keys
for Park Orbits (code 1033 +
orbit number).
If the Park Hold Time is too short, calls recall
before the paged callers can pick them up.
Is the time that
unretrieved calls remain
parked adequate?
No
In 0405 item 66, change
the Park Hold Time.
No
In 0405 Item 27,
change the Hold Recall
Callback Time.
Enhanced
In 0419 Item 6, enter 1 for
each extension that
should use Enhanced
Dial Buffering.
Yes
If a parked call recalls,
does it ring the
extension that parked it
for an adequate time?
Yes
In 0419 Item 6, enter 0 for
each extension that
should use the standard
Dial Buffering.
Standard
(384i 3.06.06 or higher)
Should the system use
Enhanced Dial Buffering or
the standard dial buffering?
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Stop
412 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Park
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 27: Hold Recall Callback Time
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
A call left parked too long recalls the extension that initially parked it for this interval.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 66: Park Hold Time
Set the Park Hold Time (0-64800 seconds). A call left parked longer than this interval will recall the extension that initially parked it.
(384i Only) 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 6: Enhanced Dial Buffering
In an extension’s Class of Service, use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) Enhanced Dial Buffering. If disabled, the system uses the standard dial buffering.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a keys as a Park Orbit key (code 1033 plus Park orbit number [01-32]).
1014 - Park Group
Assign an extension to a Park Group (01-32). An extension can only pick up a call Parked by a member
of its own Park Group.
Related Features
Hold
A user can place a call in a temporary waiting state without putting it in orbit.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Park operation.
Operation
To Park a call in a system orbit:
You can Park Intercom or trunk calls.
1.
Press Park key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1033 + orbit).
The Park key LED lights.
If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.
2.
Use Paging to announce call.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
If not picked up, the call will recall to you.
OR
1.
At keyset, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, hookflash.
2.
Dial #6 and the Park orbit (01-32 in 384i, 1-8 in 124i).
If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.
3.
Use Paging to announce call.
4.
Press SPK to hang up.
If not picked up, the call will recall to you.
Note: The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time (Program 0405, Item 66). The call rings
the extension to which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program 0405, Item 27). The
call then goes on Hold for the Park Hold Time - then recalls again for the Hold Recall Callback
Time. The call continues to cycle between Hold and recall until the extension user answers the call
or the outside party hangs up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 413
Features N-Z
Park
Operation (Cont’d)
To pick up a parked call.
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press Park key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1033 + orbit).
OR
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial *6 and the Park orbit ( 01-32 in 384i, 1-8 in 124i).
To park a call at your extension:
1.
Do not hang up.
2.
Press HOLD and dial 857.
At an SLT, hookflash instead of pressing HOLD.
3.
Page your co-worker to pick up the call.
4.
Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).
If not picked up, the call will recall to you.
To pick up a call parked at an extension (yours or a co-worker’s):
If parked at your extension:
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial 857
OR
If parked at a co-worker’s extension
Press idle CALL key dial ** plus the co-worker’s extension number.
At an SLT/DSL, skip pressing CALL.
To split between two parked calls:
You must have Park Orbit keys for the parked in calls. In addition, your keyset cannot have line
keys defined for the parked calls.
The split operation is not available on 124i.
1.
Press Call1.
2.
Press Park Orbit key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1033 + orbit) to retrieve first parked call.
Call 1 lights steadily. This moves the first parked call to your phone.
3.
Press HOLD.
Call1 flashes.
4.
Press another Park Orbit key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1033 + orbit) to retrieve the second parked call.
Call2 lights steadily. This moves the second parked call to your phone.
5.
To switch between the two parked calls, press the flashing CALL key.
You can only split between two active calls. To retrieve and split with a new call, you must first
hang up one of the initial calls.
414 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
PBX Compatibility
PBX Compatibility
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
You can connect your phone system trunks to Centrex/PBX lines, rather than to telco trunk circuits. This makes
the trunk inputs into the system 500/2500 type compatible Centrex/PBX extensions, rather than telco circuits.
PBX Compatibility lets the system be a node (i.e., satellite) in a larger private telephone network. To place outside calls when the system is behind a PBX, phone system users must first dial the PBX’s trunk access code (usually 9).
The system provides the following PBX Compatibility options:
•
•
•
•
PBX Trunk Access Code Screening
The system can monitor the numbers users dial and screen for PBX trunk access codes. The system can
screen for up to 10 trunk access codes. The codes can be one or two digits long, consisting of the digits
0-9, # and *. (You use the FLASH key as a wild card entry.)
PBX Trunk Toll Restriction
The system can provide the Toll Restriction for the PBX trunk, or restriction can be handled solely by the
connected PBX. If the phone system provides the restriction, it restricts the digits dialed after the PBX
access code.
PBX Call Restriction
When the phone system does the Toll Restriction, it can further restrict users from dialing PBX extensions. In this case, the only valid numbers are those dialed after the PBX trunk access code. The only
PBX facility phone system users can access are the PBX’s outside trunks.
Automatic Pause
The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during manual dialing, Abbreviated Dialing, Last Number Redial, Repeat Redial and Save Number Dialed. This gives the connected
PBX time to set up its trunk circuits.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 415
Features N-Z
PBX Compatibility
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0114 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB) Timers, Item 9: Flash
If the CONF (TRF) key is set for transfer (in Program 0402, Item 2), use this program to set the duration
of the flash that occurs when a user presses the CONF (TRF) key.
0402 - Tenant Group Options, Part B, Item 2: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A)
To simplify PBX Transfer, assign the CONF (TRF) key for flash (entry 2). Set the duration of the flash in
Program 0114 Item 9.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 10: PBX Call Restriction
For each Toll Restriction Class, enter 1 to restrict calls on the PBX trunk to outside calls only. Enter 0 to
allow users to dial PBX extensions.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 9: PBX Access Code
Enter the system PBX access codes. The system can have up to 10 codes. A code can be one or two digits long. Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. Use the FLASH key as a "don’t care" digit.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 1 (Signaling Type), 2 (Ring Detect Type) and 3
(CODEC Gain Type)
Set these options for compatibility with the connected PBX.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 7-10: Behind PBX
For each PBX trunk port, enter 1. You make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 19: Toll Restriction
For each PBX trunk port, enable (0) or disable (1) Toll Restriction.
1004 - Toll Restriction
Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each extension.
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
The system automatically pauses after it finds a PBX access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin.
•
If Abbreviated Dialing routes a call to a PBX trunk, it does not automatically insert a PBX
•
access code. It outdials the digits just as they are stored.
Central Office Calls, Answering and Ring Groups
Users answer incoming calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks. All of the relevant access and Ring
Group programming applies. Refer to these features for more details.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Except for dialing the PBX access code, users place calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks. All of the
relevant access programming applies. Refer to the Central Office Calls Placing feature for more details.
Direct Inward Lines
You can have DILs route from the connected PBX. Users can access these trunks for outgoing PBX
calls. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply.
Direct Inward System Access
You can program incoming DISA trunks to be outgoing PBX trunks. All PBX Compatibility restrictions
and programming apply.
Flash
Flash may allow access to certain PBX features - like Transfer. Make sure you program Flash for compatibility with the connected PBX Optionally, the CONF (TRF) key on a keyset can be a Flash key (see
Program 0402 Item 2).
Pulse to Tone Conversion
The system does not provide automatic Pulse to Tone Conversion after outdialing the PBX trunk access
code.
416 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
PBX Compatibility
Programming (Cont’d)
In Program 0901 Items
7-10, designate PBX
trunks (entry 1).
Start
Make an entry for each
Night Service mode.
Check Program 0901 Items
1, 2 and 3 for compatibility
with the connected PBX.
In Program 0901 Item
19, enter 0 to enable
system Toll Restriction.
System
PBX
No
Should calls on the PBX
trunk be restricted to
outside calls only?
User must dial access code.
User cannot call PBX
extensions.
Yes
In Program 1004, assign
Toll Restriction Class to
extensions.
Do extension users
want one-button PBX
transfer?
In Program 0901 Item 19,
enter 1 to disable system
Toll Restriction.
Go to
A
In Program 0702 Item
9, enter the PBX
access codes.
Calls are unrestricted unless
user dials PBX access code.
In Program 0701 Item 10, enter
0. Restriction begins after user
dials PBX access code.
Should system or PBX
Toll Restrict trunk?
In Program 0701 Item 10, enter
1. Restriction begins after user
dials PBX access code.
A
Yes
In 0402 Item 2, assign the
TRFR key for flash (entry 2).
No
In 0114 Item 9, set the flash
duration.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 417
Features N-Z
PBX Compatibility
Related Features (Cont’d)
Toll Restriction
PBX trunks can follow normal system Toll Restriction. Refer to the programming chart on the previous
page.
Trunk Groups and Trunk Group Routing
Users can get outbound access to PBX trunks through Trunk Groups and/or Trunk Group Rout•
ing. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply.
If the system routes a call to a PBX trunk, it does not automatically insert the PBX access code. It
•
outdials the call just as the user dialed it.
Operation
To place a call over a PBX trunk:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial 804.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 804.
2.
Dial PBX trunk group number (1-9, 01-32 or 001-128).
3.
Dial PBX access code and number
OR
1.
(Keyset only) Press PBX trunk group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + group).
2.
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key and dial 9.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 9.
2.
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
1.
Press PBX Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011).
2.
Dial PBX access code and number
OR
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, Lift handset.
2.
Dial #9.
3.
Dial PBX trunk number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
4.
Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
1.
Press PBX trunk key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1 to 128).
2.
Dial PBX access code and number.
Note: In all cases above, Toll Restriction may prevent your call.
418 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
PC Attendant Console
PC Attendant Console
Description
124i ☞
Not available.
384i ☞
Consult your sales representative for
availability.
The PC Attendant Console is a Windows-based call processing workstation for the system’s "power users" — your attendants and receptionists. The intuitive graphical interface combined with tightly integrated keyboard and mouse operation ease the burden of handling high call volumes. Unique features of the PC Attendant include:
On-screen DSS/BLF display
•
Transfer by name
•
Incoming calls grouped by type
•
User programmable function keys
•
Tab metaphor internal, external , feature and function key directories
•
Text messaging
•
Multi-tasking operation
•
The PC Attendant Console is available in two configurations: turnkey (P/N 92590) and kit (P/N 92690). The
turnkey unit is a complete package that consists of a PC with monitor, mouse and keyboard with PC Attendant
software and hardware installed. The PC Attendant kit contains PC Attendant software and the PC Interface
PCB. You install the kit in a PC of your choosing which meets the following minimum requirements:
Windows 3.1 or higher
•
486/66 processor
•
8 MByte RAM
•
VGA video card with 2 MByte VRAM
•
8 MByte free disk space
•
1 full length ISA slot available on the PC’s mother board
•
Conditions
The PC Attendant is not currently available in 124i.
Default Setting
Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (P/N 92600ATT**).
Programming
Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (P/N 92600ATT**).
Related Features
Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (P/N 92600ATT**).
Operation
Refer to the PC Attendant Console User Guide (P/N 92600ATT**).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 419
Features N-Z
Prime Line Selection
Prime Line Selection
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Prime Line Selection allows an extension user to place or answer a call over a specific trunk by just lifting the
handset. The user does not have to first press keys or dial codes. This simplifies handling calls on a frequently
used trunk.
Prime Line Selection has the following two modes of operation:
•
•
Outgoing Prime Line Preference
Lifting the handset seizes the Prime Line. Outgoing Prime Line Preference would help a telemarketer
who always needs a free line to call prospective clients. The telemarketer just lifts the handset and the
Prime Line is always available. (Outgoing Prime Line Preference may be affected by Incoming Prime
Line Preference -- see Programming below.)
Incoming Prime Line Preference
When the Prime Line rings the extension, lifting the handset answers the call. Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer’s service
calls and then dispatch repair technicians. The dispatcher would have the assurance than whenever a customer calls in, the dispatcher just lifts the handset get their call. (Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize an idle line appearance -- see Programming below.)
Conditions
The Nitsuko 900 cordless telephone does not support Prime Line Preference.
Default Setting
Disabled.
420 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Prime Line Selection
Programming
Outgoing Prime Line Preference
Start
Is Prime
NoLine
trunk part of
current "dial 9"
group?
Outgoing Prime Line Selection is a customized
application of Trunk Group Routing.
No
Program Trunk Group Routing:
- Assign trunks to groups in 0905.
- Assign trunk groups to routes in 0906.
- Assign routes to extensions in 0907.
Yes
In Program 0911, assign each
Prime Line trunk to a different
access map.
In Program 0912, assign each
extension with a Prime Line to a
different access map.
No
Will Prime Line
trunk be shared
by more than one
extension?
This gives the system a maximum
of 128 outoing Prime Lines.
Yes
In Program 0912, assign more
than one extension to the same
access map.
In Program 0912, deny outbound
access to all trunks except the
Prime Line trunk.
In Program 1008 Item 3, enter 1.
If users phone is idle, they get dial tone
on the programmed Prime Line trunk
when they lift the handset.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 421
Features N-Z
Prime Line Selection
Programming (Cont’d)
Incoming Prime Line Preference
Start
In Program 0910, assign each
Prime Line trunk to a different
ring group.
In Program 0909, assign more
than one extension to the same
Prime Line ring group.
Yes
Should extensions
share Prime Line?
This gives the system a maximum of 128
incoming Prime Lines.
In Program 0909, assign each extension
with an incoming Prime Line to a
different Prime Line ring group.
No
Check other Program 0909 ring groups. If
extension rings for other ring group calls,
user can't indentify Prime Line calls.
In Program 0401 Item
13, enter 1.
Yes
Prime Line
In Program 0401 Item 8,
enter 1
When Prime Line rings,
should lifting the handset
answer the call?
No
With both Intercom and
Prime Line ringing, should
lifting the handset answer
Intercom or Prime Line?
Intercom
In Program 0401 Item
13, enter 0.
In Program 0401 Item 8,
enter 0.
Stop
422 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Prime Line Selection
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 8: Incoming Call Priority
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set incoming Prime Line preference. Enter 1 to answer ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to answer ringing Intercom call.
0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 13: Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls
Enter 1 if lifting the handset should answer ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to seize idle line appearance.
0905 - Trunk Groups
Assign Prime Line to trunk group for outgoing Prime Line selection. (Also see 0906 and 0907 below.)
0906 - Trunk Group Routing (Dial 9)
Set up outbound route for trunk group that contains the Prime Line. (Also see 0905 and 0907.)
0907 - Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Assign extension(s) to a Prime Line route (1-64) for outgoing Prime Line access.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extension(s) to a ring group (1-128) that consists of a Prime Line.
0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign a Prime Line to a ring group (1-128).
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
For outgoing Prime Line selection, assign each Prime Line trunk to a different Access Map (1-128).
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Set assignment so extension(s) can have access to Prime Line. Deny outbound access to extensions that
should not have Prime Line.
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup, Part B, Item 3: Outgoing Trunk Line Preference
Enter 1 for this option so extension user seizes Prime Line when they lift the handset.
Related Features
Direct Inward Lines/Direct Inward System Access
DILs and DISA calls also ring extensions directly, even if not allowed in ring group programming.
Line Preference
Prime Line Selection directly interacts with Line Preference.
Operation
To place a call on your Prime Line:
1.
Lift handset.
You hear dial tone on your Prime Line.
To answer a call on your Prime Line:
1.
Lift handset.
Depending on your Line Preference programming, you’ll either answer the Prime Line or get
dial tone on the idle line appearance.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 423
Features N-Z
Privacy (Data)
Privacy (Data)
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
While on a data call using an acoustic coupler, an extension user can implement Privacy to block incoming Off
Hook Signals and Barge In attempts. The system establishes Privacy for the extension when the user presses the
programmed Privacy key. It cancels Privacy when the user presses the Privacy key a second time or hangs up.
Privacy assures the user that they will not be interrupted during an important call.
Conditions
This feature only pertains to data calls set up using a keyset and an acoustic coupler. It does not pertain to data
calls using a DCI. (Privacy is automatic for these types of calls.)
Default Setting
Disabled.
Distant
Modem
Trunk
Call
14
5
Coupler
00
0
-
Modem
92
PC
Acoustic Coupler Connection
424 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Privacy (Data)
Programming
Start
In Program 0406
Item 7, enable (1)
Privacy.
Yes
Should keyset user be
allowed to enable
Privacy?
No
In Program 0401
Item 7, disable (0)
Privacy.
In Program 1005, assign
Class of Service to an
extension.
In Program 1006,
Assign a Privacy key
to an extension.
Stop
➣
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options, Item 7: Privacy
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use a Privacy key.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a Privacy key (code 1030).
Related Features
Barge In
Enabling Data Privacy prevents Barge In and other off-hook tones from interrupting the data call.
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
A keyset user can release Privacy on their outside call so a co-worker can join in the conversation.
Programmable Function Keys
Data Privacy requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Data Privacy does not apply to single line telephones.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 425
Features N-Z
Privacy (Data)
Operation
To enable Privacy for the call you are on:
Enabling Privacy blocks off-hook tones from the handset, not the speaker.
1.
Press Privacy key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1030).
A co-worker cannot Barge In on your conversation or send Off Hook Signals.
2.
(Optional) Press Privacy key again to release Privacy for the call.
The system cancels Privacy automatically when you hang up.
426 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Private Line
Private Line
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
A Private Line is a trunk reserved for a keyset for placing and answering calls. A user with a Private Line always knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own trunk for placing calls that
is not available to others in the system.
•
•
•
Incoming only
The keyset has a Private Line only for incoming calls. The user cannot place calls on the Private Line.
Outgoing only
The keyset has a Private Line only for outgoing calls. The Private Line does not ring for incoming calls.
Both ways
The keyset has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type
Set the Trunk Service Type to 4 if routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail or 0 if not routing to
voice mail.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extension to Private Line’s ring group. Use option 1 for Incoming or Both Ways Private Lines.
Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines. Do not assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring
group.
0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign Private Line to an unused "Private Line" ring group (1-128) (i.e., a ring group just for the Private
Line).
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
Assign Private Line to the Private Line Access Map (1-128) (see Program 0912 below). Use option 5 for
Incoming, option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing. In all other Access Maps, give option 3 to
the Private Line.
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign extension to have Private Line to an unused "Private Line" Access Map.
0917 - DIL Assignment
If routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail, assign DILs to the extensions.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Make sure extension has a line key (e.g., 0012) for the Private Line.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 427
Features N-Z
Private Line
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In Program 1006, make
sure extension's Private
Line is assigned to a key.
In Program 0912, assign
extension to an unused "Private
Line" access map.
Remove the key assignment
for all other extensions.
In Program 0901:Items 14-17, set
the Trunk Service Type to 4.
In Program 0917, assign
the DIL to the extension.
In Program 0909, assign
the extension (with option
1) to Private Line's ring
group (see step 4).
Yes
Should an
unanswered
Private Line
be routed to
Voice Mail?
In Program 0901:Items 1417, set the Trunk Service
Type to 0.
No
In Program 0910, assign Private
Line to an unused "Private Line" ring
group (i.e., just for the Private Line).
This allows for up to 128
different Private Lines.
In Program 0911, assign Private
Line to the "Private Line" access
map (see step 3). Use option 5
(incoming and Hold access).
Yes
Is Private Line for
Incoming Only?
No
In Program 0909, assign extension
(with option 1) to Private Line's ring
group (see step 4).
In Program 0911, assign Private Line
to the Private Line access map (see
step 3). Use option 7 (incoming,
outgoing, and Hold access).
Yes
Is Private Line
Both Ways?
No
In Program 0909, assign
extension (with option 0) to
Private Line's ring group.
In Program 0911, assign
Private Line to a unique
access map (i.e., one
member). Use option 4
(outgoing and Hold access).
Yes
Is Private Line for
Outgoing Only?
No
Stop
In all other access maps, give access 3 (Hold) to Private Lines. Do
not assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring groups.
Features N-Z
Private Line
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Private Lines do not follow Call Forwarding.
Line Preference
An extension user can have Line Preference options applied to their Private Line.
Prime Line Selection
A Private Line can also be a Prime Line.
Programmable Function Keys
You should always program a line key for each Private Line.
Single Line Telephones
Private Lines are not available on single line telephones.
Toll Restriction
Private Lines follow normal Toll Restriction.
Transfer
An extension user can Transfer their Private Line. Since other users have hold access (see Programming), the destination can answer the transferred Private Line and place it on Hold.
Operation
To place a call on your Private Line:
1.
Press Private Line key.
2.
Dial number.
To answer a call on your Private Line:
1.
Press Private Line key.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 429
Features N-Z
Programmable Function Keys
Programmable Function Keys
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Each keyset has Programmable Function Keys. Programmable Function Keys simplify placing calls, answering
calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of a keyset’s programmable keys from your administration telephone, or the extension user can do it themselves. Depending on your telephone, you either
have 16, 24 or 32 Programmable Function Keys.
92
0
-2
00
D
Refer to Tables 1-4 and 1-5 for the Programmable Function Key functions.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
The first 16 keys on a telephone are line keys (e.g., key 1 = line 0001). The remaining keys are unassigned.
430 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Programmable Function Keys
Programming
Start
No
In 0406 Item 69,
enter 0.
Extension users dial Service
Code 851 to program their
function keys.
Should extension be
able to program their
own function keys?
Yes
In 0406 Item 69,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, you can optionally
customize an extension's
function keys from the system
program.
Do you want to
initialize an
extension's
function keys?
Yes
In 1011, automatically reset
an extension's function keys
to line keys.
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 431
Features N-Z
Programmable Function Keys
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 69: Programmable Function Key Programming
➣
➣
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to program their own
function keys.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service to extensions.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign the functions of a keyset’s Programmable Function Keys. Refer to Tables 1-4 and 1-5.
1011 - Function Key Initialization
Initialize an extension’s Programmable Function Keys. This makes all keys line keys (key 1 = line 1, key
2 = line 2 etc.). You may want to do this if you have to reassign an extension’s keys.
Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing/One-Touch Calling
Abbreviated Dialing and One-Touch Calling also offer quick access to calls and features.
Operation
To change the function of a programmable key:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 851.
3.
Press the key you want to program.
4.
Enter the 4-digit key function.
Available functions are 1000-1082 (refer to chart) and line keys 0001-0128.
To undefine a key, enter 0000.
To check the function of a programmable key:
1.
Press CHECK.
2.
Press the programmable key.
The programmed function displays.
432 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion on trunk calls. Pulse to Tone Conversion lets a user change their
extension’s dialing mode while placing a call. For systems in a Dial Pulse area, this permits users to access dialup OCCs (such as MCI) from their DP area. The user can, for example:
Place a call to an OCC over a DP trunk.
•
Depending on programming:
•
Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion
OR
Wait 10 seconds.
Dial the OCC security code and desired number. The system dials the digits after the conversion as
•
DTMF.
Conditions
Pulse to Tone Conversion is only valid for Dial Pulse trunks (Program 0901 Item 1, options 0 or 1).
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Start
In 0104, enter 2 for
manual.
Manual
At an extension,
should DP to DTMF
conversion be
automatic, manual or
both?
Automatic
In 0104, enter 0 for
automatic.
Both
In 0104, enter 1 for
both.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 433
Features N-Z
Pulse to Tone Conversion (Cont’d)
Pulse to Tone Conversion (Cont’d)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0104 - DP to DTMF Conversion Options
For each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF Conversion required: automatic (0), automatic and manual
(1), or manual (2).
Related Features
None
Operation
To convert your phone’s dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line:
1.
Place call over pulse line.
2.
Dial # to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing.
434 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Repeat Redial
Repeat Redial
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
If a keyset user places a trunk call that is busy or unanswered, they can have Repeat Redial try it again later on.
The user doesn’t continually have to try the number again -- hoping it will go through. Repeat Redial automatically retries it (up to three times) until the called party answers.
Conditions
Lifting the handset will cancel Repeat Redial.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 36: Repeat Redial Time
Set the interval between Repeat Redial attempts (0-64800 seconds).
0405 -System Timers (Part A), Item 37: Repeat Redial Enable Time
Set how long the system waits (0-64800 seconds) for the called party to answer after a Repeat Redial. If
the called party doesn’t answer within this interval, the system hangs up and tries again (after the Repeat
Redial Time). For unanswered calls, the total time between retries in the sum of Items 36 and 37.
0406 - COS Options, Item 74: Repeat Redial
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Repeat Redial.
0415 - Repeat Redial Count
Set how many times Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Repeat Redial (code 1075).
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat Redial call.
Last Number Redial/Save Number Dialed
An extension user can quickly redial their last call.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Repeat Redial.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 435
Features N-Z
Repeat Redial
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
No
In 0406 Item 74,
enter 0.
Should extension be
able to use Repeat
Redial?
Yes
In 0406 Item 74,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class
of Service to
extensions.
Is the interval
between Repeat
Redial attempts
adequate?
No
In 0405 Item 36, change
the Repeat Redial Time.
Yes
When Repeat Redial retries a call and the
called party is busy or doesn't answer,
does the system wait an adequate
interval before hanging up and trying
again?
No
In 0405 Item 37, change
the Repeat Redial Enable
Time.
Yes
In 1006, do not assign a
Repeat Redial key.
No
Should extension have a
Repeat Redial key?
Does Repeat Redial repeat an
adequate number of times
before canceling?
Yes
No
In 1006, assign a Repeat
Redial key (code 1075).
In 0415, change the
Repeat Redial count.
Yes
Stop
436 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Repeat Redial
Operation
To use Repeat Redial (if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy):
1.
Place trunk call.
Listen for busy tone or ring-no-answer,
2.
Press DIAL + LND.
OR
Press Repeat Redial Key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1075).
Your Repeat Redial key flashes while you wait for the system to redial.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
The system periodically redials the call.
4.
Lift handset or press MIC when called party answers.
To cancel Repeat Redial:
1.
Do not lift handset.
Lifting the handset cancels Repeat Redial.
2.
Press DIAL.
3.
Press LND.
OR
1.
Press Repeat Redial Key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1075).
See also Last Number Redial.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 437
Features N-Z
Reverse Voice Over
Reverse Voice Over
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
While on a handset call, Reverse Voice Over lets a busy keyset user make a private Intercom call to an idle coworker. The idle co-worker can be at a keyset or 500/2500 set. The busy user just presses and holds down a programmed Reverse Voice Over key to make a private call to a specified co-worker. The initial caller cannot hear
the Reverse Voice Over conversation. The private Intercom call continues until the Reverse Voice Over caller releases the key again. The initial call can be an outside call or an Intercom call.
Reverse Voice Over could help a salesman, for example, when placing a call to an important client. The salesman can talk with the client and give special instructions to a secretary - without interrupting the initial call.
When the keyset is idle, the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as a Hotline key. A keyset’s Reverse
Voice Over key also shows at a glance the status of the associated extension:
When the key is. . .
The associated extension is . . .
Off
Idle
Slow Flash
Busy or call ringing
Fast Flash
In Do Not Disturb
Note: When the keyset is idle, the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the associated extension
(like a Hotline key). An extension user cannot, however, use the Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls.
Conditions
(A.) (384i Only) While active, Reverse Voice Over uses a circuit on a DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. Refer to the
Conference feature for DTUA/C PCB programming.
(B.) An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one extension (limited only by the number
of available function keys).
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options, Part A, Item 20: BLF Control and
0406 - COS Options, Item 6: Automatic Off Hook Signaling
Programs 0401 Item 20 and 0406 Item 6 set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or
DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the following chart, the BLF
LED is on only when both extension line appearances are busy. In conditions 2-4, the BLF LED is on
when one line appearance is busy.
1
➣
438 FEATURES
Program 0406:
Item 6
Program 0401:
Item 20
BLF 1
Status
Busy
Status
1
1
0
Off
No
2
1
1
On
Yes
3
0
0
On
Yes
4
0
1
On
Yes
BLF is on for extension receiving a voice announced Intercom call.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Reverse Voice Over (code 1056 + dest. ext.).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Reverse Voice Over
Related Features
Do Not Disturb
A Reverse Voice Over placed to an extension always rings, regardless of how Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing is set at the destination.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Reverse Voice Over follows Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing programming.
Hotline
Like Reverse Voice Over, Hotline also provides one-button calling to coworkers.
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Calling provides one button access to co-workers, but without the Busy Lamp Field provided
by Reverse Voice Over.
Programmable Function Keys
Reverse Voice Over requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Reverse Voice Over is not available at single line telephones.
Voice Over
If an extension user places a Reverse Voice Over to a busy destination extension, the system sets up a
Voice Over. The Voice Over continues as long as the initiating extension holds down the Reverse Voice
Over key.
Operation
WHEN YOU’RE ON A CALL . . .
To place a Reverse Voice Over call:
1.
Press and hold your Reverse Voice Over key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1056 + dest. ext.).
Your Reverse Voice Over key lights steadily (green) and you can talk with the programmed Reverse Voice Over destination.
To return to your initial caller:
1.
Release the Reverse Voice Over key.
If the co-worker you call hangs up, you return to the initial call automatically.
WHEN YOUR PHONE IS IDLE . . .
To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination:
1.
Press your Reverse Voice Over key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1056 + dest. ext.).
You can optionally lift handset after this step for privacy.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 439
Features N-Z
Ring Groups
Ring Groups
Description
124i ☞
Available — 16 Ring Groups.
384i ☞
Available — 128 Ring Groups.
Ring Groups determine how trunks ring extensions. Generally, trunks ring extension’s only if Ring Group programming allows. For example, to make a trunk ring an extension:
Assign the trunk and the extension to the same Ring Group
•
In the extension’s Ring Group programming, assign ringing for the trunk.
•
The 384i system allows up to 128 Ring Groups; the 124i allows up to 16. Any number of extensions and trunks
can be in a specific group. Extensions and trunks can be in only one Ring Group at a time.
If an extension has a line key for the trunk, Ring Group calls ring the line key. If the extension doesn’t have a
line key, the trunk rings the line appearance key. If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring
group, the trunk follows Access Map programming.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
All extensions and trunks are in Ring Group 1, extension 301 rings for trunk calls and all other exten•
sions only flash.
440 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Ring Groups
Programming
Start
See the example on
the following page.
In 0910, assign trunks
with the same ringing
patterns to the same Ring
Group.
No
In 0909, assign each
extension to the Ring
Group that has the
trunks that should ring
that phone.
Does trunk ring all extensions
the same way, for each Night
Service mode?
Yes
In 0910, assign all
trunks to the same
Ring Group.
In 0909, assign extensions
to the ring group
programmed in 0910.
Use data=1 to make
the phones ring.
Transferred calls will
ring the CALL keys.
In 1006, do not
assign line keys to
extensions (code
0001-0128).
No
Should extensions have
one-button access to
ringing trunks?
Yes
In 1006, assign line
keys to extensions
(code 0001-0128).
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 441
Features N-Z
Ring Groups
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
➣
➣
Assign extensions to ring groups (1-128 in 384i, 1-16 in 124i).
0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign trunks to ring groups (1-128 in 384i, 1-16 in 124i).
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys as line keys (codes 1-128).
Note: For incoming calls, Ring Group programming (0909/0910) overrides Access Map programming
(0911/0912)
Use the charts below to program the following example:
For this extension ...1
1
301
Trunk 1 rings
Trunk 2 flashes
Trunk 3 flashes
302
Trunk 1 flashes
Trunk 2 rings
Trunk 3 flashes
303
Trunk 1 flashes
Trunk 2 flashes
Trunk 3 rings
Trunks ring the same in the day as at night.
Program 0910 - Trunk Ring Group Assignment
1
1
2
3
Trunk 1
X
-
-
Trunk 2
-
X
-
Trunk 3
-
-
X
Ring Group >
X = Trunk assigned to indicated Ring Group
1
Make the same 0910 entry for all Night Service modes.
Program 0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Ring Group >
1
2
3
Ext. 301
1
1
01
Ext. 302
01
1
01
Ext 303
01
01
1
0
1 = Extension rings
0 = Extension doesn’t ring
1
442 FEATURES
To allow extension user to answer flashing line, be sure to give extension
incoming access to the trunk in Programs 0911 and 0912.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Ring Groups
Related Features
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
DILs ring extensions without being in a Ring Group.
Night Service
Ring Group programming can be different for each Night Service mode.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify answering incoming calls.
Operation
Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 443
Features N-Z
Ringdown Extension
Ringdown Extension
Description
124i ☞
Available — 96 extensions/virtual
extensions and 24 Hotline
assignments.
384i ☞
Available — 384 extensions/virtual
extensions and 50 Hotline
assignments (in each Tenant Group).
With a Ringdown Extension, a user can call another extension by just lifting the handset. The call automatically
goes through — there is no need for the user to dial digits or press additional keys. Ringdown Extensions are
frequently used for lobby phones, where the caller just lifts the handset to get the information desk.
After the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown occurs after a programmable interval. Depending on
the setting of this interval, the extension user may be able to place other calls before the ringdown goes through.
External Hotline is a variation of Ringdown. With External Hotline, an extension automatically dials a Common
Abbreviated Dialing number when the user lifts the handset. Turn to "Hotline, External" for more.
Conditions
(A.) Ringdown extension has no effect on an extension’s current (active) call.
(B.) The Ringdown Extension user must lift the handset for ringdown to work.
(C.) Ringdown Extension (Program 1013) has priority over External Hotline (Program 1024).
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
444 FEATURES
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 16: Ringdown Extension Timer
After the user lifts the handset, the extension automatically calls the ringdown destination after this interval (0-64800 seconds).
0406 - COS Options, Item 41: Extension Ringdown
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) ringdown. If disabled in Class of Service, the
settings in Program 1013 below have no effect.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1013 - Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignments
Program the ringdown (Hotline) source and destination (target) extension numbers. The 384i allows up to
50 source/target pairs in each Tenant Group. The 124i allows up to 24 source/target pairs.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Ringdown Extension
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In Program 0406 Item
41, disable ringdown (0).
No
Should extension be
allowed to use
ringdown?
Yes
In Program 0406 Item
41, enable ringdown (1).
In Program 1005, assign a
Class of Service that allows
ringdown to extension.
In Program 0405 Item 16,
set the Ringdown
Extension Timer to 0.
Immediate
Should ringdown
occur immediately
or after a delay?
In Program 1013, assign
ringdown (Hotline) number,
originator extension number
and target extension number.
Delayed
In Program 0405 Item 16, set
the Ringdown Extension Timer
to desired delay interval (64800
seconds max.).
384i allows 50 Hotline
assignments per Tenant Group.
124i allows 24 Hotline
assignments.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 445
Features N-Z
Ringdown Extension
Related Features
Call Forwarding
Ringdown Extension follows Call Forwarding. For example, the ringdown destination can forward their
calls. When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown automatically calls the extension to
which calls are forwarded.
Call Waiting/Camp On, Callback and Off Hook Signaling
If the Ringdown Extension user hears busy tone when they lift the handset, they can Camp On to the destination, leave a Callback or activate Off Hook Signaling.
Do Not Disturb
The ringdown destination user can activate Do Not Disturb. When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the
handset, they hear DND. If enabled, the Ringdown Extension user can override the destination’s DND.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
If the destination extension has Handsfree Answerback enabled, the call will voice-announce. If the destination extension has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, the call will ring.
Hotline, External
An extension can automatically dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing Number when the user lifts the handset.
Operation
To place a call if your extension has ringdown programmed:
1.
Lift handset.
If you want to place a trunk call, press a line key before lifting the handset.
Depending on the setting of your ringdown timer, you may be able to dial an Intercom call before your ringdown goes through.
If the destination has Handsfree Answerback enabled, your call will voice announce. If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, your call will ring.
To bypass ringdown (if enabled for your keyset):
1.
Do not lift handset.
2.
Press CALL.
3.
Place Intercom or trunk call.
To answer a call if you are another extension’s ringdown destination:
1.
Speak toward phone to answer incoming voice-announcement.
OR
Lift handset to answer ringing Intercom call.
446 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Room Monitor
Room Monitor
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Room Monitor lets a keyset extension user listen to the sounds in a co-workers area. For example, the receptionist could listen for sounds in the warehouse when it’s left unattended. To use Room Monitor, the initiating extension and the receiving extension must activate it.
An extension user can only Monitor one extension at a time. However, many extensions can Monitor the same
extension at the same time.
Conditions
(A.) Room Monitor is for listening only. It does not allow for conversation between the monitoring and monitored extensions.
(B.) An extension user cannot monitor an Attendant.
(C.) The Nitsuko 900 cordless telephone does not support Room Monitor.
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Refer to Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options, Item 54: Room Monitor, Initiating Extension
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate Room Monitor.
0406 - COS Options, Item 55: Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to be monitored.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as a Room Monitor key (code 1025) for both the extension being monitored and
the extension initiating Room Monitor.
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Room Monitor.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 447
Features N-Z
Room Monitor
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0406 Item 54,
enter 0.
In 0405 Item 55,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension be
able to initiate Room
Monitor?
No
Should an extension have
to ability to be monitored by
another extension?
Yes
Yes
In 0406 Item 54,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 55,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
In 1006, assign a Room
Monitor key (code 1025) to
both the monitoring and
monitored extension.
Stop
448 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Room Monitor
Operation
You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the extension you
want to monitor. You can only listen to one extension at a time.
To activate Room Monitor (at the initiating extension):
1.
Do not lift handset or press SPK.
2.
Press Room Monitor key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1025).
3.
Dial number of extension you want to monitor.
You can place and answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.
To activate Room Monitor (at the extension to be monitored):
1.
Go to the extension you want to monitor.
2.
Do not lift handset or press SPK.
3.
Press Room Monitor key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1025).
4.
Dial the number of the extension you are at.
For example, if you are at extension 306, dial 306.
You can place and answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.
To cancel Room Monitor (at either extension):
1.
Press Room Monitor key at both the initiating extension and the monitored extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 449
Features N-Z
Save Number Dialed
Save Number Dialed
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Save Number Dialed permits an extension user to save their last outside number and easily redial it later on. For
example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a new one in its place.
Save Number Dialed saves in system memory a dialed number up to 24 digits. The number can be any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call. However, the extension
user can preselect a specific trunk if desired.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options, Item 49: Save Number Dialed
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Save Number Dialed.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as a Save key (code 1014).
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects.
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Last Number Redial
An extension user can quickly redial the last number placed.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Save Number Dialed operation.
Repeat Redial
The system can automatically retry a trunk call that was unanswered or busy.
450 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Save Number Dialed
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0406 Item 49,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able to
use Save Number Dialed?
Yes
In 0406 Item 49,
enter 1.
Assign Class of Service
to extensions.
A keyset can not save
numbers without a Save
Number Dialed function key.
In 1006, assign a function
key for Save Number
Dialed (code 1014).
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 451
Features N-Z
Save Number Dialed
Operation
To save the outside number you just dialed (up to 24 digits):
Use this feature before hanging up.
Keyset
1.
Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014)
1.
2.
Single Line Telephone
Hookflash.
Dial 815.
To redial a saved number:
Keyset
1.
(Optional) Press line key.
This selects a specific trunk for the call.
2.
Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014).
The stored number dials out.
OR
1.
Press idle CALL key
2.
Dial 815.
OR
Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014).
Save Number Dialed automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call.
The stored number dials out.
1.
2.
Single Line Telephone
Lift handset.
Dial 815.
To check to see the number you have saved:
1.
Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1014).
The stored number displays for six seconds.
The stored number dials out if you:
- Lift the handset,
- Press an idle line key,
- Press an idle CALL key, or
- Press SPK
2.
Press CLEAR.
To clear your saved number:
Keyset
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 885.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
1.
2.
452 FEATURES
Single Line Telephone
Lift handset and dial 885.
Hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Secretary Call lets two co-workers alert each other without disturbing their work. To have Secretary Call, both
co-workers must have keysets with Secretary Call buzzer keys. When a user presses their buzzer key, the system
alerts the called extension by sending a splash tone and flashing the called extension’s buzzer key. The called
user can respond by placing an Intercom call to the calling party. The called extension’s buzzer key continues
to flash until either user cancels the Secretary Call. A secretary could use this feature, for example, to get a
message through to the boss in an important meeting. After being alerted, the boss could call the secretary when
it’s most convenient.
An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions, limited only by the available number
of programmable keys.
Conditions
(A.) Secretary Call is not available to single line telephone users.
(B.) Secretary Call does not set up an Intercom call.
(C.) When assigning Secretary Call from their own extension, a user enters the associated extension numbers.
When assigning Secretary Call from system programming, use the associated extension port numbers.
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
0406 - COS Options, Item 67: Secretary Call
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Secretary Call.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Secretary Call buzzer (code 1031 plus the destination extension port number).
Both co-workers must have buzzer keys for each other.
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Secretary Call requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Secretary Call.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 453
Features N-Z
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
In 0406 Item 67,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to use Secretary
Call?
Yes
In 0406 Item 67,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class
of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, assign a function key as
a Secretary Call key (code 1031
+ extension port number).
Stop
454 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Operation
To buzz your secretary or boss:
1.
Do not lift handset.
2.
Press buzzer key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1031 + sec. ext.).
Your boss or secretary hears a splash tone.
Your buzzer key lights steadily.
Your boss’s or secretary’s buzzer key flashes fast.
To check to see who left you a Secretary Call:
1.
Do not lift handset.
2.
Press CHECK.
3.
Press flashing Secretary Call key.
4.
Press CLEAR.
To answer your Secretary Call indication:
1.
Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you.
To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension:
1.
Press your lit Secretary Call key.
To cancel a Secretary Call left at your extension:
1.
Do not lift handset.
2.
Press flashing Secretary Call key.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 455
Features N-Z
Secretary Call Pickup
Secretary Call Pickup
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Secretary Call Pickup lets a keyset user easily reroute calls intended for a co-worker to themselves. By pressing
a Secretary Call Pickup key, the user can have all calls to a co-worker’s phone ring or voice-announce theirs instead. Secretary Call Pickup is a simplified type of Call Forward with Follow Me for employees that work
closely together. This feature could be helpful to customer service representatives that must frequently cover
each other’s clients. When a representative leaves their desk, an associate could press the Secretary Call Pickup
key to intercept all their calls.
An extension can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions, limited only by the available
number of programmable keys.
Conditions
Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users.
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
➣ 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Secretary Call Pickup (1032 + boss ext). Unlike Secretary Call, you do not
have to program a corresponding key at the source and destination extensions.
Related Features
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
An extension user can also have Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroute a co-worker’s calls to themselves.
Programmable Function Keys
Secretary Call pickup requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Co-workers can alert each other without disturbing their work.
Single Line Telephones
A keyset can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for a single line telephone.
Operation
To activate Secretary Call Pickup:
1.
Press your Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + boss ext.).
You hear a splash tone and your Secretary Call Pickup key lights.
Calls intended for covered extension ring your phone instead.
To cancel Secretary Call Pickup:
1.
Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + boss ext.).
To check a key’s Secretary Call Pickup assignment.
1.
Press CHECK.
2.
Press your Secretary Call Coverage key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1032 + boss ext.).
3.
Press CLEAR.
456 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Selectable Display Messaging
Selectable Display Messaging
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available — system software prior
to 3.04 uses different procedures and
programmable keys.
An extension user can select a preprogrammed Selectable Display Message for their extension. Display keyset
callers see the selected message when they call the user’s extension. Selectable Display Messaging provides personalized messaging. For example, an extension user could select the message "GONE FOR THE DAY". Any
display keyset user calling the extension would see the message. Other than displaying the message, the system
puts the call through normally. See table below for a list of the standard messages. Each tenant group has 20 Selectable Display Messages.
An extension user can add digits for date, time or phone number after messages 1-8 and 10 (up to 24 characters). For
example, an extension user could select the message "ON VACATION UNTIL" and then enter the date. Callers see
the original message followed by the appended date. They would then be able to tell when the user was coming back
from vacation.
The default messages are:
No.
Message
Appended with...
1
IN MEETING UNTIL
Time (when meeting done)
2
OUT UNTIL
Time (when returning)
3
OUT-PLEASE CALL
8 digits (phone number)
4
PLEASE CALL ME ON
8 digits (phone number)
5
BUSY CALL AFTER
8 digits
6
OUT FOR LUNCH BACK AT
Time (when returning)
7
BUSINESS TRIP UNTIL
Date (when returning)
8
BUSINESS TRIP CALL
8 digits (where reached)
9
GONE FOR THE DAY
10
ON VACATION UNTIL
11-20
Date (when returning)
MESSAGE 11-20
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 457
Features N-Z
Selectable Display Messaging
Programming
Start
Should time in display
messages be in 12-hour
(e.g., 3:15PM) format?
No
In 0103, change the Time
and Date display mode.
Yes
Do you wantNo
to change
the default display
messages?
Yes
In 0403, change the
default Selectable
Display Messages.
No
No
Should an extension be
able to use choose a
Selectable Display
Message?
In 0406 Item 75,
enter 0.
Yes
In 0406 Item 75,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, do not assign a
function key for Selectable
Display Messaging (code
1027).
No
Should extension have
one-button access to
Selectable Display
Messaging?
Yes
In 1006, assign a function key
for Selectable Display
Messaging (code 1027).
Stop
458 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Selectable Display Messaging
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0103 - Time and Date Display Mode
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the System Time and Date display mode. The time that displays in Selectable Display Messages follows this setting.
0403 - Selectable Display Messages
Program the Selectable Display Messages (1-20).
0406 - COS Options, Item 75: Selectable Display Messaging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Selectable Display Messaging.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
(384i 3.04 or higher and 124i) Assign a function key for Call Forwarding (Device) (code 1081).
(384i prior to 3.04) Assign a function key for Selectable Display Messaging (code 1027 + msg).
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Selectable Display Messaging operation.
Operation
To select a message:
1.
Press idle CALL key + dial *4.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1081).
2.
Dial 3 + Message number (01-20).
Use VOL ▼ or VOL ▲ to scroll through the messages.
3.
(Optional for messages 1-8 and 10)
Dial the digits you want to append to the message.
You can append messages 1-8 and 10 with digits (e.g., the time when you will be back). You enter the time in 24-hour format, but it displays in 12-hour format.
4.
Press SPK to select the message and hang up (if you dialed *4 in step 1).
To cancel a message:
1.
Press idle CALL key + dial *4.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1081).
2.
Dial 3.
3.
Press SPK to hang up (if you dialed *4 in step 1).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 459
Features N-Z
Selectable Display Messaging
Operation (Cont’d)
(384i Prior to 3.04)
To select a message:
Keyset
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial *43.
OR
Press Selectable Display Messaging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1027 + msg).
3.
Dial the message number (01-20).
You may be able to append a message with digits (phone number - shown as ########), the
time of day or the date.
To scroll through the messages, press VOLUME ▲ or VOLUME ▼.
4.
Press SPK to hang up.
A co-worker calling your extension sees the message you selected. If the message is longer than
20 characters, it automatically wraps to the second line of the display.
1.
2.
3.
Single Line Telephone
Lift handset.
Dial *43 and the message number (01-20).
You may be able to append a message with digits (phone number - shown as ########), the
time of day (24-hour) or the date. The time displays in 12-hour format.
Hang up.
To cancel Selectable Display Messaging:
Keyset
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial *43.
OR
Press Selectable Display Messaging key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1027 + msg).
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
1.
2.
3.
460 FEATURES
Single Line Telephone
Lift handset.
Dial *43 and the message number (01-20).
Hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Selectable Ring Tones
Selectable Ring Tones
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
An extension user can change the way calls ring their phone. Selectable Ring Tones allows an extension user to
set up unique ringing for their calls. This is important in a crowded work area where several phones are close together. Because their phone has a characteristic ring, the user always can tell when it’s their phone ringing.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Start
No
In 0406 Item 59,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 86,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be
able to change the
incoming ring tones?
Yes
Should extension be able
to check (listen to) the
incoming ring tones?
Yes
In 0406 Item 59,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 86,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service
to extensions.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 461
Features N-Z
Selectable Ring Tones
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 59: Selectable Ring Tone Selection
➣
➣
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to change the incoming
ring tones.
0406 - COS Options, Item 86: Checking Selectable Ring Tones
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to check the Selectable
Ring Tones.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Selectable Ring Tones.
Operation
To change your extension’s incoming ring tones:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 820.
3.
Dial 1 to set Intercom ring; 2 to set trunk ring.
4.
Dial code for the desired ring pattern.
1
High pitch
2
Medium pitch
3
Low pitch
5.
Press SPK to hang up.
To listen to the incoming ring choices:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 811.
3.
Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring; 2 to listen to trunk ring.
For trunk ring, enter the tone you want to listen to followed by the tenant group.
4.
Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear.
1
High pitch
2
Medium pitch
3
Low pitch
5.
Press SPK to hang up.
462 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Serial Call
Serial Call
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Serial Call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension. Serial Calling saves transferring steps between users. For example, a Customer Service Representative (CSR) has a client
on the phone who needs technical advice. The CSR wants to send the call to Tech Service, but needs to advise
the client of certain costs when Tech Service is done. Rather than transferring the call back and forth, the CSR
can use Serial Call to Technical Service and announce, "I have Ted on the phone. I need to talk to him again.
Just hang up when you’re done and I’ll get him back."
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Start
Refer to the Transfer and Flash
features for additional information.
In 0402 Item 2, enter 0 (for
Transfer) or 2 (for Flash).
Do not enter 1.
No
Should extension be able
to use the TRFR key as a
Serial Call key?
Yes
In 0402 Item 2, enter 1 to
make the extension TRFR
keys Serial Call keys.
No
Should extension have a
function key assigned as a
Serial Call key?
Yes
In 1006, assign a
function key as a Serial
Call key (code 1035).
If the TRFR key is for Serial Call, extensions
don't need a Serial Call function key.
In 1006, do not assign a
function key as a Serial
Call key (code 1035).
Stop
➣
➣
0402 - Tenant Group Options, Part B, Item 2: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A)
For each tenant, enter 1 for this option to assign the CONF (TRF) key as a Serial Call key.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a programmable key as a Serial Call key (code 1035).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 463
Features N-Z
Serial Call
Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Serial Call requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Serial Call is not available to single line telephones.
Transfer
An extension user can extend (send) a call to a co-worker.
Operation
To place a Serial Call to a co-worker:
1.
Place or answer trunk call.
2.
Press HOLD.
3.
Dial co-worker’s extension number.
Co-worker must lift handset to respond to your announcement.
4.
Press Serial Call key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1035) but do not hang up.
When your co-worker hangs up the call, the system makes an automatic live transfer back to
your extension.
464 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Single Line Telephones
Single Line Telephones
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
Available — 72 single line telephones
maximum.
Install 2-OPX Modules in odd
numbered ports only. The system
automatically disables the next
adjacent port.
Analog Message Waiting lamping
not available.
Setting the DTMF criteria requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Adjusting the sidetone level is not
available.
Loop Disconnect Supervision for 2OPX Modules not available.
384i ☞
-
-
-
Available — 255 single line
telephones maximum.
Install 2-OPX Modules in any port.
The system automatically disables
the next adjacent port.
Analog Message Waiting lamping is
available.
Setting the DTMF criteria requires
system software 3.04 or higher.
Loop Disconnect Supervision for 2OPX Modules requires system
software 3.06.02.
The system is compatible with 500 type (Dial Pulse) and 2500 type (DTMF) analog single line telephones
(SLTs). You can install single line telephones as On-Premise or Off-Premise extensions. Single line telephone users can dial codes to access many of the features available to keyset users. With Single Line Telephones, you can
have your system simulate PBX type operation.
When installing single line telephones as On-Premise (ONS) Extensions, you must have:
A port on an ASTU PCB for each single line telephone installed.
(384i Only) If the telephones have Message Waiting lamps, a port on an ASTU/MW PCB for each telephone
installed. You must also have a Message Wait Power Supply PCB installed to provide lamp voltage.
A customer-provided ring generator (refer to the Hardware Manual for installation details).
•
(If you have 2500 sets) A CDTU PCB with at least one block reserved for analog extension DTMF reception.
•
•
•
If setting up single line telephones as Off-Premise (OPX) Extensions, you must install a 2-OPX Module. Each 2OPX Module provides two OPX ports: the physical port to which the module is connected and the next adjacent
physical port. In addition, the 2-OPX Module has its own DTMF receivers (one for each port), internal ring generator and power supply. In 124i, install a DTDU PCB if you want outbound dial tone detection for Off-Premise
Extensions. Refer to the Hardware Manual for installation details.
Conditions
(A.) 2-OPX Module circuits meet the requirements o EIA Specification RS-464-A for OPS class C (loop resistance to 3,300 ohms, loop current = 16 mA or greater). In 384i system software 3.06.02 and higher, the 2OPX Module (with updated firmware) provides far end loop disconnect supervision for the connected
circuits. Set the interval in 0115 Item 10: Loop Disconnect Time.
(B.) Dial Pulse (500 type) single line telephones cannot access any features that require the user to dial # or *.
Default Setting
In 124i, Single Line Telephones and 2-OPX Modules auto-ID as soon as they are installed.
•
In 384i, Single Line Telephones and 2-OPX Modules function as soon as they are installed and properly
•
programmed.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 465
Features N-Z
Single Line Telephones
Programming
Start
For ONS extension,
connect to ASTU port
programmed with circuit
type 3.
ONS
500 Type
In 1001 Item 1, enter 0 for
500 type.
Is single line phone an
ONS or OPX extension?
(Skip this decision for
124i.)
Are single line telephones
500 type (dial pulse) or
2500 type (DTMF)?
OPX
2500 Type
In 1001 Item 1, enter 1 for
2500 type.
(384i Only) For ONS
extensions, in Program 0303
make sure one CDTU block
is type 1.
For non-Voice Mail
ports, make sure 1001
Item 5 is 0.
Do you want to
change the way the
single line telephones
ring?
No
For OPX extension,
connect to 2-OPX Module
programmed with circuit
type 9.
Yes
Change the settings of
1001 Item 6 and 1008
Item 4.
Refer to the Single Line Ring Options chart
provided with the Single Line Telephone
Compatibility feature.
Continued on
the following
page.
466 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Single Line Telephones
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Is the Continued
Dialing feature
enabled?
In 1005, assign a
unique COS for Dual
OPX phones only.
Yes
No
In 1001:4 choose from one
of the standard gain
settings (1-5).
Are the standard
gain settings
acceptable?
Yes
Do you want to change the
transmit and receive levels for
a single line telephone?
In 0406:57 set option
to "0" to prevent dual
DTMF tones.
No
Yes
Do you want to change
the sidetone level for a
single line telephone?
Yes
No
In 0118, change the gains
for the standard settings
selected in 1001:4.
In 0128, choose a standard
sidetone level or
automatically calibrate an
extension's sidetone.
No
Are the ONS extension
timing parameters
acceptable?
No
In 0115, set the various
ASTU PCB timers.
Yes
In 0116:1-10 check the
criteria for DTMF tones
received at the SLT.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 467
Features N-Z
Single Line Telephones
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ (384i Only) 0005 - Extension Circuit Type
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Program all on-premise 500/2500 type single line telephones with circuit type 3. Program all 2-OPX
Modules with circuit type 9.
0115 - Analog Station (ASTU PCB) Timers
Set various timing parameters for the Analog Station PCBs. The entries you make in this program affect
all ASTU PCBs installed.
0116 - Tone Detection Setup
Use Items 1-10 to set the criteria for the DTMF tones received at a single line telephone.
0118 - Extension CODEC Gain Type Setup
Assign transmit and receive levels to the five analog extension CODEC gain types. You assign CODEC
gain types to extensions in Program 1001 Item 4.
(384i Only) 0128 - Analog Station (ASTU PCB) Sidetone Level
Set the sidetone level for analog extensions. You can choose between the preset levels or have the system
automatically calibrate an extension for optimum sidetone. Turn to "0129 - Analog Trunk (ATRU PCB)
Sidetone Setting" to set the sidetone levels for analog trunks.
(384i Only) 0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
If the system has 2500 type (DTMF) single line extensions, allocate at least one CDTU block for analog
extension DTMF reception (entry 1).
Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers (i.e., DTU blocks):
•
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A), Item 57: Continued Dialing
Set option to ’0’ to prevent dual DTMF tones when using Continued Dialing.
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 1: Telephone Signaling Type
Enter 0 if single line phone is a 500 type (dial pulse). Enter 1 if single line telephone is a 2500 type (DTMF).
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 4: CODEC Gain Type
Select the CODEC gain type you want the extension to use. This sets the transmit and receive levels
of the phone. Set the levels for CODEC gain type 1-5 in Program 0118.
Type 1: Transmit and Receive = 0 dB
Type 2: Transmit and Receive = -5 dB
Type 3: Transmit and Receive = -3 dB
Type 4: Transmit and Receive = +3 dB
Type 5: Transmit and Receive = + 5 dB
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 5: Terminal Type
Enter 0 for normal 500/2500 type telephones. Enter 1 if a Voice Mail port (refer to "Voice Mail" for more).
1001 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part A), Item 6: Intercom Ring Cycle for 500/2500 Sets
This option works with Program 1008 Item 4 to determine ringing for single line telephones. Refer to the
Single Line Ring Options chart below.
Single Line Ring Options
When you use these
settings . . .
Calls ring like this . . .
Program
1001 Item 6
Program
1008 Item 4
Transferred Trunk
Call
Direct Inward Line
Intercom Call
0
0
Long ring followed by
short pause
2 short rings followed
by a pause
1 second on followed
by 1 second off
1
0
1 second on followed
by 1 second off
1 second on followed
by 1 second off
1 second on followed
by 1 second off
0
1
Continuous ringing
Continuous ringing
Continuous ringing
1
1
1 second on followed
by 1 second off
Continuous ringing
Continuous ringing
468 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Single Line Telephones
Single Line Ring Options
When you use these
settings . . .
Calls ring like this . . .
Program
1001 Item 6
Program
1008 Item 4
Transferred Trunk
Call
Direct Inward Line
Intercom Call
0
2
Long ring followed by
short pause
Short ring followed by
long pause
Short ring followed by
long pause
1
2
1 second on followed
by 1 second off
Short ring followed by
long pause
Short ring followed by
long pause
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 1005 - Class of Service
➣
Assign a unique Class of Service for Dual OPX phones only when using Continued Dialing.
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 4: Ring Cycle for Keysets
This option works with Program 1001 Item 6 to determine ringing for single line telephones. Refer to the
Single Line Ring Options chart above.
Related Features
Single line telephone users have access to the following features:
Department Step Calling
Abbreviated Dialing
Directed Call Pickup
Account Codes
Do Not Disturb
Alarm
Door Box
Automatic Route Selection
Flash
Barge In
Forced Trunk Disconnect
Call Forwarding
Group Call Pickup
Call Forwarding with Follow
Hold
Me
Intercom
Call Forwarding/DND Override
Handsfree Answerback/
Call Waiting/Camp On with
Forced Intercom Ringing
Split
Last Number Redial
Callback
Line Preference
Central Office Calls, Answering
Meet Me Conference
Central Office Calls, Placing
Meet Me Paging
Conference
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Department Calling
Message Waiting
Night Service
Off Hook Signaling
Paging
PBX Compatibility
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Ringdown Extension
Save Number Dialed
Selectable Display Messages
Toll Restriction
Transfer
Trunk Queuing and Camp On
Voice Mail
Voice Over
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Refer to the individual features for additional descriptive, programming and operational information.
Operation
Refer to the individual features listed in the Related Features chart above.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 469
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Station Message Detail Recording
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
Available.
The RD/COST field and Call Costing
is only available in Base or
EXCPRU software prior to 4.02.
Expanded ACCOUNT column is
expanded to 16 digits in Base or
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Year 2000 Compliance: 124i is
unaffected by the Year 2000 date
change as the system uses a 2-digit
date code entry. Future releases will
use a 4-digit date code entry.
384i ☞
-
-
-
Available.
The RD/COST field and Call Costing
is only available in system software
prior to 3.07.10.
The ACCOUNT column is expanded
to 16 digits in 3.07.10 or higher.
Year 2000 Compliance: 384i is
unaffected by the Year 2000 date
change as prior to 3.07.25, a 2-digit
date code entry is used. With 3.07.25
or higher, a 4-digit date code entry is
used.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the system’s trunk calls. Typically, the record
outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection device. SMDR allows you to monitor
the usage at each extension and trunk. This makes charge-back and traffic management easier.
SMDR provides the following options:
Abandoned Call Reporting
The SMDR report includes calls that rang into the system but were unanswered (i.e., abandoned).
SMDR can include all abandoned calls or only those abandoned calls that rang longer than the specified
duration. The Abandoned Call Report helps you keep track of lost business.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
470 FEATURES
Blocked Call Reporting
When Toll Restriction blocks a call, you can have SMDR print the blocked call information. Or, you can
have SMDR exclude these types of calls. With Blocked Call Reporting, you can better customize Toll
Restriction for the site’s application.
Call Costing
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, the SMDR report can show costing information for long
distance calls. Call costing does not apply to systems without ARS. Use costing when you need to set
up call accounting.
Customized Date Format
The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats: American, European or Japanese.
Set the format for your preference.
Transferred Call Tracking
SMDR shows each extension’s share of a transferred call. If an outside call is transferred among four extensions, SMDR shows how long each of the callers stayed on the call.
Data Call Tracking
Data Call Tracking can log the system’s internal data calls. Since SMDR normally logs external (trunk)
data calls, Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of data terminal activity.
Digit Counting
With Digit Counting, SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls. For example, if the digit count is
nine, SMDR won’t include toll calls within the home area code. Digit Counting permits SMDR to include only the types of calls you want to monitor.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Description (Cont’d)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Digit Masking
Digit Masking lets you "X" out portions of the number dialed on the SMDR report. A digit mask of
seven, for example, masks out all exchange codes (NNXs) and local addresses. Digit Masking makes it
easier to keep track of calling patterns, without having to interpret each individual number. You can also
use Digit Masking to block out access and security codes.
Duration Monitoring
SMDR can include calls of any duration, or only those that last longer than the interval you specify. If
you want to keep track of all trunk activity, use a short duration. To keep track of only significant usage,
use a longer duration.
Extension Exclusion
You can selectively exclude extensions from the SMDR report. This ensures privacy for high-profile callers. For example, the company attorney negotiating a merger may not want his calls to show up on an inhouse report.
PBX Call Reporting
If you system is behind a PBX, you can have SMDR monitor all traffic into the PBX or just calls placed
over PBX trunks. The SMDR record can include all PBX calls (including calls to PBX extensions) or
just calls that include the PBX trunk access code.
Serial and Parallel SMDR Communication
The system is compatible with both serial and parallel SMDR devices. This gives you many SMDR output options. For example, you can output the SMDR report to a high speed parallel printer or send it to
disk through a PC’s serial port.
Trunk Exclusion
Use Trunk Exclusion to exclude certain trunks not subject to per-call charges (like WATS lines) from the
SMDR report. This makes call accounting easier, since you review only those calls with variable costs.
Usage Summaries
SMDR can automatically print daily, weekly and monthly call activity summaries. Each summary includes the total number of regular trunk calls and ISDN trunk calls, and the costs for each type. The
daily report prints every day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sunday night at midnight. The
monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month.
Extension Name or Number
The SMDR report can include an extension’s name or extension number. Choose the method that makes
it easier for you to track call usage.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 471
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Description (Cont’d)
Sample SMDR Report (384i Prior to 3.07.10 and 124i Prior to Base/EXCPRU 4.02)
09/01/96 PAGE 001
02
03
04
05
CLASS
POT
POT
POT
PIN
TIME
10:44
10:46
10:47
10:48
LINE
LINE 001
LINE 001
LINE 001
LINE 002
DURATION STATION
00:00:30 STA 324
00:00:45 STA 324
00:00:29 STA 318
00:01:39
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
ALB
POT
ALB
POT
ALB
BRD
ALB
BRD
ALB
10:50
10:52
10:52
10:55
10:56
10:56
10:56
10:56
10:56
02
LINE
02
LINE
02
LINE
02
LINE
02
00:01:40
00:00:00
00:00:16
00:00:00
00:00:23
00:00:00
00:00:09
00:00:00
00:00:08
002
002
002
002
DIALLED No./CLI RD/COST ACCOUNT
12039265400
0
18874521
0
12039265441
0
NO ANSWER
STA 324
0
STA 324
0
STA 324
120366541233
0
STA 324
181477445236
0
Sample SMDR Report (384i 3.07.10 or higher)
09/01/97 PAGE 001
02
03
04
05
CLASS
POT
POT
POT
PIN
TIME
10:44
10:46
10:47
10:48
LINE
LINE 001
LINE 001
LINE 001
LINE 002
DURATION STATION
00:00:30 STA 324
00:00:45 STA 324
00:00:29 STA 318
00:01:39
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
ALB
POT
ALB
POT
ALB
BRD
ALB
BRD
ALB
10:50
10:52
10:52
10:55
10:56
10:56
10:56
10:56
10:56
02
LINE
02
LINE
02
LINE
02
LINE
02
00:01:40
00:00:00
00:00:16
00:00:00
00:00:23
00:00:00
00:00:09
00:00:00
00:00:08
472 FEATURES
002
002
002
002
DIALED No./CLI
12039265400
18874521
12039265441
ACCOUNT
8841
0
0
NO ANSWER
STA 324
0
STA 324
0
STA 324
120366541233
0
STA 324
181477445236
0
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Description (Cont’d)
Definitions
Call Record Number
CLASS
TIME
LINE
DURATION
STATION
DIALLED No.
OR
DIALLED No./CLI
COST
SMDR record number (consecutive)
Type of call (see Class Definitions below)
Time call placed or answered. (For Transferred calls, shows
time user picked up Transfer.)
Trunk number used for call
How long call lasted. (For Transferred calls, shows how
long user was on call after answering the Transfer.)
Extension number of call "owner" (i.e., extension that first
placed or answered call) (For Transferred calls, there can be
more than one owner - depending on how many extensions
shared the call.)
For outgoing calls, the number dialed
For outgoing calls, the number dialed or, for incoming calls,
the Caller ID information
For systems with ARS, indicates the call cost
OR
ACOUNT
Class Definitions
POT
POTA
PIN
ALB
BRD
PTRS
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Account Code number entered by extension user
Outgoing trunk call
Outgoing trunk call placed using Toll Restriction Override
Incoming trunk call
All lines in group are busy (group number follows TIME field)
Call blocked due to Toll Restriction
Transferred call
FEATURES 473
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Description (Cont’d)
SMDR Report Format (384i Prior to 3.07.10 or
124i Base/EXCPRU Prior to 4.02)
Character Position
Header Line 1
1-62
63-70
71
72-75
76
77-79
CR & LF
Header Line 2
1-3
4-8
9,10
11-14
15-18
19-22
23-26
27-34
35,36
37-43
44-46
47-53
54
55-61
62,63
64-70
71
72-78
CR & LF
LF
SMDR Record
1,2
3
4-6
7-9
10-14
15
16-23
24-26
27-34
35
36-43
44-46
47-62
63
64-70
71
72-80
474 FEATURES
Field Definition
Spaces
MM/DD/YY
Space
PAGE
Space
Report page number (e.g., 001)
Carriage return and line feed
Spaces
CLASS
Spaces
TIME
Spaces
LINE
Spaces
DURATION
Spaces
STATION
Spaces
DIALED
Space
No./CLI
Spaces
RD/COST
Space
ACCOUNT
Carriage return and line feed
Line feed
Call record number (e.g., 01, 02)
Space
Call type (e.g., POT for outgoing)
Spaces
Time in 24 hour clock (HH:MM)
Space
LINE, space, line number (e.g., LINE 001)
Spaces
Call Duration (HH:MM:SS)
Space
Station number (STA, space, nnnn) or name
Spaces
Number dialed (16 digits maximum)
Space
Call cost
Space
(Space, Account code) or (NO, space, ANSWER)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Description (Cont’d)
SMDR Report Format (384i 3.07.10 or Higher or
124i Base/EXCPRU 4.02 or Higher)
Character Position
Header Line 1
1-62
63-70
71
72-75
76
77-79
CR & LF
Spaces
MM/DD/YY (384i 3.07.25 or higher = MM/DD/YYYY)
Space
PAGE
Space
Report page number (e.g., 001)
Carriage return and line feed
Header Line 2
1-3
4-8
9,10
11-14
15-18
19-22
23-26
27-34
35,36
37-43
44-46
47-53
54
55-61
62,63
64-78
CR & LF
LF
Spaces
CLASS
Spaces
TIME
Spaces
LINE
Spaces
DURATION
Spaces
STATION
Spaces
DIALLED
Space
No./CLI
Spaces
ACCOUNT
Carriage return and line feed
Line feed
SMDR Record
1,2
3
4-6
7-9
10-14
15
16-25
26
27-34
35
36-45
46
47-62
63
64-79
Call record number (e.g., 01, 02)
Space
Call type (e.g., POT for outgoing)
Spaces
Time in 24 hour clock (HH:MM)
Space
LINE, space, line number (e.g., LINE 001)
Space
Call Duration (HH:MM:SS)
Space
Station number (STA, space, nnnn) or name
Space
Number dialed (16 digits maximum)
Space
Account number or NO ANSWER
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Field Definition
FEATURES 475
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Description (Cont’d)
Summary Reports
OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY
FOR DAY OF nn/nn/nn
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN
NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS
NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS
CALLS:
CALLS:
COSTED:
COSTED:
0
0
0
0
COST:
COST:
0
0
OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY
FOR WEEK ENDING nn/nn/nn
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN
NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS
NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS
CALLS:
CALLS:
COSTED:
COSTED:
49
0
0
0
COST:
COST:
0
0
OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY
FOR MONTH ENDING nn/nn/nn
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN
NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS
NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS
CALLS:
CALLS:
COSTED:
COSTED:
49
0
0
0
COST:
COST:
0
0
Conditions
(A.) The SMDR report does not include voice Intercom calls.
(B.) SMDR requires the installation of a DCI (Data Communications Interface). Once you designate a DCI
for SMDR, you cannot use that extension for placing and answering other data calls. SMDR and the Traffic Management Reports should not use the same DCI.
(C.) The SMDR call buffer stores 320 calls. The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavailable.
When the buffer fills, each new call is not recorded. The alarm display telephone assigned in Program
0011 (normally extension 301) shows "SMDR Buffer Full," indicating that the buffer is full. The 124i
also includes a Buffer Overflow message on the SMDR report.
Default Setting
Disabled.
476 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming
Start
Is DCI installed,
programmed and
functional?
Yes
Go to
Programming
Flowchart on the
next page.
No
Install DCI. First DCI module installed is
number 1. First 3DCI installed is number
145. See Data Communications Interface
feature.
In Program 1202, set port type to 2
(Centronics parallel).
(384i Only) In Program 0005,
use circuit type 2 for keyset
with DCI or type 4 for 3DCI.
Parallel
In Program 1201, Type 1, Item 1, register
65, set DCI communications parameters
to match the SMDR device.
Serial (DTE)
Is SMDR device
serial (DTE) or
parallel interface?
In Program 1206, initialize
the DCI port used for
SMDR.
In Program 1202, set port type
to 1 (RS-232).
In Program 0503, assign an unused
extension number (e.g., 500) to the DCI
port. By default, port 1 = 601.
Will SMDR printer also
be used for system
reports?
In Program 0007, enter the SMDR
DCI port number as the system report
port number.
Yes
No
Will SMDR printer also be used
for alarm reports?
Yes
In Program 0008, enter the SMDR
DCI port number as the alarm report
port number.
No
Go to
Programming
Flowchart on the
next page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 477
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from previous
page.
American
In Program
0130, enter 0.
Do you want American,
European or Japanese
Japanese
date format in the SMDR
header?
European
In Program
0130, enter 2.
Japanese
In Program
0130, enter 1.
In Program 0901 Item 13 for each trunk,
enter 0 to include trunk on SMDR; 1 to
exclude trunk from SMDR.
In Program 1008 Item 1 for each
extension, enter 1 to include
extension on SMDR; 0 to exclude
extension from SMDR.
Selected
Selected
Should SMDR record
include information for all
trunks or just selected
trunks?
Should SMDR record
include information for all
extensions or just selected
extensions?
All
All
In Program 0901 Item 13
for all trunks, enter 0.
In Program 1008 Item 1 for
all extensions, enter 1.
Go to
Programming
Flowchart on the
next page.
478 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued from
previous page.
In Program 0404 Item
3, assign the SMDR
DCI port.
In Program 0404 Item 4, enter
minimum duration of call that
will print on the SMDR report
(1-65535 seconds).
No
In Program 0404 Item 5, enter how
long an unanswered call must ring
(1-65535 seconds) before SMDR
logs it as "NO ANSWER."
No
Should calls of any
duration print on
the SMDR report?
Should all
unanswered (i.e.,
"NO ANSWER" )
calls print on the
SMDR report?
To check a keyset's DCI port number,
press CHECK -- then DND.
Yes
In Program 0404 Item
4, enter 0.
Yes
In Program 0404 Item 5, enter 0.
To have only long distance calls print,
for example, enter 8.
In Program 0404 Item 2, enter the
minimum number of digits a user
must dial (1-24) before system will
include call on SMDR report.
No
Should all outgoing
calls print on the
SMDR report,
regardless of the
number of digits
dialed?
Yes
In Program 0404 Item 2, enter 0.
For example, you can use this feature to
block the printing of security codes.
In Program 0404 Item 1, enter the
number of digits you want to block. If
you enter 8, for example, SMDR Xs out
the last 8 digits dialed.
Yes
Do you want to block
(i.e., "X" out) any of the
digits on the SMDR
report.
No
In Program 0404 Item 1, enter 0.
Go to
Programming
Flowchart on the
next page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 479
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0404:6 Print
Item 1, enter 0.
No
In 0404:6 Print
Item 2, enter 0.
Access
Code
Calls
In 0404:6 Print
Item 3, enter 0.
In 0404:6 Print
Item 9, enter 0.
If your system is behind a PBX,
do you want SMDR to include all
calls to the PBX or just calls using
the PBX trunk access code?
Do you want the SMDR
report to include internal
data calls?
No
In 0404:6, enter 0 to disable the
following reports:
Print Item 4 - Daily Summary
Print Item 5 - Weekly Summary
Print Item 6 - Monthly Summary
In 0404:6 Print
Item 8, enter 1.
Do you want the SMDR
report to include calls
blocked by Toll Restriction?
No
No
Extension
name
Do you want to
print the SMDR
report summaries?
Should the SMDR
report include
incoming calls?
Should the SMDR report
include extension names
or numbers?
Yes
In 0404:6 Print
Item 1, enter 1.
All Calls
In 0404:6 Print
Item 2, enter 1.
Yes
In 0404:6 Print
Item 3, enter 1.
In 0404:6, enter 1 to enable the
following reports:
Print Item 4 - Daily Summary
Print Item 5 - Weekly Summary
Print Item 6 - Monthly Summary
Yes
Yes
Extension
number
In 0404:6 Print
Item 8, enter 0.
In 0404:6 Print
Item 9, enter 1.
Stop
480 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ (384i Only) 0005 - Extension Circuit Type
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Assign circuit type 2 for keysets with DCI. Assign circuit type 4 for 3DCI module.
0007 - System Report Port Setup
If the SMDR printer will also be used for system reports, enter the SMDR DCI software port number as
the system report port number.
0008 - Alarm Report Port Setup
If the SMDR printer will also be used for alarm reports, enter the SMDR DCI software port number as
the alarm report port number.
0130 - Date Format for SMDR and System Reports
Set the date format for SMDR (0=American, 1=European or 2=Japanese).
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 1: Omit (Mask) Digits
Enter the number of digits (1-24) you want SMDR to block (i.e., "X" out). Enter 0 not to block any digits.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 2: Minimum Number of SMDR Digits
Enter the minimum number of digits a user must dial (1-24) before the system includes a call on the
SMDR report. Enter 0 to include all outgoing calls, regardless of the number of digits dialed.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 3: SMDR Printer Output Port
Enter the software port number of the DCI assigned to the SMDR printer.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 4: Minimum Call Duration
Enter the minimum duration of a call (1-65535) that will print on the SMDR report. Enter 0 to have calls
of any duration print.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 5: Minimum Ringing Time
Enter how long an unanswered call must ring (1-65535) before SMDR logs it as "No Answer). Enter 0
to allow all "No Answer" calls to print.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Print Item 1 (Toll Restricted Call)
Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include calls blocked by Toll Restriction. Enter 0 to exclude
blocked calls.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Print Item 2 (Extension Calls)
If system is behind a PBX, enter 1 to have SMDR include all calls to the PBX. Enter 0 to have SMDR include only calls dialed using PBX trunk access code.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Print Item 3 (Extension Data Call)
Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include internal data calls. Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report
to exclude internal data calls.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6: Print Item 4 (Daily Summary), Print Item 5 (Weekly Summary)
and Print Item 6 (Monthly Summary)
Enter 1 to enable a summary report. Enter 0 to disable a summary report. The daily report prints every
day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sunday night at midnight. The monthly report prints at
midnight on the last day of the month.
0404- SMDR Options, Item 6, Print Item 8 (Incoming Calls)
Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to include incoming calls. Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to
exclude incoming calls.
0404 - SMDR Options, Item 6, Print Item 9 (Print Name or Number)
Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to include the extension’s name. Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include the extension’s number.
0503 - DCI Extension Number
Assign an unused extension number (e.g., 500) to the DCI port assigned to SMDR.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 13: SMDR Print Out
For each trunk, enter 0 if trunk’s calls should appear on SMDR report. Enter 1 if trunk’s calls should not
appear on SMDR report.
1008 - Basic Extension Port Setup (Part B), Item 1: SMDR Printout
For each extension, enter 1 if extension’s calls should appear on SMDR report. Enter 0 if extension’s
calls should not appear on SMDR report.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 481
Features N-Z
Station Message Detail Recording
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 1201 - DCI Setup, Type 1, Item 1, Register 65
➣
➣
Set the DCI communications parameters to match the SMDR device.
1202 - DCI Port Type
Set this option to 1 if SMDR device is serial. Set this option to 2 if SMDR device is Centronics parallel.
1206 - Initialize DCI
Initialize the DCI port selected for SMDR.
Related Features
PBX Compatibility
To use the PBX Call Reporting option, program system for behind PBX operation.
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Traffic Management Reports and SMDR should not use the sameDCI port.
Transfer
The extension that initially answers or places a call "owns" the SMDR record for the call. For example,
if extension 318 transfers a trunk call to extension 320, the SMDR record assigns the entire call to extension 318. Extension 320 does not show on the SMDR record as part of the transferred call.
Year 2000 Compliance
The SMDR page and summary banners show four digis for the year (e.g., 2001).
Operation
Once installed and programmed, SMDR operation is automatic.
482 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
-
Available — Basic T1 capabilities
require EXCPRU version 2.18 or
higher. T1 DID and tie lines require
a DTDU PCB.
ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. It is not
available in Base software.
ANI/DNIS routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant requires
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher. Routing by
trunk to a specific VAU messages is
also available with EXCPRU 4.02 or
higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision for
T1 tie trunks requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher. See page
844.
Voice Mail Caller ID with
ANI/DNIS requires EXCPRU
version 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
Available — Customizing the CODEC
Gain Types requires system software
3.04 or higher.
-
ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires
system software 3.06.02 or higher.
-
ANI/DNIS routing to the VAU
Automated Attendant (page 493)
requires system software 3.06.09 or
higher. Routing by trunk to a specific
VAU message requires system
software 3.07.10 or higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision for
T1 tie trunks requires system
software 3.05.15 or higher. See page
844.
Voice Mail Caller ID with
ANI/DNIS requires system software
3.06.14 or higher.
-
-
The T1/PRI Interface PCB gives the system T1 trunking capability. This PCB uses a single universal slot and
provides up to 24 trunk circuits. In additional to providing digital-quality trunking, the T1/PRI Interface PCB allows you to have maximum trunking capability with fewer PCBs. This in turn makes more universal slots available for other functions.
You can program each T1/PRI PCB for any combination of the following trunks:
CO loop start
CO ground start
Direct Inward Dialing1
Tie lines2
•
•
•
•
When installed in 384i, the T1/PRI Interface PCB uses the first block of 24 consecutive trunks. For example, if
you have an ATRU PCB installed for trunks 1-8, the T1/PRI Interface PCB will automatically use trunks 9-32. If
you have ATRU PCBs installed for trunks 1-8 and 17-24, the T1/PRI PCB will use trunks 25-48. The T1/PRI Interface cannot use trunks 9-16 (even if available) since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks.
1
Bidirectional DID trunks are currently not supported.
2
Two-wire (four-lead) type 1 tie lines (FIC TL11M) only.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 483
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Description (Cont’d)
ANI/DNIS Compatibility
The system is compatible with telco’s T1 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) and Dialed Number Information Service (DNIS) services. A complement to Caller ID service, ANI/DNIS Compatibility provides:
Selectable Receive Format
•
You can set up the system for compatibility with any combination of ANI, DNIS and Dialed Number
(Address) data provided by the telco.
Flexible Routing
•
Based on the data received, the system can route the incoming ANI/DNIS call to:
– An extension
– An ACD or Voice Mail master extension number
– The VAU Automated Attendant and play a VAU message to the caller (requires 384i system software
3.06.09 or higher - 124i system requires EXCPRU 4.03 or higher). Refer to page 493 for the specifics.
– A Department Group pilot number
– A trunk Ring Group
Route According to DID Translation Table or Separate ANI/DNIS Routing Tables
•
ANI/DNIS Data Displayed as Caller ID Data
•
Data Error and Unanswered Call Handling
•
If a call can’t be completed, send it to a predetermined Ring Group or play supervisory tones to the caller.
Voice Mail Caller ID
•
NVM-Series Voice Mail can use ANI/DNIS information to identify the outside caller that left a message
in a user’s mailbox. When the message recipient presses TI after hearing a message, they hear the time
the message was sent and the outside telephone number of the message sender.
Conditions
(A.) T1 Trunking requires a T1/PRI Interface PCB and a customer-provided CSU/DSU to interface with the
telco. Consult your sales representative and the system Hardware Manual for additional details.
(B.) ANI/DNIS Compatibility requires the use of system DTMF receivers on CDTU A/B PCBs. When all
receivers are busy, the incoming ANI/DNIS call waits for a receiver to become available.
(C.) The ANI/DNIS/Address data received from the telco can be up to 10 digits long. If the system receives more than 10 digits, it interprets the data as an error and handles the call according to the setting in 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 8: Routing on ANI/DNIS Error.
Default Setting
Disabled.
484 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming
Start
In 2601, enter 1 for each
ground start trunk.
In 2602, enter 2 for
each PCB.
In 0136, do not
change the T1
Trunk Timers.
Ground start
Are the T1 trunks
loop start or gound
start?
External
Should the T1/PRI
Interface PCB use
internal or external
(telco) clock?
Yes
Do the T1/PRI Interface
PCBs timing
parameters match the
requirements of the
telco?
Do you want to test the
T1 trunk circuits?
Loop start
Internal
No
Yes
In 2601, enter 0 for each
loop start trunk.
In 2602, enter 1 for
each PCB.
In 0136, change the
T1 Trunk Timers.
Go to 0009 Item 10 to
test T1 circuits.
No
Check 0901 Items 14-17 for
compatibility with the
connected telco service.
Is the T1 Trunk's
gain (amplification)
adequate?
Yes
Continued
on
following
page.
Yes
Note: All other trunk programming
must also be done.
No
In 0901 Item 3,
assign a different
CODEC Gain Type.
If required, customize the
CODEC Gain Type transmit and
receive levels in 0117.
Does T1 Trunk use
ANI/DNIS services?
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 485
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming (Cont’d)
Additional Programming for ANI/DNIS
Continued
from
previous
page.
(384i Only)
Are any DTMF
receivers reserved for
DTMF reception?
No
IN 0303, reserve at least
one CDTU DTMF
receiver for DTMF
reception (entry 2).
Yes
ANI/DNIS trunks must be
immediate start or wink start
T1 trunks with E&M signaling.
In 0901:14-17, assign
service type 6 to all
ANI/DNIS T1 trunks.
Are the ANI/DNIS
Service Options
set up?
Under the Programming heading
in the text, check:
0136: T1 Trunk Timers
and
0901: Additional ANI/DNIS
Recommended Settings
In 0905, group ANI/
DNIS trunks into Trunk
Groups as required.
In 2404, review the data
for each item and
configure the service
options (1-15).
No
Yes
In 0924, assign ANI/
DNIS Service Options
(1-15) to trunks.
If using the Caller ID Table, you'll use
programs 2401 and 2402.
If using the DID Table, you'll use
programs 1805, 1806 and 1808.
In 2301, enter 1 for
wink start signaling.
Do you want ANI/
DNIS to route to the
VAU Automated
Attendant?
Yes
Continued
on next
page.
No
Stop
486 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming (Cont’d)
ANI/DNIS Routing to the VAU Automated Attendant
Continued
from
previous
page.
Continued
on next
page.
DID
Table
Do you want to route to
the Automated Attendant
using the Caller ID Table,
the DID Table or directly?
Directly
Continued
on next
page.
Caller ID
In the name
portion of 2402,
enter 127 (384i)
or 15 (124i).
Number
Dialed &
Trunk
Should VAU routing be
based on the number
dialed, or the number
dialed and the incoming
trunk used?
Number
Dialed
In the name portion of
2402, enter 882 + VAU
message (01-16).
In 2205, enter the VAU
message (01-16) for
each trunk.
In 1803, enter 127
(384i) or 15 (for 124i) for
each trunk.
In 2404:3, enter 1.
In 2404:4, enter 0.
In 2404:7, define which
portion of the Caller ID
table (programmed in
2402) ANI/DNIS will use.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 487
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 2205, enter the
VAU message (0116) for each trunk.
Directly
In 2404:3, enter 0
to bypass the
routing tables.
In the TRF portion of
1806, enter 882 + VAU
message (01-16).
Do you want to route to
the Automated
Attendant using the DID
Table or directly?
DID Table
Number
Dialed &
Trunk
Should VAU routing be
based on the number
dialed, or the number
dialed and the incoming
trunk used?
Number
Dialed
In the TRF portion of
1806, enter 882 + VAU
message (01-16).
In 2205, enter the
VAU message (0116) for each trunk.
In 1803, enter 127
(384i) or 15 (124i)
for each trunk.
In 2403:3, enter 1.
In 2404:4, enter 2.
Stop
488 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
telemanuals.com
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0009 - Loop Back Testing, Item 10: T1 Test
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
Once installed, use this program to test the T1 trunks.
0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types assigned in 0901 Item 3.
0136 - T1 Trunk Timers
Set various T1 trunk timers for compatibility with the local telco. For ANI/DNIS, the following settings
in Program 0136 are recommended:
Item 59: Clock Select = 2 (External - provided by Central Office)
•
Item 60: Distance Between PCB and SCU = 0
•
Item 61: Frame Type = 1 (D3/D4)
•
Item 62: Zero Suppression = 2 (AMI/ZCS)
•
0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Setup
For ANI/DNIS, reserve at least one CTDU DTMF receiver for DTMF reception (entry 2).
Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers (i.e., DTU blocks):
•
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 3: CODEC Gain Type
Assign a CODEC Gain Type to each trunk. This sets the amount of gain (amplification) for the selected
trunk. Customize the Gain Type transmit and receive levels in 0117.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type
For each T1 trunk, set the Trunk Service Type to match the telco’s connected T1 service.
For each T1 trunk that should support ANI/DNIS service, enter 6. (ANI/DNIS trunks must be immediate
start or wink start T1 trunks with E&M signaling.)
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A): Additonal ANI/DNIS Recommended Settings
For ANI/DNIS, the following additional settings in Program 0901 are recommended:
Item 1: Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) = 2 (DTMF)
•
Item 2: Ring Detect Type = 1 (Immediate)
•
Item 5: Flash Type = 0 (Open Loop Flash)
•
Item 6: Flash for Time Flash or Disconnect = 0 (Timed Flash)
•
Items 7-10: Behind PBX = 0 (Stand alone)
•
Item 11: Dial Tone Detection for Manually Dialed Calls = 1 (Outgoing calls allowed)
•
Item 18: Outgoing Calls = 1 (Allowed)
•
Item 25: Tie Line Dial Tone (Immediate Start) = 1 (Enabled)
•
Item 26: Tie Line Dial Tone (Wink Start) = 1 (Enabled)
•
Item 27: DID Signaling Type = 1 (DTMF)
•
0905 - Trunk Groups
For ANI/DNIS, place all your ANI/DNIS trunks in Trunk Groups as required.
0924 - ANI/DNIS Service Option Number Assignment
For each ANI/DNIS trunk, assign a Service Option Number (1-115) for each Night Service mode.
You define ANI/DNIS Service Option Numbers in 2404.
2301 - DID/E&M Start Signaling
For each ANI/DNIS trunk, set the start signaling mode to 1 (wink start).
2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options
For each ANI/DNIS Service Option (1-15), program the option data from the table below.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 489
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming (Cont’d)
Program - 2404 ANI/DNIS Service Options
Option
Description
Range
Default
0-5
0 (Address)
Item 1
ANI/DNIS Receive Format
Use this option to specify the format of the ANI/DNIS
data received from the telco. Make sure your entry is
compatible with the service the telco provides. (The
character * indicates a delimiter.)
0 = Address (called number without delimiters)
1 = *ANI*1
2 = *DNIS*
3 = *ANI*Address*1
4 = *ANI*DNIS*1
5 = *DNIS*ANI*1
1
Select one of these options for Voice Mail Caller ID.
Item 2
Delimiter Dial Code
This option defines the character telco uses as a delimiter
(see entries 1-9 in Item 1 above). Valid entries are 0-9, #
and *.
0-9, # and *
*
Item 3
Routing Search Criteria (Data Source)
This option specifies the source of the data the system
uses to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls. The choices are:
0-2
0 (No routing)
0 = No Routing.
The system assumes an error has occurred and routes
according to the setting in Item 8.
1 = Routes on Received DNIS or Address Data.
The data source is the received DNIS or address data.
This option requires that Item 1 be 0 or 2-5.
2 = Routes on Received ANI Data.
The data source is the received ANI data. This option
requires that Item 1 be 1 or 3-5.
490 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Program - 2404 ANI/DNIS Service Options
Option
Item 4
Description
Route Data
The option sets how the system uses the route data
(gathered in Item 3) to route incoming ANI/DNIS calls.
The choices are:
Range
Default
0-2
0 (from Caller
ID Table
Name field)
0, 1
1 (Caller ID
display on)
0 = Dial Data (From Caller ID Table Name Field)
The system uses the Caller ID Table specified in Item 7
below for inbound routing. The data in the Caller ID
Table Name field is used as dial data for routing. For this
entry, the Name field entry can be an extension number, a
Department Group pilot number or the Voice Mail or
ACD master number.
1 = Trunk Ring Group (From Caller ID Table
Name Field)
Like entry 0 above, the system uses the Caller ID Table
specified in Items 6 and 7 below for inbound routing. The
data in the Caller ID Table Name field is used as dial data
for routing. For this entry, the Name field entry must be a
Trunk Ring Group number (1-128).
2 = DID Translation Table
With this option, the system uses the DID Translation
Tables set up in Programs 1805 and 1806 for inbound
ANI/DNIS routing. In addition, use Program 1808 to
associate the ANI/DNIS Trunk Group with the DID
Translation Table you want to use. Refer to the Direct
Inward Dialing feature for more on setting up DID
Translation Tables.
Item 5
ANI Displayed as Caller ID
Use this option to set if ANI data should appear on
telephone displays as part of Caller ID display. The
options are:
0 = Caller ID Off
The system does not search the Caller ID table for a
name. Instead, the telephone display will show the name
programmed into the DID Translation Table (Program
1806) used if Item 4 above is 2. Otherwise, no name
displays.
1 = Caller ID On
The telephone’s display will show the ANI name as
Caller ID data for the incoming ANI/DNIS call. This can
occur if:
– The ANI number received has a name associated
with it entered into the Caller ID Table addresses
specified in Item 6.
– The format selected in Item 1 must include an
ANI number.
– Program 0406 Item 123 (Caller ID Display) must
be 1 (enabled).
Also select this option to enable Voice Mail Caller ID.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 491
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Program - 2404 ANI/DNIS Service Options
Option
492 FEATURES
Description
Range
Default
Item 6
ANI Caller ID Table Setup
Use this option to define which part of the Caller ID
Table set up in Program 2402 the system will use for
ANI/DNIS Caller ID lookups. This is required if Items 4
and 5 above are 1 (Caller ID On). When you specify a
starting address and length, the system uses that part of
the table for lookups.
Start Address
= 000-999
Length =
0000-1000
Start Address
= 0000
Length = 1000
Item 7
ANI Routing Table Setup
Use this option to define which part of the Caller ID
Table set up in Program 2402 the system will use for
ANI/DNIS routing. When you specify a starting address
and length, the system uses that part of the table for
routing. If the incoming ANI/DNIS number data matches
the Number entry in the table, the system routes
according to the associated Name data. That data can be
an extension, Department Group pilot number, the Voice
Mail master number or a Trunk Ring Group (depending
on the setting in Item 4).
Start Address
= 000-999
Length =
0000-1000
Start Address
= 0000
Length = 0000
Item 8
Routing on ANI/DNIS Error
This option lets you determine how the system will
handle an ANI/DNIS call if a data error is detected in the
incoming data string. The options are:
0 = Play busy tone to caller
1 = Route the caller to the Ring Group specified in
Program 1803
0 or 1
1 (Use the
Program 1803
destination)
Item 9
Routing when Destination Busy or Unanswered
This option lets you determine how the system will
handle an ANI/DNIS call if the destination is busy or
doesn’t answer. The options are:
0 = System will play ringback or busy tone to the
caller - whichever is required.
1 = System will route the caller to the Ring Group
specified in Program 1803.
0 or 1
0 (Play busy
or ringback)
Item 10
Calling Number Address Length
When Item 1 = 0 (ANI/DNIS receive format is address),
use this option to specify the address length. The choices
are from 1 to 8 digits in length.
1-8
7
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 2601 - T1 Setup
➣
Designate each T1 trunk circuit for either loop start (0) or ground start (1) operation. For ANI/DNIS, the
recommended setting is 0 (loop start).
2602 - T1 Clock Source
For each PCB, set the clock source for internal system clock (1) or external telco clock (2). For
ANI/DNIS, the recommended setting is 2 (external).
ANI/DNIS Routing to the VAU Automated Attendant
Beginning with 384i software version 3.06.09 and 124i EXCPRU 4.02 software, ANI/DNIS calls can route to
the VAU Automated Attendant. In addition, you can specify the VAU message the ANI/DNIS caller hears when
the Automated Attendant answers. To program this option, choose either Methods A, B or C below.
Method A
➣ 2402 - Caller ID Table Entries
- VAU Routing Based on the Number Dialed
For the bins (addresses) used by ANI/DNIS, in the name portion enter 882 followed by the number of
the VAU Message the caller should hear (01-16). For example, to have ANI/DNIS route to the VAU
Automated Attendant and play message 10 to callers, select an available address and enter 88210 in
the name portion. The bins you use must correspond to the addresses specified in 2404 Item 7.
- VAU Routing Based on the Number Dialed and the Incoming Trunk Used
For the bins (addresses) used by ANI/DNIS, in the name portion enter 127 for 384i or 15 for 124i. For each
trunk in Program 2205 - OPA Message Assignment, enter the number of the VAU Message the caller
should hear (01-16) when the VAU Automated Attendant answers. Also, enter 127 for 384i or 15 for 124i
for each trunk in 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination. The bins you use must correspond to the addresses specified in 2404 Item 7.
➣ 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 3: Routing Search Criteria (Data Source)
Enter 1 to set the data source as the received DNIS or address data.
➣ 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 4: Route Data
Enter 0 to have the system use the Caller ID Table specified in 2404 Item 7.
➣ 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 7: ANI Routing Table Setup
Define which part of the Caller ID Table (programmed in 2402) the system will use for ANI/DNIS routing.
Method B
➣ 1806 - DID Translation Table Number Conversion
- VAU Routing Based on the Number Dialed
For the bins (addresses) used by ANI/DNIS, in the TRF portion enter 882 followed by the number of
the VAU Message the caller should hear (01-16). For example, to have ANI/DNIS route to the VAU
Automated Attendant and play message 10 to callers, select an available address and enter 88210 in
the name portion.
- VAU Routing Based on the Number Dialed and the Incoming Trunk Used
For the bins (addresses) used by ANI/DNIS, in the TRF portion enter 127 for 384i or 15 for 124i. For
each trunk in Program 2205 - OPA Message Assignment, enter the number of the VAU Message the
caller should hear (01-16) when the VAU Automated Attendant answers. Also, enter 127 for 384i or 15
for 124i for each trunk in 1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination.
➣ 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 3: Routing Search Criteria (Data Source)
Enter 1 to set the data source as the received DNIS or address data.
➣ 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 4: Route Data
Enter 2 to have the system use the DID Translation Tables set up in 1806 for routing.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 493
Features N-Z
T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
Programming (Cont’d)
Method C
When the trunk rings in and 2404 Item 3 = 0, the system looks to 2205 for routing data. If 2205 = 0 for the
trunk, the system uses the error handling specified in 2404 Item 8. If 2205 = 01-16, the system routes the caller
to the VAU Automated Attendant and plays the indicated message.
➣ 2205 - OPA Message Assignment
Make sure there is an OPA Message assigned (01-16) for each trunk you want the OPA Automated Attendant to answer.
➣ 2404 - ANI/DNIS Service Options, Item 3: Routing Search Criteria (Data Source)
Enter 0 to bypass the routing tables.
Related Features
"Central Office Calls, Answering" and "Central Office Calls, Placing"
You can use T1 trunks in place of standard analog trunks. The procedures for placing and answering calls
are the same for both types of trunks.
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
"Direct Inward Dialing (DID)"
The T1/PRI Interface PCB provides DID service. All programming parameters are the same as those
used for analog DID trunks (except for the additional T1/PRI Interface PCB settings).
"Tie Lines"
The T1/PRI Interface PCB provides tie line service. All programming parameters are the same as those
used for analog tie lines (except for the additional T1/PRI Interface PCB settings).
Operation
Refer to the following features:
"Central Office Calls, Answering"
"Central Office Calls, Placing"
"Direct Inward Dialing (DID)"
"Tie Lines"
494 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Description
124i ☞
-
The system allows either 8 fourparty conferences or 4 eight-party
conferences.
Enhanced Tandem Trunking requires
Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
384i ☞
-
Each DTU-A/C allows either 4
four-party conferences or 2 eightparty conferences per PCB.
Enhanced Tandem Trunking requires
system software 3.05.10 or higher.
Tandem Trunking allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a trunk-to-trunk Conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. The extension user
that established the Conference is not part of the conversation. The Conference continues until either outside
party hangs up. In addition, the extension user that set up the Conference can end the tandem call at any time.
Tandem Trunking could help an office manager, for example, put two outside sales people in touch. The office
manager could:
Answer a call from one salesperson
•
Place a call to the second salesperson
•
Set up the trunk-to-trunk Conference
•
Drop out of the call
•
The office manager could rejoin or terminate the Conference at any time.
In 384i system software 3.05.10 or higher, there are two methods for Tandem Trunking:
Method A — Set Up Without Transfer Key
•
An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) by using the CONF (TRF)
key for by dialing a two-digit service code (#8) instead.
Method B — Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
•
This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference with a call they have
placed on Hold. It uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem call.
Conditions
(A.) Tandem Trunking requires either loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or ground start trunks.
(B.) The maximum number of trunk-to-trunk conferences allowed is determined by the Conference feature
setup. See Programming below.
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 495
Features N-Z
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Programming (Cont’d)
Enhanced Tandem Trunking
Start
No
In 0308, assign the blocks on
the CDTU PCB for
entry 1.
Should the system have
Conference capability?
Yes
In 0308, assign the blocks on
the CDTU PCB for Conference
(entry 0).
Stop
Two
8-party
Should each CDTU PCB allow
four 4-party conferences or two
8-party conferences?
In 0302 Item 2, enter 1.
In 0406 Item 16, enter 0 to prevent
initiating Conference.
In 1005, assign Class of Service to
extensions.
No
In 0302 Item 2, enter 0.
Yes
(Optional for Method A) In 1006,
assign a function key for
Transfer (code 1077).
Stop
A
In 0402 Item 6, enter 1 to assign
CONF (TRF) for Conference.
Do you want Method A
(From Conference) or
Method B (On Hang Up)?
In 0406 Item 16, enter 1 to allow
initiating Conference.
In 0901 Item 31, enable (1) loop
supervision for each trunk that should
be able to use Tandem Trunking.
B
In 0406 Item 120, enter 1 to enable
Forced Trunk Disconnect.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 0419 Item 1, enter 1.
In 0901 Item 23, assign a new
CODEC Gain Type for
Unsupervised Conference calls.
Should an extension be
allowed to initiate a
Conference?
Four
4-party
No
When in a tandem call, are the
trunks's gains (volumes)
adequate?
In 0419 Items 1 and 2, enter 1.
Yes
Stop
If required, change the CODEC Gain Type
transmit and receive levels in 0131.
496 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Programming (Cont’d)
Tandem Trunking in Older Systems
Conference Section
Start
No
In 0308, assign the blocks on
the CDTU PCB for
entry 1.
Should the system have
Conference capability?
Yes
In 0308, assign the blocks on
the CDTU PCB for Conference
(entry 0).
Stop
Two
8-party
Should each CDTU PCB allow
four 4-party conferences or two
8-party conferences?
In 0302 Item 2, enter 1.
In 0406 Item 16, enter 0 to prevent
initiating Conference.
In 1005, assign Class of Service to
extensions.
No
Should an extension be
allowed to initiate a
Conference?
Four
4-party
In 0302 Item 2, enter 0.
Yes
In 0406 Item 16, enter 1 to allow
initiating Conference.
In 1005, assign Class of Service
extensions.
Stop
In 1006, assign a function key as a
Conference key (code 1016).
Tandem Trunking Section
In 0901 Item 31, enable (1) loop supervision for each
trunk that should be able to use Tandem Trunking.
In 0402 Items 2 and 6, enter 0.
In 0901 Item 23, assign a new
CODEC Gain Type for
Unsupervised Conference calls.
No
When in a tandem call, are the
trunks's gains (volumes)
adequate?
Yes
Stop
If required, change the CODEC Gain Type
transmit and receive levels in 0131.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 497
Features N-Z
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Programming (Cont’d)
Enhanced Tandem Trunking Method A — Tandem Trunking from Conference
➣ 0131 - Unsupervised Conf. CODEC Gain Setup
Set up the CODEC Gain Types for trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. Assign Gain Types to trunks
in 0901 Item 23.
➣ 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup, Item 2: Conference Setup
Set the Conference mode of each DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. The system allows either 4 four-party conferences (0) or 2 eight-party conferences (1) per PCB.
➣ 0308 - Conference Circuit Setup
Assign the circuits on the DTU-A or DTU-C PCBs as Conference circuits (0).
➣ 0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B), Item 6: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part B)
Enter 1 to enable the CONF (TRF) key for Conference.
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 16: Conference
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a Conference.
➣ 0419 - COS Options (Part B), Item 1: Manual Tandem Trunking
In an extensions Class of Service, enter 1.
➣ 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 23: Unsupervised Conference Call CODEC Gain Type
CODEC gain set at -5 dB (0901 Item 23 = 2 [CODEC Gain Type 2]).
➣ 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 31: Loop Disconnect Supervision
For each trunk that should be able to participate in a tandem call, enter 1.
➣ 1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
➣ 1006 - Programming Function Keys
(Optional) Assign a function key for Transfer (code 1077).
Enhanced Tandem Trunking Method B — Tandem Trunking on Hang up
➣ 0131 - Unsupervised Conf. CODEC Gain Setup
Set up the CODEC Gain Types for trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. Assign Gain Types to trunks
in 0901 Item 23.
➣ 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup, Item 2: Conference Setup
Set the Conference mode of each DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. The system allows either 4 four-party conferences (0) or 2 eight-party conferences (1) per PCB.
➣ 0308 - Conference Circuit Setup
Assign the circuits on the DTU-A or DTU-C PCBs as Conference circuits (0).
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 16: Conference
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a Conference.
➣ 0406 - COS Options (Part A), Item 120: Forced Trunk Disconnect
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter 1 to enable Forced Trunk Disconnect. This allows the extension
to disconnect an Unsupervised Conference in progress (initially set up using Method B).
➣ 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 1: Manual Tandem Trunking
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter 1 for this option (and Item 2 below).
➣ 0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 2: Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter 1 for this option (and Item 1 above) to enable Tandem Trunking
on Hang up.
➣ 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 23: Unsupervised Conference Call CODEC Gain Type
CODEC gain set at -5 dB (0901 Item 23 = 2 [CODEC Gain Type 2]).
➣ 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 31: Loop Disconnect Supervision
For each trunk, enter 1 to enable loop supervision.
➣ 1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
➣ 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Transfer (code 1077).
498 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Programming (Cont’d)
Tandem Trunking in Older Systems
➣ 0131 - Unsupervised Conf. CODEC Gain Setup
Set up the CODEC Gain Types for trunks in an Unsupervised Conference. Assign Gain Types to trunks
in 0901 Item 23.
➣ 0302 - Music on Hold and Conference Setup, Item 2: Conference Setup
(124i Only) Set the Conference mode of the system. The system allows either 8 four-party conferences
(0) or 4 eight-party conferences (1).
(384i Only) Set the Conference mode of each DTU-A or DTU-C PCB. The system allows either 4 fourparty conferences (0) or 2 eight-party conferences (1) per PCB.
➣ 0308 - Conference Circuit Setup
(384i Only) Assign the circuits on the DTU-A or DTU-C PCBs as Conference circuits (0).
➣ 0402 - Tenant Group Options, Part B, Item 2: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A)
Assign the CONF (TRF) key a Transfer key by setting this option to 0. Also see Program 0401 Item 6 below.
➣ 0402 - Tenant Group Options, Part B, Item 6: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part B)
Assign the CONF (TRF) key for Transfer by setting this option to 0. Also see Program 0401 Item 2 above.
➣ 0406 - COS Options, Item 16: Conference
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a Conference.
➣ 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 23: Unsupervised Conference Call CODEC Gain Type
CODEC gain set at -5 dB (0901 Item 23 = 2 [CODEC Gain Type 2]).
➣ 0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 31: Loop Supervision
Enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Tandem Trunking.
➣ 1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
➣ 1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Conference (code 1016).
Related Features
Conference, Voice Call
Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area.
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 499
Features N-Z
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Operation
Method A — Tandem Trunking from Conference
To set up a Tandem Call:
1.
Place or answer first trunk call.
2.
Press CONF (TRF) key.
3.
Place or answer second trunk call.
4.
Press CONF (TRF) key twice.
This sets up a Conference between you and both outside parties.
5.
Press Transfer key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1077).
OR
Press HOLD and dial #8.
The line keys for the trunks blink (green) as long as the Unsupervised Conference Continues.
To end the Tandem Call:
1.
Press either flashing line key.
The line keys light steadily (green). You can listen (i.e., monitor) the call, but you cannot join in
the conversation.
2.
Press SPK or Hang up.
The Conference ends and the line keys go out.
Method B — Tandem Trunking on Hang up (384i 3.05.10 or Higher)
To set up a Tandem Call:
1.
Place or answer first trunk call.
2.
Press HOLD to place the first trunk call on Hold.
3.
Place or answer second trunk call.
4.
Press Transfer key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1077) or hang up.
This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties.
The line keys for the trunks light steadily (red).
To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press line key + *3).
500 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Operation (Cont’d)
(Older Systems)
To make a trunk-to-trunk Conference:
Keyset
1.
Establish first trunk call.
This can be a call that you placed or answered.
2.
Press Conference key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1016).
3.
Establish second trunk call.
4.
Press Conference key twice.
The system sets up a three-party Conference between you and the two outside parties.
5.
Press CONF (TRF).
Both line keys flash. The two trunk callers can now talk to each other privately. The trunks appear busy to other extensions.
If one of the outside callers hangs up, the trunk-to-trunk Conference terminates.
(Older Systems)
To return to the tandem call:
1.
Press either flashing line key.
You talk to the two trunk callers.
If one of the callers hangs up, you continue talking to the remaining caller.
You can press CONF (TRF) again to reinstate the trunk-to-trunk Conference.
(Older Systems)
To end the trunk-to-trunk Conference:
1.
Press either flashing key to return to the tandem call.
2.
Press SPK to hang up.
The Conference ends. The system hangs up both trunks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Single Line Set
Establish first trunk call.
This can be a call that you placed or answered.
Hookflash and dial #1.
Establish second trunk call.
Hookflash and dial #8.
Hang up.
The system sets up an Unsupervised Conference between the two outside parties. The two trunk
callers can now talk to each other privately. The trunks appear busy to other extensions.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 501
Features N-Z
TAPI Compatibility
TAPI Compatibility
Description
124i ☞
-
-
Available.
Basic TAPI Commands require the
Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider
1.02.02.
TAPI Enhancements require Base
2.13 and EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Additional TAPI Commands require
124i Proprietary Mode Telephony
SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver and
system software for Base 4.02 and
EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Compatibility with the Nitsuko
384i Proprietary Mode Telephony
SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver
requires Base 4.02 or EXCPRU
4.02 or higher.
384i ☞
-
-
-
Available — requires system software
3.04 or higher.
Basic TAPI Commands available in
both Nitsuko TAPI Driver versions.
TAPI Enhancements require system
software 3.06.02.
Additional TAPI Commands require
384i Proprietary Mode Telephony
SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver.
System software 3.07.12 or higher
provides compatibility with the
Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode
Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher)
driver through Program 0419:11.
The system has Telephony Programming Applications Interface (TAPI) capability. TAPI capability provides:
Reduced TAPI Feature Set (see the Supported TAPI Commands chart below).
Caller ID data to the PC for data base lookups and screen pops (see the Caller ID Data chart below).
Telephone control (off-hook, on-hook and dialing).
•
•
•
In addition to a compatible system software version, you must also have:
32-Button Display or Super Display Telephone containing an RS-232-C DCI Module (P/N 92266) with
•
TAPI compliant firmware.
PC running Windows 3.x or higher with one of the following Nitsuko TAPI Drivers installed.
•
- Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider 1.02.02
- Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher)
A TAPI compatible Windows application
•
(Continued)
502 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
TAPI Compatibility
Description (Cont’d)
Basic TAPI Commands
TSPI_LINEANSWER
TSPI_LINECLOSE
TSPI_LINECLOSECALL
TSPI_LINECONDITIONALMEDIADETECTION
TSPI_LINECONFIGDIALOG
TSPI_LINEDIAL
TSPI_LINEGETADDRESSSTATUS
TSPI_LINEGETCALLADDRESSID
TSPI_LINEGETCALLINFO
TSPI_LINEGETCALLSTATUS
TSPI_LINEGETDEVCAPS
TSPI_LINEGETID
TSPI_LINEGETLINEDEVSTATUS
TSPI_LINEGETNUMADDRESSIDS
TSPI_LINEMAKECALL
TSPI_LINENEGOTIATETSPIVERSION
TSPI_LINEOPEN
TSPI_LINESETAPPSPECIFIC
TSPI_LINESETDEFAULTMEDIADETECTION
TSPI_LINEDROP
TSPI_LINEGETADDRESSCAPS
TSPI_LINEGETADDRESSID
TSPI_LINESETMEDIAMODE
TSPI_LINESETSTATUSMESSAGES
TSPI_PROVIDERCONFIG
TSPI_PROVIDERINIT
TSPI_PROVIDERINSTALL
TSPI_PROVIDERREMOVE
TSPI_PROVIDERSHUTDOWN
Additional TAPI Commands
TSPI_LINEBLINDTRANSFER
TSPI_LINEPICKUP
TSPI_LINECOMPLETETRANSFER
TSPI_LINEPREPAREADDTOCONFERENCE
TSPI_LINEFORWARD
TSPI_LINESELECTEXTVERSION
TSPI_LINEGETEXTENSIONID
TSPI_LINESETUPCONFERENCE
TSPI_LINEHOLD
TSPI_LINESETUPTRANSFER
TSPI_LINENEGOTIATEEXTVERSION
TSPI_LINEUNHOLD
TSPI_LINEPARK
TSPI_LINEUNPARK
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 503
Features N-Z
TAPI Compatibility
Description (Cont’d)
Caller ID Data
Call Type
Trunk Call
Signaling
Description
1st Ring Signal
NMBR=XXX XXXXXXX
Caller’s number =
XXX XXXXXXX
2nd Ring Signal
Intercom Call
1st Ring Signal
NMBR=XXXX
Caller’s number = XXXX
2nd Ring Signal
TAPI Enhancements
When a DCI keyset answers a call, it provides the following data to the connected device:
•
If the incoming call data contains the Caller ID number . . .
NMBR=XXX (XXX = Caller ID number data)
If the incoming call data does not contain the Caller ID number . . .
NUMBR=
UNAVAILABLE, OUT OF AREA, or PRIVATE
•
•
To place a call on Hold, the DCI provides the following data to the connected device:
ATD!
When the DCI keyset becomes busy, the DCI provides the following data to the connected device:
BUSY
Conditions
(A.) The Nitsuko TAPI Driver 1.02.02 does not fully support the Hold and Transfer features.
(B.) The DCI Module requires updated TAPI compliant firmware.
Default Setting
Disabled.
504 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
TAPI Compatibility
Programming
Start
In 0419:11,
enter 0.
TAPI
Which driver are you using:
Nitsuko TAPI Service
Provider
OR
Nitsuko 384i Proprietary
Mode Telephony SPV?
Telephone
SPV
In 0419:11,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 1006, assign a Telemarketing Dial
key (code 1045) to the DCI keyset.
Stop
➣
➣
➣
0419 - Class of Service Options (Part B), Item 11: TAPI Auto Idle Mode (Driver ID)
For this option:
- Enter 0 if you are installing the Nitsuko TAPI Service Provider 1.02.02 driver.
- Enter 1 if you are installing the Nitsuko 384i Proprietary Mode Telephony SPV 1.00.03 (or higher) driver.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a Telemarketing Dial key (code 1045) to the DCI keyset. The TAPI driver is active only after the
keyset user presses this key and the key lights.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 505
Features N-Z
TAPI Compatibility
Related Features
"Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications" and "Caller ID"
The system provides Database Lookup through Caller ID and TAPI compatible third-party software
(such as Symantec’s ACT!).
"Data Communications Interface (DCI)"
For more information on setting up the DCI Module, turn to this feature.
Operation
TAPI operation is automatic once programmed in the phone system and enabled in the PC’s TAPI application.
506 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tenant Service
Tenant Service
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Not available.
Available — four Tenant Groups.
Tenant Service lets you partition the system into tenant groups so several businesses can share the same common
equipment. Each tenant group has their own trunks, extensions, operator and other features (see the table below).
When an extension user dials 0, for example, they reach their own operator. In addition, trunk calls in one tenant
don’t interfere with trunk calls in the other tenant. An extension user in one tenant may be able to call a user in another tenant, or the system may restrict inter-tenant calling. The system allows up to four tenant groups.
The following table shows the features that interact with Tenant Service. Refer to the feature description in this
section for more details on feature programming and operation.
Tenant Service Feature Interaction
This feature..
And this program...
Affect Tenant Service in the following way...
0601
Common
Abbreviated Dialing
Bins
Each tenant can have a different set of Common
Abbreviated Dialing bins. Optionally, tenants may share
bins.
0602
Group Abbreviated
Dialing Bins
Each tenant can have a different set of Group Abbreviated
Dialing bins. Optionally, tenants may share bins.
0401
Item 15
DIAL Key Control
Set the DIAL key to access Common or Group
Abbreviated Dialing for each tenant.
0406
Class of Service
Options
In each of the four Tenant Groups, one of the 15 Classes of
Service can allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension’s ability
to use Account Codes.
0407
Account Codes
Each of the four Tenant Groups can either disable (0),
enable (1) or require (2) Account Codes.
Analog
Communications
Interface
0508
ACI Group
Numbers
Barge In
0401
Item 5
Barge In Tone
Callback
0401
Item 14
Callback Automatic
Answer
Enable/disable Callback automatic answer for each tenant.
Central Office Calls
0904
Trunk Tenant
Assign trunks to tenant groups. An extension in one group
cannot place or answer calls on another group’s trunks. An
extension may, however, be able to answer a trunk
transferred from another tenant.
0401
Item 3
Incoming Call RNA
Alarm
In each tenant group, enable/disable the alarm for calls that
ring too long without being answered.
Class of Service
0406
Class of Service
Options
The system allows 15 different Classes of Service for each
tenant group.
Data Communication
0507
Abbreviated Dialing
Account Codes
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
ACI software ports in different tenants can be in the same
group, but the groups always have different pilot numbers.
An extension in one tenant cannot dial an ACI Group pilot
number belonging to another tenant.
Enable/disable the Barge In tone for each tenant group.
DCI Group Numbers DCI software ports in different tenants can be in the same
group, but the groups always have different pilot numbers.
An extension in one tenant cannot dial a DCI Group pilot
number belonging to another tenant.
FEATURES 507
Features N-Z
Tenant Service
Tenant Service Feature Interaction
This feature..
Department Calling
And this program...
0410
Extension
(Department )
Group Options
0506
Department Group
Numbers
Door Box
150
Door Box Tenant
Assignment
Handsfree
0401
Item 6
Affect Tenant Service in the following way...
Customize each tenant’s Department Calling dialing
options.
Extensions in different tenants can be in the same
Department Group, but the Department Groups always
have different pilot numbers. An extension in one tenant
cannot dial a Department Group pilot number belonging to
another tenant.
Assign a Door Box to a tenant group.
Automatic Handsfree Enable/disable Automatic Handsfree for each tenant group.
0401
Item 7
Handsfree Mic
Control
Handsfree
Answerback
0401
Item 10
Forced Intercom
Ringing
Enable Forced Intercom Ringing or Handsfree Answerback
for each Intercom call.
Hold
0401
Item 4
Automatic Hold
Enable/disable Automatic Hold for each tenant group.
0402
Item 4
Hold Key
Operating Mode
Customize the function of the HOLD key for each tenant
group.
Intercom
1105
Operator’s
Extension
Line Preference
0401
Item 8
Incoming Call
Priority
For each tenant group, determine if ringing Intercom or
trunk calls have answer priority.
Night Service
0401
Item 1
Night Service,
Manual
Allow/prevent tenant group members from activating
Night Service
0402
Item 3
Night Mode Switch
Operating Mode
0401
Item 2
Night Service,
Automatic
Enable/disable Automatic Night Mode Switching for each
tenant group.
0801,
0802 and
0803
Night Service
Patterns
Each tenant group can have its own Automatic Night
Service patterns, Weekly Night Service Switching and
Holiday Night Service Switching.
Off Hook Signaling
0401
Item 1
Off Hook Signaling
Mode
Paging, External
1603
External Paging
Zone Tenant
Assign an External Paging zone to a tenant group. Each
zone can only be in one tenant.
Paging, Internal
1602
Internal Paging
Zone Names
Assign names to each tenant’s Internal Paging zones.
There are 32 zones in each tenant group.
Ringdown Extension
1013
508 FEATURES
For each tenant group, enable/disable an extension’s
microphone for Handsfree calls.
Designate an operator for each tenant group.
Program the function of the Night Mode service switch
sensors for each tenant group.
Set Off Hook Signaling to ring or voice-announce for each
tenant group.
Extension Ringdown The system allows system 50 Extension Ringdown
Assignments
(hotline) assignments per tenant group.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tenant Service
Tenant Service Feature Interaction
This feature..
Ringing Line
Preference
And this program...
0401
Item 13
Affect Tenant Service in the following way...
For each tenant group, select between Idle and Ringing
Ringing Line
Preference for Trunk Line Preference for trunk calls.
Calls
For each tenant group, select between Idle and Ringing
Line Preference for Intercom calls.
0401
Item 12
Ringing Line
Preference for
Intercom Calls
Selectable Display
Messaging
0403
Selectable Display
Messages
Station Message
Detail Recording
0404
SMDR Options
Each tenant group can have their own set of SMDR
options.
System
Programming
Password Protection
0202
Setting the User
Passwords
You can assign user passwords to each tenant. If you want,
you can have different user passwords for each tenant.
0201
Setting the
Programming
Passwords
System Timers
0405
System Timers (Part
A)
Program various system timers for each tenant group.
Tenant Service
0301
Inter-Tenant Calling
With this option, you can allow or prevent inter-tenant
Intercom calling and trunk Transfer.
1002
Extension Tenant
Group
0702
Toll Restriction
Tables
Each tenant can have a different set of Toll Restriction
tables.
0701
Toll Restriction
Class
The system has 15 Toll Restriction Classes for each tenant.
Transfer
0402
Item 2
CONF (TRF) Key
Operating Mode
For each tenant group, set the CONF (TRF) key operating
mode.
Trunk Groups
0402
Item 1
Trunk Group Key
Operating Mode
Set the Trunk Group key operating mode for each tenant
group.
Voice Announce
Unit
0901
Item 14-17
Trunk Service
Type
Each tenant group’s trunks can be answered by the VAU
Module
1802
Items 1-3
DISA and OPA
Operating Mode
1804
Item 1
Operator
Assistance
2202
VAU Message
Length
2203
General Message
Number
Each tenant group can have a different General Message
2204
VAU No Answer
Destination
The VAU No Answer Destination can be different for each
tenant group
Toll Restriction
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
The system allows up to 20 Selectable Display Messages
per tenant.
The 384i system has eight users for password entry. You
can assign users to a specific tenant or to all tenants
universally.
Assign extensions to tenant groups.
Incomplete Automated Attendant calls can by handled
differently in each tenant group
You can individually choose which trunks in which tenant
groups you want the Automated Attendant to answer
The VAU Message Length option applies to all tenant
groups
FEATURES 509
Features N-Z
Tenant Service
Tenant Service Feature Interaction
This feature..
And this program...
Voice Announce
Unit
Affect Tenant Service in the following way...
2205
OPA Message
Assignment
You can assign any available OPA message to any trunk in
any one of the system’s tenant groups
2206
OPA Fax Line Ring
Group
You can have any fax call route to any Ring Group in any
one of the system’s tenant groups
2207
900 Preamble
2208
2209
VAU Password
OPA Error
Message
Assignment
You can assign different 900 Preambles to the trunks in
each tenant group
All tenant groups share the same VAU password
You can assign different error messages to the trunks en
each tenant group
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
0301 - Inter-Tenant Calling
Allow (1) or prevent (0) system-wide inter-tenant calling.
➣ 0904 - Trunk Tenant
Assign trunks to tenant groups (1-4).
➣ 1002 - Extension Tenant
Assign extensions to tenant groups (1-4).
Note: For additional programming information, refer to the features listed in the Tenant Service Feature Interaction table on the previous pages.
510 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tenant Service
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
An extension in one tenant group
can have the same number as an
extension in another group.
In Program
0301, enter 0.
No
Should user in one
tenant be able to place
Intercom calls and
transfer trunk calls to
another tenant?
Yes
In Program
0301, enter 1.
In Program 0904,
assign trunks to
tenants.
In Program 1002,
assign extensions to
tenants.
Stop
Related Features
Refer to the Tenant Service Feature Interaction table on the previous pages.
Operation
Refer to the features listed in the Tenant Service Feature Interaction table.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 511
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Tie Lines
Description
124i ☞
-
Available with EXCPRU PCB only.
DTMF tie lines require a DTDU PCB.
Customizing CODEC Gain Type
transmit and receive levels and Tone
Detection Setup requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher. See page 844.
384i ☞
-
Available.
Customizing CODEC Gain Type
transmit and receive levels and Tone
Detection Setup require system
software 3.04 or higher.
Enhanced Answer Supervision
requires system software 3.05.15 or
higher. See page 844.
Tie lines directly link a local telephone system with one or more remote systems. The link is independent of the
telco’s switched network. When a local system user seizes a tie line, they hear Intercom dial tone from the remote system. The user may then be able to:
Dial extensions in the remote system
•
Use the remote system’s trunks for outgoing calls
•
Access Common Abbreviated Dialing bins in the remote system
•
Use the remote system’s Internal and External Paging
•
The system provides connection for 4 TL11M E&M tie line circuits (4 conductors, 2 voice and 2 signaling), 4
TL12M E&M tie line circuits (6 conductors, 2 voice and 4 voice signaling), or 4 four-wire E&M tie line circuits (4 conductors, 4 voice/signaling).
Tie Line Class of Service
Tie Line Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for incoming tie lines. This allows you to
control the capabilities of callers dialing into your system. The tie line Class of Service options are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
512 FEATURES
First Digit Absorption
A tie line can ignore (absorb) the first digit received, which helps when setting up a tie line network. For
example, your system can have tie lines to two other systems with the same extension numbering plan.
Use the first digit to differentiate between the systems. Tie line callers can dial 3200-3456 for the first
system’s extensions and 4200-4456 for the second system’s extensions. The receiving system ignores the
first digit and routes calls correctly to the extension dialed (i.e., 4301 is received as 301).
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
When a tie line user calls the remote system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls through
the remote system. Any toll charges are incurred by the remote system. The call follows the remote system’s Trunk Group Access or Automatic Route Selection - whichever is enabled.
Trunk GroupAccess
Tie line callers may be able to access trunk groups in the remote system by dialing Service Code 804 and
the trunk group number. This allows the callers to select a specific trunk group for an outgoing call.
Trunk Group Access bypasses the remote system’s Trunk Group Routing/ARS. As with dial 9 access, any
toll charges are incurred by the remote system.
Common Abbreviated Dialing
The remote system’s Common Abbreviated Dialing bins may be available to tie line callers. Use this capability to set up centralized Abbreviated Dialing control - or just save time when dialing.
Operator Calling
A tie line caller may be able to dial 0 for the remote system’s operator.
Paging
Internal and External Paging may be available to tie line callers. This allows co-workers in adjacent facilities connected by tie lines, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Description (Cont’d)
•
•
Direct Trunk Access
This option allows tie line callers to directly access a trunk for an outside call by dialing #9 and the
trunk’s number. Like Trunk Group Access, this bypasses the remote system’s Trunk Group Routing/ARS.
Any toll charges are incurred by the remote system.
Forced Trunk Disconnect
The Forced Trunk Disconnect option allows a tie line caller to disconnect (release) another extension’s active outside call. The tie line caller can then place a call on the released trunk. Tie line callers should use
Forced Trunk Disconnect only in an emergency, when no other trunks are available.
Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
You can selectively deny incoming tie lines access to your system’s outgoing trunk groups. Incoming tie line callers
could be able to access your outgoing WATS lines, for example, but not your DDD trunks. The system allows you to
set up a restriction matrix for each of your incoming tie lines - for each of your outgoing trunk groups.
Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
Incoming tie lines can have a Toll Restriction Class and be subject to the system’s toll restriction. For example,
Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing 1-900 calls. When an incoming tie line caller tries to use system
trunks to dial a 1-900 service, Toll Restriction will deny the call.
Flexible Tie Line Service Compatibility
You can individually program tie lines for Dial Pulse (DP) or DTMF incoming or outgoing signaling. Outgoing
tie lines can be either wink start or immediate start.
Conditions
(A.) Tie lines require the installation of a 4ATRU-EM PCB. Each PCB provides four tie line ports but uses
eight trunk software ports. For example, a tie line PCB that provides trunks 1-4 automatically disables
trunks 5-8.
(B.) The 4ATRU-EM PCB requires a customer provided 48 VDC battery supply. Refer to the hardware manual for additional details.
(C.) Tie line service must be purchased from your local telephone company.
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 513
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Programming
In 0901 Items 14-17, enter
5 for tie line service type.
Stop
In 0905, assign each
unique type of tie trunk
to its own trunk group.
In 0901:27, enter 0 for
DP incoming signaling.
No
DP
Are all your tie trunks of
the same type - with the
same signaling
requirements?
Yes
In 0905, assign all tie trunks to
the same group. No other
trunks should be in the group.
Does tie trunk
have DP or DTMF
inbound signaling?
DTMF
In 0901:27, enter 1 for
DTMF incoming signaling.
In 0133, make sure the Tie
Line Timers are compatible
with the local telco.
In 0901:1, enter 0 for 10 pps
DP outbound signaling;
enter 1 for 20 pps DP
outbound signaling.
In 2301, enter 0 for
immediate start signaling.
Should immediate start
tie line send dial tone
once call is set up?
DP
Imm.
No
Does tie trunk have
DP or DTMF
outbound signaling?
Does tie line require
wink or immediate start
signaling?
Set 0901:25
to 0.
Set 0901:26
to 0.
Yes
Set 0901:25 to 1.
514 FEATURES
(384i Only) In 0303, reserve
at least one CDTU block for
DTMF reception (type 2).
DTMF
In 0901:1, enter 2 for
DTMF outbound signaling.
Wink
In 2301, enter 1 for
wink start signaling.
No
Should wink start tie
line send dial tone
once call is set up?
Yes
Continued
on next
page.
Set 0901:26 to 1.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0412:1, enter 0.
In 0412:2, enter 0.
In 0412:3, enter 0.
No
No
No
Do you want tie line to
absorb (ignore) first
incoming digit?
Should tie line user be
able to dial 9 for Trunk
Group Routing or ARS?
Should tie line user be able
access a trunk group by dialing
804 and the group's number?
Yes
Yes
Yes
In 0412:1, enter 1.
In 0412:2, enter 1.
In 0412:3, enter 1.
In 0412:4, enter 0.
No
Should tie line user be
able to use Common
Abbreviated Dialing?
Yes
In 0412:4, enter 1.
In 0412:5, enter 0.
No
Should tie line user be
able to dial telephone
system operator?
Yes
In 0412:5, enter 1.
In 0412:6, enter 0.
No
Should tie line user be able
to use Internal Page?
Yes
In 0412:6, enter 1.
In 0412:7, enter 0.
No
Should tie line user be able
to use External Page?
Yes
In 0412:7, enter 1.
In 0412:8, enter 0.
No
Should tie line user be able
to use Direct Trunk Access?
Yes
In 0412:8, enter 1.
In 0412:9, enter 0.
No
Should tie line user be able to
use Forced Trunk Disconnect?
Yes
In 0412:9, enter 1.
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 515
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
Is the DTMF
Receiver Active
Time adequate?
No
In 0405 Item 17,
change the DTMF
Receiver Active Time.
Make one entry for each
Night Service mode.
Yes
In 2302, assign a tie line's
Class of Service (1-16) for
options in 0412.
Did you enable dial 9
trunk access for tie
line in 0412 Item 27?
Yes
In 0906, program Trunk Group
Routing (1-64). (If the system
has ARS enabled, dialing 9
accesses ARS instead.)
No
Do you want to restrict tie
line users from accessing
certain trunk groups for
outgoing calls?
Yes
In 0701 and 0702, be
sure the Toll Restriction
Class you select does not
restrict calls.
516 FEATURES
No
Do you want calls tie
line users place over
system trunks subject
to Toll Restriction?
Continued
on next
page.
In 2305, select the tie
line trunk group (1-128)
you want to program.
Select the trunk group (1128) you want to restrict.
Enter 0 to allow calls;
enter 1 to restrict calls.
No
In 2306, be sure to assign
the tie line to a Toll
Restriction Class (1-15)
that does not restrict calls.
In 2304, set the trunk
group route (1-64, set in
0906) the tie line seizes
when the user dials 9.
Yes
In 2306, assign a Toll
Restriction Class (115) to the tie line.
Program Toll Restriction
in Programs 0701 and
0702.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0116 Items 1-10, set
the DTMF criteria for tie
line calls for compatibility
with the telco.
Is the CODEC Gain
(amplification) adequate
for the tie Line?
No
If required, in 0117
customize the CODEC
Gain Type transmit and
receive levels.
Yes
Should users be able
to place outgoing calls
on tie line?
In 0901 Item 3, assign
a different CODEC
Gain Type.
Yes
In 0901 Item 31,
enter 1.
No
In 0901 Item 31,
enter 0.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 517
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0116 - Tone Detection Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
518 FEATURES
Use Items 1-10 to set the DTMF criteria for tie line calls.
0117 - Trunk CODEC Gain Type Settings
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types assigned in 0901 Item 3.
0133 - Tie Line Timers
Make sure the Tie Line Timer settings are compatible with your local telco.
0303 - DTMF and Dial Tone Detection Circuit Setup
If the system has DTMF tie lines, be sure to reserve at least one DTU block for analog trunk DTMF reception (type 2).
Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers (i.e., DTU blocks):
•
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 17, DTMF Receiver Active Time
After answering the tie line call, the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the tie line for this interval (064800 seconds).
0412 - DISA/Tie Line Class of Service Options
Enable (1) or disable (2) the following options for each tie line Class of Service (1-16):
First Digit Absorption (Item 1)
•
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access (Item 2)
•
Direct Trunk Access (Item 3)
•
Common Abbreviated Dialing (Item 4)
•
Operator Calling (Item 5)
•
Internal Paging (Item 6)
•
External Paging (Item 7)
•
Direct Trunk Access (Item 8)
•
Forced Trunk Disconnect (Item 9)
•
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 1: Signaling Type (DP/DTMF)
Set the outgoing signaling type for the tie trunk. The options are 0 (DP 10 pps), 1 (DP 20 pps) and 2
(DTMF). To set incoming signaling, refer to Program 0901 Item 27.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type
For each Night Service mode, enter service type 5 when the trunk should be a tie trunk.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 25, Tie Line Dial Tone (Immediate Start)
For immediate start tie lines, enter 1 if tie line should send dial tone to calling system once the call is set
up. Enter 0 if tie line should not send dial tone.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 25, Tie Line Dial Tone (Wink Start)
For wink start tie lines, enter 1 if tie line should send dial tone to calling system once the call is set up.
Enter 0 if tie line should not send dial tone.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 27: DID/E&M Incoming Signaling Type
Enter 0 if tie trunk uses DP for incoming signaling; enter 1 if tie trunk uses DTMF for incoming signaling. To set outgoing signaling, refer to Program 0901 Item 1.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 31: Loop Supervision
Enable (1) loop supervision for each tie line that should be able to place outgoing calls.
0905 - Trunk Groups
Program tie lines of similar type into the same trunk group (1-128). The system uses trunk groups for
outgoing access to tie lines (i.e., Service Code 804 + group). Also see Program 2305.
0906 - Trunk Group Routing (Dial 9)
When a tie line user dials 9, the system uses the routes defined in this program (1-64). Also see Program
2304. (If the system has ARS, the tie line user accesses ARS when they dial 9.)
2301 - DID/E&M Start Signaling
Enter 0 if tie line uses immediate start signaling. Enter 1 if tie line uses wink start signaling.
2302 - Tie Line Class of Service
Assign the tie line’s Class of Service (1-16). Use Program 2303 to set the tie line Class of Service options. You cannot use Programs 0406 and 1005 to assign Class of Service to tie lines.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 2304 - Tie Line Route
➣
➣
Use this program to assign the trunk group route (1-64) chosen when a user seizes a tie line and dials 9.
Set Trunk Group Routing in program 0906. If the system has ARS, dialing 9 accesses ARS.
2305 - Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
This program lets you build a restriction matrix for trunk calls placed over a tie line. For each tie line
trunk group (1-128), enable (0) or disable (1) outgoing access to each CO trunk group.
2306 - Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
If the system uses Toll Restriction, enter a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) for each tie line. The system uses
the class you enter in Program 0701. You cannot use Program 1004 to assign Toll Restriction to tie
lines.
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection/Trunk Group Routing
In a system with ARS enabled:
When a tie line user dials 9 for an outside call, the system routes the call via ARS.
In a system with ARS disabled:
When a tie line user dials 9 for an outside call, the system uses the routes programmed for Trunk Group
Routing.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Depending on programming, you can seize a tie line by:
Pressing a line key
•
Pressing a One-Touch Key
•
Dialing a trunk group code
•
Dial codes which directly accessing a specific tie line
•
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Trunk Groups
To simplify placing calls over your tie lines, you can put the tie lines in a trunk group.
Operation
To place a call over a tie line group:
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial 804.
2.
Dial tie line group number (1-9, 01-32 or 001-128).
3.
Dial number.
OR
1.
Press tie line group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + group).
2.
Dial number.
To place a tie line call using Trunk Group Routing:
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial 9.
2.
Dial number.
OR
1.
Press tie line Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011).
2.
Dial number
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 519
Features N-Z
Tie Lines
Operation (Cont’d)
To place a call over a specific tie line:
1.
Press idle CALL key and dial #9.
2.
Dial tie line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
3.
Dial number.
OR
1.
Press tie line key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1 to 128).
2.
Dial number.
After calling the remote system, you may be able to:
Dial 9 to place an outside call through the remote system.
•
Dial Service Code #9 + a trunk number to place outside calls over a specific trunk.
•
Use the remote system’s Common Abbreviated Dialing.
•
Call the remote system’s operator.
•
Use the remote system’s Internal and/or External Paging.
•
520 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Time and Date
Time and Date
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
Year 2000 Compliance is not avaiable
The system uses Time and Date for:
Central Office Calls (Access Maps)
Class of Service (Class)
Direct Inward Lines
Display Telephones
Fax Machine Compatibility
Night Service (Automatic)
Programmable Trunk Parameters
384i ☞
-
Available.
Year 2000 Compliance requires
system software 3.07.25 or higher.
Ring Groups
Station Message Detail Recording
System Reports
Toll Restriction (Class)
Trunk Group Routing
Voice Announce Unit
Conditions
The system retains the Time and Date after a power failure or system reset.
Default Setting
Enabled.
Programming
Refer to the Programming Flowchart on the following page.
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
0003 - Time and Date
Set the system Time and Date from your administrator’s telephone.
0103 - Time and Date Display Mode
Select the display mode (type 1-8) for Time and Date (i.e., Time and Date format).
0202 - Setting User Passwords, Item 1: Time and Date and MOH Password
Set the password used for setting the Time and Date (i.e., with Service Code 828).
0406 - COS Options, Item 71: Time and Date
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to set the Time and Date.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
Related Features
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot set the Time and Date.
Year 2000 Compliance
When setting the Time and Date from the telephone, the extension user enters 00 for 2000, 01 for 2001, etc.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 521
Features N-Z
Time and Date
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
IN 0406 Item 71,
enter 0.
Should extension user be
able to set the Time and
Date (Service Code 828)?
IN 0406 Item 71,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
The default password is 0000.
If the system prevents all
extensions from dialing Service
Code 828, this is the only way to
change the Time and Date.
Do you want to change the
default password users dial
when changing the Time
and Date?
In 0202 Item 1, change
the Time and Date and
MOH password.
Do you want to set the
system Time and Date
from system
programming?
In 0003, change the
system Time and Date.
You have 8 different formats from
which to choose.
Do you want to change
the way Time and Date
displays on telephone
displays?
In 0103, select the
new Time and Date
format (1-8).
Stop
522 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Time and Date
Operation
To set the system Time and Date:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 828.
3.
Dial the password (normally 0000).
4.
Dial two digits for the year (e.g., 92).
5.
Dial two digits for the month (01-12).
6.
Dial two digits for the day (01-31).
7.
Dial the day of the week (0-6, 0 = Sunday, 6 = Saturday).
8.
Dial two digits for the hour (24 hour clock, 13 = 1:00 PM).
9.
Dial two digits for the minutes (00-60).
10.
Press SPK to hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 523
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction
Description
124i ☞
-
Available — eight Toll Restriction
classes and 72 extensions.
Digit counting (0702:4) not required
in order to use the Permit and
Restrict Code Tables.
384i ☞
-
Available — 15 Toll Restriction
Classes in each Tenant Group and
256 extensions.
In system software 3.05.15 and
earlier, you must enable digit
counting (0702:4) in order to use the
Permit and Restrict Code Tables.
Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only certain
types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies Toll Restriction according to an extension’s Toll Restriction Class. The 384i has 15 Toll Restriction Classes per Tenant Group. The 124i has eight
Toll Restriction Classes.
Toll Restriction offers the following capabilities:
•
•
•
•
•
524 FEATURES
Common Permit Code Table
Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Toll Restriction Classes to dial. To
let all users dial 911, for example, put 911 in the Common Permit Code Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and Common Restrict Code Tables. Each tenant has one table, with 10 entries
in each table. Each code is 4 digits max., using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card).
Common Restrict Code Table
The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Toll Restriction
Classes. To prevent all users from dialing directory assistance (411), for example, put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Table. Be sure you don’t allow the codes you want to restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table. Each tenant has one table, with 10 entries in each table. Each
code is 4 digits max., using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card).
Restrict Code Table
When you want Toll Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the Restrict Code
Table. To block only 1-900 calls, for example, enter 1900 in the Restrict Code Table. (If the same Toll
Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter only
in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.) Each tenant has four tables,
with 60 entries (restricted codes) in each table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, *
and FLASH (as a wild card).
Permit Code Table
The Permit Code Table lets you set up Toll Restriction so that users can dial only selected (permitted)
telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most calls. To allow all users to dial only
area code 203, for example, enter 1203 in the Permit Code Table. 1 + 203 + NNX + nnnn are the only
numbers users can dial. (If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the
system restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not
restricted.) Each tenant has four tables, with 60 entries (permitted codes) in each table. A permitted code
is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card).
International Call Restriction
International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial. You can
build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit table to allow only certain
calls. To allow most international calls, use the International Call Restrict Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow Table. Each Tenant can have one International Call Restrict table and one International Call Allow table, with up to 10 digits in each table entry. Valid entries
are 0-9, #,* and FLASH (for a wild card).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction
Description (Cont’d)
•
•
•
•
•
Toll Restriction for Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing can bypass or follow Toll Restriction. If you allow many users to program Abbreviated Dialing, consider Toll Restricting the numbers they dial. If only administrators can program Abbreviated Dialing, Toll Restriction may not be necessary. You can separately restrict Group and Common
Abbreviated Dialing.
Local Call Digit Counting
Use Local Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You can use this option
to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example, set the Maximum Number of Digits
in Local Calls to 7 to limit local callers to dialing the exchange code (NNX) and local address (nnnn)
only. You can make four entries for this option in each tenant group. The range is 4-8 digits.
Toll Call Digit Counting
With Toll Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can dial. This lets
you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up services. You can make four entries ( 4-30 digits) for each tenant.
Toll Free Trunks
Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted, such as the company president’s Private Line. Users can
place calls on Toll Free Trunks anytime -- to anywhere, without inadvertently being toll restricted.
PBX Call Restriction
Toll Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX access codes.
You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have trunks programmed for behind
PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics.
Toll Restriction Overview
The following chart shows the basic Toll Restriction process. Refer to Programming below for the specifics.
Conditions
(A.) If a Toll Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table, the system does not
restrict the call.
(B.) Toll Call Digit counting may prevent users from taking advantage of long distance automated services
like ACD and automated Technical Service.
Default Setting
Disabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 525
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction
Programming
Start
For each toll restricted
trunk, in program 0901
Item 19 enter 0.
Review the PBX Compatibility
feature before programming
Toll Restriction.
No
Yes
Is trunk toll
free?
Yes
For each toll free
trunk, in Program
0901 Item 19 enter 1.
Yes
In Program 0702 Item 8,
enter data into the Common
Restrict Codes Table. There
is one table per tenant.
Is your system
installed behind a
PBX?
No
In Program 0702 Item 7,
enter data into the Common
Permit Codes Table. There is
one table per tenant.
Yes
Do you want to allow all
users within a Tenant
Group to dial certain
calls (such as 911)?
No
In Program 0701 Item 5,
enable (1) the Common
Permit Code Table.
If you enable just the Common Permit
Codes Table but don't make any
entries, you can't place any trunk calls.
In Program 0701 Item 5,
disable (0) the Common
Permit Code Table.
Do you want to
prevent all users
within a tenant from
dialing certain calls
(such as 1-900)?
No
In Program 0701 Item
6, disable (0) the
Common Restrict
Codes Table.
In Program 0701 Item
6, enable (1) the
Common Restrict
Codes Table.
Continued
on next
page.
526 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0702:6, program the
Restrict Codes Tables. Each
tenant group has four tables,
with 60 entries in each table.
Allow
For a Toll Restriction
Class, do you want to
allow most calls or
restrict most calls?
Restrict
In 0702:5, program the Permit
Codes Tables. Each tenant
group has four tables, with 60
entries in each table.
In 0701:12, enable the
Restrict Code Table (1-4)
you want to use.
In 0701:11, enable the
Permit Code Table (1-4)
you want to use.
In 0701:11, disable (0)
the Permit Code Table.
In 0701:12, disable (0)
the Restrict Code Table.
In 0702:1, program the
International Call Restrict
Table. Each tenant group
has one table, with ten
entries in each table.
Allow
For a Toll Restriction Class,
do you want to allow most
international calls or restrict
most international calls?
In 0701:1, enable (1)
the International Call
Restrict Table.
In 0701:2, disable (0)
the International Call
Permit Table.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Restrict
In 0702:2, program the
International Call Permit
Table. Each tenant group
has one table, with ten
entries in each table.
In 0701:2, enable (1)
the International Call
Permit Table.
Continued
on next
page.
In 0701:1, disable
(0) the International
Call Restrict Table.
FEATURES 527
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
In 0701:7 enter 0.
In 0701:8 enter 0.
In 0701:3 enter 0.
No
No
No
Do you want to Toll
Restrict Common
Abbreviated Dialing
numbers?
Do you want to Toll Restrict
Group Abbreviated Dialing
numbers?
Do you want to
restrict the number of
digits local callers
can dial?
Yes
Yes
Yes
In 0701:7 enter 1.
In 0701:8 enter 1.
In 0702:3 program the
maximum number of local
call digits dialed table. Each
tenant has one table, with
four entries in each table.
In 0701:3 select a table
entry from 0702:3.
Long distance calls are calls where the NPA or NNX is in either the
Common Permit Code Table (0702:7), the Permit Code Table
(0702:5), the Common Restrict Code Table (0702:8) or the Restrict
Code Table (0702:6).
In 0701:4 enter 0.
No
Do you want to restrict the
number of digits long
distance callers can dial?
Yes
In 1004 assign a Toll
Restriction Class to each
extension for each Night
Service Mode.
In 0406:84 enter 0 to
disable operator alert.
No
Do you want the operator to
be notified if a user violates
toll restriction?
In 0702:4 program the
maximum number of toll call
digits dialed table. Each
tenant has one table, with
four entries in each table.
In 0701:4 select a
table entry from
0702:4.
Yes
In 0406:84 enter 1 to enable
operator alert.
Assign Class of Service
to extensions.
Stop
528 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction
Programming (Cont’d)
Start
Extension user dials digits.
Are digits dialed in a
Permit Table?
Yes
No
No
Are digits dialed in a
Restrict Table?
Yes
Has maximum local
digit length been
exceeded?
Yes
Toll violation occurs system drops call.
No
Yes
Has maximum long
distance digit length
been exceeded?
No
Digits sent out over trunk.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 529
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0406 - Class of Service Options (Part A), Item 84: Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
530 FEATURES
When toll restriction is violated, determine if the operator should be notified. (0=disable, 1=enable)
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 1: International Call Restrict Table
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call Restrict Table (Program 0702 - Item 1).
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 2: International Call Permit Table
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call Permit
Table (Program 0702, Item 2).
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 3: Maximum Number of Digits in Local Call
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the dialing limit for local calls.
When enabling, select from entries 1-4 in Program 0702 Item 3.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 4: Maximum Number of Digits in Non-Local Calls
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the dialing limit for non-local
calls. When enabling, select from entries 1-4 in Program 0702 Item 4.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 5: Common Permit Code Table
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Permit Code
Table (Program 0702 Item 7).
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 6: Common Restrict Code Table
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Restrict Code
Table (Program 0702 Item 8).
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 7: Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialing
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Toll Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 8: Restriction for Group Abbreviated Dialing Numbers
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Toll Restriction for Group
Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 9, Intercom Call Restriction
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Intercom Call Restriction. If
enabled, extensions cannot place or receive Intercom calls.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 10: PBX Call Restriction
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) PBX Call Restriction. Refer
to the PBX Compatibility Feature.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 11: Permit Code Table
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the Permit Code Table. When
enabling, select from tables 1-4 in Program 0702 Item 5.
0701 - Toll Restriction Class, Item 12: Restrict Code Table
For the tenant and Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the Restrict Code Table. When
enabling, select from tables 1-4 in Program 0702 Item 6.
0702 - Toll Restriction Table, Item 1: International Call Restrict Table
Enter the international dialing codes you want to restrict.
0702 - Toll Restriction Table, Item 2: International Call Permit Table
Enter the international dialing codes you want to permit.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 3: Maximum Number of Digits in Local Call
Set the maximum number of digits local callers can dial.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 4: Maximum Number of Digits in Non-Local Calls
Set the maximum number of digits long distance callers can dial. Non-local (i.e., long distance) calls are
calls where the NPA or NNX is in either the Common Permit Code Table (Program 0702 Item 7) or the
Permit Code Table (Program 0702 Item 5).
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 5: Permit Code Table
For each tenant, program codes into the Permit Code Tables.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 6: Restrict Code Table
For each tenant, program codes into the Restrict Code Tables.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 7: Common Permit Code Table
For each tenant, program codes into the Common Permit Code Table.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 8: Common Restrict Table
➣
➣
➣
➣
For each tenant, program codes into the Common Restrict Code Table.
0702 - Toll Restriction Tables, Item 9, PBX Access Codes
Each tenant can have up to 10 PBX access codes. Refer to the PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics.
0901- Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Item 19, Toll Restriction
For each trunk, enter 0 to enable Toll Restriction; enter 1 to disable Toll Restriction.
1004 - Toll Restriction Class
For each extension, assign a Toll Restriction Class for reach Night Service mode.
1006 - Class of Service
For each extension, assign a Class of Service (1-15).
Related Features
Toll Restriction Override
A user can temporarily override an extension’s Toll Restriction.
Operation
To place a trunk call if your system is Toll Restricted:
1.
Place call normally.
If your Toll Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call will be cut off.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 531
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction Override
Toll Restriction Override
Description
124i ☞
384i ☞
Available.
Available.
Toll Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass an extension’s Toll Restriction. This helps a user that
must place an important call that Toll Restriction normally prevents. For example, you could set up Toll Restriction to block 900 calls and then provide a Toll Restriction Override code to your attendant and executives. When
the attendant or executive needs to place a 900 call, they just:
Press CALL1 and dial their override code.
•
Press a line key or dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9 or #9 002).
•
Place the 900 call without restriction.
•
You can assign a different Toll Restriction Override code to each extension. Or, extensions can share the same
override code.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
Programming
Start
In 0406:33, enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to use Toll Restriction
Override?
Yes
Extensions may share
the same code.
After the system
implements Toll
Restriction Override, do
users have adequate time
to dial their number?
In 0406:33, enter 1.
In 1025, enter the Toll
Restriction Override code
(4 digits) for each
extension port.
No
In 0405:38, change
the Toll Restriction
Override time.
Yes
Stop
532 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Toll Restriction Override
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 38: Toll Restriction Override Time
➣
➣
Set the Toll Restriction Override Time (0-64800 seconds). After dialing the Toll Restriction Override
codes, the system removes Toll Restriction for this interval.
0406 - COS Options, Item 33: Toll Restriction Override
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use Toll Restriction Override.
1025 - Toll Restriction Override Codes
For each extension port, enter the Toll Restriction Override code (four digits). Each extension port can
have a separate override code.
Related Features
Station Message Detail Recording
In the Class heading in the SMDR report, POTA indicates that the call was placed using Toll Restriction
Override.
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Override temporarily overrides an extension’s Toll Restriction.
Voice Announce Unit
If the system has a Voice Announce Unit, users hear, "Your call cannot go through. Please call the operator" when they dial a number that Toll Restriction prevents.
Operation
To temporarily override a restricted extension’s Toll Restriction:
You can override restriction for only one call at a time.
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 875.
3.
Dial Toll Restriction Override code.
If you wait too long before going to the next step, you may have to repeat the procedure.
You’ll hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
4.
Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
5.
Dial number without restriction.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 533
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Description
124i ☞
-
Available — requires EXCPRU 2.10
or higher and an LAPB PCB. Not
available in Base software.
Year 2000 Compliance: 124i is
unaffected by the Year 2000 date
change as the system uses a 2-digit
date code entry. Future releases will
use a 4-digit date code entry.
384i ☞
-
Available — requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Year 2000 Compliance: 384i is
unaffected by the Year 2000 date
change as prior to 3.07.25, a 2-digit
date code entry is used. With 3.07.25
or higher, a 4-digit date code entry is
used.
The system provides comprehensive Traffic Management (TMS) Reports that help when analyzing system usage
and calling patterns. The TMS report is in five sections (shown below):
1.
Trunk Calls Sorted by Extension
2.
Trunk Calls Sorted by Trunk
3.
ACD Calls Sorted by Agent
4.
ACD Calls Sorted by ACD Group
5.
All Trunks Busy Report
1. Trunk Calls Sorted By Extension
Output Format
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sample Report
10/03/95 PAGE 001
|===== INBOUND CALLS =====|===== OUTBOUND CALLS =======|
STA | TOTAL | ANSRD | IN USE | TRIED | ABORTED | IN USE |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------301
4
1 00:01:40
3
2
00:00:01
305
0
2 00:02:44
0
0
00:00:00
307
0
0 00:00:00
1
1
00:00:00
311
0
1 00:01:15
0
0
00:00:00
Heading
STA
Extension number
INBOUND CALLS
Incoming trunk calls
TOTAL
The total of all incoming trunk calls that rang the extension
ANSRD
The total of all incoming trunk calls that the extension answered
IN USE
The time the extension was in use on incoming trunk calls
OUTBOUND CALLS
TRIED
534 FEATURES
Description
Outgoing trunk calls
The total of all trunk calls the extension tried to place
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
ABORTED
The total of all trunk calls the user aborted before the called party
answered
IN USE
The time the extension was in use for outgoing trunk calls
2. Trunk Calls Sorted by Trunk
Output Format
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sample Report
10/03/95 PAGE 002
|===================== INBOUND CALLS =======================|OUTBOUND CALLS|
|
|
|RING-ANS| LONG|
|
| UNANSRD |ABAN-|
|
|
TRK |TOTAL|ANSRD| DELAY | WAIT| IN USE |TRMNATD| WAIT
|DONED|TOTAL| IN USE |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------001
2
2 00:00:13
0 00:02:30
0 00:00:00
0
4 00:00:02
002
2
2 00:00:05
0 00:03:09
0 00:00:00
0
0 00:00:00
Heading
Description
TRK
Trunk number
INBOUND CALLS
Incoming trunk calls
TOTAL
The total of all incoming calls that rang the trunk
ANSRD
The total of all incoming calls on the trunk answered in the system
RING-ANS DELAY
The length of time calls on the trunk rang before being answered
LONG WAIT
The number of calls that ring longer than 0414:6 (TMS Report
Wait Time) before being answered.
IN USE
The time that unanswered incoming calls rang
TRMNATD
The number of calls that were terminated ;by the caller before
being answered in the system
UNANSRD WAIT
The time that unanswered incoming calls rang
ABONDONED
The number incoming calls that the outside caller hung up while
the calls were on hold or being transferred
OUTBOUND CALLS
Outgoing trunk calls
TOTAL
IN USE
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
The time the extension was in use for outgoing trunk calls
FEATURES 535
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Description (Cont’d)
3. ACD Calls Sorted by Agent
Output Format
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sample Report
10/03/95 PAGE 003
ACD |== INBOUND CALLS ===|=== OUTBOUND CALLS ===|== OFF-DUTY ==|
AGENT|TOTAL|ANSRD| IN USE |TRIED|ABORTED| IN USE |TIMES|DURATION|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------339
5
5 00:00:34
0
0 00:00:00
0 00:00:00
Heading
ACD AGENT
Each extension/agent that is in an ACD Group
INBOUND CALLS
Incoming trunk calls to ACD agents
TOTAL
The number of trunk calls routed to the agent (answered or
unanswered)
ANSRD
The total of the incoming trunk calls answered by the agent
IN USE
The total time the member was in use for incoming trunk calls
OUTBOUND CALLS
Outgoing trunk calls from ACD agents
TRIED
The number of times the agent seized trunks for outgoing calls
ABORTED
The number of times the agent aborted before the called party
answered
IN USE
The time the agent was in use for outgoing trunk calls
OFF DUTY
536 FEATURES
Description
Off-duty status of ACD agent
TIMES
The number of times the agent was in off-duty mode (i.e., logged
out of their ACD Group)
DURATION
The length of time the agent was in off-duty mode, incremented
when the agent returns to service
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Description (Cont’d)
4. ACD Calls Sorted by ACD Group
Output Format
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sample Report
10/03/95 PAGE 004
|
|
|
|========= ALL AGENTS BUSY ==========
| ACD | ACD |
| INBND |
| # OF | CALLS | CALLS |
GROUPS|MASTER| AGENTS | CALLS | DURATION | TIMES | RECVD | ABORTED |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------001
305
5
00:00:46
5
0
0
307
317
339
Heading
Description
ACD GROUPS
The ACD Group number (001-008)
ACD MASTER
The master number for each ACD Group
AGENTS
The extension number of each ACD agent in each ACD Group
INBND CALLS
Total number incoming trunk calls to ACD agent
ALL AGENTS BUSY
Report of the All Agents Busy condition. This occurs when there
are no idle extensions in an ACD Group to receive calls to the ACD
master number.
DURATION
The cumulative length of time of the All Agents Busy condition
# OF TIMES
The number of times the All All Agents Busy condition occurred
CALLS RECVD
The number of trunk calls received by the ACD group while all
agents were busy
CALLS ABORTED
The number of trunk calls the outside caller aborted while waiting
for an agent to answer (excluding trunk calls to which an overflow
announcement is sent)
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 537
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Description (Cont’d)
5. All Trunks Busy Report
Output Format
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sample Report
10/03/95 PAGE 005
|
|========= ALL TRUNKS BUSY ==========|
GROUPS| TRUNKS | TOTAL | DURATION | CALLS ATTEMPTED |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------002
001
3
00:01:28
2
002
Heading
Description
GROUPS
The associated Trunk Group number
TRUNKS
The trunk port number the associated Trunk Group
ALL AGENTS BUSY
Report of the All Trunks Busy condition
TOTAL
The number of times all trunks in the associated group were busy at
the same time
DURATION
The commutative length of the All Trunks Busy condition
CALLS ATTEMPTED
The number of outgoing trunk group calls attempted while all
trunks in the group were busy. This field does not include trunk
calls placed using a line key or Trunk Group codes (e.g., 804 + 1
for Trunk Group 1).
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
538 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Programming
Start
Stop
No
Do you want to set
up and print the TMS
Reports?
Refer to your Software and
Hardware Manuals for more
on setting up DCIs.
Yes
Is your TMS Report
printer set up?
No
In 0417:1, assign the
DCI Software Port to
which the TMS Report
printer is connected.
Yes
In 0417:2, set From(EXT)
and To(EXT) to include just
the range of extensions you
want to print.
A range of
extensions
Should the TMS
Report include all
extensions or just a
range of extensions?
In 0417:2, set From(TRK)
and To(TRK) to include
just the range of trunks
you want to print.
A range
of trunks
Should the TMS
Report include all
trunks or just a range
of trunks?
In 0417:4, set
Mode to 0.
Manually
Do you want to
print the TMS
Report manually or
automatically at a
preset time?
All
extensions
All
trunks
Automatically
In 0417:2, set
From(EXT) to 1 and
To(EXT) to the last
installed extension.
In 0417:2, set
From(TRK) to 1 and
To(TRK) to the last
installed trunk.
Go to A on the
following page.
In 0417:3, enter 1
when you see Print
All?(Yes:1)
In 0417:3, enter 0
when you see Data
Clear?(Yes:1) .
Accumulate
When the report
runs, do you want
the TMS data to
clear (erase) or
accumulate?
Clear
In 0417:3, enter 1
when you see Data
Clear?(Yes:1) .
Go to B on the
following page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 539
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued from A
on the preceding
page.
In 0417:4, enter
2 for Mode.
Trunk &
ACD
Do you want the
automatically printed
report to include trunk
data, trunk and ACD
data, or all data?
Trunk
data
In 0417:4, enter
1 for Mode.
All data
In 0417:4, enter
3 for Mode.
In 0417:4, enter the
start time for the
automatic report
(Hour and MIN).
Continued from B
on the preceding
page.
Are the LONG
WAIT calls in TMS
Report Section 2
logging correctly?
No
In 0414:6, change the
TMS Report Wait Time
to meet the site's
requirements.
Yes
Stop
540 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0414 - System Timers (Part 2), Item 6: TMS Report Wait Time
➣
➣
➣
➣
Calls ringing an ACD Group longer than this interval are marked as LONG WAIT calls in TMS Report
Section 2 (Trunk Calls Sorted by Trunk). The range is 1-64800 seconds.
0417 - Traffic Management Report Setup, Item 1: TMS Printer Output Port
Enter the DCI Software Port (1-144, 145-288) to which the TMS printer is connected.
0417 - Traffic Management Report Setup, Item 2: TMS Print Range
Specify which extensions and trunks you want to include in each of the TMS reports:
From (EXT) = The first extension in the print range (1-256)
To (EXT) = Last extension in the print range (1-256)
From (TRK) = First trunk in the print range (1-128)
To (TRK) = Last trunk in the print range (1-128)
0417 - Traffic Management Report Setup, Item 3: Manual Printing
Enter 1 for this option if you want the TMS report range specified in Item 2 to immediately print to the
printer specified in Program 0417 Item 1. Immediate printing is available only if Program 0417 Item 4
Mode = 0 (manual mode).
0417 - Traffic Management Report Setup, Item 4: Print Time Setup
Use this option to specify the print mode for the TMS report.
Prompt
Entry
Description
Mode
0
Manual printing enabled. Manual printing will occur immediately
when requested by Program 0417 Item 3.
1
Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for trunk data only. The
TMS report will include only sections 2 and 5. Use the prompts Hour
and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The TMS data
clears after the report prints.
2
Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for trunk and ACD data
only. The TMS report will provide data in sections 2-5 only. Use the
prompts Hour and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The
TMS data clears after the report prints.
3
Automatic printing (at a preset time) enabled for all data. Use the
prompts Hour and MIN below to select the automatic print time. The
TMS data clears after the report prints.
Hour
This option selects the start hour (1-23) for automatic printing. Use a 24-hour
clock (e.g., 13 = 1:00 PM).
MIN
This option selects the start minute (1-59) for the hour selected in the previous
option.
Related Features
Data Communications Interface (DCI)
TMS Reports require a DCI Module or 3-DCI Unit, in addition to additional programming and a customer-provided printer. Refer to the system Software Manual and Hardware Manual for more on setting
up and connecting to DCIs.
Station Message Detail Recording
SMDR provides additional information about the system’s trunk calling patterns. Refer to the Software
Manual for more.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 541
Features N-Z
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Operation
To select a printer for the Traffic Management Report:
1.
Enter the programming mode
2.
0417 + HOLD
Tenant No?
3.
Enter the number of the Tenant Group you want to program (1-4) + HOLD
Menu No?
4.
1 + HOLD
Print Port:
The previously programmed value displays.
5.
Enter the DCI Software Port (1-144, 145-288) to which the TMS printer is connected + HOLD
Menu No?
6.
Return to step 4 to select another menu item.
OR
HOLD + Return to step 3 to select another Tenant Group.
OR
HOLD + HOLD to exit.
To run the Traffic Management Report:
1.
Enter the programming mode
2.
0417 + HOLD
Tenant No?
3.
Enter the number of the Tenant Group you want to program (1-4) + HOLD
Menu No?
4.
3 + HOLD
Print All?(Yes:1)
The previously programmed value displays.
5.
1 + HOLD to enable printing.
OR
HOLD to go back to step 3.
Data Clear?(Yes:1)
6.
1 + HOLD to run the TMS Report and clear (erase) the data after the report is run.
OR
HOLD to run the TMS Report without clearing the data.
Use this option if you want data to accumulate in the TMS Report.
Print O.K.
If you see PRINT N.G. instead, there is a problem with the TMS printer or the software assignment.
7.
HOLD + Return to step 4 to select another menu item.
OR
HOLD + HOLD + Return to step 3 to select another Tenant Group.
OR
HOLD three times to exit.
Note: For additional programming options, refer to Program 0417 - Traffic Management Report Options on
page 769.
542 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Transfer
Transfer
Description
124i ☞
-
Available.
MOH or ringback on Transfer
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
384i
☞
-
Available.
MOH or ringback on Transfer
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active Intercom or outside call to any other extension
in the system. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker. A call a user
transfers automatically recalls if not picked up at the destination extension. This assures that users do not lose or
inadvertently abandon their transfers. In 384i system software 3.04 and higher and 124i, while a transferred call
is ringing an extension the system can optionally play ringback tone or Music on Hold to the caller.
The system allows the following types of transfers:
Screened Transfer
The transferring user announces the call to the destination before hanging up
Unscreened Transfer
•
The transferring party extends the call without an announcement.
Extension (Department) Groups Transfer
•
The Transferring party sends the call to a Department instead of an extension.
Transfer Without Holding
•
A user presses a busy line key and waits for the call to complete. The system automatically sends them the
call when the internal caller hangs up.
•
Automatic On-Hook Transfer Operation
With Automatic On-Hook Transfer, a Transfer goes through as soon as the transferring user hangs up. For example, extension 304 can answer a trunk, press HOLD, dial 305 and hang up. The system extends the call to extension 305. Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer, the call would stay on Hold at extension 304 when the user
hangs up. To extend the call, the user at extension 304 would have to press CONF (TRF) or a Transfer function
key before hanging up.
Each method has advantages. Automatic On-Hook Transfer makes transferring calls easier. However, users have
to be more aware of how they handle their calls on Hold. Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer, extending a call
becomes a two-step operation — but separate from placing calls on Hold.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 543
Features N-Z
Transfer
Programming
Start
Should extension be
allowed to place and
Unscreened Transfer?
Yes
No
Should extension be allowed
to use Transfer Without
Holding?
Yes
No
Should extension have
Automatic On-Hook
Transfer?
No
In 0406 Item 11,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 11,
enter 1.
If disabled, extension user cannot press a busy line key and
wait for the internal caller to hang up.
In 0406 Item 34,
emter 0.
In 0406 Item 34,
emter 1.
If disabled, extension user must additionally press
TRFR to Transfer a call.
In 0406 Item 76,
enter 0.
In 1006, assign a function
key as code 1077.
Function key
Yes
In 0406 Item 76,
enter 1.
Do you want to use the
CONF/TRF key or a function
key to extend calls?
CONF/TRF
In 0402 Item 6, enter 0. In
0402 Item 2, enter 0.
The pre-answer display shows "TRANSFER<<," the
incoming trunk and the transferring extension.
No
In 0406 Item 42,
enter 0.
Should extension be able to
see the incoming pre-answer
display?
Yes
In 0406 Item 42,
enter 1.
Continued on
next page.
544 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Transfer
Programming (Cont’d)
Continued
from
previous
page.
The Transfer Callback display shows
"TRF RCALL" and the number of the
extension that didn't pick it up.
In 0406 Item 95,
enter 0.
No
Should extension be able
to see the Transfer
Callback display?
Yes
In 0406 Item 95,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
In 0401 Item 19,
enter 0.
No
Should extensions be
allowed to Transfer calls to
busy extensions?
If an extension's
Transfer is not picked
up, does it recall in an
adequate time?
Yes
No
In 0401 Item 19,
enter 1.
In 0405 Item 5, change
the Transfer Recall time.
Yes
In 0401 Item 18,
enter 1.
In 0401 Item 25, enter
1 to enable ringback
for transferred caller.
Hookswitch
+ *7
Ringback
For single line telephones,
should hookswitch or
hookswitch + *7 answer
camped on trunk call?
While a Transfer is
ringing the
destination, should
system play MOH or
ringback to caller?
Hookswitch
MOH
In 0401 Item 18,
enter 0.
In 0401 Item 25, enter 0
to enable MOH for
transferred caller.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 545
Features N-Z
Transfer
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 18: SLT Answering Mode
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
546 FEATURES
For a busy single line (500/2500 type) telephones, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call:
0=
Press and release hookswitch to pick up waiting call
1=
Press and release hookswitch and dial Service Code 894 to answer
waiting call
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 19: Busy Transfer
Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled, calls transferred to
busy extensions recall immediately.
0401 - Tenant Group Options (Part A), Item 25: MOH on Transfer
Use this option to enable (0) or disable (1) MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred caller hears
Music on Hold while their call rings the destination extension. If disabled (1), a transferred caller hears
ringback while their call rings the destination extension.
0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B), Item 2: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part A)
Set the CONF (TRF) key for Transfer (0), Series Call (1) or Flash (2). When enabling the Transfer mode,
you must also set Program 0402 Item 6 for Transfer (0).
0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B), Item 6: CONF (TRF) Key Operating Mode (Part B)
Set the CONF (TRF) key for Transfer (0) or Conference (1). If set for Transfer, also refer to Program
0402 Item 2.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 5: Transfer Recall Time
Set the Transfer Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension
that initially transferred it after this interval. This interval also sets how long a transferred call camps-on
to a busy extension.
0406 - COS Options, Item 11: Unscreened Transfer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use Unscreened
Transfer.
0406 - COS Options, Item 34: Transfer Without Holding
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use Transfer Without Holding.
0406 - COS Options, Item 42: Transfer Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s incoming Transfer pre-answer
display.
0406 - COS Options, Item 76: Automatic On Hook Transfer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use Automatic On
Hook Transfer. If enabled, user must press HOLD and dial the extension number to Transfer the call. If
disabled, user must press HOLD, dial the extension number and then CONF (TRF) to transfer the call.
0406 - COS Options, Item 95: Transfer Callback Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the Transfer Callback Display. If disabled,
the second line of the display shows: ANSWERED. If enabled, the second line of display shows: TRF
RCALL followed by the number of the extension from which the recall came.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
If the CONF (TRF) key is set for Conference (in Program 0402 Item 6), extension users may want function keys programmed for Transfer (code 1077).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Transfer
Related Features
Call Forwarding
With Transfer to Busy Extensions enabled (Program 0401 Item 19=1), Call Forwarding with Both Ringing offers a unique option. A transferred call will wait for either the forwarding or destination extension
to become free. The call goes through to whichever extension becomes available first. If neither extension becomes free within the Transfer Recall Time, the call recalls the transferring extension.
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Page a co-worker and have the call automatically Transfer when the co-worker answers the Page.
One-Touch Calling
When transferring, an extension user can press a One-Touch Key instead of dialing the extension number.
Serial Call
Serial Call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension.
Tenant Service
An extension user can Transfer a trunk call to a user in another tenant group.
Operation
Transferring Trunk Calls
To Transfer a trunk call to a co-worker’s extension:
1.
At keyset, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, hookflash.
You hear Transfer dial tone.
2.
Dial co-worker’s extension number.
If the extension is busy or doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or press the
flashing line key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have the call
Camp-On.
3.
Announce call and hang up.
If you don’t have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press CONF (TRF) or your Transfer
Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call.
If your co-worker doesn’t want the call, press the flashing line key to return to the call.
If you don’t want to screen the call, hang up without making an announcement.
To answer a call transferred to your extension:
1.
Lift the handset when a co-worker announces the call.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 547
Features N-Z
Transfer
Operation (Cont’d)
Transferring Without Holding
To Transfer without holding (keyset only):
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press busy line key.
3.
When original caller hangs up, you are connected.
Transferring Intercom Calls
To Transfer your Intercom call:
1.
At keyset, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, hookflash.
2.
Dial extension to receive your call.
If the extension is busy or doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or press
the flashing CALL key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have
the call Camp-On.
3.
Announce your call and hang up.
If your co-worker doesn’t want the call, press the flashing CALL key to return to it.
With Automatic On Hook Transfer
If your co-worker just speaks toward their phone to answer, the transferred Intercom call goes
on Hold at your phone when you hang up.
Without Automatic On Hook Transfer
You must press CONF (TRF) or your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call.
If your co-worker just speaks toward their phone to answer, the transferred Intercom call disconnects when you hang up.
To Transfer the call unscreened, press CONF (TRF) or your Transfer Programmable Function
Key and hang up without making an announcement.
548 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing
Description
124i ☞
-
Available — 16 trunk groups and 36
routes.
Changing the Trunk Access Code
requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher.
384i ☞
-
Available — 128 trunk groups and
64 routes.
Changing the Trunk Access Code
requires system software 3.04 or
higher.
Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group Routing code (9) for
trunk calls. Trunk Group Routing routes calls in the order specified by system programming. If a user dials 9
and all trunks in the first group are busy, the system may route the call to another group. When you’re setting up
your system, Trunk Group Routing will help you minimize the expense of toll calls. For example, if your system has outbound WATS lines, OCC lines and DDD lines, use Trunk Group Routing to route calls to the WATS
lines first.
Route 1
Outbound Call
WATS
Least Expensive
First Choice
Route 2
OCC
Moderately
Expensive
Second Choice
Route 3
DDD
Most Expensive
Third Choice
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled. All trunks are in Group 1.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 549
Features N-Z
Trunk Group Routing
Programming
Start
In this case, Trunk Group
Routing is not required.
In 0905, put all trunks in
the same Trunk Group.
For example, put DDD trunks in group 1
and WATS trunks in group 2.
Yes
Using Trunk Groups from
0905, in 0906 set up an
outbound routing table (1-64
in 384i, 1-36 in 124i).
Stop
In 0907, enter 0 for
extensions that you want to
prevent from dialing 9.
No
In 0912, assign extensions that
should use Trunk Group
Routing to the Access Maps set
in the previous step.
In 1006, do not assign a
function key for Trunk Group
Routing (code 1011).
Are all trunks of the
same carrier/cost type?
Should extension be able
to dial 9 and use Trunk
Group Routing?
In 0911, assign all the
trunks in a specific route to
the same Access Map. Use
options 1, 4, or 7.
No
Do you want onebutton access to Trunk
Group Routing?
Do you want to change
the Trunk Access Code
(normally 9)?
No
In 0905, program
trunks of the same type
into the same group.
Normally, the least expensive carriers
should be the first routes chosen.
Yes
In 0907, assign
extensions to the
routes set up in 0906.
Caution: Be sure the assignments made in
0911 don't interfere with your incoming call
Access Map programming. This may restrict
your Trunk Group Routing choices.
Yes
Yes
In 1006, assign a function
key for Trunk Group Routing
access (code 1011).
In 0510, select a new
Trunk Access Code.
You must also carefully
review 0501.
No
Stop
550 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Trunk Group Routing
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0510 - Trunk Access Code
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
If required, change the Trunk Access Code (normally 9).
0905 - Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-128).
0906 - Trunk Group Routing
Set up an outbound routing table (1-64 in 384i, 1-36 in 124i) for trunk groups assigned in Program 0905.
0907 - Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Assign the routes set in Program 0906 to extensions.
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
Access Map programming may limit Trunk Group Routing options.
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Access Map programming may limit Trunk Group Routing options.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Trunk Group Routing access (code 1011).
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Instead of using Trunk Group Routing, an extension user can place a trunk call by:
Pressing a line key
•
Dialing a trunk service code
•
Pressing a trunk group key (refer to the Trunk Group feature)
•
Dialing a trunk group service code (refer to the Trunk Group feature).
•
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Programmable Function Keys
Programmable Function Keys simplify placing calls using Trunk Group Routing.
Ringing Line Preference
The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming (Program 0906) when setting up Ringing Line Preference.
Tenant Service
Each tenant group can have a different trunk group routing code.
Trunk Groups
Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks within a specific trunk group.
Operation
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 9.
3.
Dial number.
OR
1.
Press Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1011).
2.
Dial number.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 551
Features N-Z
Trunk Groups
Trunk Groups
Description
124i ☞
Available — 16 trunk groups.
384i ☞
Available — 128 trunk groups.
Trunk Groups let you optimize trunk usage for incoming and outgoing calls. With Trunk Groups, users can have
loop (rotary) keys for trunk calls. Incoming trunk group calls ring these loop keys. For outgoing calls, the user
presses a loop key to access the first available trunk within the group. You set the access order in trunk group
programming. The system allows 128 trunk groups.
Loop keys give an extension user more available function keys, since the user doesn’t need a separate line key for
each trunk. The user only needs one loop key for each trunk group. This simplifies placing and answering calls.
Like Trunk Group Routing, Trunk Groups help you minimize the expense of toll calls. For example, if your system
has outbound WATS lines, OCC lines and DDD lines, program the trunk group to route to the WATS lines first.
Priority
Type of Trunk
1
WATS
2
OCC
3
DDD
Conditions
None
Default Setting
All trunks are in group 1.
552 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Trunk Groups
Programming
Start
In 0905, put all
trunks in the same
Trunk Group.
Yes
For example, put DDD trunks in group 1
and WATS trunks in group 2.
Are all trunks of the
same carrier/cost
No
type?
No
In 0905, program trunks of
the same type into the
same Trunk Group.
Each trunk with unique access requirements should
be in its own Access Map.
In 0912, assign extensions to
Access Maps whose trunks do
not use options 1, 4, 6 or 7.
No
Should extension be able
to place outgoing calls
on Trunk Groups?
Yes
In 0912, assign extensions
to Access Maps that use
option 1, 4, 6 or 7.
Stop
In 1006, do not assign
function keys for Trunk
Group access (code 1012
+ group).
In 0402 Item 1, enter
2 for Incoming
In 0911, assign trunks to
Access Maps. Use access
option 1, 4, 6 or 7.
No
Incoming
Should extensions
have one-button
access to Trunk
Groups?
Should Trunk Group
function key be for
Outgoing Access,
Incoming Access or
both?
Yes
Outgoing
In 1006, assign function
keys for Trunk Group
access (code 1012 +
group).
In 0402 Item 1, enter
1 for Outgoing
Both
In 0402 Item 1, enter 0 for
both Incoming and
Outgoing Access.
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 553
Features N-Z
Trunk Groups
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0402 - Tenant Group Options (Part B), Item 1: Trunk Group Key Operating Mode
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the operating mode of the extension’s trunk group keys (Incoming and Outgoing Access = 0, Outgoing Access =1, Incoming Access = 2).
0905 - Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-128).
0911 - Trunk Access Map Setup
Assign trunks to Access Maps (1-128).
0912 - Extension Access Map Assignment
Assign Access Maps (1-128) to extensions.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for trunk group access (code 1012 + group).
Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Instead of using Trunk Groups, an extension user can place a trunk call by:
Pressing a line key
•
Dialing a trunk access code
•
Dialing a Trunk Group Routing code (9) - refer to the Trunk Group Routing feature
•
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify placing and answering trunk group calls.
Ring Groups
Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group Routing
code (9) for trunk calls.
Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 804.
3.
Dial trunk group number (1-9, 01-99 or 001-128)
4.
Dial number.
OR
1.
Press trunk group key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1012 + group)
2.
Dial number
To answer an incoming trunk group call:
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Press flashing trunk group key.
554 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Description
124i ☞
Available.
384i ☞
Available.
Trunk Queuing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy trunk or trunk group to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as soon as the trunk is available. The user does not have to
manually retry the trunk later. Trunk Queuing lets the caller know when the call can go through. If the extension user does not answer the Trunk Queuing ring, the system cancels the queue request.
With Trunk Camp On, an extension user can queue (wait in line) off hook for a busy trunk or trunk group to become free. The caller connects to the trunk when the trunk becomes free. As with Trunk Queuing, the user does
not have to manually retry the trunk later.
Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group. When a
trunk becomes free, the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left.
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Enabled.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 555
Features N-Z
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Programming
Start
No
In 0406 Item 25,
enter 0.
Should extension be
allowed to use Trunk
Queuing/Camp On
(Service Code 850)?
Yes
In 0406 Item 25,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign
Class of Service to
extensions.
In 1006, do not assign
a function key for
Trunk Queuing/Camp
On (code 1020).
No
Should extension have
one-button Trunk
Queuing/Camp On
operation?
When Trunk Queuing
calls an extension
back, does it ring for an
adequate time?
Yes
No
In 1006, assign a
function key for Trunk
Queuing/Camp On (code
1020).
In 0405 Item 26, change
the Trunk Queuing
Callback Time.
Yes
Does the system wait an
adequate time before
canceling Callbacks/Camp
Ons that cannot go through?
No
In 0405 Item 29, change
the Callback/Trunk
Queuing Cancel Time.
Yes
Stop
556 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 26: Trunk Queuing Callback Time
➣
➣
➣
➣
Set the Trunk Queuing Callback Time (0-64800 seconds). Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension
for this interval.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 29: Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
Set the Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time (0-64800 seconds). The system cancels an extension’s Callback or Trunk Queuing request after this interval.
0406 - COS Options, Item 25: Trunk Queuing (Camp-On)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Trunk Queuing.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
1006 - Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Trunk Queuing and Trunk Camp On (code 1020).
Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
With Automatic Route Selection, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route.
Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback
A user can Camp On or leave a Callback request for an extension.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Trunk Queuing operation.
Operation
To queue for a busy trunk:
1.
Try to access busy trunk.
2.
Dial 2 or press Trunk Queuing/Camp On key (PGM 1006 or SC 851: 1020).
3.
Hang up to leave a Trunk Queuing request.
OR
Wait off hook to Camp On to the trunk.
To answer when Trunk Queuing calls you back:
1.
Lift handset.
To cancel a Trunk Queueing/Camp On request:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 870.
3.
At keyset, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line telephone, hang up.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 557
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Voice Announce Unit
Description
124i ☞
-
-
Available — install VAU in odd
numbered ports only. The system
reserves the next adjacent port for the
expansion module (if installed). If not
installed, the adjacent port is disabled.
When a user presses 8 with system
software 2.13 Base, 2.18 EXCPRU
or higher, they hear the date
immediately after the time.
The Voice Announce Unit is Year
2000 Compliant and will announce
the year 2000 and above.
384i ☞
Available. — Park and Page and
Personal Greeting have different
procedures prior to system
software 3.04.
-
When a user presses 8 with system
software 3.06.02 or higher, they hear
the date immediately after the time.
-
The Voice Announce Unit is Year
2000 Compliant and will announce
the year 2000 and above.
The Voice Announce Unit (VAU) Module gives the system voice recording and playback capability. This enhances the system with:
VAU Messages - are 16 system messages used for the General Message, Automated Attendant greetings
•
and the 900 Preamble
General Message - provides a prerecorded message to which any user can listen
•
Personal Greeting - lets an extension user record a message and forward their calls. Callers to the exten•
sion hear the recorded message and are then redirected.
Park and Page - parks a call at an extension and automatically pages the user to pick it up
•
Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance) - answers incoming calls, plays a greeting to the caller
•
and then lets the caller directly dial a system extension
Voice Prompting Messages - plays call and feature status messages to users
•
900 Preamble - alerts callers using 900 lines of the cost and features of the "pay-per-call" service
•
Time, Date and Station Number Check - lets a keyset extension user quickly hear a recording for the
•
time, date, or the extension’s number.
The Main VAU Module (P/N 92136) has three channels, 128 seconds of VAU Message storage and 256 seconds
of Personal Greeting storage. By adding the Plug-in Expansion Board (P/N 92137), the VAU capacity increases
to six channels and 512 seconds of Personal Greeting storage capacity. Each VAU channel has its own integral
DTMF receiver. The Main VAU Module and Plug-in Expansion Board do not require the use of system (i.e.,
CDTU PCB) DTMF receivers.
In the Main VAU Module, all three channels can play messages simultaneously, or users can record on two while
the third plays a message. By installing the Plug-in Expansion Board, six channels can play messages simultaneously, or users can record on four while the fifth and sixth play messages.1 With Automated Attendant, for example, a system with a Main VAU Module can answer and route three calls at the same time. A system with the
Plug-in Expansion Board installed can answer and route six calls at the same time.
VAU Messages
The VAU Module allows you to record up to 16 VAU messages. You allocate these messages for Automated Attendant greetings, the General Message and the 900 Preamble message. The total storage time for all 16 messages is 128 seconds. The maximum duration of any one VAU message is programmable, but normally limited
to 16 seconds . VAU messages are battery backed up. Once recorded, the VAU Module will retain the VAU Messages in memory for up to 14 days provided the battery in the module is fully charged. (To fully charge the battery, plug the VAU Module into a working system for about 24 hours.)
1
The Main VAU Module allows recording on two channels simultaneously. The Main Module with the Plug-in Expansion Board allows recording on four
channels simultaneously.
558 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Description (Cont’d)
Any on-premise extension, DISA or DID caller can listen, record and erase VAU Messages (unless restricted in
programming). DISA and DID callers use the same procedures as on-premise users, except that they must additionally enter a VAU password.
General Message
A General Message is a prerecorded message available to all callers. A General Message typically contains important company information that all employees should hear. To hear the General Message, an employee can go
to any keyset and press 4 (for General Message). You can restrict the ability to record the General Message in an
extension’s Class of Service. This allows you to give recording capability to the System Administrator or Communications Manager, for example, but not any employee. You can assign a different General Message to each
Tenant Group. The MW LED at each telephone flashes when a new General Message is recorded. Once the extension user listens to the message, the MW LED goes out.
Personal Greeting
Personal Greeting allows an extension user to record a message and forward their calls. Callers to the extension
hear the recorded message and are then forwarded to the new destination. With Personal Greeting, an extension
user can add a personal touch to their Call Forwards. For example, a user can record:
"Hi. This is John Smith. I’ll be out of the office today. In my absence, Mary Jones can answer all your questions.
Please hold on for Mary."
After they record their Personal Greeting, the extension user chooses the condition that will activate Personal
Greeting. Personal Greeting will activate for:
Calls to the extension when it is busy or not answered
•
All calls immediately
•
Calls to the extension that are unanswered
•
The extension user then selects the destination for their calls. The choices are:
A co-worker’s extension
•
Personal Greeting only (without forwarding)
•
The extension user’s own subscriber mailbox (if Voice Mail is installed)
•
Off-Premise via Common Abbreviated Dialing
•
In addition, the user can have Personal Greeting activate automatically for all calls, just CO (trunk) calls or just Intercom calls. When the user implements Personal Greeting for all calls, the system plays the greeting and reroutes:
Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant (OPA)
•
DISA calls ringing the extension
•
DID calls ringing the extension
•
Direct Inward Lines (DILs) ringing the extension
•
Intercom calls
•
With Personal Greeting for only CO (trunk) calls, the system reroutes all of the calls listed above except
Intercom calls.
Note: All the options above are not available in 384i system software prior to 3.04.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 559
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Description (Cont’d)
If the system has the Main VAU Module (P/N 92136), there are 256 seconds available for Personal Greeting storage. If the system has the Plug-in Expansion Board installed (P/N 92137), there are 512 seconds of Personal
Greeting storage. The maximum length of a single Personal Greeting is programmable, but is normally 16 seconds. Personal Greetings are not battery backed up. If the VAU Module is unplugged, if there is a commercial
power failure or if the system resets, any recorded Personal Greetings are lost.
Unique Personal Greeting Conditions
If a call comes into the extension when there are no VAU ports available to play the Personal Greeting, the
system forwards the call without playing the recorded message to the caller.
If an extension has Personal Greeting (RNA) enabled, Intercom calls that voice announce are not subject to
Personal Greeting rerouting.
Personal Greeting does not reroute normal Ring Group calls. Calls transferred from a co-worker or Voice
Mail Automated Attendant route to the forwarding destination without listening to the Personal Greeting.
Park and Page
When an extension user is away from their phone, Park and Page can let them know when they have a call waiting to be answered. To enable Park and Page, the user records a Personal Greeting along with an additional Paging announcement. Park and Page will then answer an incoming call and play the Personal Greeting to the caller.
The caller then listens to Music on Hold (if available) while the system broadcasts the prerecorded Paging announcement. When the extension user hears the Page, they can go to any telephone and use Directed Call Pickup
to intercept up the call.
For example, John Smith could record a Personal Greeting that says:
"Hello, this is John Smith. I am away from my phone right now but please hold on while I am automatically paged."
The prerecorded Paging announcement could say:
"John Smith, you have a call waiting on your line."
The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts the second
message. John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call. If John doesn’t pick up the call, the
Page periodically repeats.
Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls, immediately rerouted. This means that Park
and Page will activate for ringing Intercom calls, DID calls and DISA calls. It will also activate for calls transferred from the Automated Attendant. Additionally, calls from the Automated Attendant follow Automatic Overflow routing if not picked up. Park and Page will activate for transferred outside calls but not play the Personal
Greeting to the caller. If a call comes in when the specified Page zone is busy, the system broadcasts the announcement when the zone becomes free.
560 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Description (Cont’d)
Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance)
Automated Attendant automatically answers outside calls, plays a prerecorded greeting and then lets the outside
callers directly dial system extensions, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. Automated Attendant provides immediate answering and routing of outside calls without the need for an operator or dispatcher. Automated Attendant provides:
Single Digit Dialing
•
Single Digit Dialing allows Automated Attendant callers to dial extensions, Department Calling Groups
and Voice Mail by pressing a single digit. For example, your Automated Attendant can greet calls with,
"Thank you for calling. To place an order, dial 1. To check on an existing order, dial 2. To speak with an
operator, dial 0." You can set up single digit dialing for each VAU Message programmed to answer outside calls via the Automated Attendant. This allows you to set up day/night/holiday greetings or unique
greetings for each incoming trunk. (Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits 3 and 4, outside
callers will not be able to dial system extensions.)
Simultaneous Call Answering
•
With the Main VAU Module installed, the Automated Attendant can answer up to three calls simultaneously.
Adding the Plug-in Expansion Board lets the Automated Attendant answer up to six calls simultaneously.
Flexible Routing
•
The outside caller can directly dial any system extension, Department Calling Group or Voice Mail. If the
caller dials a busy extension, Automated Attendant allows them to dial another extension or wait for the
busy extension to become free. If the busy extension is a display keyset, the outside caller can optionally
leave their number (up to 14 digits) on the called extension’s display for a return call. The VAU Module
has integral DTMF receivers for detecting the digits that the callers dial. The Main VAU Module has
three receivers; the Main Module with the Plug-in Expansion Board has six receivers. Automated Attendant does not require circuits on a CDTU PCB for DTMF reception.
Automatic Overflow
•
Automatic Overflow can automatically redirect a call if it can’t go through. This can happen if all VAU
Module ports are busy, if the called extension doesn’t answer, or if the caller misdials or waits too long to
dial. (This would occur if the caller is using a dial pulse telephone.) When the call overflows, it rings a
designated Ring Group or the Voice Mail system.
Programmable Automated Attendant Greetings
•
You can record a different greeting for each trunk answered by the Automated Attendant. The greetings
can be different in the day, at night or on holidays or weekends. You can also have a special greeting if
the caller misdials. You record the greetings just the way you want. For example, "Dial the three-digit extension number you wish to reach, dial 500 for sales or dial 600 for Customer Service." When assigning
and recording Automated Attendant greetings, you can choose among the 16 VAU messages.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 561
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Description (Cont’d)
Voice Prompting Messages
The VAU Module provides the system with Voice Prompting Messages. These Voice Prompting Messages tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. For example, if a user calls extension 300 when it is busy, they hear,
"Station 300 is busy. For Callback, dial 2." The following table shows the available Voice Prompting Messages.
Voice Prompting Messages
Message No.
Message
This message will play when . . .
01
Oh
A user dials 6 for the extension number or 8 for the
time, or as part of a spoken code (e.g., 804).
02
Zero
Not currently used
03
1
04
2
A user dials 3 for the date, 6 for the extension
number, 8 for the time or as part of a spoken code
(e.g., 114).
05
3
06
4
07
5
08
6
09
7
10
8
11
9
12
10
13
11
14
12
562 FEATURES
A user dials 3 for the date or 8 for the time.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Voice Prompting Messages
Message No.
Message
This message will play when . . .
15
13
A user dials 3 for the date.
16
14
17
15
18
16
19
17
20
18
21
19
22
20
23
30
24
40
25
50
26
60
27
70
28
80
29
90
30
Hundred
Not currently used.
31
Thousand
Not currently used.
32
Sunday
A user dials 3 for the date.
33
Monday
34
Tuesday
35
Wednesday
36
Thursday
37
Friday
38
Saturday
39
This is station
A user dials 6 for the extension number.
40
The date is
A user dials 3 for the date.
41
The time is
A user dials 8 for the time.
42
AM
A user dials 8 for the time.
43
PM
A user dials 8 for the time.
44
Dial
A command is spoken (e.g., "dial 2").
45
Star
Not currently used.
46
Pound
47
Station
A user dials 6 for the extension number.
48
Is busy, for callback dial
A user is calling a busy extension.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 563
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Voice Prompting Messages
Message No.
Message
This message will play when . . .
49
All lines are busy, for callback
dial
A user dials 9 or 804 (+ trunk group) and all trunks
are busy
50
Please do not disturb
A user calls an extension that has enabled Do Not
Disturb.
51
Please hold on, all lines are
busy, your call will be answered
when a line becomes free
ACD message - refer to the ACD Manual (P/N
92000ACD**).
52
Please hold on, your call is
being rerouted
Call Forwarding Off-Premise is rerouting your call
53
The lowest cost line is busy,
please wait for the next one
ARS tries to reroute the user’s call and the least
costly route is busy.
54
The number you have dialed is
not in service
User dials a Service Code that Class of Service
prevents.
55
You have a message
An extension user has a Message Waiting to which
they have not responded.
56
Your call cannot go through,
please call the operator
Toll Restriction has denied a call.
57
Your calls have been forwarded
An extension user has forwarded their calls.
58
Vacant number
An extension user has dialed an extension that does
not exit.
59
Is unavailable
60
Please dial a new station
An outside caller dials an extension through the
Automated Attendant and the extension is busy.
61
Or dial
62
To wait
63
To leave your number
64
Dial # to call you back at
Not currently used.
65
Please enter your area code and
telephone number
An outside caller dials an extension through the
Automated Attendant and the extension is busy.
66
Please enter your password
Not currently used.
67
Please enter an account code
A user tries to place a trunk call and Forced Account
Codes are enabled.
68
Please start recording
A user has dialed the code to record a VAU message
or Personal Greeting
69
Recording finished
A user is recording a VAU message or Personal
Greeting and they have exceeded the maximum
allowed recording length.
70
Audio file is full
There is no more space available in the VAU for
storing messages.
564 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
telemanuals.com
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Voice Prompting Messages
Message No.
Message
This message will play when . . .
71
To listen dial
72
To erase dial
A user is trying to record a VAU message or
Personal Greeting and the recording already exists.
73
To re-record dial
74
To save dial
75
To leave a message
76
Just a moment
77
Hello
78
Thank you
79
Good-by
Not currently used.
Not currently used.
900 Preamble
If the system has trunks that are part of a 900 (caller paid) service, the VAU Module can automatically play a prerecorded message when a user answers the call. This prerecorded message should describe the 900 service features and cost. The 900 Preamble ensures that the caller is always aware that they have accessed a 900
"pay-per-call" service. A system user cannot converse with the caller until the preamble message ends. If the
caller hangs up before the message completes, they are not charged for the call. If the caller waits for the message to end, they can talk to a system user and call charging begins. The system will answer as many 900 calls as
there are available VAU ports. If a 900 calls comes in when all VAU ports are busy, the call will not appear on an
extension until a VAU port is available.
You can also use the 900 Preamble message to set up an Auto-Answer with Greeting application. When a receptionist answers a call, the VAU can play a preamble message such as, "Welcome to ABC Company. How can I
help you?" When the caller replies, the receptionist answers, "One moment please," and quickly extends the call
to the desired party. This ensures that all incoming calls are answered quickly, courteously and consistently.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 565
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Description (Cont’d)
Time, Date and Station Number Check
If the system has a VAU Module installed, any keyset user can find out the time, date or the extension’s number
while their phone is idle (on hook). The time and date check saves the user time since they don’t have to look for
a clock or calendar. Hearing the extension number conveniently identifies non-display keysets. To find out the
date, the user presses 3 (for Date). For their extension number, the user presses 6 (for Number). To listen to the
time, the user presses 8 (for Time).
(384i System Software Prior to 3.06.02 and 124i)
To find out the date, the user presses 3 (for Date). For their extension number, the user presses 6 (for Number).
To listen to the time, the user presses 8 (for Time).
(384i System Software 3.06.02 and Higher)
For find out their extension number, the user presses 6 (for Number). To listen to the time and date, the user
presses 8 (for Time). (Note that pressing 3 activates Directory Dialing and no longer causes the VAU to
play the date.)
Conditions
None
Default Setting
Disabled.
566 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming
Initial VAU Module Programming
Start
In 0005, enter circuit type 8 for the
VAU Module. (Skip this action and
the following decision in 124i.)
After programming circuit
type in 0005, enter Order
No. 2.
Expansion
You must initialze the VAU Module
when you install it for the first time.
Is the VAU a Main or
Expansion Module?
Is this a first time
installation?
Main
After programming circuit
type in 0005, enter Order
No. 1.
Yes
No
Do you want to initialize
(erase) all VAU Messages and
Personal Greetings?
Yes
In 2201, select Item 1 to
initialize all VAU Messages
and Personal Greetings.
No
Do you want to initialize
(erase) only VAU Messages?
Yes
In 2201, select Item 2 to
initialize only VAU Messages.
No
Do you want to initialze
(erase) only Personal
Greetings?
Yes
In 2201, select Item 3 to
initialize only Personal
Greetings.
No
Go to the
flowchart on the
following page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 567
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming (Cont’d)
Programming VAU Messages
The system uses VAU Messages
for the General Message,
Automated Attendant Greetings
and the 900 Preamble.
In 0406 Item 96,
enter 0.
Start
No
Should an extension be
able to record VAU
Messages?
Yes
In 0406 Item 96,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign a
Class of Service to
an extension.
This sets the maximum length of
Automated Attendant Greetings, the
General Message and the 900
Preamble.
Do you want VAU
Messages to be longer
than 16 seconds?
Yes
In 2202 Item 1, change
the maximum allowed
length of the VAU
Message.
No
In 2208, enter
CLEAR.
No
Should DISA callers be
able to record VAU
Messages?
Yes
In 2208, set the
password DISA callers
must dial before
recording VAU
Messages.
Go to the
flowchart on
the following
page.
568 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming (Cont’d)
Programming the General Message
Start
No
In 0406 Item 97,
enter 0.
In 0406 Item 98,
enter 0.
No
Should an extension be
allowed to listen to the
General Message?
Yes
Should an extension be
allowed to record the
General Message?
Yes
In 0406 Item 97,
enter 1.
In 0406 Item 98,
enter 1.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Each Tenant Group can have a
different General Message.
In 2203, enter the number of the
VAU Message you want to use
for the General Message.
Go to the
flowchart on
the following
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 569
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming (Cont’d)
Programming Personal Greeting
Start
In 0406 Item 99,
enter 0.
Should extension
be allowed to use
Personal Greeting?
No
Yes
In 0406 Item 99,
enter 1.
No
In 0405 Item 1, change the
Delayed Call Forwarding
interval.
Yes
In 2204, specify a VAU
No Answer Destination
Ring Group.
Changing this option also affects Park and Page.
In 1005, assign Class of
Service to extensions.
Should a call to an extension
with Personal Greeting
options 2 and 6 enabled ring
10 seconds before rerouting?
Yes
This also affects
Automated Attendant
If all VAU ports are busy,
should DIL and DISA calls
to an extension with
Personal Greeting
enabled reroute?
No
Yes
Should the call wait
20 seconds before
rerouting?
No
In 2202 Item 2, change the
maximum allowed
Personal Greeting length.
No
Is 16 seconds the
correct Personal
Greeting maximum
length?
In 0405 Item 63, change
the VAU No-Answer Time
interval.
Yes
For one-button access to the Call
Forwarding Device code (*4), in
1006 assign a Call Forwarding
Device key (code 1081).
570 FEATURES
Continued
on next
page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming (Cont’d)
Programming Park and Page
Start
In 0406 Item 99,
enter 0.
No
Yes
Should extension be able
to use Park and Page?
In 0406 Item 99,
enter 1.
Changing this option also affects Personal Greeting.
If a Park and Page is not
picked up, is the repeat
interval (18 seconds)
adequate?
No
In 0405 Item 64, change
the Park and Page Repeat
Timer.
Yes
For one-button access to the Call
Forwarding Device code (*4), in
1006 assign a Call Forwarding
(Device( key (code 1081).
Continue with
the following
flowchart.
Programming the 900 Preamble
Start
In 2207 for the specified trunk,
enter 0 to disable the 900
Preamble.
No
Should trunk play 900
preamble to caller
when it is answered?
Yes
In 2207 for the specified trunk,
enter the VAU Message
number (1-16) that should
play as the 900 preamble.
Go to the
flowchart on the
following page.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 571
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming (Cont’d)
Programming Automated Attendant (OPA), Page 1 of 2
Start
In 0901 Items 14-17 for
each trunk, enter a
circuit type other than 1.
No
Stop
Should Automated
Attendant answer
trunks?
Yes
In 2205 for each
trunk, enter the VAU
Message the caller
hears after answer.
If caller misdials,
should they hear an
error recording or
reroute/disconnect?
In 1804 Item 1 for
each trunk, enter 4.
Error
Recording
Reroute or
Disconnect
In 1802, enter 0 for each item
that should disconnect:
Item 1 = Timeout w/o dialing
Item 2 = Unanswered or busy
Item 3 = Misdial
Disconnect
If caller misdials,
waits too long or
dials an extension
that doesn't answer,
does call reroute or
disconnect?
In 0901 Item 14-17 for each
trunk, enter 1 if Automated
Attendant should
automatically answer
incoming calls.
In 2209 for each trunk,
enter the VAU
Message the caller
hears if they misdial.
Continued
on next
page.
Reroute
In 1802, enter 1 for each item
that should reroute:
Item 1 = Timeout w/o dialing
Item 2 = Unanswered or busy
Item 3 = Misdial
This also sets options
for DISA calls.
In 1803, set the Ring Group to
which the incomplete call
reroutes. (1-126 in 384i, 1-15
in 124i)
Continued
on next
page.
572 FEATURES
in 0909, assign extensions to
the Ring Group programmed
in 1803 that should receive
the rerouted calls.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming (Cont’d)
Programming Automated Attendant (OPA), Page 2 of 2
Continued
from
previous
page.
Programs 1802 and 1803
must be set to reroute.
If an extension doesn't
answer, does the
Automated Attendant
wait an adequate time
before rerouting?
No
In 0405 Item 35,
change the DISA and
OPA No Answer Time.
No
In 0405 Item 10,
change the Intercom
Interdigit Time.
Yes
Do callers have the
correct amount of
time to dial digits?
Yes
Should Automated
Attendant callers
have single digit
dialing options?
Yes
In 2210 for each VAU
Message used by the
Automated Attendant, set the
destination for each single
digit dialed.
No
Stop
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 573
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ (384i Only) 0005 - Manual Extension Circuit Type Setup
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
574 FEATURES
Enter circuit type 8 for the VAU Module. Assign Order 1 to the Main VAU. Assign Order 2 to the Plug-in
Expansion Board.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 1: Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set how long a telephone with Personal Greeting options 3 or 4 enabled will ring before the call reroutes
to the programmed destination.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 10: Intercom Interdigit Time
Automated Attendant (OPA) callers must dial digits within this interval. If the caller doesn’t, they hear
busy tone and must hang up and dial again.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 35: DISA and OPA No Answer Time
If an Automated Attendant (OPA) caller dials an extension that doesn’t answer, the call will wait this interval before rerouting to the Ring Group specified in Program 1803. This setting also affects unanswered DISA calls.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 63: VAU No-Answer Time
If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VAU ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the extension will wait this interval for a VAU port to become free. If a VAU port is still not available, the call
will ring the VAU No Answer Destination set in Program 2204.
0405 - System Timers (Part A), Item 64: Park and Page Repeat Timer
If a Park and Page is not picked up within this interval, the Paging announcement repeats.
0406 - COS Options, Item 96: VAU Record
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to record, erase and listen to VAU messages.
0406 - COS Options, Item 97: General Message Listen
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial 4 or Service
Code 111 and listen to their General Message.
0406 - COS Options, Item 98: General Message Record
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial Service Code
112 and record, listen to and erase the General Message.
0406 - COS Options, Item 99: Personal Greeting
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial Service Code
*47 to record, listen to or erase a Personal Greeting. This option also affects Park and Page.
0901 - Basic Trunk Port Setup (Part A), Items 14-17: Trunk Service Type
For each Night Service mode, enter 1 if trunk should be automatically answered by VAU Automated
Attendant.
0909 - Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to the Ring Group programmed in 1803 that should receive the rerouted calls.
1005 - Class of Service
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
1006 - Programming Function Keys (Part A)
For one-button access to the Call Forwarding (device) setup code (*4), assign a Call Forwarding (Device)
key (code 1081).
1802 - DISA and OPA Operating Mode, Items 1-3
Set what happens when an Automated Attendant (OPA) caller dials an extension that doesn’t answer, misdials or waits too long to dial. The options are disconnect (0) or route (1) to the Ring Group set in Program 1803. This also sets the options for DISA calls.
Item 1 = Time-out without dialing
Item 2 = Unanswered or busy
Item 3 = Misdial
The call follows the setting of Item 3 only if Program 2209 = 0 for the trunk.
1803 - DISA and OPA Transfer Destination
Set the destination that Automated Attendant (OPA) calls ring if the OPA caller dials an extension that
doesn’t answer, misdials or waits too long to dial. (The corresponding item in Program 1802 must be 1.)
This also sets the options for DISA calls. In 384i, destinations are Ring Groups 1-127 and Voice Mail
(128). In 124i, destinations are Ring Groups 1-16.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Programming (Cont’d)
➣ 1804 - VAU Setup, Item 1: Operator Assistance
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
➣
For each Night Service mode, enter 4 if trunk should be automatically answered by VAU Automated Attendant (OPA).
2201 - VAU Initialization
After the installing the VAU for the first time, initialize (erase) the VAU messages. The options are: 1
(Erase all VAU Messages and Personal Greetings), 2 (Erase only VAU Messages) and 3 (Erase only Personal Greetings). You can also erase any time after the initial installation for maintenance purposes. This
option is only available when programming from the telephone.
2202 - VAU Message Length
Set the maximum length of VAU messages (Item 1) and Personal Greetings (Item 2).
2203 - General Message Number
Enter the number of the VAU message you want to use for the General Message (01-16). The message
you select should not be used as a VAU message.
2204 - VAU No Answer Destination
When all VAU ports are busy, incoming DILs and DISA calls wait for the VAU No-Answer Time (Program 0405 Item 63) and then ring the VAU No Answer Destination Ring Group.
2205 - OPA Message Assignment
For each trunk that will be answered by the VAU Automated Attendant (OPA), enter the VAU message (116) the outside caller hears after answer. Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
2207 - 900 Preamble
For each trunk that should have the 900 Preamble option, enter the number of the VAU message (1-16)
that is your recorded preamble message. Enter 0 for no preamble.
2208 - VAU Password
Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system will allow them to record, listen to or erase
VAU messages.
2209 - OPA Error Message Assignment
For each trunk that will be answered by the VAU Automated Attendant (OPA), enter the VAU message (116) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly after answer. If you enter 0, the call reroutes according
to Program 1802 Item 3 and Program 1803. Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
2210 - Automated Attendant Single Digit Codes
Set up single digit dialing for Automated Attendant callers. For each VAU Message programmed to answer outside calls (see Program 2205), specify
The digit the Automated Attendant caller dials (1-12, where 10=0, 11=* and 12=#). (Keep in mind
•
that if you assign destinations to digits 3 and 4, outside callers will not be able to dial system extensions.)
The destination reached (four digits maximum) when the caller dials the single digit code.
•
Related Features
(384i Only) Tenant Service
One VAU Module is shared among all Tenant Groups.
Year 2000 Compliance
The Voice Announce Unit will properly announce the year 2000 and above.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 575
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation
VAU MESSAGES
To record a VAU message:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
OR
At a single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 116.
3.
Dial 7 (Record).
4.
Dial the VAU message number you want to record (01-16).
5.
When you hear, "Please start recording" followed by a beep, record your message.
Normally, your message cannot exceed 16 seconds. If you hear, "Recording finished," you have
exceeded the allowed message length.
6.
Press # to listen to the message you just recorded.
OR
Hang up to save the message.
To listen to a previously recorded VAU message:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
OR
At a single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 116.
3.
Dial 5 (Listen).
4.
Dial the VAU message number to which you want to listen (01-16).
You’ll hear the previously recorded message. If you hear a beep instead, there is no previous
message recorded.
5.
Dial # to hear the message again.
OR
Hang up.
To erase a previously recorded VAU message:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
OR
At a single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 116.
3.
Dial 3 (Erase).
4.
Dial the number of the VAU message you want to erase (01-16).
5.
Press HOLD (keyset only) to cancel the procedure without erasing (and return to step 3).
OR
Hang up to erase the message.
576 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation (Cont’d)
VAU MESSAGES (Cont’d)
To record, listen to or erase a VAU message if you call in using DISA:
1.
Place call to the system.
2.
After the system answers, dial the DISA password (normally 000000).
3.
Dial 116 and the VAU password.
4.
Dial the function you want.
7 = Record
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
5.
Dial the message number (01-16).
If you dialed 7 to record, you can dial # to listen to the message you just recorded.
If you dialed 5 to listen, you can dial # to listen to the message again.
If you want to Record, listen to or erase another message, go back to step 4.
GENERAL MESSAGE
To listen to the General Message:
Keyset
Your MW LED flashes when there is a new General Message. A voice message periodically reminds you
1.
Do not lift the handset or press CALL.
2.
Dial 4 (General).
You will hear the General Message for your own Tenant Group.
Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have unanswered "Message Waiting" requests or new messages in your "Voice Mail" mailbox.
Single Line Telephone
1.
Lift handset.
2.
Dial 111.
You will hear the General Message for your own Tenant Group.
To record, listen to or erase the General Message for your own Tenant Group:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2.
Dial 112.
3.
Dial the function you want.
7 = Record
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
If you dialed 7 to record, you can dial # to listen to the message you just recorded.
If you dialed 5 to listen, you can dial # to listen to the message again.
To Record or listen to the General Message again, go back to step 3.
If you dialed 3 to erase the General Message, you must go to step 4 (hang up). To cancel without erasing, press HOLD instead and go back to step 3.
4.
Hang up when you are done.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 577
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation (Cont’d)
PERSONAL GREETING
1.
Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT) and dial *4.
OR
Press Call Forwarding (Device) key (PGM1006 or SC 851: 1081).
2.
Dial 7 + When you hear, "Please start recording," record your Personal Greeting.
If you already have Personal Greeting or Park and Page set up, you can dial:
7 to re-record
5 to listen (then # to listen again)
3 to erase (then optionally HOLD to cancel the erase)
3.
Dial # + Personal Greeting condition:
2 = Busy or not answered
4 = Immediate
6 = Not answered
3 = Cancel
4.
Dial the destination to receive your calls. The destination can be:
- A co-worker’s extension
- Your Voice Mailbox (by dialing the Voice Mail master number)
- Off-premise via Common Abbreviated Dialing (by entering #2 + bin)
- Greeting without forwarding so caller hears busy (by entering your extension number)
You cannot forward to a Department Group pilot number.
5.
Dial Personal Greeting type:
2 = All calls
3 = Outside calls only
4 = Intercom calls only
6.
Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated.
To cancel your Personal Greeting:
1.
Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT).
2.
Dial *47 + 3.
3.
Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).
578 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation (Cont’d)
PERSONAL GREETING (Cont’d)
Older 384i Systems
To enable Personal Greeting:
Use this procedure when you don’t have a Personal Greeting recorded.
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial *47.
3.
When you hear, "Please start recording" followed by two beeps, begin recording your Personal Greeting.
4.
Dial # then the destination to which Personal Greeting will forward your calls.
You can forward your calls to:
- A co-worker’s extension number
- Greeting only without forwarding (by entering your own extension number)
- Your mailbox (by entering the Voice Mail master number)
- Off-premise via Common Abbreviated Dialing (#2 + bin number)
If you hang up without making an entry for this step, incoming callers just hear your Personal
Greeting. Calls from the Automated Attendant, DISA calls and DID calls ring your phone after the
greeting.
If you hang up after you make an entry for this step, the system implements "Forward Immediately for All Calls."
5.
Dial the condition that will activate Personal Greeting.
The choices are:
1 - Forward when busy
2 - Forward when not answered
3 - Forward when busy or not answered
4 - Forward immediately for all calls
If you hang up after you make an entry for this step, the system implements "All Calls" immediately.
6.
Dial the Personal Greeting forwarding type.
The choices are:
1 - All incoming calls
2 - Only CO (trunk) calls
DND Flashes slowly.
7.
Dial the option you want:
7 = reRecord
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
SPK = Hang up
If you dial 7 to Rerecord, go to step 4.
If you dial 5 to listen, you can repeat step 3 or press SPK to hang up.
If you dial 3, you will cancel your Park and Page when you press SPK to hang up. You can undo
the cancel by pressing HOLD before SPK. Press SPK to hang up.
You hear stutter dial tone when you place a new call.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 579
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation (Cont’d)
PERSONAL GREETING (Cont’d)
Older 384i Systems (Cont’d)
To rerecord, erase or listen to your Personal Greeting:
Use this procedure if you have already recorded a Personal Greeting.
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
You hear stutter dial tone.
2.
Dial *47.
3.
The voice prompt announces your options. Dial the option you want:
7 = reRecord
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
If you dial 7 to Rerecord, go to step 4.
If you dial 5 to listen, you can repeat step 3 or press SPK to hang up.
If you dial 3, you will cancel your Park and Page when you press SPK to hang up. You can undo
the cancel by pressing HOLD before SPK.
4.
Dial the destination to which Personal Greeting will forward your calls.
You can forward your calls to:
- A co-worker’s extension number
- Greeting only without forwarding (by entering your own extension number)
- Your mailbox (by entering the Voice Mail master number)
- Off-premise via Common Abbreviated Dialing (#2 + bin number)
If you hang up without making an entry for this step, incoming callers just hear your Personal
Greeting. Calls from the Automated Attendant, DISA calls and DID calls ring your phone after the
greeting.
If you hang up after you make an entry for this step, the system implements "Forward Immediately for All Calls."
5.
Dial the condition that will activate Personal Greeting.
The choices are:
1 - Forward when busy
2 - Forward when not answered
3 - Forward when busy or not answered
4 - Forward immediately for all calls
If you hang up after you make an entry for this step, the system implements "All Calls" immediately.
6.
Dial the Personal Greeting forwarding type.
The choices are:
1 - All incoming calls
2 - Only CO (trunk) calls
7.
Press SPK to hang up.
To cancel your Personal Greeting:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial *20.
This also cancels Call Forwarding and Park and Page.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
580 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation (Cont’d)
PARK AND PAGE
To have the system Page you when you have a call:
1.
Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT) and dial *4.
OR
Press Call Forwarding (Device) key (PGM1006 or SC 851: 1081).
2.
Dial 7 + When you hear, "Please start recording," record you Personal Greeting.
If you already have Park and Page or Persona Greeting set up, you can dial:
7 to re-record
5 to listen (then # again to listen again)
3 to erase (the optionally HOLD to cancel the erase)
3.
Dial #7.
4.
When you hear, "Please start recording," record your Page.
5.
Dial # + Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement.
For example, for Internal Zone 1 dial 801 + 1. Or, for Combined Paging Zone 1 dial *1 + 1.
6.
Dial Park and Page type:
2 = All calls
3 = Outside calls only
7.
Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated.
To pick up your Park and Page:
1.
Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT).
2.
Dial ** + your extension number.
To cancel your Park and Page:
1.
Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT).
2.
Dial *473.
3.
Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 581
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation (Cont’d)
PARK AND PAGE
Older 384i Systems
To have the system Page you when you have a call:
Use this procedure when you don’t have a Park and Page recorded.
1.
At a keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At a single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial *47.
3.
When you hear, "Please start recording" followed by two beeps, begin recording your Personal Greeting.
When a caller first reaches your extension, they hear your Personal Greeting.
4.
Dial the Paging zone that should broadcast your page.
For Internal Paging, dial 801 + zone (0-9 or 00-32, where 0 and 00 are All Call Internal Paging).
For External Paging, dial 803 + zone (0-8, where 0 is All Call External Paging)
5.
When you hear, "Please start recording" followed by two beeps, begin recording the message that will
broadcast over the Paging zone.
A typical message would be, "Fred Jones, you have a call on your line."
6.
Press SPK to hang up when you are done.
To rerecord, erase or listen to your Park and Page:
Use this procedure if you already have a Park and Page recorded.
1.
At a keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At a single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial *47.
3.
The voice prompt announces your options for your Personal Greeting. Dial the option you want:
7 = reRecord
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
If you dial 7 to Rerecord, go to step 4.
If you dial 5 to listen, you can repeat step 3 or press SPK to hang up.
If you dial 3, you will cancel your Park and Page when you press SPK to hang up. You can undo
the cancel by pressing HOLD before SPK.
4.
Dial the Paging zone that should broadcast your page.
For Internal Paging, dial 801 + zone (0-9 or 00-32, where 0 and 00 are All Call Internal Paging).
For External Paging, dial 803 + zone (0-8, where 0 is All Call External Paging)
5.
When you hear, "Please start recording" followed by two beeps, begin recording the message that will
broadcast over the Paging zone.
A typical message would be, "Fred Jones, you have a call on your line."
6.
Press SPK to hang up when you are done.
582 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation (Cont’d)
PARK AND PAGE (Cont’d)
Older 384i Systems (Cont’d)
To pick up your Park and Page:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial **.
3.
Dial the number of the announced extension.
You connect to the waiting call.
To cancel your Park and Page:
1.
At keyset, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2.
Dial *20.
3.
Press SPK to hang up.
AUTOMATED ATTENDANT
The review the phone numbers left on your display by the Automated Attendant:
1.
Press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 143.
3.
To scroll through the list of numbers left on your display, press VOL▲ or VOL▼.
OR
To erase the displayed number, dial 3 (for Erase).
OR
To automatically dial out the displayed number, dial 2 (for Call).
The erases the number from the display after it dials out.
TIME, DATE AND STATION NUMBER CHECK
To check the extension number of any keyset:
1.
Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 6 for extension Number.
To check the system time and date from any keyset extension:
1.
Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 8 for Time and date.
To hear the date in 384i with system software prior to 3.06.02, see the procedure below.
(Older 384i Systems)
To check the system date from any keyset extension:
1.
Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key.
2.
Dial 3 for Date.
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
FEATURES 583
Features N-Z
Voice Announce Unit
Operation (Cont’d)
900 PREAMBLE
To answer a 900 Preamble call:
1.
Answer the ringing call.
The line key turns solid red as the system plays the preamble to the caller.
2.
When you hear two beeps and the line key turns green, converse with the caller.
584 FEATURES
92000SWG08 Issue 1-0
Features N-Z
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Description
124i ☞
-
-
-
-
-
-
Available
COS control over the reminder
message requires Base 2.13,
EXCPRU 2.18 or higher.
Changing the DTMF tone detection
criteria requires Base 2.13, EXCPRU
2.18 or higher.
To accomodate customer-provided
pagers, Base 2.13 and EXCPRU
2.18 or higher can accept Park and
Page strings containing any valid
DTMF digits.
In Base 2.13, EXCPRU 2.18 or
higher, a line key changes from red
to green when an AME users presses
CALL1 to intercept the call.
Voice Mail Caller ID with
ANI/DNIS requires EXCPRU
version 2.18 or higher.
Message Center Mailbox requires
Base and EXCPRU 4.02 or higher.
Voice Mail key flashes red when
there are messages waiting.
Year 2000 Compliance not available.
384i ☞
-
-
-
-
-
-
Available
COS control over the reminder
message and requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
Changing the DTMF tone detection
criteria setup requires system
software 3.04 or higher.
To accomodate customer-provided
pagers, system software 3.05.09 and
higher can accept Park and Page
strings containing any valid DTMF
digits.
In system software 3.06.02 or higher,
a line key changes from red to green
when an AME users presses CALL1
to intercept the call.
Voice Mail Caller ID with
ANI/DNIS requires system software
3.06.14 or higher.
Message Center Mailbox requires
system software 3.07.10.
In system software 3.07.10 and
higher, Voice Mail key flashes green
when subscriber mailbox has
messages waiting.
Year 2000 Compliance requires system
software 3.07.25 or higher. Consult
your Sales Representative for applicable
NVM-Series Voice Mail software.
The system is fully compatible with Nitsuko’s NVM-Series Voice Mail with Automated Attendant Systems.
These systems provide telephone users with comprehensive Voice Mail and Automated Attendant features.